Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080201477 | Client side replacement of DNS addresses - A DHCP response is intercepted and the DNS address in the DHCP response is placed with an address for a server device when the server device is present on a local network. When the server device is not present, the DNS address from the DHCP response is used. The server device may provide authentication, shared resources, or other services to devices within a local area network and may also serve as a gateway to other networks including the Internet. | 08-21-2008 |
20080201478 | METHOD FOR DETECTING FAULT IN NEXT GENERATION NETWORK - A method for detecting fault in a next generation network includes: establishing a tool set and a corresponding command set for detecting whether the network is connective and detecting a range of network fault; creating dynamically in a PROXY an address mapping table storing a correspondence relationship between a user identifier userid and address information of a user terminal; and upon occurrence of a fault in the network, obtaining the address information of the user terminal from the address mapping table according to the userid of the user terminal probed currently, executing the set of command according to the address information, and probing connectivity of the network between the PROXY and the user terminal. The problem that the network address transform (NAT) device and the firewall cannot be traversed may be avoided, and the fault point or range may be detected accurately in the NGN where a fault occurs. | 08-21-2008 |
20080201479 | Associating Virtual Machines on a Server Computer with Particular Users on an Exclusive Basis - A first computer of a plurality of computers in a server computer system may be associated with a first user on an exclusive basis. An administrator of the server computer system may utilize an administrative user interface in order to specify the association. Associating the first computer with the first user on the exclusive basis may prevent users other than the first user from using the first computer. In response to receiving a request from the first user to connect to the server computer system, the system may operate to determine that the first computer is associated with the first user on the exclusive basis and may assign the first computer to the first user. Once the first computer has been assigned to the first user, the first user can begin using the first computer. In some embodiments the first computer may be a physical computer. In other embodiments the first computer may be a virtual machine. | 08-21-2008 |
20080201480 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION, METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR TRAVERSING NAT TO REALIZE NETWORK COMMUNICATION - The employment relates to a realization method for establishing peer-to-peer communication connection, a method, an apparatus and a system for realizing network communication by traversing NAT. The employment mainly comprises following steps. When the user terminal may not directly communicate with the peer user terminal by the manner of peer-to-peer communication for needing to traverse through the NAT (network address translator) entity, the type information of the NAT entity needed to be traversed is determined. Then, the communication connection with the peer user terminal is established according to the determined type information of the NAT entity and by using the predefined manner of peer-to peer communication and the communications between the user terminals are carried out. The employment realizes that the manner of peer-to-peer communication is adopted as much as possible during the process of traversing the NAT to carry out the communication so as to reduce the occupation of server source and effectively save the costs of network operation. The employment also tries to use the corresponding re-issue mechanism during the procedure of establishing the peer-to-peer communication in order to resolve various connection establishment problems when the factors which may affect the connection establishment appear. | 08-21-2008 |
20080209045 | Capture and Resumption of Network Application Sessions - A system and method for capture and resumption of network application sessions in a network system. A transaction may be detected between a client and server that includes application session state information. The session state information may relate to a session between the client and the server. The Application session state information may be recorded in response to the detection of the transaction, and the application session state information may not be deleted according to session information expiration policies (e.g., of the client). User input may be received which requests to review the captured network application session. Correspondingly, a network request comprising captured credentials of the captured session may be generated and forwarded to the server. The network request may be usable to enable resumption of the captured network application session. | 08-28-2008 |
20080209046 | HEALTH-RELATED OPPORTUNISTIC NETWORKING - A wireless opportunistic network that can facilitate data transfer by way of interconnected devices is disclosed. In accordance with this opportunistic network, each of the devices effectively contributes to the transfer of the information thereby obviating the need for an external carrier. In this manner, the carrier infrastructure is embodied and distributed throughout the individual devices of the network. In a particular aspect, the opportunistic network is employed to transfer and make available health-related data. This functionality can be used in many scenarios related to heath from, monitoring patients and conveying basic diagnostic data to identifying bioterrorism by way of collaborating data between a number of devices within the network. Essentially, the innovation provides for at least two core functional ideas, the opportunistic network infrastructure and the use of the network in health related scenarios. | 08-28-2008 |
20080209047 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTED POLICY EVALUATION - In one embodiment, the invention is a method and apparatus for distributed policy evaluation. One embodiment of a method for evaluating a systems management policy, where the policy includes a condition and an action to be taken when the condition evaluates to TRUE, includes forwarding the policy, by a first autonomic manager, to at least a second autonomic manager and receiving at least partial evaluation results for the policy from at least the second autonomic manager. | 08-28-2008 |
20080209048 | Loading A Mirror Driver In Remote Terminal Server Session - Described are systems and methods for loading mirror drivers in remote sessions of a remote server that enables remote sessions at various computing or client devices to access the mirror drivers. The mirror drivers are video display drivers which receives video rendering output and/or graphics output from a graphics device interface. Such video rendering output and/or graphics output received may be a mirror image of the video rendering output and/or graphics output send to display drivers for displaying on monitor. | 08-28-2008 |
20080209049 | Systems and Methods for Enabling Communications between Clients and Hosts - Systems and methods for linking clients and hosts, including obtaining, from one or more hosts, information on host attributes of the one or more hosts; obtaining, from one or more clients, information on desired attributes desired by the one or more clients; enabling a comparison of host attributes to desired attributes; and enabling a communication between one or more of the clients and one or more of the hosts and enabling one or more of the clients to issue commands to the one or more hosts and to receive telepresence information from one or more of the hosts. | 08-28-2008 |
20080209050 | Multiple sessions between a server and a browser - A method and apparatus for a server capable of supporting multiple sessions with a browser. First session information of a browser is detected. Second session information of the browser is detected. A first session is initiated with a first browser instance of the browser using the first session information. A second session is initiated with a second browser instance of the browser using the second session information. | 08-28-2008 |
20080209051 | Transport System for Instant Messaging - An exemplary method involves creating a master session over a first connection through a server; and creating a virtual channel over the connection, the virtual channel operable to communicate a feature session. The method may involve establishing a direct connection that bypasses the server, and switching communication of the feature session to the direct connection. A system for network communication includes a plurality of transport bridges, each transport bridge corresponding to an active network device configuration, and a switching module operable to choose one of the transport bridges to form a connection between two computing devices based on the active network device configuration. | 08-28-2008 |
20080215739 | Marketing Method and Communication System for Implementing the Marketing Method - In one aspect, a database in which target subscribers of different subscriber classes that can be reached via a communications system are allocated, and one respective marketer is assigned to each of the subscriber classes. When the communications system establishes a first communications relation between a first subscriber and a target subscriber while using a destination address given by the first subscriber, the subscriber class of the target subscriber is determined based on the destination address. The determination of the subscriber class results in the establishment of a second communications relation between the first subscriber and a marketer assigned to the determined subscriber class. | 09-04-2008 |
20080215740 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A DESTINATION NUMBER UPON RECEIVING A DIALED NUMBER FROM A CALLING PARTY - A method, system and computer program for utilizing destination information stored in a database are disclosed. The database is queried for information about a service located at a destination, and location information of a requesting party is determined. Routing information is determined based upon the location information of the requesting party and the destination information of the service. The routing information is utilized to establish a route between the requesting party and the destination of the service. | 09-04-2008 |
20080222293 | Systems and methods for facilitating identification of communication originators - Systems, apparatuses and methods for facilitating identification of the originator of a communication. A communication is received from a sending device. Sending device identification information is requested from a distributed contact database fashioned from the contact databases of the communication devices in a group of communication devices. If the sending device identification information is available at a given communication device, it is received from the communication device. | 09-11-2008 |
20080222294 | Managing Communications Using a Mobile Device - A method and apparatus is provided for managing communications using a mobile device. More specifically, the present invention allows the mobile device to transfer a communication session from one network path to another network path. The user of the mobile device, therefore, has control over “network choice” instead of the network operators or handset providers. In addition, the present invention allows the mobile device to manage an association with one or more wireless network access points. With respect to access point management, the present invention provides a “fast scan” or “short scan” process to reduce the scanning time during active communication sessions to a level that is not detectable by the user. As a result, the present invention is more efficient, reduces power consumption, increases call quality and increases user acceptance of the device. | 09-11-2008 |
20080222295 | Using internet content as a means to establish live social networks by linking internet users to each other who are simultaneously engaged in the same and/or similar content - A system and method that uses internet content and/or content metadata as a means to establish social networks. Examples include linking internet users, searchers, viewers and/or listeners of the same and/or similar internet content to each other via a platform that enables any of the following in n-dimensional environments: social networking, communications, sharing, e-commerce, advertising, search, hosting and registry services, push and pull applications, anonymous communications, and rich presence. | 09-11-2008 |
20080222296 | DISTRIBUTED SERVER ARCHITECTURE - A method and apparatus for synchronizing network element state when a network connection between a plurality of servers is restored after a network failure includes a plurality of objects that exist within the network. Each object exists in a plurality of different versions, in which each said different object version results from modifications to an object made by different servers during the network failure when the servers are unable to communicate with each other but otherwise continue to function. Each object comprises a vector including a separate version number for each server, in which each server increments its version number in the vector when it modifies the object. An automatic conflict resolution mechanism provides, at each server, a most up to date view of all objects across all of said plurality of servers upon restoration of the network connection between said plurality of servers after said network failure. The conflict resolution mechanism reconciles the existence of said plurality of different versions of an object to determine which object version should take precedence over other object versions. Conflict resolution is performed when there are multiple versions of a same object at a server. The conflict resolution mechanism also comprises at least one tie breaking rule that is applied to decide which servers take precedence over other servers when determining which object version should take precedence over other object versions. | 09-11-2008 |
20080222297 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO EFFICIENTLY MANAGE A NETWORK CONNECTION TO CONNECT A CLIENT AND A RESOURCE - This document discusses, among other things, an example system and methods for connecting a client and a resource. Example embodiments may include receiving a request from a client computer, for a connection to a generically named resource that is associated with multiple resources. In response to the request, example embodiments may further include detecting whether one of the multiple resources is overloaded and determining a number of static connections reserved for the client computer. A static or dynamic connection may be assigned to the resource or a further one of the multiple resources based on the generic resource name, the load on the resource and the number of static connections reserved for the client computer. | 09-11-2008 |
20080222298 | SHARING A SHARED RESOURCE ACROSS LOGICAL PARTITIONS OR SYSTEMS - An apparatus and method for sharing a resource (such as a modem or virtual private network) allow virtualizing the shared resource in a simple and efficient manner that allows both accepting and initiating virtual or physical connections through the shared resource across logical partitions or systems. An L2TP tunnel is established between the server that owns the shared resource and the client that desires to use the shared resource. Messages are defined that allow the client to initiate an outgoing connection through the shared resource, and that allow the client to accept an incoming connection received from the shared resource. Once the connection is made, the client and ultimate destination communicate through the shared resource via point-to-point communications. | 09-11-2008 |
20080228922 | System and Method for Providing Client Awareness in High-Availability Application Architecture - System and method for providing client awareness in a high-availability application architecture. One embodiment is a method of servicing a service request in a network maintained by an organization and comprising a plurality of servers. The method comprises responsive to an initial request for service by a client via a service broker, providing to the client through the service broker a response identifying an available one of the servers; and connecting the client directly to the available server, the client thereafter sending successive requests for service directly to the available server without involvement of the service broker. | 09-18-2008 |
20080228923 | Server-Side Connection Resource Pooling - A server side connection pool provides pooling of server connections. Thus, client side processes do not create groups of dedicated resources. Clients are provided the capability to communicate to a server side connection broker process to GET a pooled server connection comprising connection state plus a thread of execution for doing some work, whereby requesting the work can bypass the connection broker process and go directly to the assigned pooled connection. Once the client issues a RELEASE to release the pooled connection back to the pool, a completely different client process on potentially a different client middle tier machine can reuse the same pooled connection. The server-side connection pool can be logically partitioned into sub-pools that correspond to connection classes that typically correspond to respective applications. A client process can request a pooled connection having a particular state, where a stored procedure can be executed to generate such state. | 09-18-2008 |
20080228924 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CREATION OF AUTOMATED CONTENT DEPENDENT PROCEDURES IN AN ONLINE ENVIRONMENT - There is provided a system and method for creating automated content dependent procedures in an online environment, wherein the user will be able to create graphical objects representing a collection of operations and desired online services, wherein both the editing operations and desired online services are associated with a specific type file, preferably a file type of a data file. The process is based on selection of a file type by the user and is illustrated to the user by a graphical user interface containing the content dependent information. With this approach the user will be able to create automated procedures for processing of computer file types. | 09-18-2008 |
20080228925 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SELECTING MEDIA CONTENT BASED ON TECHNICAL ENVIRONMENT INFORMATION - The present disclosure includes methods and systems for selecting media content based on technical environment information. A connection over a network between a server and a client is established. The e connection is associated with the technical environment information and the technical environment information is associated with an the ability of the client to playback media content locally. The method includes selecting, at the server, a version of media content appropriate for playback at the client locally based on the ability of the client. | 09-18-2008 |
20080235380 | FACTORING OUT DIALOG CONTROL AND CALL CONTROL - Systems, methods, and machine-readable media are disclosed for providing session control and media exchange control that can include and combine, for example, call control and voice access concepts such as dialog (voice dialog, prompts and DTMF) or web/GUI elements. In one embodiment, a method of controlling a media session can comprise establishing a call via a signaling protocol, maintaining control of the call, and passing control of aspects of the call other than call control to a separate media processing module. The media processing module can comprise, for example, a dialog manager. In some implementations a voice access enabler providing a an abstract interface for accessing functions of the dialog controller. | 09-25-2008 |
20080235381 | MESSAGE RELAYING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION ESTABLISHING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A storage unit of a relaying apparatus stores first identification information that identifies an SIP terminal and second identification that identifies other SIP terminal which is forecast as a transfer destination of a message. A transmitting-and-receiving unit receives from the SIP terminal a request message that is received before a transfer message to be transferred to other SIP terminal and that includes a processing request concerning communications and the first identification information. An obtaining unit obtains from a storage unit the second identification information corresponding to the first identification information included in the received request message. A connection establishing unit establishes communications between the other SIP terminal of the obtained second identification information and the relaying apparatus. | 09-25-2008 |
20080244074 | REMEDIAL ACTION AGAINST MALICIOUS CODE AT A CLIENT FACILITY - Aspects of this invention may relate to a malicious application remedial action request application where a network site interaction may be requested from a client computing facility; the network site interaction from the client computing facility may be determined to be unacceptable based on an acceptance policy at a gateway facility; access to the network site from the client computing facility may be denied; information relating to the attempted interaction with the network site may be sent from the gateway facility to the client computing facility, wherein the information may indicate that the attempted interaction occurred; and the client computing facility may interpret the information relating to the attempted interaction, determine whether the attempted interaction was the result of an automatically generated request, and take remedial action in the event that the attempted interaction was the result of the automatically generated request. | 10-02-2008 |
20080244075 | High performance real-time data multiplexer - A method and system for enabling peer computers to communicate with each other is described. Data of varying data types from a plurality of data sources are multiplexed for delivery through at least one common peer connection. | 10-02-2008 |
20080244076 | Method and Apparatus for Tagging Network Traffic Using Extensible Fields in Message Headers - Embodiments of a system and method of tagging network traffic with relevant user demographic and location information for facilitating the delivery of directed media are described. A tag processing module within a router device coupling a client computer to a destination site served by a server computer intercepts a request from a client computer to a server computer over a network. The tag processing module determines a unique device identifier corresponding to the client computer, generates a local user identifier for the client computer by performing a one-way hashing operation on the unique device identifier, derives demographic and location information for a user of the client computer, generates a request identifier associated with the intercepted request by encrypting the local user identifier, demographic information and geographic location information in an alphanumeric string, and embeds the alphanumeric string in an extensible field of a packet within the request to generate a tagged request identifier. | 10-02-2008 |
20080244077 | Methods for auditing peer-to-peer communications in remote device monitoring system and systems thereof - A method, computer readable medium and system for auditing peer-to-peer communications in a remote device monitoring system includes establishing a peer-to-peer communication between at least two computing devices. An auditing system associated with the established peer-to-peer communication is identified and audit information about at least a portion of the established peer-to-peer communication is stored in the identified auditing system. | 10-02-2008 |
20080250144 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF CONTENT DATA - Provided are a method and apparatus for controlling transmission of content data. In the method, a communication channel is initially established to transmit the content data, the content data is transmitted through the established communication channel, verification is performed a plurality of times to determine whether the content data is transmitted within an acceptable transmission range, and whether to continue the transmission of the content data is determined according to the verification result. Accordingly, when a client moves to a location outside a predetermined acceptable transmission range in a wireless environment, a server stops transmission of the content data. In addition, content data can be continuously transmitted regardless of interference caused by a temporary obstacle between a server and a client. | 10-09-2008 |
20080250145 | APPARATUS AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA FOR RECOVERABLE WORKFLOW - Improved methods for providing recoverable workflow of complex and/or risk-prone workflows in a computer system or computer network include segmenting such workflows into sub-processes, associating a checkpoint with the end of each sub-process, and determining whether processing of each sub-process was successful. If so, a set of parameters is stored at each checkpoint before processing the next sub-process, but otherwise processing of the failed sub-process is retried, using the parameter set stored at the previous checkpoint. In one embodiment, the methods are implemented by a certified messaging capability that guarantees delivery of any message. In the event a hardware or software failure occurs during a sub-process execution, the certified messaging capability returns a failure indication, so that execution of the failed sub-process can be reinitiated. Improved computers and computer networks for providing recoverable workflow are also described. | 10-09-2008 |
20080250146 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLICATION OR PROTOCOL VERSION NEGOTIATION - A method for version negotiation between two entities is provided. Described in the context of communication protocol negotiation, an initiating entity proposes an initial communication protocol version to a receiving entity. In response, the receiving entity accepts the protocol version if it is within the range of its supported versions or proposes an alternative protocol version selecting to be either the highest or lowest protocol version supported by the receiving entity. This allows the receiving entity to successfully limit the number of protocol versions it supports and to communicate this restriction in any protocol setting to the initiating entity. The initiating entity then accepts the proposed alternative protocol version. If version negotiation is successful, either the accepted initial version or the accepted alternative version of the communication protocol is used for the duration of the communication session between the initiating entity and the receiving entity. | 10-09-2008 |
20080256244 | Method, Apparatus, Computer Program Product and Network Node for Providing Remote Client Deactivation - An apparatus for providing remote client deactivation includes a processing element. The processing element may be configured to receive a message associated with a service related to a communication session with a client, determine whether the client is associated with an indication to deactivate the client and communicate a signaling message to deactivate the client in response to a determination that the client is associated with the indication to deactivate the client. | 10-16-2008 |
20080263209 | Active-active operation for a cluster of SSL virtual private network (VPN) devices with load distribution - A method of load distribution for a cluster of two or more nodes. The method comprises receiving an initial request packet on a network device having a virtual IP address; forwarding the request packet from the network device to a cluster of at least two nodes, wherein each of the at least two nodes has an internal dispatcher module and an unique and non-conflicting virtual IP address; establishing one of the at least two nodes as a priority dispatcher or dispatcher endpoint, wherein if any one node fails, the virtual IP address of the one node which is no longer active falls back to another node within the cluster based on cluster priorities; dispatching the request packet to one of the nodes associated with the cluster; and forwarding the request from one of the nodes to a switching device. | 10-23-2008 |
20080263210 | Method and System for Notifying Updating of Terminal Capability Information for Combination Service - A method and system for notifying updating of terminal capability information for a combination service for simultaneously performing two or more services between first and second users are disclosed. Each terminal recognizes whether or not its terminal capability information has been updated to inform the other terminal accordingly when the first service for the combination service is connected. When a terminal, which has received update indication information informing that the terminal capability information has been updated, request and obtains the updated terminal capability information from the other terminal. | 10-23-2008 |
20080263211 | SYSTEM AND ARTICLE OF MANUFACTURE FOR CONTROLLING CLIENT ACCESS - Provided are a method, system, and article of manufacture, wherein in certain embodiments a request is received to initiate a session. A determination is made whether the session should be initiated with addressing information provided by a client. The session is initiated with trusted addressing information corresponding to the client, in response to determining that the session should not be initiated with the addressing information provided by the client. | 10-23-2008 |
20080270611 | Method and Device for Providing Correlation Means in Hybrid Telecommunication Networks - Combinational networks provide simultaneous connectivity via networks of different network type between user equipment. For communication sessions on different network types, belonging to the same user equipment, a correlation check is enabled by introduction of an identifier denoted as Combinational Call Indicator (CCI). This CCI identifier in combination with the known Calling Line Identity (CLI) identifier enables user equipment and other and network entities to perform a correlation check between ongoing, or to be established, CScalls and PS-sessions. A user equipment, setting up a related communication session, sets the CCI identifier and provides the CCI identifier during the communication session setup towards the receiving user equipment or network entity, which is enabled to check whether the last received communication session is correlated to the earlier established session due to the presence of the CCI identifier. | 10-30-2008 |
20080270612 | Enabling secure remote assistance using a terminal services gateway - A secure remote assistance session between computers that are behind firewalls and/or NAT devices is provided by an arrangement that uses a terminal services (“TS”) gateway to enable utilization of a remote desktop protocol (“RDP”) connection by a terminal services client in a reverse direction to that used in a conventional terminal services session. The connection is made via a regular TS gateway protocol mechanism by which the TS client behind a firewall establishes a connection to the remote server that is typically behind a firewall that protects a corporate network. The server then functions as the terminal services client to tunnel RDP data through the established TS gateway connection through the NAT firewall to a client. Thus, the server and client reverse roles after the TS gateway connection is made to thereby enable remote viewing of the graphical user interface that is displayed by the client in support of the remote assistance session. | 10-30-2008 |
20080270613 | Method of Processing a Contact for a Mobile Device and Related Device - To add a contact to a mobile device, the mobile device displays a login screen for a first online service, logs into the first online service based on a username and password, retrieves a contact list from the first online service which has a first contact identifier, utilizes the first contact identifier as a search term for finding a second contact identifier on a second online service, and adds the contact including the first contact identifier and the second contact identifier to the mobile device. | 10-30-2008 |
20080270614 | METHOD AND DEVICES FOR THE INTERWORKING OF NODES - A method for the set-up of a bearer in a communication system from a first node which is adapted to a first bearer protocol to a second node which is adapted to a second bearer protocol is described. The set-up of a bearer is initiated by a message to the first node and an identification of the second node is provided to the first node. The first node determines whether the second node is adapted to the first bearer protocol and sets up the bearer according to the first bearer protocol if the second node is adapted to the first bearer protocol. Else, the first node sets up a bearer according to the first bearer protocol to a conversion node (BIGW) and sends an identification of the second node to the conversion node (BIGW) and the conversion node (BIGW) sets up a bearer according to the second bearer protocol to the second node and introduces a conversion unit between the first bearer protocol and the second bearer protocol. Nodes and program units adapted to the method are also described. | 10-30-2008 |
20080275992 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MANAGING CONNECTIONS BETWEEN A COMPUTING SYSTEM AND AN AVAILABLE NETWORK USING A CONNECTION MANAGER - In one aspect, a method of enabling an execution thread of an application running on a communication device to access a communication service is provided. The method includes selecting a connection profile that supports the communication service and attaching the execution thread to a data channel associated with the connection profile. In another aspect, a computing device is provided capable of running an application having one or more execution threads and communication capability. The computing system or device comprises connection management logic including a database for storing a plurality of connection profiles, server logic adapted to receive a request from the application for a communication service, select a connection profile from the database that supports the requested communication service, and attach one of the one or more execution thread of the application to a data channel associated with the connection profile, and a user interface enabling user input for modifying the plurality of connection profiles. | 11-06-2008 |
20080281969 | Controlling access to versions of application software by a server, based on site ID - A plurality of versions of software application programs can be handled by a single server serving multiple user-clients who each need access to specific ones of the plurality of versions. Thus such different versions can run simultaneously without requiring upgrading of early versions and no interference between versions. A particular version is given a SiteID that a user request calls, and a table in the server is consulted to keep track of which SiteID corresponds to which version and to assign each request to the appropriate version. A directory or registry must be set up to accommodate the table which must be consulted for each request. No significant change need be made in any version of the software application program since the table is created at installation time on the server and the SiteID's are assigned to the users when they get rights to the particular version of interest by an administrator. In a preferred embodiment, a SiteID identifies (and the “site” embodies) a collection of databases that the user may need access to. One and only one application software version is associated with a SiteID. Accessing a table that maps the SiteID to a particular version can be monitored and additional programs run responsive to information about such access. | 11-13-2008 |
20080281970 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR INTEGRATING HETEROGENEOUS SYSTEMS - Disclosed are a method, computer program product and apparatus for integrating resource and coordinator components in a heterogeneous computer system. The technique disclosed involves the introduction of a negotiation phase into the resource enlistment or registration process wherein the resource component and coordinator component request and respond with indicators showing the quality of service that each supports, thus jointly establishing at runtime a quality of service to be supported for the resource and coordinator pairing. The qualities of service may include commit phase support and recovery support. | 11-13-2008 |
20080288643 | Session Initiation Protocol Signalling - A method of delivering a copy of a Session Initiation Protocol, SIP, message to each of a plurality of terminals in a multimedia communication system. The method comprises receiving the message at a first SIP exploder, grouping destination addresses defined for the SIP message according to their network domains, and for each group of destination addresses corresponding to a domain associated with a further SIP exploder, forwarding a single copy of the message to that exploder, the message containing all of the destination addresses of the group. | 11-20-2008 |
20080288644 | System and Method for Creating Global Sessions Across Converged Protocol Applications - A system and method for creating global sessions across different protocols and multiple converged protocol applications are provided. By creating a global session, state information for each of the individual protocol sessions may be communicated across protocols and utilized in performing operations across converged protocol applications. An edge server is used at the edge of a data network to correlate client interactions over different protocols and to associate them with a global session. The edge server acts as a session reference counter for individual client sessions that are part of a larger global session. The global session is created after the creation of the first protocol session and exists across the creation of future sessions on other protocols and other converged applications. Logical names and global session tokens are utilized to manage the various global sessions handled by the edge server. | 11-20-2008 |
20080288645 | COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT USING TWO DIFFERENT PROGRAMS TO DETERMINE STATE OF A NETWORK NODE TO ELIMINATE MESSAGE RESPONSE DELAYS IN SYSTEM PROCESSING - The determination of node and/or adapter liveness in a distributed network data processing system is carried out via one messaging protocol that can be assisted by a second messaging protocol which is significantly less susceptible to delay, especially memory blocking delays encountered by daemons running on other nodes. The switching of protocols is accompanied by controlled grace periods for needed responses. This messaging protocol flexibility is also adapted for use as a mechanism for controlling the deliberate activities of node addition (birth) and node deletion (death). | 11-20-2008 |
20080294781 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GLOBAL LOGOFF FROM A WEB-BASED POINT OF CONTACT SERVER - A method carried out at a point of contact (e.g., reverse proxy, a web server plug-in, or the like) that serves as an intermediary between a client browser and one or more back-end applications (or application component), wherein each back-end application has the capability to set its own server-side session management data with respect to the point of contact that is independent of any client-side session management data set by the point of contact and used by the point of contact to manage a user session. The method begins as a given back-end application returns a response to a first request that has been issued from the client browser (the first request having been received at the point of contact and passed to a back end application or component for processing). The point of contact intercepts the out-going response, augments server-side session management data associated therewith with a “stamp,” and forwards to the client browser the response together with the server-side session management data as augmented to include the stamp. The stamp provides a way for the point of contact to later determine whether the server-side session management data, if received with another user request, is valid for that request. Later, upon receipt at the point of contact of a new user request that includes the server-side session management data (and stamp), the point of contact uses the stamp to determine whether the new request is valid. If so, the point of contact removes the stamp from the server-side session management data and forwards the new request (and the management data) to the back-end application for handling. | 11-27-2008 |
20080294782 | CLAN BASED STRATEGY SHARING TOOL - A method for use with a computer simulation includes providing an ability to run a simulation in which a plurality of client devices communicate over a network to interact with the simulation, providing an ability to generate a first user interface on each of the plurality of client devices for allowing users associated with the client devices to interact with the simulation, providing an ability to provide information that includes a representation of at least a portion of an environment of the simulation on a subset of the plurality of client devices, and providing an ability to allow users associated with the subset of the plurality of client devices to interact with the information without allowing access thereto by the other client devices. A system for use in running a computer simulation and a storage medium storing a computer program executable by a processor based system are also disclosed. | 11-27-2008 |
20080301300 | Predictive asynchronous web pre-fetch - A web server receives an asynchronous pre-request of data from a web browser resulting from the web browser predicting a user action based on the user's interaction with the web browser. The web server pre-fetches the pre-requested data based on the asynchronous pre-request of data. | 12-04-2008 |
20080301301 | Information sharing in a smart space - An apparatus and method for storing and maintaining in a smart space device connectivity information of devices of the smart space including a plurality of disparate radio access technologies. The connectivity information is propagated to at least one other device of the smart space and is used for selecting an optimal distribution route for information to be shared in the smart space. Technologies such as NoTA, BillBoard and Whiteboard can be used. | 12-04-2008 |
20080301302 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, RELAYING METHOD AND RELAYING DEVICE - Method and device for heightening communications security. Gateway | 12-04-2008 |
20080301303 | VIRTUAL NETWORK CONNECTION APPARATUS, SYSTEM, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CONNECTION OF A VIRTUAL NETWORK AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - There is provided a virtual network connection apparatus having a unit that receives an instruction for forming a virtual network; an unit that assigns a unique virtual network identifier in response to the instruction; a unit that receives designation of an information processor; a unit that issues permission information for a designated information processor and registers the issued permission information in correlation to the assigned identifier; a processor that determines, upon receipt of the permission information from an information processor, a virtual network identifier correlated to the permission information and executes a process to correlate an address of the information processor to the determined identifier; and a transmission controller that determines a virtual network identifiers correlated to a source and a destination addresses of a transmitted information, and executes a control to transmit the transmitted information to the destination address by reference to the determined identifiers. | 12-04-2008 |
20080307096 | Using a remote handheld device as a local device - A data connection can be established between a handheld device (e.g., a mobile phone or smartphone) and a computerized second device. For example, an action associated with a keyboard scancode can be mapped to a key on the keypad of the handheld device. A key press on a keypad of the handheld device can be translated into key press data. The key press data can be sent to the second device over the data connection, causing the action to be executed on the second device. | 12-11-2008 |
20080307097 | Method and apparatus for refactoring a graph in a graphical programming language - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system that refactors a port of a node in a graph, wherein the node has one or more input ports and one or more output ports. During operation, the system identifies an input port of the node to be refactored. The system then creates a pass-through node, wherein the value on an output port of the pass-through node equals the value on an input port of the pass-through node. Next, the system connects the output port of the pass-through node to the input port to be refactored, so that the refactored input port receives a value that is set on the input port of the pass-through node. | 12-11-2008 |
20080307098 | METHOD FOR INTELLIGENT, SELF-MANAGED, DECENTRALIZED CONNECTION POOL MANAGEMENT POOL - A server can be connected to a set of other servers using a connection pool of connections. When information is to be sent to one of the set of other servers, the server can obtain a connection from the connection pool. | 12-11-2008 |
20080313334 | DATA EXCHANGE PROTOCOL ENHANCEMENT TO QUERY OBJECT PERMISSIONS - Systems and methods are provided to view the properties/attributes of a selected or specified object in the Object Exchange (OBEX) environment. A field, e.g., a Permissions field, is included in a GET request, where the field includes a header portion, e.g., a Permission header set to an arbitrary value. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313335 | Communicator establishing aspects with context identifying - One aspect relates to attempting to establish a communication with at least one identifiable person and/or identifiable communication device based at least in part on an at least one context designated destination relating at least partially to at least one context of the at least one identifiable person and/or identifiable communication device. Another aspect relates to altering an at least one transmitted data between a relatively ambiguous specification and a relatively precise specification at least partially based on an at least one context relating to communications with an at least one identifiable person and/or identifiable communication device. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313336 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PHONE APPLICATION STATE MANAGEMENT MECHANISM - A phone application state management mechanism is described. The mechanism adopts the state storage format widely known as “Cookies” to store information in a cross-application standard format. Cookies for multiple users are stored on a single machine that retrieves phone applications using a hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP). Suitable state information for a particular user is automatically retrieved in connection with HTTP requests. Further, by phone based applications can set the values of suitable cookies. An enforced access policy can be used to prevent an application provided by a first legal entity from accessing state information stored by an application provided by another legal entity. The approach can also be used to reduce the passing of telephone identifying information between applications for user identification purposes. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313337 | Method and Apparatus for Creating Dynamic Phone Pages Due to Triggering Events from an External Source - Methods and apparatus for sending a dynamically updated data object to a user of a communication device are disclosed. An exemplary method comprises receiving updated data from an external source at a first communication device and updating a stored data object with the updated data. Upon the occurrence of a trigger, the updated data object, which comprises the updated information, is transferred to a second communication device. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313338 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR INTEGRATING HETEROGENEOUS SYSTEMS - Disclosed are a method, computer program product and apparatus for integrating resource and coordinator components in a heterogeneous computer system. The technique disclosed involves the introduction of a negotiation phase into the resource enlistment or registration process wherein the resource component and coordinator component request and respond with indicators showing the quality of service that each supports, thus jointly establishing at runtime a quality of service to be supported for the resource and coordinator pairing. The qualities of service may include commit phase support and recovery support. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313339 | CONNECTION MANAGEMENT METHOD, SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM PRODUCT - The invention provides a method, system, and program product for managing a connection. In particular, the invention manages connection information in memory based on an expected usage of the corresponding connection. Connection information can be stored in faster memory, such as cache memory, when the connection is expected to have numerous additional messages. Similarly, the connection information for a connection not expected to have many additional messages can be swapped out of the cache memory and stored in relatively slower memory. As a result, the connection information that is more frequently used is more likely to be available in a faster memory. | 12-18-2008 |
20080320145 | Methods and Servers for Displaying and Activating Disconnected Sessions - A method for displaying and activating disconnected sessions includes the step of receiving information associated with a user. At least one disconnected session already associated with the user is identified in response to the information. A graphical representation of the at least one disconnected session associated with the user is displayed to the user. A request to connect to the at least one disconnected session is received from the user. A connection is established between a client computer operated by the user and the requested at least one disconnected session. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320146 | Establishing interaction between a process and a server process - A method for establishing interaction between a process and a server process. In one implementation, a request may be sent to a server. The request may have a pointer and a registration for an object. The object may be designated to receive responses from the server. The object may receive the pointer and an indication that the server has instantiated a server process. The process may then interact with the server process. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320147 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POLICY-BASED PACKET CLASSIFICATION - A method, apparatus, and computer implemented instructions for processing a request in a data processing system. The request is received. In response to a first hash value being present within the request, the first hash value is compared to a second hash value that was computed locally, wherein the second hash value represents a current policy configuration for assigning a quality of service. In response to a match between the first hash value and the second hash value, other information in the request is used to establish a quality of service for packets associated with the request. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320148 | Session initiation protocol adaptor - A SIP adaptor modifies the format of a session initiation protocol (SIP) message. A SIP message in a first format is received by the SIP adaptor from a first SIP server that is based on the first message format. The SIP adaptor modifies the SIP message to a second format and forwards the modified SIP message to a second SIP server that is based on the second message format. By modifying SIP messages, the SIP adaptor allows communications sessions to be established between clients of SIP servers that utilize dissimilar SIP message formats. | 12-25-2008 |
20090006628 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE PRESENTATION OF DYNAMIC INFORMATION TO A MOBILE DEVICE - The present disclosure relates generally to systems and methods for controlling the presentation of dynamic information to mobile devices. In one example, the method includes receiving status information from a mobile device indicating that the mobile device is available to receive advertisement information and receiving device information from the mobile device identifying at least one device parameter of the mobile device. Advertising content to send to the mobile device is identified and access information for the advertising content is embedded in a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message that is send to the mobile device. The SIP message is generated based at least partly on the device information. | 01-01-2009 |
20090006629 | Instantiating a communication pipeline between software - An embodiment not only instantiates a pipeline that allows communication between first and second executable nodes regardless of whether the nodes have compatible or incompatible interface views, but also structures the pipeline based on the relationship between the interface views so, for example, the pipeline does not consume unnecessary overhead or introduce unnecessary data-transfer delay. For example, an embodiment compares a first interface view of a first executable node to a second interface view of a second executable node. A first communication pipeline having a first structure is instantiated between the first and second nodes if the first view has a first pre-established relationship to the second view, and a second communication pipeline having a second structure is instantiated between the first and second nodes if the first view has a second pre-established relationship to the second view. | 01-01-2009 |
20090006630 | Sip converter - When communications are performed by connecting a non-SIP information terminal device in which SIP is not supported to a SIP converter connected to a communication line via a line terminating device, the SIP converter performs establishment and disconnection of a SIP session, and transmission of a SIP message on behalf of the non-SIP information terminal device. | 01-01-2009 |
20090006631 | Media Stream Scheduling for Hiccup-Free Fast-Channel-Change in the Presence of Network Chokepoints - An implementation, as described herein, facilitates fast start-up of a new media stream while avoiding temporal interruption (i.e., “hiccups”) of the presentation of that new media stream. At least one implementation, described herein, coordinates the delivery of multiple simultaneous media streams on a media-stream network. Its coordination accounts for traversal of bandwidth-restricted chokepoints; quickly stopping delivery of one or more media streams from the set of streams; quickly initiating delivery and presentation of one or more new media streams not previously in the set (i.e., a “channel change”); and producing clean playback of all of the streams in the set, despite their different timelines. This abstract itself is not intended to limit the scope of this patent. The scope of the present invention is pointed out in the appending claims. | 01-01-2009 |
20090013077 | OBJE NETWORK DEVICE SERVICE CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM - An Obje network device service control method and system, the method including: discovering Obje components by an Obje proxy, and generating component proxies by an Obje proxy, the component proxies respectively corresponding to the Obje components; discovering the component proxies by a Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) control point, and requesting by the UPnP control point a component proxy of the component proxies, which is selected by a UPnP control point, for a presentation page; generating and providing by the selected component proxy the presentation page to the UPnP control point; and controlling by the UPnP control point a transfer session between the Obje components based on the presentation page. | 01-08-2009 |
20090013078 | Optimized Signaling Protocol, Including Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), in a Communications Environment - A redacted version of a signaling protocol, such as Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), is used to optimize call session communications between a communications terminal and a proxy server. During a session registration process, the proxy server captures and stores session context data by leveraging the content of the registration messages. With the session context data stored at the proxy server, the messages between the proxy server and the communications terminal may omit some or all of the session context data. For outgoing messages, a proxy server receives a redacted signaling message from the communications terminal, reconstructs a standard signaling message from the redacted signaling message, and forwards the reconstructed message to a recipient. For incoming messages, the proxy server receives a standard signaling message, redacts the standard message to remove some or all of the session context data, and forwards the redacted message to the communications terminal. | 01-08-2009 |
20090013079 | Disconnecting selected participant in multicast session - A slow client that participates in a reliable multicast session may reduce the speed of data transfer for other clients in the session. A multicast server can mitigate the effect of a slow client by identifying and disconnecting one or more clients that are slowing down the session, or by using other criteria to identify clients to be disconnected. The server may monitor the performance of clients in the session based on factors such as the rate at which each of the clients is able to receive data, the number or rate of packets lost by a client, the amount of time that a client has spent as the slowest client in the session, the identity of a particular client, etc. A client that has been identified for disconnection based on the server's detection efforts, or that has been identified by an administrator, may be disconnected. | 01-08-2009 |
20090013080 | Media Stream Scheduling for Hiccup-Free Fast-Channel-Change in the Presence of Network Chokepoints - An implementation, as described herein, facilitates fast start-up of a new media stream while avoiding temporal interruption (i.e., “hiccups”) of the presentation of that new media stream. At least one implementation, described herein, coordinates the delivery of multiple simultaneous media streams on a media-stream network. Its coordination accounts for traversal of bandwidth-restricted chokepoints; quickly stopping delivery of one or more media streams from the set of streams; quickly initiating delivery and presentation of one or more new media streams not previously in the set (i.e., a “channel change”); and producing clean playback of all of the streams in the set, despite their different timelines. This abstract itself is not intended to limit the scope of this patent. The scope of the present invention is pointed out in the appending claims. | 01-08-2009 |
20090019164 | DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING A ROUTER TO FIND THE BEST DHCP SERVER - Provided is a method for assigning a domain host configuration protocol (DHCP) server from a list of available DHCP servers based upon user selected criteria. When a network router receives a request for an IP address from a computer, or “client,” connected to a network, the request is analyzed for information related to both the client and the available DHCP servers. The analysis may be based upon a number of factors such as the number of previous requests to a particular DHCP server and the proximity of the servers to the computer requesting the IP address. Once the router determines an appropriate DHCP server for a particular IP address request, the client request is forwarded to that DHCP server. The process is completely transparent to both the requesting client and to the selected DHCP server. | 01-15-2009 |
20090019165 | METHODS FOR SENDING SMALL PACKETS IN A PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) NETWORK - An improved mechanism is provided that facilitates transmission of small packets within an ad hoc peer-to-peer network. A small packet is identified to a receiver within a control channel so that its lower power can be considered in an interference management protocol implemented among local peer devices. In a traffic slot, a transmitter voluntarily backs down on the transmitter power as a smaller packet will require much lower signal-to-noise ratio. This will improve the signal energy per bit per noise power density for the transmission as well as minimize the interference caused to other wireless communications happening in the same spectrum. | 01-15-2009 |
20090024744 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A DESIGNATED CONNECTION BETWEEN COMPONENTS OF COMPUTING DEVICES - A system and method for identifying a single, designated connection from one or more connections (e.g. TCP connections) that may have been established between two components for data communications. Each component is associated with a component identifier that is generated by an identifier generating algorithm adapted to ensure that component identifiers generated by the algorithm are orderable and substantially unique. For example, Universally Unique Identifiers may be generated for this purpose. Each component in the distributed system can be uniquely identified by its component identifier, and the component identifiers facilitate the identification of each component as either a controller or responder in a determination of whether a particular connection should be identified as the designated connection. In one embodiment, that particular connection is identified as the designated connection unless an earlier established connection exists that neither the first component nor the second component knows to be broken. In that case, the earlier established connection may be identified as the designated connection. | 01-22-2009 |
20090024745 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING NETWORK CONNECTION - A portable router for enabling a data communication terminal to be location and device transparent includes: a first module for storing a digital communication address of a user; a second module for detecting a data communication network location to which the terminal is connected; a third module for detecting communication devices that are connected to the terminal; a fourth module for establishing data communication between the terminal and the network such that the communication address of the location from the second module is automatically converted to the communication address of the user from the first module; and a fifth module for automatically selecting a communication device which was detected by the third module for use by the fourth module. | 01-22-2009 |
20090031027 | Relationship-Centric Portals for Communication Sessions - Relationship-centric resources are provided to users during a communication session. After establishing a communication session between a first communication device and a second communication device, content that meets a content descriptor is retrieved. This content descriptor describes a nature of a relationship between users of the first and second communication devices. The retrieved content, which meets the content descriptor, is then simultaneously displaying on both the first communication device and the second communication device. | 01-29-2009 |
20090031028 | Secure tunnel domain name management - Apparatus, systems, and methods may operate to establish a virtual private network (VPN) connection between a server in a private network and a client in a public network. Additional activities include intercepting a socket call from the client requesting resolution of a network address associated with a domain name in the private network, searching a local linked list for the network address, returning the network address to the client if the network address is found in the local linked list, and, if the network address is not found in the local linked list, sending a request to resolve the network address to a domain name system (DNS) server in the private network. Additional apparatus, systems, and methods are disclosed. | 01-29-2009 |
20090031029 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REESTABLISHING, WITH A CLIENT DEVICE, A SIGNALING SESSION ASSOCIATED WITH A CALL IN PROGRESS - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for re-establishing, with a client device, a signaling session associated with a call in progress. One method for reestablishing, with a client device, a signaling session associated with a call in progress includes monitoring an Internet protocol (IP) address of media packets received from the client device during a call in progress having an associated signaling session and detecting a change in the IP address for the device from the media packets, and wherein the signaling session is terminated. The method further includes, in response to detecting a change in the IP address for the device from the media packets, sending a notification message to the client device. The method further includes receiving a registration message from the client device to re-establish the signaling session. | 01-29-2009 |
20090031030 | PEER-BASED NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT - A solution for providing a networking environment is provided, in which data for a plurality of members is managed. Each member includes profile data and may include one or more peers. A peer can comprise another member that is a friend of the member. The member can provide invitee credentials, such as an identifier (e.g., user name) and password, which another member can use to view some or all of the profile data of the member. Additionally, peers of the other member can also view some or all of the profile data of the member and both the other member and his/her peers can view some or all of the profile data of the peer(s) of the member. In this manner, a networking environment is provided that enables an individual and his/her peers to learn about another individual in the context of the other individual's peers. | 01-29-2009 |
20090031031 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MAINTAINING A CONFIGURATION STATE - A system for configuring configurable products includes a stateless configuration engine. A user and a server are coupled to a network for transmitting and receiving information. The user includes a web browser, memory and a display. The user receives web pages from the server and enters information into the fields on the page. The user sends the web page and the entered information to the server. The server decodes the information on the web page and sends a next page to the user including hidden form fields that include the decoded information. The information is stored in the source code of the page displayed by the web browser located at the user. | 01-29-2009 |
20090037586 | Campaign for downloading data into portable communicating objects - The downloading of data from a server into one (Cn) of the portable communicating objects (C | 02-05-2009 |
20090037587 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Out of data being transmitted from a client application A | 02-05-2009 |
20090037588 | Method And System For Providing Status Information Of At Least Two Related Principals - Methods and systems are described for providing status information of at least two related principals. One method includes establishing an association between a first tuple including a first status for a first principal and a second tuple including a second status for a second principal, where the association includes a relationship indicator indicating a relationship between the first principal and the second principal. A first subscription to the first tuple for receiving the first status for the first principal is provided for a first watcher entity. In response to providing the first subscription, the method includes generating a first notification message including status information comprising at least one of a composite status based on the first status for the first principal, the second status for the second principal and the relationship indicator; and the first status, the second status and the relationship indicator. | 02-05-2009 |
20090037589 | INTERFACE APPARATUS, EXCHANGE APPARATUS WITH THE APPARATUS, AND CONTROL METHOD FOR USE IN THE APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, an interface apparatus includes a connector which establishes connection with a plurality of Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) terminals which each include communication functions defined by SIP and with an SIP network to one port, a first processor which executes exchange processing for the plurality of SIP terminals, a second processor which executes exchange processing for the SIP network, and a sorting unit which sorts a control signal into the first processor or the second processor based on transmission destination identification information or transmission origin identification information in the control signal regarding exchange received by the connector. | 02-05-2009 |
20090049178 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MINIMIZING RETRY DELAYS IN HIGH TRAFFIC COMPUTER NETWORKS - A system, method, and program product is provided that requests, by a first computer system, a new network session with a second computer system. The new network session request occurs after a previous network session between the two systems and the new network session request includes a new sequence number that is different from a previous sequence number that was used during the previous network session. The first computer system receives an acknowledgement from the second computer system that references the previous sequence number instead of the new sequence number. In response to receiving the acknowledgement at the first computer system that references the previous sequence number, the first computer system modifies the new sequence number by setting it to a value that is higher than the previous sequence number, and the first computer system re-requests the new network session using the modified new sequence number. | 02-19-2009 |
20090049179 | Establishing of a semantic multilayer network - A semantic multilayer network is established, wherein a first layer in said semantic multilayer network including tag annotations, and a second layer in said semantic multilayer network including data structured by an ontology, are established and wherein the first layer and the second layer are connected. Thus, connecting of two entirely different worlds of the dynamic, emergent “social tagging” (e.g., web applications like Web 2.0) and of the regular “ontology engineering” (e.g. Semantic Web) data, dynamic data tag annotations and ontology, seen as too opposed or conflictive, therefore being treated separately and independently so far, becomes possible. Here, by utilizing advantages of both worlds, computer aided handling of large amounts of data, including e.g. processing, management, or querying of data, becomes considerably efficient and effective, wherein said data may be distributed in different areas, locations, or systems. | 02-19-2009 |
20090049180 | GATEWAY APPARATUS - Even when all of usable sessions are in use, a communication can be established for a new session and the interrupted session is automatically restored. Information on degrees of importance of communication sessions and information of restoration requirement are set in advance and stored in a session importance table in association with identifier (URI) of communication initiating terminals and identifier of destinations of communication. When a connection request for a session having a high degree of importance such as an emergency session is received, the session having the lowest degree of importance is selected and interrupted. Information of the interrupted session such as the communication initiator identifier and the communication destination identifier is stored in a session restoration table. The session is automatically restored as soon as a session resource becomes unoccupied according to the communication initiator identifier and the communication destination identifier stored in the session restoration table. | 02-19-2009 |
20090049181 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, SESSION RECOVERY METHOD, RECORDING MEDIUM FOR STORING SESSION RECOVERY PROGRAM - An information processing apparatus, a session recovery method and a recording medium for storing a session recovery program are disclosed. According to one aspect of the present invention, even if a session with a server apparatus connected via a network is invalidated, it is possible to resume the session without user's recognition of the session invalidation. The information processing apparatus includes an authentication information maintain part maintaining authentication information supplied to establish the session, a session invalidation detection part detecting that the session is invalidated, and a session recovery part, when the session invalidation detection part detects that the session has been invalidated, requesting the server apparatus to establish a session by using the authentication information in the authentication information maintain part. | 02-19-2009 |
20090055536 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PLUG AND PLAY BETWEEN HOST AND CLIENT - A host client plug-and-play system and method capable of controlling a client at the same time that the client is connected to a host through wired/wireless communication means are provided. The host client plug-and-play method in a host client communication system where at least one client is controlled by at least one host, includes: (a) a step of performing device connection between the client and the host; (b) a step of performing communication compatible operation step between the client and the host; (c) a step where the host receives a device driver and control software for allowing the host to identify and control the client; (d) a step where the host installs the received device driver and control software; (e) a step of performing device identification and communication compatible operation between the host and the client by using the device deriver installed in the host; and (f) a step where the host controls the client by using the control software installed in the host. | 02-26-2009 |
20090055537 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, TERMINAL SWITCHING SYSTEM, AND TERMINAL SWITCHING METHOD - A transfer-source terminal, a communication-destination terminal, and a nearby terminal existing in the neighborhood of transfer-source terminal are provided. The nearby terminal collects connectivity information for monitoring connectivity after terminal switching by performing a communication process with the communication-destination terminal, and transmits the connectivity information collected to the transfer-source terminal. The transfer-source terminal receives connectivity information from the nearby terminal by a connectivity information receiving unit, determines a transfer-destination terminal from among the nearby terminals according to connectivity information by a transfer-destination terminal determinating unit, and transfers a communication session with a communication-destination terminal to the transfer-destination terminal determined, by a session transferring unit. | 02-26-2009 |
20090055538 | Content commentary - Techniques involving content commentaries are described. In an implementation, a commentary is made at a client during output of content. The commentary is to be output concurrently with a subsequent output of the content. A communication is formed that includes the commentary to be communicated over a network such that the commentary is available to be output at another client. | 02-26-2009 |
20090055539 | AV SERVER APPARATUS AND CONNECTION MANAGEMENT METHOD - In connection management by a conventional server apparatus using IDs, a client apparatus cannot know an attribute of a connection corresponding to an ID. A server apparatus ( | 02-26-2009 |
20090063685 | SECURE COMPUTER WORKING ENVIRONMENT UTILIZING A READ-ONLY BOOTABLE MEDIA - A read-only bootable media is provided in which a remote agent loads the read-only bootable media onto a computer. The read-only bootable media provides a customized operating system that is run in the computer's volatile memory. The read-only media also disables any persistent storage connected to the agent computer or devices connected to the agent computer. This protects the agent's computer and any networks that the agent connects to from malicious software. Also, by disabling persistent storage, confidential information is protected from unauthorized retention by the agent. | 03-05-2009 |
20090063686 | AUTOMATED SERVICE DISCOVERY AND DYNAMIC CONNECTION MANAGEMENT - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes device functional circuitry to perform at least one service; and network interface control circuitry to control interaction between the apparatus and a network. The network interface control circuitry includes a service discovery module to (1) send a presence announcement message to be transmitted outside the device to let other devices outside the device know of services the device may perform and (2) to receive presence announcement messages from the other devices outside the device to learn what services to the other devices may perform. In some embodiments, the network interface control circuitry includes a dynamic connection management module. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-05-2009 |
20090063687 | Hybrid connection model - A connection manager to manage connections between a web server using a hybrid connection model. The hybrid connection model is optimized to minimize system resources necessary to maintain an idle connection The hybrid connection model decreases resources required during idle times by using a single or set of poller threads to monitor for socket events for all idle connections. The connection is then assigned a worker thread when further data is ready to be transferred over a connection. | 03-05-2009 |
20090063688 | CENTRALIZED TCP TERMINATION WITH MULTI-SERVICE CHAINING - A network element having centralized TCP termination with multi-service chaining is described herein. According to one embodiment, a network element includes a switch fabric, a first service module coupled to the switch fabric, and a second and a third service modules coupled to the first service module over the switch fabric. In response to packets of a network transaction received from a client over a first network for access a server of a data center having multiple servers over a second network, the first service module is configured to terminate a TCP connection of the packets. The TCP terminated packets are transmitted to the second and third service modules over the switch fabric. The second and third service modules are configured to perform different application network services on the TCP terminated packets without having to perform a TCP process again. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 03-05-2009 |
20090063689 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVISIONING CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT - A method for execution by at least one entity in the service provider network. The method comprises receiving an access request from a communication device; determining a logical identifier intended for use by the communication device during an eventual communication session; and identifying, based on the logical identifier, an object linked to a physical location of the communication device. Finally, in one aspect, the method comprises obtaining account credentials for a customer known to be associated with the object, whereas in another aspect, the method comprises establishing a data session between the communication device and a network entity associated with the object without necessarily obtaining any account credentials. | 03-05-2009 |
20090070471 | Method for recovering a video-on-demand session - The present invention relates to a method for recovering a downloading section that has been interrupted, in a device comprising an interface with a network enabling access to a remote server and means for implementing a downloading session with the said server, comprising the steps for starting up a downloading session of a content from the remote server, by means of more than one signalling channel with at least the said server, detecting a premature interruption of the downloading session, verifying the availability of all the channels, as long as one of the channels is unavailable, the session is not recovered and when all the channels are again available, the session is recovered. | 03-12-2009 |
20090070472 | AUTOMATIC AND SECURE CONFIGURATION OF WIRELESS MEDICAL NETWORKS | 03-12-2009 |
20090070473 | Method for Data Routing in Networks - An integrated security system integrates broadband and mobile access and control with conventional security systems and premise devices to provide a tri-mode security network having remote connectivity and access. The integrated security system delivers remote premise monitoring and control functionality to conventional monitored premise protection and complements existing premise protection equipment. The integrated security system integrates into the premise network and couples wirelessly with the conventional security panel, enabling broadband access to premise security systems. Automation devices can be added, enabling users to remotely see live video or pictures and control home devices via a personal web portal or other client device. Camera management enables automatic configuration and management of cameras in the premise network. The camera management extends to remote control and monitoring from outside the firewall of the premise network to include routing of images or video from a streaming source device to a requesting client device. | 03-12-2009 |
20090077239 | SERVER APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL, ELECTRIC APPLIANCE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A server apparatus, a mobile terminal, an electric appliance, a communication system, a communication method and a program for notifying a mobile terminal user in the open of the cause of a failure of P2P connection. In a communication system, an electric appliance ( | 03-19-2009 |
20090077240 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING A MOBILE SERVER - Methods and apparatus are provided for transmitting data to a client device from a computer module in a vehicle. Data is transmitted from the computer module over an in-vehicle network to an in-vehicle communications gateway module. The data from the computer module is destined for the client device. A request for a software component is transmitted to the client device from a standard port of the in-vehicle communications gateway module. The software component comprises a non-standard transfer protocol module. The in-vehicle communications gateway module loads the non-standard transfer protocol module, and the data is exchanged between the in-vehicle communications gateway module and the client device according to the non-standard transfer protocol. | 03-19-2009 |
20090077241 | METHOD OF FORWARDING/SHARING SERVICE AND DEVICE OF ENABLING THE METHOD - A terminal apparatus for forwarding/sharing a data service is provided. The terminal apparatus for forwarding/sharing the data service includes a service receiver to receive the data service from a service provision apparatus; a connector to perform a connection with a corresponding terminal; and a service forwarding unit to forward the data service to the corresponding terminal via the connection with the corresponding terminal | 03-19-2009 |
20090077242 | METHOD, TERMINAL, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR OBTAINING ID INFORMATION OF APPLICATION SERVICE - The present invention discloses a method, a terminal, a device, and a system for obtaining ID information of an application service to solve the problem of the prior art that a terminal cannot automatically obtain the ID information of a target application service. In the invention, a first device sends an ID request to a second device, and the second device returns the ID information of the target application service to the first device. By the technical solution of the invention, a terminal which acts as the first device may automatically obtain the ID information of the target application service, and the user experience satisfaction is improved. | 03-19-2009 |
20090083426 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ENABLING MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION - A method and arrangement in a multimedia gateway connected to a multimedia service network, for providing access to multimedia services for communication devices connected to a private network. The multimedia gateway may include a device database, a communication unit and a logic unit. A service identity is associated with the multimedia gateway and is valid in the multimedia service network. When a session request is received, a session is established on behalf of at least one device in the private network using said service identity and capabilities of said at least one device. Thereby, no individual service identity is necessary for the selected device(s). If the session request is a session invitation of an incoming request, said at least one device is selected based on capability requirements for the session. | 03-26-2009 |
20090083427 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RELAY APPARATUS, RELAY METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - The communication system includes: an apparatus that mounts a processing unit which executes transmission and reception of a signal with an external apparatus and which processes the received signal; and a relay apparatus that relays transmission and reception of a signal between the external apparatus and the apparatus. The relay apparatus is provided with: a transmission and reception unit that receives a signal from the external apparatus and transmits a signal to the external apparatus; an analysis unit that analyzes whether or not the signal received by the transmission and reception unit is a signal to be processed by the processing unit of the apparatus; and a determination unit that determines whether or not to execute transfer processing of the received signal to the apparatus based on a result of the analysis by the analysis unit. | 03-26-2009 |
20090083428 | SWITCHING BETWEEN CONENCTIVITY TYPES TO MAINTAIN CONNECTIVITY - Techniques are provided for leveraging narrowband connectivity (such as dial-up communications or other types of low bandwidth communications) to provision or configure broadband connectivity between a broadband access provider and a broadband device, such as a DSL modem or a cable modem. Specifically, because narrowband connectivity does not require advance configuration or provisioning by the host system of connectivity parameters for an access-seeking device, a modem at an access-seeking device may be leveraged to establish a narrowband connection between that device and a host system and to enable an exchange or negotiation of connectivity parameters necessary to enable future broadband connectivity. Thus, once established, the narrowband connection may be used as a conduit for communicating required provisioning information between the broadband-enabling host and the access-seeking device to enable broadband connectivity by the device in the future. | 03-26-2009 |
20090089434 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SAVING AND RETRIEVING CLIENT-SPECIFIC INFORMATION IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method of saving and retrieving client-specific information in an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). A Serving Call Session Control Server (S-CSCF) receives information from a first client initiating a call to a second client. The information includes identification information corresponding to the first client and a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) invite to the second client. If a profile of the first client in a Home Subscriber Server (HSS) includes a trigger value, the S-CSCF forwards the SIP invite to an Application Server (AS). If a local AS archive does not include valid profile information corresponding to the first client, the AS fetches valid profile information from the HSS, and the AS stores the profile information in the local archive. The AS sends the profile information corresponding to the first client from the local archive to the second client by embedding the profile information within the SIP invite. | 04-02-2009 |
20090089435 | Method for initiating IMS based communications - A method of initiating an IP Multimedia Sub-system communication for a user that is not registered a priori with the IP Multimedia Subsystem. The method comprises receiving a communication request from said user at a Session Initiation Protocol Application Server via an interface to an external network or receiving an internally or externally generated stimulus requiring the establishment of an IP Multimedia Subsystem communication, allocating a Serving Call/State Control Function to the user, forwarding a SIP request from the Application Server to the allocated Serving Call/State Control Function, and establishing the requested communication. | 04-02-2009 |
20090089436 | Policy information in multiple PDFs - The invention proposes a method for establishing sessions in a network comprising a user entity, a network control node and a plurality of network nodes storing subscriber specific information, the method comprising the steps of receiving a session establishing request at the network control node, forwarding a policy request message from the network control node to each network node of the plurality of network nodes storing subscriber specific information comprising policy information required for the session to be established, processing the policy request message to generate a policy decision message and sending the policy decision message to the network control node from each of the network nodes having received the policy request message, generating a single policy decision confirmation message based on the received policy decision messages in the network control node, and sending the single policy decision message to the user entity. | 04-02-2009 |
20090089437 | SYSTEMS AND MEDIA FOR SHARING SESSION DATA ON A NETWORK - Systems and media for sharing session data on a network are disclosed. More particularly, hardware and/or software for sharing user session data between different servers on a network are disclosed. Embodiments include a data processing system for sharing session data on a network, where the network includes an application server and an enterprise server, each providing at least part of an application to a user on the network. In some embodiments, the application server includes a session transport component for recording changes to user session data with the application server and the enterprise server includes a session transport component for requesting updated user session data from the application server. In further embodiments, the enterprise server may establish a user session based on the updated user session data received from the application server. | 04-02-2009 |
20090094367 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING GROUP SESSION - A method and system for establishing a group session and a service server are disclosed. The method comprises: acquiring a group member list and establishing session conditions according to the information in a received group session; acquiring the various information described in the establishing session conditions; determining group members of which the various information meets the establishing session conditions; and sending a request for establishing a group session of which the various information meets the establishing session conditions, and establishing the group session. The method solves the problem that the service server cannot dynamically select the group members, according to the current statuses of the group members, to establish the session in the prior art, whose disadvantages are the session is inflexible and the communication resources are wasted. | 04-09-2009 |
20090106426 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MODEL-BASED PAGEVIEW LATENCY MANAGEMENT - Within exemplary embodiments of the present invention a methodology for response time management for a web page-view download operation is provided. The methodology providing a server-side approach for optimizing weighted, per class, client perceived web page-view download response time. Further, a model for monitoring web page-views download latency in real-time based upon the behavior typically seen from conventional web browsers. | 04-23-2009 |
20090106427 | MOBILE SERVER WITH MULTIPLE SERVICE CONNECTIONS - A method of communicating between a mobile communications device and a plurality of services that are used by the mobile communications device. The method includes establishing, through a firewall and a wireless network, a first communications session between the mobile communications device and a mobile server located in an enterprise network with which the mobile communications device is associated; and establishing, concurrent with the first communications session at least one further communications session between the mobile server and a service, the at least one further communications session being established by the mobile server as a session proxy for the mobile communications device. | 04-23-2009 |
20090106428 | Service intermediary Addressing for real time composition of services - Real-time service composition is provided by a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) transport binding for Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) messages. A SOAPAction header and SOAP envelope can be included in a SIP message to identify a requested service. The SIP message recipient can parse out the SOAP envelope and forward same to a corresponding Web Service. An intermediary node, including a SIP Proxy, can evaluate incoming SIP/SOAP messages and provide requested services to which they have access. | 04-23-2009 |
20090106429 | Collaborative music network - A collaborative music network for collaboratively linking members with each other has a central control center which is adapted for a plurality of members accessing thereto through internet, and a communication center linked to the central control center for interactively networking the members with each other. The music network includes a session for the session-members to edit, mix and record the audio files in the session and save them in the session and the user's own hard drive. The session also provides a live platform for session-members to interact and perform music. Non-session members are able to work on the audio files in the session. The completed music works are played through the network music player and purchased through online music store. The music network also contains an Internet radio to broadcast the audio files selected from member profiles. | 04-23-2009 |
20090106430 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A SHARED I/O SUBSYSTEM - A computer system that includes a plurality of servers, and a shared I/O subsystem coupled to each of the servers and to one or more I/O interfaces. The shared I/O subsystem services I/O requests made by two or more of the servers. Each I/O interface may couple to a network, appliance, or other device. The I/O requests serviced by the shared I/O subsystem may alternatively include software initiated or hardware initiated I/O requests. Different servers coupled to the shared I/O subsystem may use different operating systems, and each I/O interface may be used by two or more servers. | 04-23-2009 |
20090113057 | Proximity Routing For Session Based Applications Using Anycast - Certain exemplary embodiments can comprise a method, which can comprise automatically providing content to an information device from a content distribution node of a plurality of content distribution nodes. The information device can be adapted to send a request for the content from the first content distribution node utilizing an Internet Protocol (IP) address of the content distribution node. | 04-30-2009 |
20090113058 | Terminal server draining - Techniques are described for managing and controlling connections of server sessions, including systems and methods for managing and controlling connections to a server computer. Connections are monitored to a server computer depending on a “drain state” of the server computer. If the server is in drain mode, requests to initiate a fresh session with the server computer are rejected, or deferred until the server computer comes out of the drain state. | 04-30-2009 |
20090113059 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PEER TO PEER LINK ESTABLISHMENT OVER A NETWORK - A method and apparatus for linking to a Peer-to-Peer (“P2P”) network for VOIP communications. An intermediary peer creates a map to link peers together in the P2P network. A series of messages are generated to open the ports of one peer to be accessible to other peers on the P2P network. Peers are then enabled to communicate directly with other peers. Steward peers can assume the functionality of the intermediary peer. | 04-30-2009 |
20090113060 | Systems and Methods for Seamless Host Migration - Systems and methods of the present invention for maintaining network data distribution are provided. Network data may be distributed in such as manner as to allow a network session to weather interrupted communications between host and clients without significant loss of data. Embodiments of the present invention provide for one or more clients to serve as backup host(s) for the network session. When the other clients transmit data to the host, they may also transmit the data to one or more backup hosts if there are any indications of interrupted communication. | 04-30-2009 |
20090119405 | Combining UNIX commands with uniform resource locators - A computer command processor to prepare a data processing pipeline where an output of a first process is provided as an input of a second process, wherein the first process and the second process execute at different computer systems. Systems (and the processes that are to occur there) are identified by Uniform Resource Locators (“URLs”). | 05-07-2009 |
20090125626 | Method and system for processing a control message in an Internet protocol-based mobile communication system supporting a multimedia service - A method and system for processing a message in an Internet protocol-based mobile communication system supporting a multimedia service. In the system, application servers include a representative application server and multiple backend application servers. A method for defining a control message between application servers to set up a session using the standard Internet protocol is provided. When an application server performs a call processing operation, control message processing load and control message transmission delay is reduced. | 05-14-2009 |
20090125627 | HIGHLY SCALABLE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT FOR MANAGING REMOTE DEVICES - A highly scalable primary server is provided to serve an increasing number of users and remote devices. Instead of communicating with a primary server using an expensive communication protocol, a remote device communicates with a secondary server using a less expensive protocol to determine whether the primary server desires to communicate control instructions to the remote device. When the primary server has a request to control the remote device, the primary server creates a table entry to the secondary server to notify the remote device of a request to communicate. Upon polling the secondary server and learning of the created table entry, the remote device establishes a communication connection with the primary server to receive the instructions for controlling the remote device. In this manner, the demand for resources needed for communication with the primary server is significantly reduced. | 05-14-2009 |
20090125628 | Service subscription associated with real time composition of services - Real-time service composition is provided by a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) transport binding for Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) messages. A SOAPAction header and SOAP envelope can be included in a SIP message to identify a requested service. The SIP message recipient can parse out the SOAP envelope and forward same to a corresponding Web Service. An intermediary node, including a SIP Proxy, can evaluate incoming SIP/SOAP messages and provide requested services to which they have access. Service discovery and subscription are facilitated by adding Universal Description, Discovery and Integration (UDDI) services requests and responses. | 05-14-2009 |
20090125629 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSPARENT NEGOTIATIONS - In one embodiment, the present invention is a method and apparatus for transparent TCP negotiations. In one embodiment, endpoint machines (e.g., clients and servers) negotiate network characteristics through use of TCP header fields, which provide backward capability. Negotiations may be requested or initiated by either endpoint, and if the receiving endpoint is not capable of negotiating, the existing TCP connection will continue to operate as normal. | 05-14-2009 |
20090125630 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEFINING A SEARCH WINDOW BASED ON DISTANCE BETWEEN ACCESS POINTS - An access terminal defines a search window based on a distance between access points. Here, a first one of the access points may comprise a macro access point from which the access terminal acquires timing. The search window may be used to monitor for pilot signals from a second one of the access points. For example, the second access point may comprise a femto node that provides relatively small area coverage. In some aspects the definition of the search window may involve adjusting (e.g., advancing) a center of a search window based on the distance between the access points. In addition, the access terminal may employ a smaller search window when it is searching for pilot signals from a femto node as compared to when it is searching for pilot signals from a macro access point. | 05-14-2009 |
20090132712 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SESSION MOBILITY BETWEEN END USER COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method and system for providing session mobility between end user communication devices, such as between session initiation protocol (SIP) devices and universal plug and play (UPnP) devices. The session mobility methods and systems make use of a session manager, which can be part of a bridge coupled between the communication devices involved in a communication session, that allows the session to be moved to another end user communication device. The session manager controls the transfer of communication sessions between the end user communication devices. The session manager also is configured to control and manage the addition of end user communication devices to existing sessions between communication devices. As part of this session mobility between communication devices, the session manager can create a virtual device within the bridge to represent an actual communication device that is communicating with a different communication device in a different domain within the communication session. | 05-21-2009 |
20090132713 | SINGLE-ROUNDTRIP EXCHANGE FOR CROSS-DOMAIN DATA ACCESS - An anonymous cross-domain data request message is sent to a target domain, the request message including a cross-domain data request header. A cross-domain response message is also received from the target domain if cross-domain data requests are supported by the computing device and if the data requested by the anonymous cross-domain data request message is available for cross-domain data requests. The cross-domain response message includes a cross-domain request allowed header as well as the data requested by the anonymous cross-domain data request message. The requested data can be thoroughly examined, without restriction, by a Web page initiating the request. The target domain is a different domain than the domain that includes a Web page that requested that the anonymous cross-domain data request message be sent. | 05-21-2009 |
20090132714 | Method and System for Providing Connection Resiliency - A system, method and device for providing connection resiliency. The method including maintaining, by a first proxy, a TCP connection with a TCP client and a TCP connection with a TCP server through one or more TCP networks; maintaining information of both TCP connections by a forwarding component between the TCP networks and the first proxy; establishing, by the forwarding component, a new TCP connection with a second proxy for each of the TCP connections maintained by the first proxy; and forwarding data, to and from both the client and the server, to and from the second proxy without disconnection of the TCP connections of the TCP client and TCP server. | 05-21-2009 |
20090132715 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONDUCTING SECURE IP TRANSACTION SESSIONS WITH PERSISTENCE - A method for providing a persistent network session is disclosed. The method includes conducting a first session between a terminal and a server via a communication gateway. The first session includes a session between the communication gateway and the server. The method also includes issuing a notification to the communication gateway to continue a session between the terminal and the communication gateway upon closure of the first session. | 05-21-2009 |
20090138602 | Secured agent communications - A server communicates with a network appliance. The server includes an agent. The network appliance sends a request to the agent. The request includes an identification of a port. The agent negotiates a secured communication channel with the network appliance on the identified port to retrieve further instructions from the network appliance. The instructions includes one or more commands. The server reports the results of the executed command to the network appliance on the initial channel. | 05-28-2009 |
20090138603 | PROTECTION FOR DIRECT LINK SETUP (DLS) TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for establishing direct link setup (DLS) connections between stations in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The DLS connections may be established in a manner that helps avoid collisions with transmissions from hidden stations. | 05-28-2009 |
20090138604 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DELIVERING DIGITAL CONTENT - A system for delivering digital content to user devices. The system includes a content delivery server for establishing respective sessions with the user devices and for delivering streams of content to the user devices during the sessions according to a streaming protocol. An asset server is communicatively coupled to the content delivery server through an asset protocol for maintaining an asset scheduling table including asset entries, each asset entry including an asset identifier identifying a given asset in association with a starting time parameter, user identifiers identifying at least one target user device, and a set of session identifiers each identifying a session established with a target user device identified by the user identifiers. The content delivery server inserts, for each asset entry in the asset scheduling table, and for each session identified by a session identifier in the asset entry, the asset identified by the asset identifier of the asset entry into the stream of content delivered during the session, at a predefined insertion time. | 05-28-2009 |
20090138605 | CONNECTION METHOD AND CONFERENCING APPARATUS - In a conferencing system having a first conferencing apparatus and a plurality of second conferencing apparatuses, the plurality of second conferencing apparatuses transmit connection requests, which are for connecting to the first conferencing apparatus, to the first conferencing apparatus based upon first connection information, which is for connecting to the first conferencing apparatus and which a plurality of second communication devices have received from a first communication device. The first conferencing apparatus detects second connection information, which is for connecting to the second conferencing apparatuses that have transmitted the connection requests, and instructs the plurality of second conferencing apparatuses to connect themselves together based upon the second connection information. | 05-28-2009 |
20090138606 | TRANSFERRING SESSIONS BETWEEN DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for transferring a communication and computer session between devices. A user launches a communication session on a first device, such as a personal computer. The user may then selectively transfer the communication session to another device, such as a wireless device, through activation of a triggering signal. In response, the context of the communication session is determined as it is being performed on the first device, including a type of the communication session. The communication session is then transferred to the second device by launching a new communication session on the second device and transferring the context of the communication session corresponding to the first device to the new communication session on the second device. The communications session is continued via use of the first device as a proxy for the second device. | 05-28-2009 |
20090144428 | Method and Apparatus For Multimodal Voice and Web Services - This invention is based on being able to locate a voice server, temporarily allocate it, send it the audio of you saying “When is flight 683 due to arrive?”, getting the results of what you said back in the browser, and deallocating the voice server for use by the next person talking into their browser. Voice channels and IVR ports are initially set up by a switch and the IVR using conventional audio protocols. The Voice channels are not initially connected to the client. The switch handles the allocation and deallocation of IVR voice channels without having to communication further with the IVR. A user indicates (usually by pressing a PTT button) to the client device that he wishes to initiate a voice interaction during an X+V session. This translates to a request on the CTRL channel to synchronise the XHTML and VXML forms which the embodiment uses as a trigger for the VXML browser to execute a conversational turn. The multiplexer intercepts this control command and connects the virtual voice circuit between the device and an existing open but unattached voice port. The virtual circuit is connected without having to set up an RTP channel. The CTRL signal is then forwarded to the interaction manager so that the conversation can take place. At the end of the conversation the virtual circuit is disconnected. | 06-04-2009 |
20090144429 | Method and Apparatus for Identifying an IMS Service - An apparatus and method for indicating the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) services to which a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message relates. One or more communication service identifiers are added to the SIP message as a Feature Tag. | 06-04-2009 |
20090144430 | System and Method for Dynamic Negotiation of Device Name with Wildcard Character - A method and system for dynamically negotiating a device name for establishing a communications session between a host computer and a client computer are provided. A host computer receives from a client computer, a device name that includes as part of the device name at least a wildcard character. The host computer replaces the wildcard character with one or more characters that can be used in device names, to generate a unique device name that is not already being used by the host computer. | 06-04-2009 |
20090144431 | GUARANTEED QUALITY MULTIMEDIA SERVICE OVER MANAGED PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK OR NGN - Methods and systems are provided for guaranteed quality multimedia service over managed peer-to-peer networks (also known as super peer-to-peer, sP2P, networks). A managed peer-to-peer network ( | 06-04-2009 |
20090150549 | Dynamic communication stack - A method of facilitating communication between a resource and a computer is described. The computer employs a software application that allows the computer to communicate with the resource. The resource may comprise a medical device such as a blood glucose meter or an insulin pump. In order to facilitate communication between the computer and the resource, the software constructs a communication protocol particular to the type of resource connected to the computer. The stack comprising the communication protocol allows the computer to communicate with the resource. Once the resource and computer cease communication, the stack may be removed from the memory of the computer. | 06-11-2009 |
20090157882 | NETWORK CONNECTION FAILOVER DURING APPLICATION SERVICE INTERRUPTION - A system, method and computer program product for implementing network connection failover during application service interruption. While the application is quiesced, a network socket that terminates a network connection to a network peer is maintained on behalf of the application. The socket's network connection state information is sustained by providing acknowledgements of incoming network traffic to the network peer that prevent the peer from terminating the connection. Upon restart, the application is brought up with a blocked socket. The state of the blocked socket is conformed to a current network connection state of the original socket and the blocked socket is unblocked. | 06-18-2009 |
20090157883 | Messaging Proxy System - A messaging proxy system is disclosed for the purpose of delivering data in the form of a portable message format from a producer running on a mobile or non-mobile computer, over any wireless network, by passing this data through an intermediary proxy computer program, to one or more recipients running on mobile or non-mobile computers. The system includes a message proxy computer program with at least one pluggable transport protocol adapter. The proxy contains a command subsystem for sending and receiving command- and message-tokens to and from the mobile clients. The system further includes a thin messaging middleware client to run on mobile devices. The thin messaging middleware client includes at least one pluggable protocol adapter. The client also comprises a command subsystem for sending and receiving command- and message-tokens to and from the proxy. The proxy also contains a communication subsystem for sending and receiving messages via a state of the art message oriented middleware. | 06-18-2009 |
20090164639 | INTEGRATED WEB PORTAL FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATIONS WITH AN INTENDED PARTY - Described are a system and method for presenting, to a first user, information about a second user to enable the first user to select an appropriate communication means for communicating with the second user. A service node receives from a web browser executing at a communication device used by the first user a request for a web page associated with the second user. The service node collects information related to a current status of activity of the second user, determines one or more options for establishing communications with the second user, and transmits to the first user the web page having the current activity of the second user and the one or more communications options. | 06-25-2009 |
20090164640 | MULTIMEDIA PERSONAL ASSISTANT - A system receives, when a multimedia component is operating in a first identity, a first communication request from a first user. The first communication request includes a voice session establishment request or a video session establishment request. The system provides, in response to receiving the first communication request, first multimedia content to the first user based on the first identity and an identifier associated with the first user. The system further receives, when the multimedia component is operating in the first identity, a second communication request from a second, different user. The second communication request includes a voice session establishment request or a video session establishment request. The system provides, in response to receiving the second communication request, second, different multimedia content to the second, different user based on the first identity and an identifier associated with the second, different user. | 06-25-2009 |
20090164641 | Media Toolbar and Aggregated/Distributed Media Ecosystem - A method and network architecture through which user-specific media profile data can be made available to third parties. A browser is optionally enhanced to facilitate playback and control of one or more media players, thereby allowing the user to play content via the browser. As the user plays content in the browser or any of the media players, information is collected about the content and stored in a database. By monitoring all media-related interactions made by the user within the browser, the collected content information can encompass information from a wide range of sources. User-specific profile data is then determined based on the collected data and such user-specific profile data is made available to third parties. The user-specific profile data can be used, for example, for social networking purposes, and may also be used to drive advertisements or other content to the user. | 06-25-2009 |
20090164642 | METHOD AND INTERNET PROTOCOL TELEVISION (IPTV) CONTENT MANAGER SERVER FOR IPTV SERVICING - There is provided a method and an Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) content manager server for IPTV service. The server comprises a Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) stack adapted to request an establishment of a first RTSP session with an IPTV media server responsive to an IPTV service request from an Internet Protocol Television Terminal (ITF). The RTSP stack stores an identifier of the first RTSP session responsive to the request for the establishment of the RTSP session. Subsequently, the RTSP stack receives an RTSP session initiation message from the ITF requesting an establishment of an RTSP session. Upon receipt of the message, the content manager server authenticates the message, determines the existence of an existing RTSP session for the ITF, and thus acts to discard the session initiation message received from the ITF and to return the identifier of the first, already established, RTSP session. | 06-25-2009 |
20090164643 | System and Method for Concurrently Utilizing Multiple System Identifiers - System and method for providing access to multiple wireless service providers (WSPs) on a shared network infrastructure. The system includes a plurality of access points (APs) coupled to a network which may be distributed in airports, mass-transit stations, businesses, etc. The network may couple to a wide area network, such as the Internet. Each AP may include a plurality of virtual APs (VAPs), each corresponding to a WSP. A portable computing device (PCD) of a user stores identification information indicating a WSP of a plurality of possible WSPs, and which may include an access level of the user. Each AP “listens for” or detects identification information associated with numerous WSPs. When the AP receives the identification information from the PCD, it determines the VAP/WSP for the PCD using the identification information. Network access is then provided to the PCD through the determined WSP at the determined access level. | 06-25-2009 |
20090172169 | SECURE PROXIES FOR FLAT NETWORKS - A proxy is in communication with an internet protocol network and a mobile operator network. The proxy receives first communications from access points via the internet protocol network, transmits content from the first communications to the mobile operator network, receives second communications from the mobile operator network, and transmits content from the second communications to the access points via the internet protocol network. The proxy may perform operations based on the first and second communications received from either the access points, or from the mobile operator network. The operations performed by the proxy may include modifying the communications, saving certain information regarding the communications, performing authentication, encryption, or decryption of the communications, determining a destination for the communications, or sending the communications to a destination. | 07-02-2009 |
20090172170 | ESTABLISHMENT OF MEDIA SESSIONS WITH MEDIA ADAPTATION - The present invention relates to a method and terminal for reporting media format adaptation resources to convert a media format of a media stream of a media session to be established between terminals through a packet switched communications network towards a requesting terminal. The invention further relates to a method and NSIS router for reporting media format adaptation resources for converting a media format of a media stream of a media session to be established between terminals. To allow terminals to establish a media session utilizing media adaptation, the invention provides a NSIS (Next Step In Signaling) based signaling framework facilitating the detection and reservation of media adaptation resources on (and off) a media data path on which media data are transported utilizing a media transport protocol among terminals participating in the session. | 07-02-2009 |
20090172171 | METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR DISGUISING DIGITAL CONTENT - A method for establishing a disguised communication session between communicating user terminals. The method comprises at a first communicating user terminal, providing data for a communication session with a second communicating user terminal, distributing the data among a plurality of proxy network nodes, and using the plurality of proxy network nodes for forwarding a plurality of flows to the second communicating user terminal, each the flow comprising a portion of the data. The distributing and forwarding is performed so as to disguise at least one characteristic of the communication session from at least one inspection entity probing the plurality of flows. | 07-02-2009 |
20090172172 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENABLING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION AMONG VISITORS TO A COMMON WEBSITE - In one aspect, a method for methods and systems for enabling peer-to-peer communication among visitors to a common website includes determining, by a server unaffiliated with a first URL, that a first computer is accessing the first URL via a first web browser. The method includes determining, by a server, that a second computer is accessing a second URL via a second web browser, the second URL sharing at least a hostname with the first URL. The method includes sending, from a server to the second computer, address information identifying the first computer. The method includes establishing a connection between the second computer and the first computer. In one embodiment, the method includes displaying, to a user of the first computer, a three-dimensional environment incorporating the first web browser. | 07-02-2009 |
20090177778 | Session Affinity Cache and Manager - A method and apparatus for managing sessions by a load balancer using a session affinity cache to manage common session identifiers and resource node session identifiers. A session affinity manager within the load balancer utilizes a common session identifier to represent multiple sessions to a client. The session affinity manager provided generates a common session identifier for a set of resource node sessions for each client. The relationship between the resource node session identifiers and common session identifier is maintained in the session affinity cache by the session affinity manager. The session affinity manager translates client requests using the common session identifier into requests using the resource node session identifier retrieved from the session affinity cache. The session affinity manager rewrites resource node responses to use a common session identifier in place of resource node session identifiers. | 07-09-2009 |
20090177779 | Methods and Apparatus for Randomization of Periodic Behavior in Communication Network - A technique for use in a client, wherein the client supports a state-based signaling protocol (e.g., Session Initiation Protocol or SIP), includes initiating a given session state between the client and a server that also supports the state-based signaling protocol, and refreshing the given session state in a randomized manner. Further, a technique for use in a server, wherein the server supports a state-based signaling protocol (again, e.g., SIP), includes randomly assigning an expiration time duration for a given session state between the server and a client that also supports the state-based signaling protocol, and reporting the randomly assigned expiration time for the given session state to the client. By randomizing various behaviors of the client, the server, or both, bursty traffic in the communication network is reduced or eliminated. | 07-09-2009 |
20090177780 | Method and apparatus for data processing - According to the present invention, a method and apparatus for data processing is provided for a data processing device comprising an auxiliary execution system, a main execution system, a switch unit and a networking unit. The method and apparatus according to the present invention are capable of establishing a networking data channel between the auxiliary execution system, the switch unit and the networking unit based on a first control instruction for the switch unit; or of establishing a networking data channel between the main execution system, the switch unit and the networking unit based on a second control instruction for the switch unit. In this way, the realization of always online can be guaranteed, and apparently, the user satisfaction can be effectively improved. | 07-09-2009 |
20090193123 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USING CONVERSATIONAL AGENT TO COLLECT INFORMATION AND TRIGGER ACTIONS - A system of using a conversational agent to collect information and trigger actions, in one example embodiment, comprises a user interface to selectively receive user credentials to obtain access to a computer-implemented marketplace, an information exchange module to establish an information exchange between the user and a conversational agent based on the user profile, where the conversational agent is a computer program designed to simulate an intelligent conversation. The system may further include a communication module to communicate with the user to receive information related to a marketplace offering; and a listing module to list the marketplace offering at the computer-implemented marketplace based on the information received. | 07-30-2009 |
20090193124 | Methods, Portable Electronic Devices, Systems and Computer Program Products for Automatically Creating Social Networking Services (SNS) - Methods, portable electronic devices, systems and computer program products are provided for automatically creating a social networking service (SNS) session. The methods include generating at and transmitting from a first device a first audio and/or video fingerprint of an audio and/or video event. The first audio and/or video fingerprint has a first predetermined length (T). A second audio and/or video fingerprint is periodically transmitted to a server from the first device. The second audio and/or video fingerprint has a second predetermined length (t), smaller than the first predetermined length (T), and includes data associated with the audio and/or video event that is later in time than data included in the first audio and/or video fingerprint. The first device is joined to an SNS session, automatically created by the server, responsive to receipts at the server, of a third audio and/or video fingerprint having the first predetermined length (T) from a second device that includes a portion of the first audio and/or video fingerprint or the second audio and/or video fingerprint periodically transmitted from the first device. | 07-30-2009 |
20090193125 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA VIA DATA NETWORKS WITH DATA CONVERSION BY A COM AUTOMATIC MARSHALLER - A system and a method of transmitting data via data networks. A bidirectional data connection is created even behind firewalls, including from a client not visible to a server in the Internet. In the method and system, a first connection request for establishing a first transmission channel is sent to a server of an automation system from a first data processing device of a client via a data connection. This request is answered by the server via a second transmission channel. The data connection is kept permanently open, thereby allowing mutually time-independent bidirectional sending and receiving of data between the client and the server, via at least one data network. A COM automatic marshaller which incorporates itself into the communications chain between the client and the server is provided. | 07-30-2009 |
20090198817 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VIRTUAL SERVER MIGRATION ACROSS NETWORKS USING DNS AND ROUTE TRIANGULATION - A first virtual server is moved from a first network location to a second network location without interrupting service to users of the first virtual server. The state and data of the first virtual server are copied and transmitted to the second network location to create a copy of the first virtual server. The first virtual server copy is then updated to duplicate the first virtual server and all connections or packets directed to the first virtual server are intercepted and directed to the first virtual server copy at the second network location. A DNS entry for the symbolic name of the first virtual server is updated to reflect a shortened TTL value and then the address field of the DNS entry is set to the address of the first virtual server copy after the changeover and subsequent connections are directed to the first virtual server copy. | 08-06-2009 |
20090198818 | Terminal apparatus and recording medium on which program is recorded, as well as reconnection process method, in information distribution system - To provide a terminal apparatus and a program thereof, as well as a reconnection process method, in an information distribution system which enables a swifter completion of a reconnection process in the information distribution system. The terminal apparatus includes a connection condition detection module which detects that it has become necessary to reconnect to another terminal apparatus different from an apparatus connected upstream in a hierarchical structure, a connection process module which, on detecting that the reconnection has become necessary, starts a process of connecting to another terminal apparatus configuring the hierarchical structure, a connection request module which, on detecting that the reconnection has become necessary, requests of an apparatus connected downstream a process of connecting to another terminal apparatus configuring the hierarchical structure, and a reception control module which, on the connection process of the apparatus connected downstream finishing before the connection process using the connection process module finishes, receives information with the apparatus connected downstream as an upstream apparatus. | 08-06-2009 |
20090204712 | Content Aware Routing of Subscriptions For Streaming and Static Data - The invention relates to integration of streaming data, and more specifically relates to subscription routing: distributing the load of streaming data subscriptions across multiple servers in a session-oriented client-server architecture. In one embodiment the invention provides, in a client-server architecture, a method of implementing the client-side architecture whereby a logical connection and session may be mapped to one or more physical connections and sessions. The invention provides mobility of subscriptions from one physical session/connection to another based on directives from a server; and further permit a client to blend multiple physical subscriptions for different data streams into a single logical data stream based on directives from a server. | 08-13-2009 |
20090210536 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR FACILITATING TRANSFER OF SESSIONS BETWEEN USER DEVICES - Methods and systems for facilitating transfer of an active session from a first device to a second device associated with the same user. A network server is configured to enable the switching or swapping of an active session from one device to another device, where both devices are associated with a common user address. The switching or swapping is implemented with no or minimal effect on the active session or awareness of the remote party. The device switch may be performed in relation to any active session, including VoIP, video conferencing, or other media sessions. | 08-20-2009 |
20090210537 | Mobile communications device and associated application for use thereon - An application manager configured for use on a resource-limited device, the application manager including: an application engine configured to effect communications between a plurality of applications installed on the resource limited device and one or more external network sites; and a connection manager configured to control and/or coordinate when the plurality of applications are able to attempt to establish communications with the one or more external network sites. The resource-limited device may be a mobile terminal. | 08-20-2009 |
20090210538 | System and Method for Indicating Supported Session Policy URI Schemes Extensions - A method for negotiating a communication protocol for a policy channel. The method comprises a user agent transmitting information related to a plurality of uniform resource identifier (URI) schemes that the user agent supports for communication over the policy channel. The method further comprises the user agent receiving an indication of a selection of one or more of the plurality of URI schemes. The method further comprises the user agent using at least one communication protocol identified by one of the selected URI scheme for communication over the policy channel. | 08-20-2009 |
20090216885 | Stateless Core Service Transaction Patterns - A connection handler can receive a service request, initiate a temporary proxy state in the connection handler, open a first connection to a service provider from the connection handler to request fulfillment of the service request, and populate the temporary proxy state with a copy of original content received at the connection handler from the service provider in fulfillment of the service request. The populating can include creating a temporary proxy state content. The connection handler can tag the original content object on the service provider with an activity indicator that specifies that the original content has been accessed by the connection handler and then terminate the first connection between the connection handler and the service provider. Related systems, apparatus, methods, and/or articles are also described. | 08-27-2009 |
20090216886 | Method of multi-path accessing remote logic device under linux system - A method of multi-path accessing a remote logic device under a Linux system is used to realize a multi-path access between an initiator and a target in a storage area network (SAN). Firstly, a communication is established between the initiator and the target. Next, the initiator requests to establish at least one link session with the target. Then, the initiator obtains an iSCSI-connected host assigned by the target, and also obtains a message about connected devices corresponding to the iSCSI-connected host through transmitting a report logic unit number (LUN) command. Then, the initiator configures a device mapper, and the device mapper generates information about redundant devices according to the connected devices and the corresponding LUNs, and the redundant connected devices are mapped into a unique mapping device. | 08-27-2009 |
20090216887 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION - The invention concerns method of establishing a connection in a peer-to-peer network ( | 08-27-2009 |
20090222563 | Method of Establishing a Connection on a Communication Network - A method of establishing connections between at least a first and a second terminal on a communication network includes: sending to the second terminal a network signal requesting the network availability to establish the connection and a terminal signal requesting the availability of the second terminal to run an application exchanging data between the first and second terminals; receiving at the second terminal the network signal and the terminal signal; and sending on the network a response signal carrying information based on the network and terminal signals and assuming a content corresponding to the availability/unavailability of the network to establish the connection combined the availability/unavailability of the second terminal to run the application. | 09-03-2009 |
20090234953 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR INTEGRATION OF THIRD PARTY VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK SOLUTIONS - Various embodiments for integration of virtual private network solutions are described. In one embodiment, a mobile computing device may comprise a virtual private network client configured to establish a virtual private network connection over one or more transports and a connection manager. The connection manager may comprise a virtual private network plug-in module associated with the virtual private network client. The connection manager may load the virtual private network plug-in module in response to a request to establish a virtual private network connection using the virtual private network client over a selected transport. The connection manager may instruct the virtual private network plug-in module to send a setup command to the virtual private network client for establishing the virtual private network connection over the selected transport. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 09-17-2009 |
20090240813 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM OF BUS NETWORK STRUCTURE AND METHOD USING THE COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM - Disclosed is a communication network system in a bus network structure, the system including: a broker processing a message routing; a connector, and a plurality of services connected to the broker via the connector, wherein: the service is a communicable terminal node and each of the plurality of services is connected to the broker via one connector, the connector is a module for mediating a connection between the service and the broker, each connector connected to only one broker, and the broker is a module for setting up a routing path or the connection with the connector, and to process the message routing, all brokers connected to each other in a full mesh topology. | 09-24-2009 |
20090240814 | Unified pairing for wireless devices - A framework for users to connect to wireless devices, regardless of the underlying wireless technology. The framework has a modular structure, including discovery handlers, pairing handlers, and pairing ceremony modules. Discovery and pairing handlers are specific to each wireless technology, enabling discovery of wireless devices, and connection to the device. Pairing ceremony modules are technology independent, and may be invoked by any pairing handler, regardless of the wireless technology employed by a device. The framework provides an aggregation of wireless technologies into a common user interface, improving the user's experience and expanding possibilities for use of wireless technologies. | 09-24-2009 |
20090240815 | UPNP APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING REMOTE ACCESS SERVICE - A universal plug and play (UPnP) device and method of providing a remote access service, the method including: receiving product identification number (PIN) information that is an identifier provided to a remote access server (RAS) device when manufactured and a uniform resource locator (URL) of the RAS device from the outside; generating WPS messages including a credential ID and remote access transport agent (RATA) capability information, which are generated based on the PIN information; encapsulating an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) packet including the WPS messages as an IP based application protocol packet; and transmitting the IP based application protocol packet to the RAS device. | 09-24-2009 |
20090240816 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING A REMOTE LOCATION WITH AN OPTICAL READER HAVING A PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY SYSTEM - An optical reader for accessing a remote location on a network includes an optical scanning system, a memory system, an output circuit for interfacing to a first computer disposed on the network, and a switching device for switching between a scan mode, a record mode and a playback mode. The optical reader further includes a transmitter for transmitting code information representative of a code to the first computer. In the scan mode, the code information is indicative of information representative of an encoded indicia scanned by the optical scanning system. In the playback mode the code information is indicative of information retrieved from a user-selectable memory in the memory system. The code information is configured to cause the first computer to determine routing information to the remote location, and access the remote location on the network in accordance with the determined routing information. | 09-24-2009 |
20090248878 | AGGREGATING CONNECTION MAINTENANCE TO OPTIMIZE RESOURCE CONSUMPTION - Combining network connection maintenance operations that use a resource to extend battery life. Each of the network connections has a timer and a defined tolerance for early connection maintenance. After receiving notification of an event, the network connections are accessed to identify the connections for which a maintenance operation may be performed early based on the timer and the tolerance. In an embodiment, the maintenance operation includes sending a transmission control protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet on the connection. | 10-01-2009 |
20090248879 | System and method for collecting, cataloging, and sharing product information - In accordance with the principles of the invention a network based social cataloging service is provided that automatically catalogs product information for products that a user views while “window shopping” on the network for retrieval at a later time. Further in accordance with the principles of the invention, a network-based community is provided where a user's cataloged information saved while window-shopping, is shared with other members of the community. | 10-01-2009 |
20090248880 | DIGITAL BROADCAST SERVICE METHOD AND SYSTEM - A method and system for providing digital broadcast services are disclosed. The digital broadcast service method, using a service server and user terminal, includes establishing connections between a user terminal and a service server through a wireless network and a broadcast distribution system, performing, by the user terminal, service registration through the wireless network, purchasing, by the user terminal, a broadcast service from the service server through the wireless network, transmitting, by the user terminal, an authentication key request for the purchased broadcast service through the wireless network, and releasing the connection made through the wireless network after one of the performing of the service registration, the purchasing of the service, or the transmitting of the authentication key request. | 10-01-2009 |
20090248881 | Method, Server And System For Controlling A Virtual Role - A method for controlling a virtual role includes: initiating, by a source virtual role client, a virtual role trip request carrying an identification of a destination virtual role client to a control server on the network side; establishing, by the control server, a session between the source virtual role client and the destination virtual role client, and sending attribute information of the virtual role to the destination virtual role client through the network; displaying, by the destination virtual role client, the virtual role in a local user interface. Structures of the control server and systems for controlling virtual role are also provided. According to the present invention, a virtual role of a source virtual role client can make a trip to a destination virtual role client through the network without relying on a user client. | 10-01-2009 |
20090254662 | METHOD FOR UPDATING CONNECTION PROFILE IN CONTENT DELIVERY SERVICE - A method for updating a connection profile in a content delivery service by a dynamic content delivery (DCD) terminal, comprises: receiving, from a server, a connection profile update message including a connection profile; transmitting, to the server, a connection profile update confirmation message in response to the reception; transmitting, to the server, a session deactivation request message based on the connection profile; and transmitting, to another server, a session activation request message base on the connection profile. | 10-08-2009 |
20090254663 | Prioritizing Network Traffic - Methods and systems for operation upon one or more data processors for prioritizing transmission of communications associated with an entity based upon reputation information associated with the entity. | 10-08-2009 |
20090254664 | SESSION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A session management system enabling network resources to be efficiently utilized or saved when communication addresses are assigned to a network interface. The system manages sessions between a server having a plurality of addresses and a client. It is determined, in a case where an application provided with the client requests to communicate with the server, whether or not a session in which an address different from an address designated by the application is used is already established between the client and the server. The application is caused to communicate with the server by using the already established session when it is determined that the session is already established, and communicate with the server by using a newly established session when it is determined that the session is not established. | 10-08-2009 |
20090254665 | Trigger-Based Session Completion Using External Parties - A method for performing Internet call processing related to the completion of session initiation requests is provided. The session initiation requests include one or more triggers. Based on the detection of one or more triggers, a call processing entity involved with processing the session initiation request transfers call processing to one or more third parties. Each third party performs additional call processing and returns a result to the call processing entity. Based on reception of the result, the call processing entity continues processing the session initiation request. The URI of one or more third parties may be specified in the session initiation request. Also, one or more third parties may be pre-specified. A special trust relationship may exist between a terminal related to the session initiation request and one or more third parties, and the third parties may therefore perform call processing using context specific information or confidential information. | 10-08-2009 |
20090259754 | METHOD FOR IP CAMERAS CONNECTION - The present invention relates to a method for IP Cameras connection, which comprises the following steps: registering a presetting identification code of a IP Camera and an IP address onto a global service system server; transferring one identification code to the global service system server by one user device; making the global service system server check the identification code with the presetting identification code; based on the checking result, transferring the IP address to the user device by the global service system server; if the IP Camera is connected to one IP Sharing device, then the user device is able to communicate information with the IP Camera through the global service system server, to get the actual IP address and port number of the user device for connecting with the IP Camera. | 10-15-2009 |
20090259755 | METHOD FOR SETTING UP A COMMUNICATIONS PATH IN AN EXTENDED COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM AND CORRESPONDING TUNNEL END-POINTS - A method is proposed for setting up a communications path between a first communications sub-network and a second communications sub-network by means of an intermediate communications sub-network in an extended communications network. | 10-15-2009 |
20090265470 | Gesturing to Select and Configure Device Communication - Described is a technology by which a gesture made with a source device (e.g., a cellular telephone), such as a throwing or pointing motion, is used to automatically set up a connection with another device to which the gesture is directed. Audio signals output during the gesture, e.g., such as at the start and end of the gesture, are detected by candidate (listening) devices. The device having the least time difference between detection of the start and end signals is the device that is generally best aligned with the throwing or pointing motion, and thus may be selected as the target device. Once selected, a connection such as a network connection may be set up between the source device and the target device for further communication, such as for application data exchange. | 10-22-2009 |
20090265471 | METHOD, SYSTEM, SERVER AND TERMINAL FOR PROCESSING MESSAGE - A method, a system, a server, and a terminal for processing message are described. The method includes the steps as follows. A notification message for requesting to establish a session sent by a session requester is received, in which the notification message carries session management information related to the session. The session management information of the session in the notification message is acquired, and a session connection with the session requester is initiated according to the session management information. Alternatively, the notification message is acknowledged according to the session management information, a reply message is generated according to an acknowledgement result, and the reply message is sent to the session requester. In embodiments of the present invention, a Data Synchronization (DS)/Device Management (DM) server determines problems of the sent notification message according to the information returned from the terminal, so as to perform the further processing, thereby preventing the DS or DM server from blindly and repeatedly sending the notification message when not being informed that a session connection is established by a DS or DM terminal. | 10-22-2009 |
20090271517 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS DEVICE RECONNECTION HANDLING - An apparatus and method for wireless device reconnection handling are disclosed involving a keep-alive request being sent from a wireless device to a server based on a first keep-alive time interval. At least one indicator that the keep-alive request has failed is received. A second keep-alive time interval different from the first keep-alive time interval is defined in response to at least one condition being satisfied and in response to the receiving. The defining includes defining the second keep-alive time interval when a response to the keep-alive request is not received from the server within a threshold time period associated with the at least one condition. In addition, the server is associated with a first wireless network. The first keep-alive time interval is defined before the sending based on a preference associated with a server associated with a second wireless network different than the first wireless network. | 10-29-2009 |
20090271518 | ETHERNET EXTENSIBILITY - A networked computer with a networking framework that can operate in accordance with a standard protocol or may be configured to perform one or more functions that alter or extend processing according to the standard. The framework includes extensibility points and a mechanism to receive plug-ins that may perform extensibility functions. Network profile information indicates configuration of the extensibility points, including specific extensibility functions to be executed at the extensibility points. This information may be used to configure the extensibility points so that, as the computer operates, the extensibility functions are selectively executed instead of or in addition to standard functions. | 10-29-2009 |
20090271519 | Method and system for facilitating group organization using mobile devices - Method and system for facilitating group organization using mobile devices and near field communication (NFC). Such a method in one aspect comprises the steps of selecting a first member of a group to create resources for the group, creating the resources by the first member using a mobile device belonging to the first member, bringing the mobile device belonging to the first member and a mobile device belonging to a second member of the group into proximity whereby a NFC connection is established between the mobile devices, uploading from the mobile device belonging to the second member to the mobile device belonging to the first member via the NFC connection information about the second member and adding the information about the second member to the resources. | 10-29-2009 |
20090271520 | Method, system and apparatus for logging date with low latency - A system, method and apparatus for logging data are provided. Network data is acquired in transmission to a destination. The network data is converted to loggable data. The loggable data is output in a machine readable format. As a result, the system, method and apparatus provides for low latency acquisition of data, which may also be used for recoverability. | 10-29-2009 |
20090276529 | CONNECTING EXTERNAL DEVICES TO A GAMING VOICE CHAT SERVICE - Voice chat enhances the game playing experience by allowing gamers in different locations to have conversations within the gaming environment. Functionality can be implemented within a gaming system to send an external invitation a user who is logged out of the game system to participate in a voice chat and/or multiplayer game session. The user can choose to accept the invitation and participate in the voice chat session on a device such as a mobile phone. Automatically generating external requests improves convenience for players, especially when inviting several other players to a voice chat session, because they do not have to find external contact information for each player who is not logged in. | 11-05-2009 |
20090276530 | Devices, Systems, Methods and Software for Computer Networking - A method of accessing content from a server using a client device, the client device having at least first and second connections to one or more remote computers. The method includes testing the performance of the first connection, testing the performance of the second connection and selecting, in response to the performance testing, the first connection or the second connection for accessing content from the server using the client device. | 11-05-2009 |
20090276531 | Media File Sharing, Correlation Of Metadata Related To Shared Media Files And Assembling Shared Media File Collections - The present invention provides for systems and methods for communicating media files and creating a collection of media files, also referred to herein as a master media file. In addition, the systems and methods of the present invention provide for the creation of automatic metadata and compilation of metadata associated with the collection of media files. The present invention is able to bond devices, referred to herein as slave devices, such as media capture devices, presence devices and/or sensor devices and instruct the slave devices, particularly the media capture devices, to communicate captured media files with a specified set of metadata included. | 11-05-2009 |
20090282152 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING COUNTERFEITING OF A NETWORK-SIDE MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL ADDRESS - A method and apparatus is provided for preventing the counterfeiting of a network-side Media Access Control (MAC) address. The method includes: receiving a message from a user equipment (UE) and resolving the message from the UE in order to obtain a MAC address of the UE; learning the MAC address of the UE if the MAC address of the UE is different from a known MAC address of a network-side equipment; learning the MAC address of the network-side equipment; and generating a MAC address learning table by utilizing the learned MAC address of the network-side equipment and setting the MAC address learning table to be a static address table, and/or filtering messages having source MAC addresses being the MAC address of the network-side equipment and from other user-side ports by utilizing the learned MAC address of the network-side equipment. | 11-12-2009 |
20090282153 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM - A communication control system for intervening in the communication between a PC terminal in an external network and a portable telephone terminal with an electronic mail transmission/reception function in a mobile communication network has a database in which a portable telephone number and a mail account are stored in association with each other. Upon receipt of an access request with an FQDN to a predetermined portable telephone terminal from the PC terminal, the communication control system solves the name of the portable telephone terminal by searching the database on the basis of a host name (mail account name) extracted from the FQDN to acquire the telephone number corresponding to the host name (mail account name) as address information, thereby making a connection of the communication to the mobile communication terminal on the basis of the address information acquired by solving the name. | 11-12-2009 |
20090282154 | CONTROL SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING INFORMATION, INFORMATION PROCESSING TERMINAL AND METHOD THEREOF, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - A client (such as a PC, portable telephone, PDA, electrical appliances), to which a device such as a IC card is connected, starts a handshake protocol to request a server to start communication. When communication is established via the handshake protocol, the initiative of communication is transferred to the server, and the state changes into a neutral state. In this neutral state, a control packet including a particular number of messages and a finished message is transmitted from the server to the client. If the client receives the control packet, the client performs a process according to the messages included in the control packet. This makes it possible to remotely control a device via a network in a highly reliable and efficient manner. | 11-12-2009 |
20090287826 | Many-to-One Mapping of Host Identities - A computer-implemented method includes sending, from a first node to a second node, an initiator message to open a connection between the first node and the second node, receiving, at the first node, a responder message sent from the second node, in which the responder message comprises a responder certificate, converting the responder certificate to a responder canonical identifier, comparing the responder canonical identifier to a stored canonical identifier, and establishing the connection between the first node and the second node over a pre-existing session corresponding to the stored canonical identifier, when the responder canonical identifier matches the stored canonical identifier. | 11-19-2009 |
20090287827 | MANAGING DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - Apparatuses and methods are disclosed for managing discovery in wireless peer-to-peer networks. Various discovery procedures may be implemented by supporting a broadcast of a plurality of discovery signals spaced apart in time by silent periods from a peer node and changing the duration of at least one of the silent periods. | 11-19-2009 |
20090287828 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND SERVER FOR TRANSFERRING SESSION CONTROL RIGHT - A method, a system and a server for transferring session control right, relating to communication field, are provided in the present invention. The method includes: receiving a request for transferring session control right; negotiating about session transfer with a client of which the control right is to be taken over or a client which is to take over the control right based on the received request for transferring session control right; and transferring the session control right to the client which is to take over the control right after a successful negotiation. The server includes a request receiving module, a negotiating module and a control right transferring module. Therefore, session control right can be transferred between various clients, which facilitates user with a better control over session. | 11-19-2009 |
20090300185 | Reception of Audio-Visual Content Addressed to Several Devices - The present invention relates to a method for receiving audiovisual programs sent by a server to at least two reception devices. Initially, a first user requests a document from the server that establishes a unicast stream to download said document. Then, a second user requests to receive the same document, even truncated by a part. The server studies the proposal and possibly, for a lower price, agrees to the download. The server then switches the broadcast of the document from a unicast stream to a multicast stream, the first and second devices receiving said document via the same multicast stream. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300186 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION BETWEEN AN OBJECT, A USER DEVICE AND A SERVICE DEVICE - A method and a system for establishing communication between an object ( | 12-03-2009 |
20090300187 | Transmission device having connection confirmation function - When establishment of a link is detected, a connection destination information request frame is transmitted via the established link to request information of a destination of connection. The connection destination information included in a connection destination information response frame received in response to that request is stored in a database and displayed on a display unit. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300188 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR DISCONNECTION PROCESS THEREOF, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A wireless communication apparatus (for example, a wireless LAN access point) sends to an opposite apparatus during connection (for example, a wireless LAN terminal) advance notice of disconnection that notifies disconnection to a transmission frame before sending a disconnection frame (a deauthentication frame). After the advance notice of disconnection, the disconnection frame is sent and a disconnection process is executed. Since advance notice of disconnection is executed before the disconnection frame is sent, unless the wireless communication apparatus or the opposite apparatus during connection receives advance notice of disconnection before the disconnection frame is received, the disconnection frame is ignored, that is, disconnection frames from apparatuses except the apparatus during connection is ignored, then, illegal connection disconnection can be prevented. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300189 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a cooperating system of a Web server and a communication service control server, information of an error in a communication network is not notified until the Web server inquires the communication service control server. To solve the problem, provided is a communication system comprising a session control server for controlling communication sessions from/to a plurality of terminals, an application server for communicating with the session control server, a Web server for communicating with the application server, and a network for coupling the session control server, the application server and the Web server. The application server is configured to transmit status related information including information on each communication session status of the plurality of terminals to the Web server. The Web server is configured to detect each communication session status of the plurality of terminals based on the received status related information. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300190 | Data Serialization In A User Switching Environment - A method for sharing a common computing system among multiple users is disclosed. A user can perform a login process during which an input data, such as a user name or a password can be entered by the user to access a session. The user name and/or the password are then serialized into an object or a set of objects. If the serialized object or objects are authentic, a session is created and the session properties of the session are defined. Any applications that are subsequently executed during the session remain active after the session is switched out. | 12-03-2009 |
20090313376 | METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR ESTABLISHING A SESSION BETWEEN A CLIENT TERMINAL AND A MEDIA SUPPLY SYSTEM TO TRANSPORT A UNICAST MEDIA STREAM OVER AN IP NETWORK - A method of setting up a session between a client terminal and a media supply system in order to transport a unicast media stream from the media supply system to the client terminal over an intervening IP network, the media supply system implementing the Real Time Streaming Protocol. The method comprises conducting a negotiation between the client terminal and the media supply system over an IP Multimedia Subsystem network in order to identify to the IP Multimedia Subsystem network the source and destination IP addresses and port numbers for the media stream, and subsequently sending Real Time Streaming Protocol messages from the client terminal to the media supply system in order to control the playout of media from the media supply system. | 12-17-2009 |
20090313377 | TRANSFERRING FILES - Systems and techniques for transferring one or more files by connecting to a communications system host; sending, to a client connected to the communications system host, a request to transfer one or more files; when a client permits access to the one or more files, establishing a direct socket connection from the client and bypassing the communications system host; and initiating the transfer of the one or more files from the client over the direct socket connection. | 12-17-2009 |
20090313378 | Remote Media IMS Sessions - A system and method is provided for remote session control of IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) sessions. A remote media flow may be established as part of an origination process wherein the controller UE requests that the media flow is established on a remote media UE as part of the origination request. A remote media flow may also be established as part of a termination process wherein the controller UE identified in the termination request identifies a remote media UE on which a remote media is to be established. Embodiments also allow for the session control to be transferred from a first device to a second device, while maintaining one or more media flows on the first device. | 12-17-2009 |
20090319665 | MANAGEMENT OF DUPLICATE TCP CONNECTIONS USING SEQUENCE AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT NUMBERS - A method for managing a first TCP connection with a second computer is disclosed. The method can include associating the first TCP connection with a first set of numbers. The method can further include receiving a SYN message from an unidentified computer, wherein the SYN message is associated with a second set. The method can further include creating a record representing a new TCP connection with the unidentified computer, wherein the new TCP connection is associated with the second set, sending a SYN/ACK message to the second computer and receiving an ACK message from the second computer, wherein the ACK message is associated with a third set. The method can further include verifying the first TCP connection and deleting the record if the third set matches the first set. Alternatively, if the third set matches the second set, then the first TCP connection is replaced with the new TCP connection. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319666 | Method and Apparatus for Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) Based Information Uploading from an Optical Network Terminal (ONT) - Collecting diagnostic information from a remote device in today's networks is limited to system related information. However, of more interest to vendors of commercial products or services is information related to, for example, how their products, services or advertisement are perceived by end users. Accordingly, a method and corresponding apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention are provided that extends the Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) NOTIFY mechanism. Originally defined for server to client or downstream notification of a state of a resource or of an event, the present invention extends this functionality to include uploading information other than a state of a resource or of an event from the client to the server or upstream. As such, information, such as usage behavior of a user, may now be collected to understand end user perception of products, services or advertisements. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319667 | Optimal Source Interface Selection - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate to selecting a source interface with which to establish a connection. In aspects, a profile for each network location a host has seen is maintained in a data store. The profile includes information about the network interfaces available to a source host at the network location. This information indicates, among other things, the reliability of each interface of the source host. Based on the profile, an interface is selected with which to establish a connection. If the interface is unsuccessful in establishing the connection, the interface is de-prioritized and another interface may be selected. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319668 | COMMUNICATION INTEGRATION BETWEEN A VIRTUAL UNIVERSE AND AN EXTERNAL DEVICE - An approach that provides real-time communication integration between a virtual universe and an external source is described. In one embodiment, there is a real-time communication integration interface tool that provides real-time communication integration between a virtual universe and a communication device external to the virtual universe. In this embodiment, there is a communication request component configured to receive a request to initiate a communication between a first resident that is on-line in the virtual universe and a second resident that is logged out of the virtual universe via the communication device. A communication link component is configured to establish a communication link between the virtual universe and the communication device in response to receiving the request. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319669 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR EDITING WEB CONTENTS BY URL CONVERSION - It is possible to provide a method and device for enabling a WEB server having no WEB edition system inside to edit and update WEB contents directly from a WEB browser by converting and accessing a disclosed WEB contents public URL. For this, a relay server is installed for mediating between a WEB server having file transfer means, such as FTP, and a WEB browser for browsing the WEB contents. By converting the disclosed URL of the contents from the WEB browser based on a predetermined procedure, the connection destination is switched from the WEB server to the relay server. The relay server specifies the WEB server and the positions of the contents data according to the URL accessed by the WEB browser and relays the contents date acquisition and storage for the WEB server in accordance with a request from the WEB browser. Moreover, the relay server provides the WEB browser with an application for editing the contents. Thus, it is possible to acquire, edit and update the contents. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319670 | Method and system for maintaining connections between a terminal and servers in a communication system - A method and system for maintaining connections between a terminal and a plurality of servers in a stand-by state in which the terminal is connected to the servers. The terminal generates timers for maintaining the connections to the servers. The terminal determines whether a timer expires. When the timer expires, the terminal simultaneously sends packets for connection maintenance notifications to all the servers having communication connections to the terminal. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319671 | REMOTE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD BASED ON CLIPBOARD DATA MODIFICATIONS - A first computer remotely controls, using a remote control application over a network (such as a WAN), a remote session on a second computer over a first network. The disclosed method (as implemented in a first application in the first computer) involves identifying clipboard data (associated with a copy, cut or paste operation) shared between a first and second computer during the remote session, temporarily storing the shared clipboard data, modifying, (via the first application in a unidirectional manner) the clipboard data associated with said environment, wherein the modified clipboard data is extracted by an interceptor associated with the second computer. The second computer, based on a look-up of clipboard values, executes a pre-defined action affecting the remote session, wherein the pre-defined action is different than the copy, cut, or paste operation. After executing the pre-defined action, the clipboard data is restored from the computer storage. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319672 | Method and Apparatus for Browsing Using Multiple Coordinated Device Sets - Systems and methods for navigating hypermedia using multiple coordinated input/output device sets. Disclosed systems and methods allow a user and/or an author to control what resources are presented on which device sets (whether they are integrated or not), and provide for coordinating browsing activities to enable such a user interface to be employed across multiple independent systems. Disclosed systems and methods also support new and enriched aspects and applications of hypermedia browsing and related business activities. | 12-24-2009 |
20090327496 | REMOTE ACCESS BETWEEN UPnP DEVICES - A method is provided for allowing Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) technology to be used over the Internet or other wide area communications networks. In one illustrative example, a first UPnP-enabled device is to provide a UPnP service such as streaming media to various users over the Internet. The first UPnP-enabled device provides an on-line identity provider such as Windows Live or the like with user IDs of those users who are authorized to access the first UPnP-enabled device from a remote location. When a user wishes to receive the UPnP service from the first UPnP-enabled device, the user logs in to the on-line identity provider using his user ID and receives from the on-line provider an IP address associated with the first UPnP-enabled device. The user's media player or other application constructs a URL from the IP address and contacts the UPnP-enabled device at that URL. The UPnP-enabled device provides the user with a list of media libraries that are available on it. Finally, the user's media player can invoke the desired UPnP service using content or other information available from the media libraries. | 12-31-2009 |
20090327497 | SEAMLESS LOCATION AWARE NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - Described is a technology by which a seamless automatic connection to an (e.g., corporate) network is made for a client device. Upon detecting a need for a connection to a network, such as by intercepting a communication directed towards a network destination, a list of available connection methods is automatically obtained based on the device's current location data (e.g., LAN or remote) and policy information. An available connection method from the list is selected, e.g., in order, and an attempt is made to establish a connection via that connection method. If the attempt fails, another attempt is made with a different connection method, and so on, until a connection method succeeds. Additional seamlessness from the user's perspective is provided via a credentials vault, by which stored credentials may be retrieved and used in association with the access method being attempted. | 12-31-2009 |
20100005176 | METHOD AND DEVICES FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION - The present invention is related to a method for establishing a communication session between a client and a server. The method comprises the steps of
| 01-07-2010 |
20100011108 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR CAUSING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO JOIN A COMMUNICATION SESSION - According to embodiments of the present invention, there are provided a method, system and apparatus for joining a communication session. A method comprises receiving from a first communication device an indication of a desire of the first communication device to establish a communication session; the first communication device having been associated with a device group comprising the first communication device and at least one second communication device. The method further comprises determining if there exists an active communication session with the at least one second communication device. The method further comprises, responsive to existence of the active communication session, causing the first communication device to join the active communication session. | 01-14-2010 |
20100017518 | Facilitating early media in a communications system - A method of sending information from a Session Initiation intermediate node to a first Session Initiation Protocol terminal. The method comprises, upon receipt of a session initiation request at the Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node, establishing a first Session Initiation Protocol dialog between the Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node and the first Session Initiation Protocol terminal, sending information over said first dialog, forwarding said request from the Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node to a second, destination Session Initiation Protocol terminal, before, during, or after establishment of said first dialog, and establishing a second Session Initiation Protocol dialog, between the first and second Session Initiation Protocol terminals. | 01-21-2010 |
20100017519 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY DETERMINING CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT MECHANISM BASED ON THE RELATIVE LOCATIONS - An apparatus and a method for dynamically determining a connection establishment mechanism between virtual machines (VMs) based on locations of the VMs. The apparatus includes a communication agent unit for receiving messages relating to the locations of the VMs, a control unit for determining the connection establishment mechanism between the VMs based on the received messages and a controlling mechanism to establish a connection between the VMs according to the determined connection establishment mechanism. The method includes receiving messages relating to the locations of the VMs, determining the connection establishment mechanism between the VMs based on the received messages, and establishing a connection between the VMs according to the determined connection establishment mechanism. | 01-21-2010 |
20100017520 | DATA SYNCHRONIZATION - The invention relates to a method of limiting the size of synchronization messages between a first synchronization device and a second synchronization device. The first device specifies a maximum message size for synchronization messages to be sent to the first device and transmits information on the maximum message size to the second device. The second device transmits to the first device one or more synchronization messages which are equal to or smaller than the maximum message size of the first device. | 01-21-2010 |
20100017521 | QoS CHANNELS FOR MULTIMEDIA SERVICES ON A GENERAL PURPOSE OPERATING SYSTEM PLATFORM USING DATA CARDS - A SIP (session initiation protocol) service activation abstraction layer that provides a unified interface to upper layer applications for discovering, establishing, and managing the QoS connectivity. In one implementation, this is IP Multimedia Subsystem-centric, further supporting applications that utilize SIP for session control. This capability extends to the data card universe allowing UMTS data card vendors to establish concurrent QoS-based sessions using multiple primary PDP (packet data protocol) contexts based on a set of SIP triggers, further allowing applications running on a computing system to transparently utilize the established pipes based on the individual QoS requirements. | 01-21-2010 |
20100023624 | METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND APPLICATION SERVER FOR ADDING MEDIA STREAM OF MULTIMEDIA SESSION - A method, user equipment and application server for adding media stream of multimedia session. A UE | 01-28-2010 |
20100023625 | TERMINAL UNIT FOR HANDLING SESSION ON THE BASIS OF SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL, METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING THEREOF - According to the present invention, a service is configured by a plurality of sessions and respective session negotiation requests defined by different media formats can be performed without influencing existing connected sessions, and hence it is easy to add, delete, and change the media, the contact of session negotiation can be specified, and the response to the session negotiation request can be processed easily with the service acceptance or rejection of the contact. | 01-28-2010 |
20100023626 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING HOST OVERHEAD IN A SOCKET SERVER IMPLEMENTATION - A network application executing on a host system provides a list of application buffers in host memory stored in a queue to a network services processor coupled to the host system. The application buffers are used for storing data transferred on a socket established between the network application and a remote network application executing in a remote host system. Using the application buffers, data received by the network services processor over the network is transferred between the network services processor and the application buffers. After the transfer, a completion notification is written to one of the two control queues in the host system. The completion notification includes the size of the data transferred and an identifier associated with the socket. The identifier identifies a thread associated with the transferred data and the location of the data in the host system. | 01-28-2010 |
20100030898 | NETWORK SETTING METHOD AND NETWORK SETTING APPARATUS - An administrative manager connected to a plurality of servers each including a virtual machine environment in which a host OS and a guest OS are operable as virtual OS, performs the following processes. Namely, when the guest OS is started up in the server, the information whether or not transmission and reception of data among service programs is necessary and the information of the servers executing the service programs are referred to. Then, the connection target server which performs communications with the server in which the guest OS is started up, is determined according to the service program to be executed in the starting objective server. Further, the connection information is set to the host OS that operates in the starting objective server and to the host OS that operates in the connection target server. | 02-04-2010 |
20100030899 | Methods, Systems, and Software for Providing Service Integration Framework - A preferred embodiment of the subject invention comprises a system for implementing computer network services and applications, comprising a front-end component comprising one or more applications; a back-end component comprising one or more services; and an abstraction layer component operable to communicate with the front-end and back-end components. In another preferred embodiment, the subject invention comprises a system for linking applications and services, comprising: a vendor connectivity component; a business integration component; a security component; a utility component; and a back end connectivity component. | 02-04-2010 |
20100030900 | Peer-to-Peer Identity Management Interfaces and Methods - Peer-to-peer (P2P) application programming interfaces (APIs) that allow an application to create, import, export, manage, enumerate, and delete P2P identities are presented. Further, the management of group identity information is provided. APIs abstract away from low level credential and cryptographic functions required to create and manage P2P identities. This management includes retrieval and setting of a friendly name, generation of a cryptographic public/private key pair, retrieval of security information in the form of an XML fragment, and creation of a new name based on an existing identity. Since the P2P environment also allows for the existence of multiple separate groups of peers within the P2P cloud, a preferred embodiment of the present invention also allows for the enumeration of all groups associated with a given identity, for each identity existing for the user. | 02-04-2010 |
20100036957 | Method and System for Implementing Transfer of a Network Session - An improved approach is described for sharing resources such as sessions and connections in database systems. Conduits and templates in shared memory can be employed to facilitate the transfer of network sessions. This provides a very efficient way to share processing entities across multiple users or clients. | 02-11-2010 |
20100036958 | Remote Session Control - A method and system for remote session control of IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) sessions, wherein media is established using one or more devices, and multi-media session/session control for multi-media session is provided by a device which may or may not be the same as the device on which the media is established. A method and system is also provided to transfer media from one device to one or more devices retaining multi-media session/session control on a transferring device. | 02-11-2010 |
20100042729 | System for automated device-to-device transfer system - A session transfer module of a session server provides the capability to a user to direct a transfer of an on-going session from one device to another device while maintaining the session. The session transfer module is invoked by a user in a way consistent with the user interface of the client application, including by a graphical user command, a command line prompt, or a voice command. The client provides a selection of possible devices that may receive the redirected session. The session transfer module receives the selected device with the session redirect command over a communication network. The communication network may be wired (e.g., public switched telephone network (“PSTN”), Internet, etc.,) a wireless network (e.g., digital telephone network, pager network, etc.,) or a combination of the wired and wireless networks. The session transfer module may be configured to discontinue the session with the current device and to block any subsequent messages of the transferring session from reaching the device. The session transfer module may be further configured to access a device profile from a device profile database to convert the blocked messages into a format compatible to the format and/or modality of the redirected device. The session transfer module may be further configured to push the session to the redirected device in response to an activation (e.g., log-on) of the redirected device by the user. Alternatively, the session transfer module may be further configured to push the session back to the device in response to a time-out in the activation of the redirected device. | 02-18-2010 |
20100049853 | Electronic device and remote computer system and method for controlling remote communications - A remote communication system and method are disclosed. An environment is identified defining a plurality of parameters communicated between an electronic device (or a computer-based device) and a remote computer as part of a remote session (i.e., the electronic device remotely controlling the remote computer via the remote session), with each parameter defining an action associated with the remote session. A first application (associated with the electronic device), via a unidirectional communication with the environment, modifies at least one parameter associated with the environment (e.g., modifying keyboard scan codes, cursor position, mouse position, clipboard data, screen resolution, or channel administration), wherein the modified parameter is extracted by an interceptor associated with the remote computer and, the interceptor, based on a look-up, executes a pre-defined action affecting the remote session, wherein the pre-defined action being different than the modified parameter's associated action. | 02-25-2010 |
20100049854 | Network device and interceptor module system and method for controlling remote communications - A remote communication system and method are disclosed. An environment in an electronic device, such as a computer based device, is identified defining a plurality of parameters communicated between the electronic device and a remote computer as part of a remote session (i.e., the electronic device remotely controlling the remote computer via the remote session), with each parameter defining an action associated with the remote session. A first application, via a unidirectional communication with the environment, modifies at least one parameter associated with the environment (e.g., modifying keyboard scan codes, cursor position, mouse position, clipboard data, screen resolution, or channel administration). A network device (e.g., a router, a switch, a hub, a repeater, a multilayer switch, etc.) monitors communication between the electronic device and the remote computer and extracts the modified parameter and, based on a look-up, executes a pre-defined action affecting the remote session, wherein the pre-defined action is different than the modified parameter's associated action. | 02-25-2010 |
20100049855 | Distributed Network Communication System Which Selectively Provides Data to Different Network Destinations - A system and method for providing access and/or roaming features on a network system. The network system includes a plurality of wireless and/or wired access points coupled to a network. Access points (APs) for the network may be widely distributed in various facilities, such as airports, mass-transit stations, and various businesses. The network may couple to a wide area network, such as the Internet. In one embodiment, a portable computing device (PCD) of a user may store identification information which uniquely indicates a network provider of a plurality of possible network providers. The identification information may also or instead indicate an access or privilege level of the user. Each of the access points are operable to “listen for” or detect identification information associated with numerous different providers. When the access point receives the identification information from a PCD of a user, the access point may determine the appropriate network provider for the portable computing device using the identification information. Network access may then be provided to the portable computing device through the determined network provider. Thus the network system is useable by subscribers of each of the plurality of possible network providers, thereby enabling subscribers to “roam” on various wireless networks, including networks maintained by other providers. The access information may also include an access level which indicates the user's access or privilege level. Thus, the local network may provide various local resources which are available to users having a first access level, and users with a second access level may not be entitled to view or utilize these network resources on the network, but may be simply provided external Internet access. | 02-25-2010 |
20100049856 | SIP-Based Session Control Among A Plurality OF Multimedia Devices - These exemplary embodiments utilize Sessions Initiation Protocol (SIP) for admission control among a plurality of multimedia devices. The use of the SIP allows a SIP server to perform admission control functions. The use of RSVP linkages is reduced. The use of SIP for admission control allows an application to communicate, or “talk,” to a network and other multimedia devices and to request that resources within the network be reserved. Any communications device that uses sessions may utilize the SIP protocol for admission control. The SIP protocol may be used for unicast and multicast media sessions including video-on-demand and/or multicast video access control. | 02-25-2010 |
20100057918 | HTTP STANDBY CONNECTION - An apparatus and a method for requesting data from a server. In one embodiment, a client opens a first HTTP connection and a second HTTP connection with the server. The client requests for data from a random access file from the server with the first HTTP connection. The client receives and reads the data while maintaining the second HTTP connection open. The client requests for additional data at another location in the file on the second HTTP connection. The client maintains the second HTTP connection by occasionally sending requests to the server on the second HTTP connection. | 03-04-2010 |
20100064045 | HANDING A REQUEST RELATING TO A SERVICE - In a multi-service communication environment, when a communication establishment request is received ( | 03-11-2010 |
20100064046 | MANAGEMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS FROM STOLEN DEVICES - A device, method, system and computer readable medium are disclosed for the management of communications provided by a multitude of stolen electronic devices reporting location information to a monitoring center. | 03-11-2010 |
20100070632 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE METHOD - A method for transmitting information in a wireless communication system and a wireless communication terminal supporting the method, wherein when an application server sends to a receiving terminal a specific message for checking radio environment information or a message including a radio environment capability, the receiving terminal having received the message may send a response message with its own radio environment information to the application server, such that the radio environment information related to the receiving terminal can be sent to the sending terminal after analyzed by the application server. | 03-18-2010 |
20100070633 | Method and Apparatus for Improving SIP Parse Performance - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for improving SIP parse performance. The method comprising the steps of: receiving a text-based SIP message to be sent to a SIP server; according to a SIP message filter table, determining whether the text-based SIP message needs to be transformed to a token-based message; and in the case that the text-based SIP message needs to be transformed to a token-based message, performing the transformation and sending the transformed token-based message to said SIP server, otherwise directly sending the text-based SIP message to said SIP server. According to the present invention, larger SIP message throughput in a SIP server and better utilization of resources of a front end device can be achieved. | 03-18-2010 |
20100077082 | Method of Operating A Contact Center - Some known Contact Centers rely on a Network Level Router to determine which of a number of available Contact Centers should deal with a given contact. This decision is made by the NLR based on real time information provided by the Contact Centers. However, the format of such information is proprietary which means that the NLR must translate and collate this information. This invention seeks to use session initiation protocol (SIP) Presence for such information transfer which enables improved decision making and further enables additional functionality to be added to the Contact Center system. The invention provides a SIP enabled Contact Center ( | 03-25-2010 |
20100077083 | COORDINATING DATA DELIVERY USING TIME SUGGESTIONS - Coordinating delivery of data to a first computing device from a plurality of second computing devices based on known power times for a resource associated with the first computing device. One of the second computing devices requests a time interval for data delivery. The first computing device compares the requested time interval to the known power times to determine a delivery time. For example, the requested time interval is compared against activation times for recurrent schedules that use the resource, and against previously determined delivery times. The second computing device delivers data at the determined delivery time to preserve the resource. In some embodiments, the delivery time is adjusted for processing delays and network latency. | 03-25-2010 |
20100077084 | PROCESSING SIP MESSAGES BASED ON MULTIPLE CORES - A method and an apparatus of processing Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) messages based on multiple cores. The method comprises: pre-parsing a received SIP message to obtain an identifier of the SIP message; dispatching SIP messages with the same identifier to the same core; and processing, on each core, SIP messages dispatched to the core by using related dedicated resources. The present invention relieves the resource contention and thus improves the utilization efficiency of computing resources of cores. | 03-25-2010 |
20100077085 | Systems and method for configuring display resolution in a terminal server environment - Methods, apparatus, systems and computer program product for configuring display resolution in a terminal server environment. A host system can receive a request for a graphical session, wherein the request identifies a non-standard resolution and the host system generates display initialization information for the non-standard resolution prior to transmitting graphic information to the remote client. The host system can configure a virtual monitor in the non-standard resolution, retain the display initialization information for the non-standard resolution, and can pre-render future graphical sessions in that resolution. Additionally, the host system can maintain a graphical session during a period of inactivity without terminating and, upon reconnection of the remote client, determine if the session should be maintained in the original display resolution or configured for a new resolution. | 03-25-2010 |
20100077086 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING CONNECTION SETUP IN A NETWORK - Certain embodiments of a method and system for handling connection setup in a network may comprise a network interface hardware device (NIHW) that may be operable to receive a services list and/or connection acceptance criteria from a first guest operating system running on a host system, receive a connection request from a second guest operating system running on the host system, and determine whether to allow establishment of the requested connection based on one or both of the services list and the connection acceptance criteria. The determination may be made prior to or during connection set up. The NIHW may maintain a connection state comprising information regarding set up of the requested connection. The services list may comprises one or more of a local network address, a local transport address, a network protocol, and a transport protocol. The communicated acceptance criteria may comprises packet filtering operations and/or security operations. | 03-25-2010 |
20100082819 | NETWORK BRIDGING APPARATUS FOR STORAGE DEVICE AND DATA STREAM TRANSMITTING METHOD THEREOF - A network bridging apparatus for a storage device and a data stream transmitting method thereof are provided. More particularly, a chip embedded with ATA over Ethernet (AoE) technology is incorporated into the network bridging apparatus. By which the independent-external storage device can be shared over a network. According to a preferred embodiment, a bridging module having the technology of AoE is included for converting either network packets or data being compatible with some standard data transmission formats. Preferably, one end of the apparatus is equipped with a network interface unit for connecting to the network, and further, the other end of the network bridging apparatus is connected to a storage device via a transmission interface. Therefore, the storage device using a standard transmission interface, such as USB, IEEE1394. eSATA or the like, can be shared with other computer systems within the local area network. | 04-01-2010 |
20100082820 | System and Method for Off Route Processing - A system and method for off route processing is disclosed. The system and method can be used to provide information when an off route condition occurs. The system and method can include provisions to make modifications in the way navigation information is displayed. The system and method can also provide a selectable re-route mode and selectable re-route information. | 04-01-2010 |
20100088414 | SELECTIVELY JOINING CLIENTS TO MEETING SERVERS - In an embodiment, a hosted-on-premises meeting exchange server operates seamlessly with web meeting servers. For example, one computer-implemented method comprises receiving a request from a client computer to join a web meeting; determining whether the client computer is coupled to a local network which includes an on-premises-meeting exchange server; in response to determining that the client computer is coupled to the local network, joining the client computer to the web meeting at the on-premises-meeting exchange server when the on-premises-meeting exchange server has sufficient capacity, and otherwise joining the client computer to the web meeting at an off-premises-meeting exchange server; and in response to determining that the client computer is not coupled to the local network, joining the client computer to the web meeting at the off-premises-meeting exchange server. | 04-08-2010 |
20100088415 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATING FACILITIES - A method and apparatus for providing facility location plans for a network are disclosed. For example, the method identifies a facility and a number of nearest active clients associated with a minimized cost per unit demand of connecting these clients to this facility. The method then connects the number of nearest active clients to the facility associated with the minimized cost per unit demand. In one embodiment, the method iterates this process with the remaining clients until all demands have been assigned to facilities. | 04-08-2010 |
20100088416 | NETWORK CONNECTION CONTROL TECHNIQUE, NETWORK CONNECTION TECHNIQUE AND AUTHENTICATION APPARATUS - A network connection method includes: generating the same address as an address that is other than address currently used by the user terminal and is generated by the authentication apparatus, as a reconnection address, and storing the reconnection address that is valid for a predetermined valid period into a reconnection address storage device; and when a present time is within the predetermined valid period after the connection with the first network is disconnected, reconnecting to the first network by using the reconnection address stored in the reconnection address storage device without the authentication by the authentication apparatus. | 04-08-2010 |
20100088417 | STORAGE MEDIUM, UNIQUENESS ASSURANCE REALIZING METHOD, SESSION MANAGEMENT METHOD AND UNIQUENESS ASSURANCE INFORMATION SETTING MANAGEMENT DEVICE - One system distributes a request for providing a service using a first communication protocol, from a terminal device to a server selected from among a plurality of servers by a server load balancer in response to the request. A corresponding relation between identification information for identifying a session generated in a distributed server and the server that has generated the session corresponding to the identification information is set in the server load balancer by the service of a second communication protocol as uniqueness assurance information for uniqueness assurance. Thus, when the provision of a service is requested using a second communication protocol by the terminal device, the server load balancer refers to the set uniqueness assurance information and selects the server for providing the service from among the plurality of servers. | 04-08-2010 |
20100088418 | EDGE TRAVERSAL SERVICE DORMANCY - A system maintains a dormant state in the host, in which no beacons (or “bubbles”) are transmitted from the host when no application or service (collectively, “processes”) of the host is accepting unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service. When at least one application or service begins to accept unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host enters a qualified state and begins transmitting the beacons. As each additional application or service begins to accept such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is maintained. As applications and services terminate acceptance of such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is decremented. When the last application or service terminates acceptance of unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host re-enters the dormant state and ceases transmission of its beacons. | 04-08-2010 |
20100095006 | EFFICIENT SELECTION OF A MESSAGING MULTIPLEXED CHANNEL INSTANCE - A method, system and article of manufacture are disclosed for selecting a channel instance for connecting a client application with a server application in a multi-channel computer system. In this computer system, when a new channel instance is used to connect one of the client applications with one of the server applications, defined channel instance information is established for the channel instance. The method of this invention comprises the steps of when a new application connection request is made, locking existing channel instance information; and after said locking, scanning through a list of channel instance connections for one of the channel instances that is a candidate channel instance for that new application connection request. The method comprises the further steps of, in response to finding a candidate channel instance, determining whether the candidate channel instance is suitable for the new application connection request. | 04-15-2010 |
20100095007 | Systems and Methods for Dynamic Creation and Release of Proxy Mobile IP Connections - Disclosed are systems, methods and computer program products for facilitating dynamic addition and release of IP addresses in an established Proxy Mobile IPv6 (PMIP) sessions, for example, based on the demand of a mobile device. An example method comprises receiving from the mobile device a request to add a second IP interface type to a current communication session associated with a first IP interface type, wherein the second IP interface type is different from the first IP interface type. The method further includes receiving from the home network a set of IP addresses of the second IP interface type and establishing one or more IP flows of the second IP interface type using one or more received IP addresses. The method further includes associating the one or more IP flows of the second IP interface type with the current communication session for the mobile device. | 04-15-2010 |
20100100626 | METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO INTER-WIDGET INTERACTIONS MANAGED BY A CLIENT-SIDE MASTER - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving at a first widget executing at a first client a first signal sent from a second widget executing at a second client. The first signal can be associated with an interactive session between at least the first widget and the second widget. The first widget can be selected to operate as a client-side master. The method can also include defining at the first widget, and based on the first signal, a second signal having a master flag. The second signal can be sent from the first widget to the second widget. | 04-22-2010 |
20100100627 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BYPASSING AN ACCESS POINT IN A LOCAL AREA NETWORK FOR P2P DATA TRANSFERS - A system and method for bypassing an access point in a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) for direct point-to-point data transfers are provided. A user device in the wireless LAN is equipped with a primary local wireless interface establishing a wireless communication link with an access point of the wireless LAN, a secondary local wireless interface used for direct point-to-point (P2P) file transfers, and a P2P file transfer application. When the P2P application desires to transfer a data file to another user device within the wireless LAN, the user device determines whether the other user device is within a coverage area of the secondary local wireless interface and whether the file transfer meets one or more alternate transfer criterion. If so, the data file is transferred to the other user device via a direct P2P wireless communication link, thereby bypassing the access point of the wireless LAN. | 04-22-2010 |
20100106841 | Handling Proxy Requests in a Computing System - Systems, methods, and computer-program products receive a communication request, identify the communication request as a proxy request, generate a fake SID for the communication request, and transmit the proxy request using the generated fake SID. | 04-29-2010 |
20100115100 | Federated configuration data management - A system, implemented as programming on a processor, and a corresponding method, provide for federating data search functions related to configuration of network objects. The system includes external data stores holding data related to the network objects, a configuration management database (CMDB), and a CMDB server coupled to the CMDB and the data stores. The CMDB server includes a federation engine that identifies network objects and a mapping engine that queries external data stores for reconciliation data and creates relationships between the network objects and federated data. | 05-06-2010 |
20100115101 | DISTRIBUTED NETWORK CONNECTION POLICY MANAGEMENT - A connection policy for a communications network has a local connection policy indicating which paths between a given one of the nodes (computer A, router A, host | 05-06-2010 |
20100115102 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING A TCP DATA TRANSMISSION IN CASE THE PHYSICAL TRANSMISSION MEDIUM IS DISCONNECTED - A method for the improvement of a TCP data transmission process in the case of an interruption of the physical transmission medium, wherein after the establishment of a TCP connection between a client ( | 05-06-2010 |
20100115103 | COOPERATIVE NETWORK FOR MOBILE INTERNET ACCESS - A method and system for connecting mobile users to the Internet using cooperative interconnection. A node consists of a network element that has two connections methodologies—typically a node will have a radio link and a wired link to the Internet. To obtain a connection, a member of the service located themselves in proximity to a network node which is commonly provided by another member and the cooperative tunneling agent requests a secure link. All members of the service agree to give connection to the Internet upon request from another member. | 05-06-2010 |
20100115104 | COOPERATIVE NETWORK FOR MOBILE INTERNET ACCESS - A method and system for connecting mobile users to the Internet using cooperative interconnection. A node consists of a network element that has two connections methodologies—typically a node will have a radio link and a wired link to the Internet. To obtain a connection, a member of the service located themselves in proximity to a network node which is commonly provided by another member and the cooperative tunneling agent requests a secure link. All members of the service agree to give connection to the Internet upon request from another member. | 05-06-2010 |
20100115105 | MOBILITY IN A MULTI-ACCESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention provides a terminal capable of establishing multiple communication sessions with a public network proxy through different access networks. The terminal actively communicates with the public network proxy to control which of the multiple communication paths are active, as well as control the transition from actively using one communication path to using another. The public network proxy facilitates data and voice sessions between the terminal and any number of other communication devices. In one embodiment, the communication sessions are reserved tunneling sessions, and the terminal cooperates with the public network proxy to effectively control how many tunneling-sessions are established, how many tunneling sessions are active at any given time, and the transition from one tunneling session to another for active communications. Each of the communication or tunneling sessions may be established over different access networks using different communication technologies and protocols. | 05-06-2010 |
20100115106 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A session control method for a mobile communication system including a session control device for executing the control of sessions according to instructions from an application server, includes managing a group of plurality of communication terminals owned by same user and types of sessions processable by each of the communication terminals constituting the group. When a session establishment request is executed to any one of the plurality of communication terminals constituting the group, any one from the plurality of communication terminals comprising the group may be selected depending on type of session requested to be established, and the session connection to the selected communication terminal is executed. The constitution of the communication terminals of the group can be changed according to request from the communication terminals. The types of sessions processable by each of the communication terminals constituting the group can be changed according to request from the communication terminals. | 05-06-2010 |
20100115107 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - When a communication route is established between SIP servers # | 05-06-2010 |
20100121956 | COMPOSITE ENDPOINT MECHANISM - A multimedia call from an originating device is provided. At least one session may be created at an application server in response to receiving the multimedia call. An endpoint may be created within the session for communication between the originating device and the application server. The endpoint may be a composite endpoint for communication between the originating device and two or more terminating devices. The composite endpoint may be include two or more logical endpoints for communicating with and respectively associated with the two terminating devices. A portion or more of the multimedia call may be delivered from the application server to each of the terminating devices using the logical endpoint associated with each terminating device. | 05-13-2010 |
20100121957 | PERFORMANCE ENHANCING PROXY HANDOVER - An approach is provided for graceful shutdown and startup of spoofing when a handover procedure is performed. A handover of a performance enhancing proxy (PEP) session associated with a transport connection is detected. A shutdown procedure is initiated to stop spoofing of the transport connection in response to the detected handover. The shutdown procedure avoids teardown of the transport connection during the handover from a first link to a second link of a communication system. | 05-13-2010 |
20100125667 | DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION OF VIRTUAL MACHINES - A computer implemented method for configuring virtual internal networks for testing is provided. The method includes deploying a virtual firewall and deploying a public switch enabling access to an external local area network through a first interface of the virtual firewall. A private switch enabling access to a plurality of virtual machines through a second interface of the virtual firewall is provided. The plurality of virtual machines define a private network behind the firewall. A network address is assigned to the virtual firewall and a private address is assigned to each of the virtual machines. The plurality of virtual machines are then tested through a test launcher in communication with the public switch. | 05-20-2010 |
20100131652 | UNIFIED INTERFACE FOR CONFIGURING MULTIPLE NETWORKING TECHNOLOGIES - A network and connection provisioning framework for configuring and provisioning multiple aspects of network connectivity (e.g., multiple networks, media types, and/or connections). The framework may comprise a unified configuration interface that enables an administrator to configure multiple different types of network connectivity. A single configuration file comprising settings for multiple aspects of network connectivity may be generated based on preferences entered by a system administrator, or by exporting current settings from a particular computing device. Global configuration policies or other configuration settings that span multiple types of network connectivity may be also created and stored in one or more configuration files. Stand-alone media managers and/or plug-in modules may implement one or more standardized application programming interface functions so that they may interoperate with the network and connection provisioning framework. The standardized API may be used to ensure that configuration information is handled and stored in a standardized manner by different media managers and/or plug-in modules. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131653 | BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM USER INTERFACE WITH PINNED DISPLAY FEATURE - Building control systems that include a user interface that is configured to help manage relatively large amounts of building control data in an efficient and intuitive manner. In some cases, subsets of building control information can be associated with display elements such as windows or tabs, which can then be pinned to provide a convenient way to selectively display only certain building control information. In some cases, a pinned display element may display one or more building control parameters, which in some cases, can be user selectable and/or updated over time. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131654 | PLATFORM FOR ENABLING TERMINAL SERVICES VIRTUALIZATION - Disclosed are techniques for providing a platform and application program interface (API) that leverages a terminal services session broker infrastructure to support third party plug-in applications. In a typical scenario, when a user requests for a connection to access third party plug-in applications, the application program interface may interact with the session broker process to identify sessions or suitable servers to which the user can be connected. The user may access the third party plug-in applications through the identified sessions or suitable servers. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131655 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING LARGE AMOUNT OF DATA IN WEB SERVICE TRANSACTION - A system and associated method for web service data for a web service transaction are disclosed. A client program that employs the web service transaction invokes a pair of web service calls to transfer the web service data to and from a web service program that executes the web service transaction. The web service program establishes a user session between the web service program and a web interface program. During the user session, the web service transaction is performed as a user of the client program directly interacts with the web service program through the web interface program. When the user session is completed, the client program retrieves the web service data resulting from the web service transaction from the web service program. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131656 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISPATCHING RECEIVED SESSIONS BETWEEN A PLURALITY OF INSTANCES OF AN APPLICATION USING THE SAME IP PORT - A logical module, referred as Load Balancer Module (LBM), is disclosed which listens to one of certain common predefined port number. These well-known ports for receiving communication video conference signaling and control protocols is thereafter load balanced and multi-plexed to a number of instances of protocol stack applications. By balancing the multi-media data stream across a multitude of application instances multiple multi-media data streams may be serviced and processed by a single internet protocol host processor. A mutipoint control unit (MCU) may therefore process multiple input data streams containing multi-media video conferencing information. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131657 | Novel method and system of anonymizing real time Internet communications between peers - A method and system of establishing a direct communication between two peers over the Internet without revealing their real identities and personal information to each other, comprising of a first client node, a second client node, an intermediate anonymizer server node, the first anonymizer interface and the second anonymizer interface. | 05-27-2010 |
20100138543 | Real-time content detection in ISP transmissions - A method and system for detecting the transmission of preidentified content, such as copyrighted material, over an Internet Service Provider (ISP) network. A set of rules is provided to identify one or more traffic flow profiles of data streams transmitting preidentified content. Preferably the rules are adaptively created through analysis of actual ISP data in conjunction with data suggesting an initial set of profile characteristics. The rules are applied to data streams being transmitted in the ISP network, so that data streams fitting one or more of the profiles are identified. A database contains, e.g., as digital signatures or fingerprints, one or more items of content whose transmission is sought to be detected. Data streams identified as matching a profile are analyzed to determine if their content matches an item of content in the database, and if so, an action is taken which may include interrupting the transmission, suspending an ISP account, or reporting the transmission. An ISP with a system performing this method may offer services to content providers, and a plurality of ISPs may jointly use a single database of preidentified content to be compared to each ISP's identified data streams. | 06-03-2010 |
20100138544 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA PROCESSING - A computer-implemented method, system and computer program product for protecting data being transferred during a session with an application are presented. In response to receiving a session request that includes an application identifier for an application, a data processing node establishes a session with the application and assigns a session identifier for that session. A session response, which includes the session identifier, to the session request is sent. In response to receiving a first request that includes the session identifier, a first pipe in the session is established. This first pipe enables data related to the first request to be isolated according to an assigned first pipe identifier for the first pipe. A first response to the first request is sent, wherein the first response comprises the session identifier and the first pipe identifier. | 06-03-2010 |
20100138545 | STREAMING MEDIA - A method for providing a session invitation protocol (SIP) session between a first and a second entity. An SIP session is established between the first and second entity. At least one media stream is transmitted from the first entity to the second entity. At least one of transmission, storage and play back of the at least one media stream is controlled in the SIP session at the first and/or second entity. | 06-03-2010 |
20100146125 | Communication Method Capable of Connecting With a Communication Application Service and Gateway Thereof - A communication method capable of connecting with a communication application service for an Internet protocol private branch exchange includes establishing a communication channel in the Internet protocol private branch exchange, transmitting a communication message to a channel proxy through the communication channel, and starting to communicate with the communication application service according to the communication message and transmitting the communication message to the communication application service. | 06-10-2010 |
20100153559 | Method and Apparatus for Suspending Network Based Services - Disclosed is a method for de-registering user equipment from a network in response to notification that the user equipment will cease using network services. An Interruption Service Manager (ISM) notifies the network to suspend services as the IMS network conditions or the user equipment conditions change. The ISM may also notify the user equipment to re-register onto the IMS core network when the connection is re-established. | 06-17-2010 |
20100153560 | PROTOCOL AND SYSTEM FOR FIREWALL AND NAT TRAVERSAL FOR TCP CONNECTIONS - Embodiments of this invention provides a system and a protocol to enable two transmission control protocol TCP peers that exist behind one or more firewalls and network address translators NATs to automatically setup a true peer-to-peer TCP connection and exchange data without making changes to the firewall or NAT devices or existing TCP-based applications. In embodiments of this invention, the synchronization between the blind TCP peers is achieved using a system that consists of a registration server, an agent application, and a virtual network interface that together relay and replicate the control signals between the two TCP peers. In addition, embodiments of this invention are also used to traverse the NAT and establish a bi-directional peer-to-peer TCP connection in the firewall. | 06-17-2010 |
20100153561 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OUT-OF-BAND SIGNALING FOR TCP CONNECTION SETUP - Embodiments of this invention improve TCP performance over unreliable links and allow TCP connections to be set up when otherwise not possible. Embodiments of this invention include the use of out-of-band signaling for TCP to synchronizing and establishing a connection between two TCP endpoints without modification to the TCP/IP protocol suite. Embodiments of this invention provide a system that creates a control channel to enable out-of-band signaling for TCP connection establishment between two TCP endpoints. In embodiments of this invention, the control channel used for the out-of-band signaling traffic between the TCP endpoints (or peers) is achieved using a system that consists of a signaling broker, an agent application, and a virtual network interface and capture module that together create control channel for the TCP signaling traffic. Embodiments of this invention include a protocol to execute out-of-band signaling for TCP. | 06-17-2010 |
20100153562 | METHOD FOR DISCOVERY AND ROUTING USING A PRIORI KNOWLEDGE IN THE FORM OF APPLICATION PROGRAMME WITHIN MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORKS - A mobile ad-hoc network device includes application software. The device constructs its routing table, listing reachable devices with the same application software. The routing table knowledge is dynamic, as devices enter and leave the network or their parameters change. | 06-17-2010 |
20100161806 | Optimization of Media Flows in a Telecommunications System - Disclosed are techniques for optimization of media flows within a provider network. The provider network comprises a plurality of sites, each site having one or more media servers capable of supporting a media session with a user endpoint device. The provider network further includes a media server director (MSD) that receives registration information identifying one or more user endpoint devices that have registered with a particular site. Using this registration information, as well as predetermined preference policies, the MSD prepares a preference order for the media servers of the provider network for user endpoint devices associated with the site. When an application server signals an intent to establish a media session with a user endpoint device of the site, the MSD selects a media server based on the preference order and provides an indicator of the selected media server. The application server can then contact the selected media server identified by the indicator to establish and support a media session with the user endpoint device. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161807 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADDRESS BOOK UPDATES - A method comprises receiving an indication of a list of contacts in an address book to receive an automatic update; submitting a subscription request for the contacts; receiving updates for contact information for the subscribed contacts; and synchronizing the updates with the address book, wherein the synchronizing includes synchronizing only the updated contacts. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161808 | IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS AND SERVICE PROVIDING METHOD - An image forming apparatus, comprising a communication interface unit to communicate with outside, a plurality of web-based applications to use web page information received via the communication interface unit, and a control unit to provide service on an open platform having a web server which shares session information of each of the plurality of web-based applications. Accordingly, session information can be shared between web-based applications. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161809 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR REGULATING NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR (NAT) AND FIREWALL PINHOLE PRESERVATION TRAFFIC IN A SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for regulating pinhole preservation traffic generated or received by firewall or network address translator (NAT) session initiation protocol (SIP) user agent clients (UACs) are disclosed. One method includes, maintaining a list of contact information for a plurality of SIP UACs registering from behind at least one of a firewall and a NAT. The method further includes iterating through the list to generate SIP messages to the different UACs such that the SIP messages to the different UACs are spaced at substantially regular intervals with respect to each other, wherein the SIP messages to the different UACs trigger responses from the UACs such that the responses are spaced at substantially regular intervals with respect each other. | 06-24-2010 |
20100169493 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SWITCHING FROM STREAMING CONTENT TO LOCAL CONTENT - A method of receiving streaming music at a wireless device is provided. The method includes receiving a music stream from a server, emitting music from the music stream, and playing a locally stored song, when a network interruption is detected. The method may further include accessing a playlist and determining whether the playlist includes at least one of a user favorite song, a same artist song, or a same genre song. Moreover, the method may also include determining that a network connection is re-established, finishing playback of the locally stored song, receiving another music stream from the server, and emitting music from the other music stream. | 07-01-2010 |
20100169494 | Virtualizing Sockets to Enable the Migration of a System Environment - Techniques for maintaining connectivity between a remote application stored on a remote device and an application being executed in a system environment, wherein the system environment is migrated from a first device to a second device, are provided. A first connection between the remote application stored on the remote device and the application being executed in the system environment stored on the first device is established via a first communication over a first negotiation channel. The first negotiation channel connects a first socket layer interface linked to the application being executed in the system environment to a second socket layer interface linked to the remote application. The first connection between the remote application and the application being executed in the system environment is disconnected for migration of the system environment from the first device to the second device. Disconnecting the first connection is coordinated via the first negotiation channel. A second connection between the remote application stored on the remote device and an application being executed in the migrated system environment stored on the second device is established via a second communication over a second negotiation channel. The second negotiation channel connects a third socket layer interface linked to the application being executed in the migrated system environment to the second socket layer interface linked to the remote application. | 07-01-2010 |
20100169495 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING CONTINUITY OF MEDIA STREAMS IN A SESSION - A method, apparatus, and system for processing continuity of media streams in a session are disclosed herein to fulfill the requirements for processing continuity of media streams in a session. The method includes the following steps: providing an SAF between a set of first access connections and a remote connection corresponding to a HandOver Remote Function (HORF), where each first access connection corresponds to a HandOver Source Function (HOSF) in an HOSF set in a session and is associated with at least one target media stream; associating, by the SAF, a media component corresponding to the target media stream with a second access connection between the SAF and each HandOver Destination Function (HODF) in an HODF set after receiving a stream operation request; performing, by the SAF, a stream operation on the second access connection and processes continuity of the target media stream. | 07-01-2010 |
20100169496 | Method and Apparatus for Optimization of SIGCOMP UDVM Performance - A mobile communication system that utilizes multiple access technologies achieves multiple session registrations by deriving a plurality of extended unique device identifications from a specific unique device identification (e.g., private user identification (PIID) stored on a subscriber identity module (SIM)) assigned to a user equipment. Each of the plurality of extended unique device identifications have the benefit of allowing multiple registrations with one or more access networks while allowing a home subscriber system to detect the one unique device identification embedded in the extended unique device identifications for authentication purposes. Thereby, a large population of deployed UEs and access network infrastructure may benefit without replacement by allowing a UE to maintain session continuity when transitioning between access networks, to select a preferred access technology when in overlapping coverage areas without session interruption, or to maintain multiple sessions (e.g., simultaneous Voice over IP (VoIP) and media streaming) with different access networks. | 07-01-2010 |
20100174816 | On-Demand Network Connection - An on-demand network connection for a remote user is provided. Responsive to a failure to receive an electronic communication via an established network connection, a remote user device receives a connection request that indicates that the on-demand network connection is to be established. Responsive to receiving the connection request, the on-demand network connection is established from the remote user device to a network. Then, the electronic communication is received on the remote user device via the on-demand network connection. | 07-08-2010 |
20100174817 | SPLICING PROXIED WEB REQUESTS WITH CALLBACK FOR SUBSEQUENT REQUESTS - The present invention provides a method, system, and computer program product for splicing proxied web requests with callback for subsequent requests. The method comprises: initiating by a proxy a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) splice between first and second socket connections in order to service a request; and returning control of the first and second socket connections to the proxy in response to a completion event associated with the TCP splice. | 07-08-2010 |
20100174818 | Input Service for Client Devices - An input service for client devices is described. In embodiment(s), a session request can be received at a network service from a client device to establish an input service session. An applicable character input service can be determined which is then utilized by the client device where the character input service generates a character input interface for display at the client device. The character input interface of the character input service is communicated to the client device from which characters can be selected for input, and character inputs are received from the client device when initiated via the character input interface. The character inputs can be resolved at the network service for display updates that are then communicated to the client device for display in the character input interface. | 07-08-2010 |
20100174819 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING REGISTER REQUEST, NETWORK ELEMENT, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention provides a method for processing register request, network element, and a communication system. The method for processing a register request of a terminal in a communication system that comprises a first network element (GSN) for providing IP networking service to said terminal, a second network element (P-CSCF) for providing SIP proxy service to said terminal, a third network element (S-CSCF) for providing SIP subscriber service to said terminal, and a fourth network element (HSS) for storing information about said terminal including said terminal's address; wherein the communication system further comprises a fifth network element (NAPT) for translating said terminal's address in between said first network element and said second network element; said method comprise: determining whether a message issued by said terminal for said register request has undergone Network Address Port Translation; indicating an address for address verification in said message based on the determination whether said message has undergone Network Address Port Translation; and verifying the address for address verification in said message against the information stored in said fourth network element. | 07-08-2010 |
20100180037 | Method and apparatus for optimizing and prioritizing the creation of a large number of VPN tunnels - There is provided a communications network including a server forming part of a virtual private network, a plurality of client computers operative to request connection to the server and to be connected to the server when a request for connection is granted, thereby to be added to the virtual private network and a server response module, operative, in response to a connection request from at least one of the plurality of client computers which connection request cannot be processed by the server, to provide to the at least one of said plurality of client computers a server response indicating that the connection request should be retransmitted only after at least one criterion is met. | 07-15-2010 |
20100185769 | Methods for Downloading a File to Consumer Electronic Devices via a Peer-to-peer Network - This invention relates to methods for downloading a user requested file via a peer-to-peer network, comprising the steps of: generating a second queue for containing one or more trying-to-connect peers, a third queue for containing currently-connected peers, and a forth queue for containing previously-connected peers; requesting from said servers one or more available peers, wherein said available peers having one or more blocks of said user requested file; placing said available peers in said second queue; connecting to the peers in the second queue, wherein upon successfully connecting to a peer in the second queue, placing such peer in said third queue; and downloading one or more blocks from the peers in said third queue. | 07-22-2010 |
20100185770 | PRESENCE CAPABILITIES AND PREFERENCES - Architecture for gathering and presentation to a remote user (watcher) of presence, preferences, and capabilities information of a local user (publisher). An extensible presence document is employed, as transmitted by the publisher, that contains specific information about the capabilities of the publisher endpoint and preferences that are for the publisher overall. The document is aggregated, and the aggregated capabilities are transmitted to watchers. The watchers render this information in a user experience. | 07-22-2010 |
20100185771 | System and method for hybrid communication mechanism utilizing both communication server-based and direct endpoint-to-endpoint connections - A new approach is proposed that contemplates systems and methods to support a hybrid solution that utilizes a centralized communication server as the main mechanism for communication between two clients (endpoints), but augments the server-based communication with an optional direct connection between the two clients whenever available while hiding the complexities and time spent dealing with the direct connection from the clients. The switch of the communication mode between the clients is kept transparent to them during their communication session without causing any inconvenience and/or disruption of the communication. When a direct endpoint to endpoint connection is not available the approach preserves the advantages of connecting through the intermediate communication server. | 07-22-2010 |
20100185772 | METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING SERVICE INTERACTION IN THE IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method for implementing service interaction in the IP multimedia subsystem is disclosed in the present invention, wherein each service logic has a unique service identifier. The method comprises the following steps: (a) a Serving-Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) sends a session initiation protocol (SIP) request message to the service capability interaction manager (SCIM) or to the application server (AS) to which a user requests for a service; (b) after the AS or SCIM has received the request and has executed this service, it inserts the service identifier of this service into the SIP request, and returns the SIP request with the service identifier to said S-CSCF. With the present invention, most of the service interaction requirements can be satisfied. | 07-22-2010 |
20100185773 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND BASE STATION FOR MAINTAINING A NETWORK CONNECTION - An electronic device and wireless base station for maintaining a persistent connection are provided. In an embodiment, a system includes an electronic device that connects to a web-server via a physical link that is bandwidth-constrained. The physical link also includes a wireless base station and at least one network address translation (“NAT”) router that is configured to terminate idle connections between the client and the web-server. One of the electronic device and the wireless base station is configured to send keep-alive packets to the web-server in order to reduce the likelihood of the NAT router terminating the connection. The keep-alive packets are sent on a variable basis that is intended to reduce bandwidth consumption while ensuring that the NAT router does not deem the connection idle and terminate the connection. | 07-22-2010 |
20100198975 | Method of Discovering Operator-Provided Network-Services using IMS - A method, a session managing node and an arrangement for providing a network-service address of at least one network-service of an IMS network ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100205307 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM - A communication control system includes external equipment for making a request for required data, a plurality of control units each for transmitting the required data according to the request from the external equipment, and communication control equipment disposed between the external equipment and the control units, for establishing a communication path with the control units according to the request from the external equipment, and for instructing a corresponding one of the control units to transmit the required data. | 08-12-2010 |
20100205308 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING SESSION MOBILITY - A session mobility support is disclosed. An application server (AS) can accurately recognize a session update by checking a Replace header, a user ID and a media element included in a session invitation message (or an SIP-based INVITE message) received from a UE (User Equipment), to thus guarantee successful mobility of a session. In addition, in order to allow the AS to accurately recognize the session update, the UE first transmits the session invitation message including the Replace header via a PS (Packet Switching domain, and then, after a response to the session invitation message is received, the UE transmits a call setup message (e.g., SETUP message) via a CS (Circuit Switching) domain. | 08-12-2010 |
20100205309 | Method and Arrangement of a Multimedia Gateway and Communication Terminals - A multimedia gateway for enabling a remote device to access a local device located in a private network via a residential gateway of the private network is provided. The multimedia gateway includes: connecting means for connecting to the private network and a multimedia service network, first receiving means for receiving authentication information from the remote device over the private network, storing means for storing the authentication information in a memory, second receiving means for receiving a session invite message from the remote device over the multimedia service network, the session invite message including authentication information, and authenticating means for authenticating the remote device by determining whether or not the authentication information included in the session invite message has been stored in the memory by the storing means. | 08-12-2010 |
20100211684 | METHOD AND COMMUNICATIONS ARRANGEMENT FOR OPERATING A COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION - The invention relates to a method and a communications arrangement for operating a communications connection between a communications terminal device (KE | 08-19-2010 |
20100211685 | PAIRING EXCHANGE - A computing device capable of communicating over multiple types of communication channel pairing data for use with a further type of communication channel, the device being arranged to communicate pairing data with another device in response to a pairing stimulus and to communicate that pairing data over each of said multiple types of communication channel. | 08-19-2010 |
20100211686 | User Plane Control in IMS - From a user a request for a session is received. Information on an access network via which the request is received is determined. A media type or an application requested in the request is determined. A decision on media path handling is made based on the information on the access network determined and the media type or the application determined. | 08-19-2010 |
20100217871 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING A PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AS A SECURE VIRTUAL MASS STORAGE DEVICE OVER A NETWORK - A wireless device is provided. The wireless device has a processor for controlling operation of the wireless device; a first input device coupled to the processor for accepting an input; at least one display device coupled to the processor for communicating an output to the user; a communications subsystem coupled to the processor for communicating with a communications network; a universal serial bus (USB) storage device connected to a USB port of the wireless device; a memory coupled to the processor; and a storage device coupled to the processor. The wireless device includes a USB/network handling module resident in the memory for execution by the processor. The USB/network handling module is configured to establish a secure connection between the wireless device and a server of a network; load a universal serial bus mass storage component; initiate a file share between the wireless device and the server; and mount the USB storage device connected to the USB port of the wireless device as a shared network drive on the network. | 08-26-2010 |
20100217872 | NOTIFICATION MODEL OVER A SERVER-TO-SERVER CONNECTION POOL - A server-to-server notification model that employs a connection pool such that an asynchronous request issued from the pool can access any session of the remote server for pending notifications on all of the sessions. Only one asynchronous request (or call) is issued to the remote server for all sessions in the connection pool, and the call is completed if any notifications to any participating sessions occur on the remote server. When the asynchronous request completes, the returned data provides a set of the sessions that have pending notifications. | 08-26-2010 |
20100217873 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIP ACCESS TO MEDIA AND CONFERENCES - A method and system for SIP access to media and conferences using a Media Server provides multiple connections to a resource while at the same time releasing the connection from the Media Server, therefore minimizing resources required on the Media Server and providing an increased number of connections. A method for providing media services may comprise receiving a request for media services from an initiating client device at a Media Server, determining, at the Media Server, a type of media resource needed to service the request and selecting a Resource Server based on the determined type of media resource, and establishing, by the Media Server, a media service connection between at least the initiating client device and the selected Resource Server to provide the requested media service, wherein the established media service connection does not include the Media Server. | 08-26-2010 |
20100228862 | MULTI-TIERED SCALABLE MEDIA STREAMING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Embodiments disclosed herein relate generally to systems and methods for delivering a scalable media stream from a media server to a media client, wherein thinning is performed at more than one location in the network between the media server and the media client. The system includes at least a session management node located close to the media server, and a client management node located close to the media client. The session management node receives the scalable media stream from the media sever and performs steady state thinning on the scalable media stream to produce a session media stream. The client management node receives a client input media stream, which is at least a portion of the scalable media stream, and performs dynamic thinning on the client input media stream to produce a client output media stream that is streamed to the media client. | 09-09-2010 |
20100228863 | CONTENT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND ITS CONTROL METHOD - A content distribution system in which, when it is detected that an incommunicable area is present in a moving direction of a client terminal, the client terminal transmits a change request signal, requesting an increase of the confirmation interval of a keep-alive signal, to the content distribution server before the client terminal enters the incommunicable area. When the change request signal is received during distribution of content data, the content distribution server increases the confirmation interval of the keep-alive signal, thereby allowing the session of content distribution to be maintained while the client terminal is in motion within the incommunicable area. | 09-09-2010 |
20100228864 | SERIAL DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - The serial device management system is a new and innovative method of aiding the deployment and troubleshooting of POS terminals serially connected to IP enabled devices. Various messages and other data may be sent through a pipe from the IP enabled device to a serially connected POS terminal. This will allow the POS terminal to behave as if it has a direct IP connection. | 09-09-2010 |
20100228865 | Method And System For Administering A Concurrent User Licensing Agreement On A Manufacturing/Process Control Information Portal Server - Disclosed is a server that provides session-persistent concurrent licenses for resources accessed by clients. In one embodiment, rather than requiring a license when the server is initially accessed, a license is not requested until a client seeks access to a licensed resource. In one implementation, scripts for Web pages associated with licensed resources include requests for licenses from a license management facility. Certain resources conditionally request a license based upon the origin of the access request: the license request may be bypassed for access requests from “pre-licensed” applications. Session-based licensing allows equitable assessment of compensation to a service provider for use of the services. The server includes many resources, some of which require a license for access while others do not. The services of premium value are the only ones for which customers are expected to obtain/claim a license. | 09-09-2010 |
20100228866 | METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING DATA, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS THEREOF - A method for synchronizing data is disclosed: a synchronization initiator sends a synchronization session request to a synchronization recipient to create a synchronization session connection with the synchronization recipient; and a synchronization process is started in the synchronization session, and the synchronization initiator synchronizes data with the synchronization recipient through the synchronization process. A synchronization process is started in the synchronization session, and the synchronization initiator synchronizes data with the synchronization recipient through the synchronization process, thus synchronizing the data between both parties flexibly. | 09-09-2010 |
20100235514 | Securing a network connection by way of an endpoint computing device - Methods and apparatus involve securing a network connection by way of mobile, endpoint computing assets. The endpoints have one or more pre-defined security policies governing the connection that are balanced against competing interests of actually maintaining connections between devices, especially in WiMAX, MANET, MESH, or other ad hoc computing environments where poor security, signal strength, fragile connections or mobility issues are of traditional concern. In this manner, connections will not be lost over security enforcement in an otherwise hostile environment. The security policies are enforced in a variety of ways, but may be altered to lesser policies or not-so-strictly enforced so as to maintain satisfactory connections between devices. Other embodiments contemplate analyzing connectivity components before connection and selecting only those components that enable full or best compliance with the policies. Still other embodiments contemplate altering connections in order to maintain full enforcement of policies. Computer program products are also disclosed. | 09-16-2010 |
20100235515 | Method and apparatus for managing connection - A method and apparatus for managing connection is disclosed, which is capable of realizing an efficient management through a bi-directional connection, the method comprising pairing two uni-directional connections between a receiver and a transmitter, if Internet service to be provided requires bi-directional data delivery capability; and creating a second uni-directional connection by assigning the second uni-directional connection at the time of creating a first uni-directional connection for the Internet service, wherein the first uni-directional connection is opposite to the second uni-directional connection. | 09-16-2010 |
20100235516 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SERVER - A SOAP-SIP adapter | 09-16-2010 |
20100235517 | INTELLIGENT ROUTING OF COORDINATED AUDIO, VIDEO, WEB SERVICES AND MEASUREMENT DATA STREAMS - A system may receive a request from a client station to communicate with any available expert that matches at least one criterion. The system determines an identity of an expert station associated with an expert matching the at least one criterion. The system may then establish a session between the client station and the expert station, where the session includes a first connection and a second connection, the first connection is for transmission of audio/video, and the second connection is for transmission of telemetry data during the transmission of the audio/video. The telemetry data is measured at the client station. | 09-16-2010 |
20100235518 | CONNECTION TO MULTIPLE ACCESSORIES WITH MULTIPLE ACCESSORY-SPECIFIC PROTOCOLS - Embodiments of the present invention provide various communication techniques for communication between a mobile computing device and an accessory. An accessory protocol that is generic to the mobile computing device can be used for some communication. An application executing at the mobile computing device can communicate with the accessory using an application communication protocol. In some embodiments, the application communication protocol can be different from the accessory communication protocol. In other embodiments the application protocol may only be recognized by the application and the accessory. In some embodiments, messages conforming to an application protocol can be communicated between the application and the accessory by packaging the messages inside a message conforming to the accessory communication protocol. | 09-16-2010 |
20100235519 | POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION MANAGEMENT METHOD, MANAGEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT, AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) management method includes: acquiring information about a policy control session corresponding to a data connection, where the information about the policy control session includes information about policy control session release or result information about policy control session setup, and managing a mapping relation between the data connection and a PCRF according to the information about the policy control session corresponding to the data connection. A management network element includes: a policy control session information acquiring unit, adapted to acquire the information about a policy control session corresponding to a data connection, where the information about the policy control session includes information about policy control session release or result information about policy control session setup; and a managing unit, adapted to manage a mapping relation between the data connection and a PCRF according to the information about the policy control session corresponding to the data connection. | 09-16-2010 |
20100241752 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DOWNLOADING A FIRMWARE LOADER FROM A HOST COMPUTER - A method for downloading a firmware loader from a host computer to a portable electronic device establishes a communication connection between the host computer and the portable electronic device. Transmission parameters between the portable electronic device and the portable electronic device are configured. The firmware loader is transmitted from the host computer to the portable electronic device according to the transmission parameters. The firmware loader is verified, where the portable electronic device obtains a start address of the firmware loader. | 09-23-2010 |
20100241753 | System and Method For Securely Communicating On-Demand Content From Closed Network to Dedicated Devices, and For Compiling Content Usage Data in Closed Network Securely Communicating Content to Dedicated Devices - A system for securely communicating content as streaming data is provided. The system includes a closed network created on a public network, and a dedicated device for receiving twice-encrypted streamed content from the closed network. Upon authentication of the dedicated device, a content enabling component in the closed network twice-encrypts previously once-encrypted streamed content by using randomly selected encryption algorithms, and streams the twice-encrypted streamed content to the dedicated device during a closed network communication session and through a closed connection established between the closed network and the dedicated device. The dedicated device includes a content enabling component having a unique content enabling component identifier and a unique decryption key. The dedicated device decrypts the twice-encrypted streamed content by using its unique information and decryption key as well as randomly selected information received from the closed network during the closed network communication session and through the closed connection. | 09-23-2010 |
20100250752 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD OF STARTING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus, comprising has a generator which generates format information of a start instruction message, a memory which stores the format information, a communication unit which transmits the format information and receives a start instruction message via a network, and a controller which detects whether or not the received start instruction message corresponds to the format information stored in the memory, and performs start processing and initialization processing based on a content of the start instruction message when the received start instruction message corresponds to the format information. | 09-30-2010 |
20100250753 | PARTIAL SESSION TRANSFER METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR THE SAME - A session transfer procedure not for all ongoing multimedia components but for some media components in a wireless communication system and an apparatus for the same are provided. In a partial session transfer procedure, a user equipment establishing a first session to transmit a plurality of media components transmits a partial attach request message to a mobility control entity of a network core. The partial attach request message may be an attach request message whose attach type is set to ‘partial handover’. Upon receiving an attach accept message containing information regarding a gateway of the network core from the mobility control entity, a second session is established with the gateway by using the gateway information. After the establishing of the second session, the user equipment does not release the previously established first session. The user equipment transmits partial session transfer information indicating a media component to be transmitted using each of the first session and the second session among the plurality of media components to a counterpart user equipment, and thereafter exchanges multimedia data with the counterpart user equipment through both of the first session and the second session on the basis of the partial session transfer information. | 09-30-2010 |
20100262696 | PAIRING SYSTEM, PAIRING MANAGEMENT DEVICE, PAIRING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - To provide a pairing system which requires no special hardware and is capable of easily pairing terminals intended by a user. A pairing management device includes a pairing control module which receives pairing requests from communication terminals and data terminals, and generates tentative pairs from the communication terminals and the data terminals which transmitted the pairing request, and a confirmation data control module which allots and transmits pair confirmation data which corresponds on one-on-one basis to the communication terminals and the data terminals forming the tentative pairs, and allows the pairing control module to update the tentative pairs to final pairs when the pairing control module receives pair alteration data corresponding to the pair confirmation data from the communication terminals or the data terminals. | 10-14-2010 |
20100262697 | A METHOD FOR EVENT PACKET HANDLING - A method of delivering information from a Notifying node of a SIP/IMS network to a Watcher Client, via an intermediate Watcher Proxy. A connection is established between the Watcher Proxy and the Watcher Client, using a SIP session, wherein the established connection is used for forwarding a request for a SIP subscription to the Watcher Proxy as an embedded SIP subscribe message. Once a backend SIP subscription has been setup between the Watcher Proxy and the Notifying node, SIP notify messages delivered from the Notifying node will be forwarded from the Watcher Proxy to the Watcher Client via the established connection, thereby separating SIP subscribe traffic from SIP control traffic. | 10-14-2010 |
20100262698 | METHOD FOR NEGOTIATING REDUNDANT TRANSMISSION - The present invention provides a method for negotiating redundant transmission during IP bearer establishment and modification processes, wherein the method of negotiating redundant transmission in the establishment process comprises: an IP bearer control module judges whether a proactive MGW supports redundant transmission; a bearer establishment request tunnel message is carried with redundant transmission parameters and sent to a reactive media gateway of two media gateways; the reactive media gateway resolves the bearer establishment request tunnel message and sends a reactive end bearer establishment request to a RTP/IP protocol processing module via the IP bearer control module, and the IP bearer control module sends a bearer establishment response tunnel message carrying a redundant transmission parameter to the proactive media gateway; and the proactive media gateway sends a proactive end bearer establishment request to the RTP/IP protocol processing module via the IP bearer control module so as to realize a bearer connection between the proactive end media gateway and the reactive end media gateway. | 10-14-2010 |
20100262699 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING TRUST FOR SIP MESSAGES - A method for performing initial registration is provided. The method includes receiving a server timeout message, the server timeout message including at least a field set to a value equal to a value received during a first registration. The method further includes initiating restoration procedures by performing an initial registration. | 10-14-2010 |
20100262700 | DISTRIBUTED CALL SERVER SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION SESSIONS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - An apparatus, method, and computer program manage communication sessions that include a plurality of portions. Different processors handle each portion of a communication session. The apparatus, method, and computer program transfer the communication session from one of the processors to another of the processors during the different portions of the communication session. | 10-14-2010 |
20100268828 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING REMOTE SESSION DATA - Examples of systems and methods are provided for communication and for forwarding display data related to a remote session between a client device and a remote server to a host device. The system may facilitate establishing the remote session with the remote server. The system may facilitate establishing a trusted relationship between the client device and the host device. The system may filter out data related to local graphical user interface (GUI) and selectively forward from the client device to the host device display data related to the remote session established between the client device and the remote server. | 10-21-2010 |
20100268829 | Selecting proxies from among autodiscovered proxies - Network devices include proxies and where multiple proxies are present on a network, they can probe to determine the existence of other proxies. Where more than two proxies are present and thus different proxy pairings are possible, the proxies are programmed to determine which proxies should form a proxy pair. Marked probe packets are used by proxies to discover each other and probing is done such a connection can be eventually formed even if some probe packets fail due to the marking Asymmetric routing can be detected and proxies configured for connection forwarding as necessary. | 10-21-2010 |
20100274902 | System and Method for N-Way Communication with and between Locking/Unlocking Morphing Game Peripherals - A system and method for actuating a visible persistent physical change to a game peripheral during interaction with an online game server having multiple game states. The method includes steps for establishing a connection between a game peripheral and an online game server, associating the game peripheral with at least one game state, retrieving from the online game server at least one bit for downloading to the game peripheral, and actuating at least one electro-mechanical component of the game peripheral for morphing the game peripheral. Morphing of the game peripheral produces at least one visible persistent change to the game peripheral, including locking or unlocking components of the game peripheral, changing physical shape, or other mode of changing the visible appearance of the game peripheral. Some embodiments include a second game peripheral for communicating state to a first game peripheral, and actuating an electro-mechanical component of the first game peripheral. | 10-28-2010 |
20100274903 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PREVENTING A LOCAL DISPLAY DEVICE FROM DISPLAYING DATA GENERATED BY A REMOTE COMPUTING DEVICE - A method and system for preventing a local display device from displaying data generated by a remote computing device is described. The system includes a local agent for facilitating a remote session; an operating system generating a request to enable a display device controlled by a display adapter; and a filter executing in a driver and in communication with the local agent, the filter intercepting the request generated by the operating system. The filter transmits the request to the local agent when a remote user is active or to the display adapter when the remote user is inactive. The filter will transmits a signal to the operating system that the display adapter has enabled the display device when the filter transmits the request to at least one of the local agent and the display adapter. | 10-28-2010 |
20100274904 | METHOD OF INTERACTION WITH PHYSICAL ELEMENTS FORMING THE CONTENT OF A MACHINE - The invention concerns a method for interacting between a handheld device and a machine. The handheld device has an Internet browser for interacting with a physical element that is part of the machine. The physical element is a smart card web server for establishing a near-field wireless connection with the handheld device when the handheld device is in proximity of the machine. The physical element communicates over the air with at least a distant server, the server being able to update the content of the physical element. | 10-28-2010 |
20100274905 | SIGNALING OF MGW IDENTITY IN SIP-I - The invention relates to signaling of MGW identity in SIP-I. A Call Control Unit of a network includes an Input/Output unit. The Call Control Unit includes a processing unit in communication with the input/output unit. The Call Control Unit includes a memory unit in communication with the processing unit, the processing unit producing a signal having information which identifies a seized Media Gateway (MGW) related to a call establishment or one or more offered Media Gateways, which is sent via Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) to a Mobile Switching Centre (MSC)-Server in the network which is in charge to seize a MGW. A computer readable medium storing a computer program, which, when executed by at least one processing unit, signals a media gateway (MGW) identity. A method in a telecommunications node for signaling a Media Gateway (MGW) Identity. | 10-28-2010 |
20100274906 | System for Activating and Deactivating a Function - The present invention relates to a system being adapted to be connected to at least one computer. The system comprises: at least one tracking surface, and a pointing device adapted to navigate on the at least one computer when the pointing device is moved across the at least one tracking surface, which defines a first zone and a second zone. The system further comprises a detection unit which detects the zone the pointing device is present in, and a control unit adapted to activate a function when present in the first zone. | 10-28-2010 |
20100274907 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA THROUGH A PLURALITY OF DATA-PATHS - A communication apparatus is configured to include first and second cards, and a card-to-card link connecting the cards. Each card is communicably connected to another communication apparatus through a route connected to the card. One of the cards is determined to be a primary card that controls data transmission between the communication apparatus and another communication apparatus, and the other card is determined to be a secondary card controlled by the primary card. The primary card establishes a primary data-path for transmitting primary data, using one of the first and second routes connected to the primary card. The primary card further establishes a secondary data-path for transmitting secondary data, using the card-to-card link, the secondary card, and the other one of the first and second routes connected to the secondary card. | 10-28-2010 |
20100274908 | LOCATION TAGGING METHOD FOR PACKET BASED SIGNALLING - Location information is tagged in a packet based network. SIP signaling messages are used to initiate a communication session between at least two end user devices in a packet based telecommunications network. The communication session is routed through various intermediate network elements of the packet based network. The intermediate network elements tag the signaling messages with information indicating their geographic location or otherwise provide such location information. In response to the signaling messages and preferably before the communication session is established, the location information indicating the location of the intermediate network elements in the routing of the communication session between the end user devices is made available. An end user device or apparatus may receive the location information and provide a user display indicating the routing and status of the communication session being initiated. | 10-28-2010 |
20100274909 | CONNECTION DEVICE AND CONNECTION METHOD - A connection device that does not require complicated operation by a user an interconnects a single-display conference terminal and the multi-display conference terminal includes an address holding unit ( | 10-28-2010 |
20100281168 | Assymmetric Traffic Flow Detection - Methods, apparatuses and systems directed to detecting, and in some implementations, responding to, asymmetric routing in network deployments. In a particular embodiment, a first process detects asymmetric routing at connection initiation, while the second process can detect asymmetric routing that may after connection initiation. | 11-04-2010 |
20100281169 | PRESENCE-AWARENESS FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - The invention relates to computer software product ( | 11-04-2010 |
20100281170 | METHOD FOR SELECTING A POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION ENTITY IN THE NON-ROAMING SCENARIO - A method for selecting a policy and charging rules function entity in the non-roaming scenario includes the following steps: when a diameter routing agent DRA receives an indication message of the IP connectivity access network IP-CAN session establishment, the indication message is forwarded to a PCRF according to the related relationship which is set up and saved for allocating the policy and charging rules function PCRF entity to the IP-CAN session; and the corresponding policy and charging control PCC policy, which is made for the IP-CAN session by the PCRF, is forwarded to the provider's IP application function AF and the network element, which has policy and charging enforcement function, corresponding to the IP-CAN session. | 11-04-2010 |
20100281171 | PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK-TO-NETWORK INTERCONNECTION INTERFACE - An exemplary method includes network elements associated with distinct network domains exchanging signaling and media border processing information by way of a secure packet-switched connection between the network elements, exchanging service policy information by way of the secure packet-switched connection, peering a session associated with a first service type between the distinct network domains by way of a packet-switched network-to-network interconnection interface (“NNII”) in accordance with the exchanged signaling and media border processing information, peering another session associated with a second service type between the distinct network domains by way of the packet-switched NNII in accordance with the exchanged signaling and media border processing information, enforcing a first performance threshold specified by the service policy information for peering the session associated with the first service type, and enforcing a second performance threshold specified by the service policy information for peering the other session associated with the second service type. | 11-04-2010 |
20100287284 | METHOD FOR SETTING UP APPLICATIONS BY INTERCEPTION ON AN EXISTING NETWORK - The invention concerns a method for extending applications in an existing network by intercepting communications between a client application (C) and a server application (S). It includes fixing a device (B) in a point of interception (I) of a communication line (L), which is known to support all the packet exchanges between the client (C) and the server (S) applications and enabling a connection termination point to be created on the new application (N) emulating the network identity of the application originally requested by the client application (C). | 11-11-2010 |
20100287285 | CONTROL OF QUALITY-OF-SERVICE PRECONDITIONS IN AN IP MUTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - The invention relates to a method of establishing a session between client user terminals accessing IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, networks. At least one of the IMS networks implements the use of Quality of Service, QoS, preconditions, and at least one of the client user terminals does not use QoS preconditions. The method includes receiving, at an inter-working function, IWF located in one of the IMS networks, an IMS session initiation request originated by an originating client, the request indicating a terminating client for the session. A decision is made, based on the session initiation request, that one of the originating client and the terminating client is not using QoS preconditions. A set of QoS preconditions is inserted into a procedure for establishing the IMS session on behalf of the client that is not using QoS preconditions. Session establishment is completed only after QoS resources complying with the set of QoS preconditions have been established. | 11-11-2010 |
20100306384 | Multi-directional secure common data transport system - The improved secure common data transport system features a transport bus, a system bus, and agents operating as software or a combination of hardware and software running on connected computers. Each agent contains various lower-level components for internal operations and modules that provide overall functionality. The agent interfaces with other agents via the system and transport busses. To communicate, Data, Control Logic, IO, and Security modules within an agent allow the agent to create a ticket that is formatted in XML and encrypted for security. Agents connect with other agents utilizing a Multi-IO Socket Engine that allows for true multi-directional communications socket connections. Multi-directional communication allows a first agent to communicate with a second agent simultaneously as the second agent is communicating with the first. The overall network configuration is determined by the types of socket connection the agents establish. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306385 | RULE BASED MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ON WEB PAGES - Methods and systems are disclosed for a communication system that automatically initiates a multimedia communication session between a web site visitor and an agent who work for the web site based on predetermined rules while the visitor is browsing the web site. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306386 | PARAMETERIZABLE SELECTION OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ON THE BASIS OF NAME RESOLUTION MECHANISMS - The invention relates to a method for establishing a communication link between a communication system and a remote station by means of a communication network, whereby, in the context of the communication link, a parameterized selection of a remote station is made from several available remote stations by utilizing the name resolution mechanism. The communication forms a logical name with the help of parameters used for selecting a remote station or embeds the parameters in a logical name and transmits the formed logical name to a name resolution mechanism located in the communication network. The name resolution mechanism selects a remote station on the basis of the afore-mentioned logical name and a selection function and feeds back the communication address thereof. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306387 | NETWORK INTERFACE DEVICE - A network interface device is provided. The network interface device is connected to a computer and performs communications via a network includes a first management unit that identifies a communication connection by a port number, and manages a communication connection state of each port by a context that is stored in a storage unit and is associated with a port number, a second management unit that manages a storage state of the context, and a control unit that refers to the context, and performs an exemplary operation to establish a communication connection and an exemplary operation to cut off a communication connection between ports. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306388 | INFORMATION PORTAL - A communication system for providing high-speed wireless access to mobile processing systems a stationary transceiver defining an information portal in its immediate vicinity. A local server in communication with this stationary transceiver is configured to respond to a mobile processing-system present within the information portal. | 12-02-2010 |
20100312897 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING MEDIA AND MEDIA TRANSFER BETWEEN DEVICES - A method to transfer control is presented. The method includes receiving a request to transfer control of a collaborative session from a first user equipment (UE). The method includes sending a request for the transfer of control of the collaborative session in response to the received request to a second UE, and receiving, in response to the sent request to the second UE, an indication of acceptance of the transfer of control of the collaborative session. The method includes sending a notification of status to the first UE of the control of the collaborative session in response to receiving, from the second UE, the indication of acceptance. | 12-09-2010 |
20100312898 | PUBLISH/SUBSCRIBE NETWORKS - A method of making data, published on a first publication/subscribe (pubsub) network, available to hosts within a second publication/subscribe network where the networks are interconnected via the Internet. The method comprises registering a publication identity of said data within a rendezvous system located within the Internet, forwarding Subscribe requests associated with said publication identity from said second network to said rendezvous system and, at the rendezvous system, identifying a location of said data within said first network. The Subscribe request can then be forwarded to said first network, and said data delivered from said first network to said second network via the Internet. | 12-09-2010 |
20100318663 | OPTIMIZING MOBILE DEVICE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MULTIPLE DATA SOURCES - Embodiments are provided for synchronizing data retrieval with multiple data sources on a mobile computing device while maintaining a predetermined quality of service and optimizing resource usage. A connection is established between the mobile computing device and the multiple data sources for a first synchronization interval. A synchronization request is sent over the connection during the first interval. A response to the request including data is received from a data source during the first interval to synchronize the data. After the data is received, the connection to the data source is severed. The connection between the mobile computing device and the data source is then re-established for a second synchronization interval based on quality of service parameters associated with the data source and a pending connection status associated with one or more additional data sources. Another synchronization request is then sent by the mobile computing device over the re-established connection. | 12-16-2010 |
20100318664 | STEGANOGRAPHIC ENCODING FOR VIDEO AND IMAGES - The presently claimed invention relates generally to digital watermarking and steganographic data hiding for video and images. One claim recites a method of connecting a user computing device to one of a plurality of remote computers available for communication over a network. The method includes: a) obtaining streaming data representing a two dimensional color image or video, the two dimensional color image or video including an index steganographically hidden therein through alterations to the two dimensional color image or video; b) analyzing the streaming data to obtain the index; c) accessing a database with the index, the database comprising a plurality of records that associate an index to a pointer, the pointer identifying a remote computer on the network, in which the pointer is determined as a function of the index; and d) using the pointer to establish communication with the remote computer identified thereby. Of course, additional claims and combinations are provided as well. | 12-16-2010 |
20100318665 | INTERCEPTION OF A CLOUD-BASED COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - Methods and apparatus are provided for intercepting a client-server communication connection in a computing environment. A first network intermediary configured to facilitate optimization of client-server transactions may be installed in a path of communications between the client and the server. A second network intermediary configured to cooperate with the first network intermediary is not in the path of communications between the client and the server. The first network intermediary intercepts a connection request from the client and forwards a modified request toward the server. A module within the server intercepts the connection request and redirects it to the second network intermediary. The client-server connection is thus split-terminated at the two network intermediaries, which establish cooperative sessions between themselves and with the client and with the server. | 12-16-2010 |
20100325284 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY PROVIDING A CLIENT WITH ACCESS TO AN ASSOCIATED VIRTUAL MACHINE - Techniques for automatically providing a client with access to a virtual machine associated with the client are described herein. According to one embodiment, a message is received by a controller from a client over a network indicating that the client is starting up. In response, the controller causes a connection to be automatically established between the client and a virtual machine (VM) associated with the client once the client has started up. The associated VM may be one of a predetermined VM, a member of a group of VMs that are associated with the client, and a VM selected from a pool of VMs. As a result, a user of the client can instantly access contents provided by the associated VM without having to manually log onto a Web portal in order to select the associated VM to be launched. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 12-23-2010 |
20100325285 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TEARING DOWN INDIVIDUAL IP COMMUNICATION SESSIONS IN MULTIPLE IP STACK DEVICES - Embodiments of the invention are used to provide a system and method for tearing down and reclaiming an IP address from a multi-IP stack device based on configurable timer parameters that provide a network operator with independent control over each protocol-specific IP network layer session. Dedicated idle and session timers for each IP network layer session are implemented at the network layer of various network nodes in order to independently tear down IPv4 and IPv6 network sessions while maintaining the underlying link layer connection. In embodiments, the IP protocol-specific idle and session timers are processed by the Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN) or the Home Agent (HA). To achieve user session level control of IP protocol-specific network layer sessions, embodiments of the invention provide for storing the network layer idle and session timer attributes at the Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) server prior to passing such attributes to the PDSN or the HA for processing during the dual-stack communication session. | 12-23-2010 |
20100325286 | SESSION TRANSFER METHOD AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING SESSION CONTINUITY - According to the present invention, a service operator can immediately transfer an ongoing session to another network, accordingly it is capable of dealing with cases that a network is required to be temporarily stopped due to repairing/checking for the network, it is required to perform a network load balancing, it is required to more effectively perform the ongoing session, and the policy of the service operator is changed. And, according to the present invention, when the ongoing session is required to be transferred later even though it is not required to be immediately transferred, or session continuity operator policy is changed, it is capable of sending the session continuity operator policy to the terminal and then allowing the terminal to transfer the ongoing session to another network according to determination by itself. | 12-23-2010 |
20100325287 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF HANDLING NON-HTTP CLIENT OR SERVER PUSH ON HTTP VSERVER - The present application presents systems and methods for handling by an HTTP virtual server (HTTPVS), connections via which non-HTTP data is transmitted between clients and servers. HTTPVS intercepts a request from a client to establish first transport layer connection (TLC) with a server. HTTPVS establishes second TLC with the servers in response to receiving an acknowledgment from a client to establish the first TLC. HTTPVS determines if a first network packet transmitted via first TLC comprises an HTTP payload or non-HTTP payload. If HTTPVP the first network packet includes HTTP payload, HTTPVS may process all transmissions from the first TLC in accordance with connection tracking and forward the processed transmissions to the server via the second TLC. If HTTPVS determines that the first network packet does not include an HTTP payload, HTTPVS may link the first TLC and the second TLC so the client and server exchange non-HTTP communication without interruption. | 12-23-2010 |
20100325288 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF STATE MIGRATION IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present application is directed towards systems and methods of state migration in a multi-core system. An external process on a client or server may initiate a plurality of connections with the multi-core system, such that some cores have a plurality of connections and others have none. The present invention provides systems and methods for redirecting a connection or migrating the state of a connection from being associated with a first core with a plurality of connections to a second core with no connections. | 12-23-2010 |
20100325289 | RE-ACTIVATED GROUP COMMUNICATION - An improved method for re-activating a terminated group session. A server responsible for controlling the connection stores associated participant information identifying clients that participated or were intended to participate the connection. This associated participant information is provided to the client when a negative response to the request for re-joining the connection needs to be given. The client can then re-activate the communication by re-initing the connection. The roles and responsibilities of the continued connection are more consistent and still, the task of storing the information for the continued connection takes place in the element where it is most appropriately done. | 12-23-2010 |
20100332662 | Peer-to-peer negotiation in a wireless network - When two wireless communication devices discover each other and prepare to associate with each other, they perform a negotiation with each other to decide which will act as the network controller in that association. The negotiation may include an exchange of information indicating which device is more suitable to act as a network controller. | 12-30-2010 |
20100332663 | PLUG-AND-SHOW USB PORTABLE DISK - A plug-and-show USB portable disk, applied to a wireless presentation system including a computer, a wireless gateway wireless networking with the computer and a display apparatus connected with the wireless gateway, includes an image capturing and analyzing program and a plug-and-show program. The computer, further having a screen and a USB transmission port, is to transmit at least a presentation frame data to the screen for displaying respective presentation frame image. The image capturing and analyzing program is to capture and analyze the presentation frame data transmitted from the computer to the wireless gateway and to generate and forward an analysis result of the presentation frame data to the wireless gateway through the computer. The plug-and-show program is to control the computer to execute the image capturing and analyzing program as the USB portable disk engages with the USB transmission port. | 12-30-2010 |
20100332664 | LOAD-BALANCING CLUSTER - A load-balancing cluster includes a switch having a plurality of ports; and a plurality of servers connected to at least some of the plurality of ports of the switch. Each server is addressable by the same virtual Internet Protocol (VIP) address. Each server in the cluster has a mechanism constructed and adapted to respond to connection requests at the VIP by selecting one of the plurality of servers to handle that connection, wherein the selecting is based, at least in part, on a given function of information used to request the connection; and a firewall mechanism constructed and adapted to accept all requests for the VIP address for a particular connection only on the server that has been selected to handle that particular connection. The selected server determines whether it is responsible for the request and may hand it off to another cluster member. | 12-30-2010 |
20110004689 | ACCESS OF ELEMENTS FOR A SECURE WEB PAGE THROUGH A NON-SECURE CHANNEL - Particular embodiments generally relate to allowing access of non-secure elements through a non-secure channel when a top-level page was accessed through a secure connection. In one embodiment, a webpage is accessed over a secure channel. The webpage includes secure and non-secure elements. When a non-secure element for the webpage is determined, a client may message with the server to open a non-secure channel for accessing the non-secure element. For example, the client may request port information in the request. The server then can respond with port information for a non-secure channel. The client then accesses data for the non-secure element through the non-secure channel using the port information. | 01-06-2011 |
20110004690 | Method of Forwarding Messages Over a Network and System for Implementing the Method - The present invention relates to a method of forwarding messages over a network. The message forwarding method is implemented in a router ( | 01-06-2011 |
20110004691 | Distribution of Streaming Content Between Media Players Configured to Locate Each Other - The invention relates to a device for either generating or maintaining an organic data network having an dynamic topology, comprising
| 01-06-2011 |
20110010458 | Methods and Apparatus for Automated Local Network Formation Using Alternate Connected Interfaces - The described apparatus and methods may include a local network formation module configured to join an overlay network via an available connection, retrieve from the overlay network at least one ad associated with forming a local network, determine if there is at least one matching ad to form the local network, and if no matching ads are determined, then publish an ad with a first local network configuration, or if one or more matching ads are determined, then join a local network according to a second local network configuration corresponding to one of the one or more matching ads. | 01-13-2011 |
20110016216 | Optimized negotiation of coding resources between communication clients - A network (N) device (S) (I | 01-20-2011 |
20110022715 | MANAGEMENT SESSION INITIATION WITH A CUSTOMER PREMISES DEVICE - A communication method for execution at a customer premises device, comprising detecting receipt of a command indicative of an intent of a management entity to initiate a management session, the command being a management session initiation command. Responsive to detecting receipt of the management session initiation command, an identifier for participating in a management session with the management entity is obtained. Also, a method for execution at a management entity, comprising obtaining a management address for a customer device and determining whether the management address is indicative of a an address capable of supporting a management session or an address incapable of supporting a management session. If the management address is indicative of an address incapable of supporting a management session, a command is sent to the customer device, causing it to obtain a management address capable of supporting a management session. | 01-27-2011 |
20110029676 | PER PRIORITY TCP QUALITY OF SERVICE - An IP gateway device establishes distinct TCP sessions within a single FCIP tunnel, each TCP session being designated for a different priority of service (e.g., high, medium, low), plus a control stream. Each TCP session has its own TCP stack and its own settings for VLAN Tagging (IEEE 802.1Q), quality of service (IEEE 802.1P) and Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP). By distributing data streams assigned to different priorities of service into different TCP sessions within the FCIP tunnel, an IP gateway device can preserve the distinctions between the data stream priorities while the data traffic is within the IP network. | 02-03-2011 |
20110035500 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE TO OUTPUT ELECTRONIC CONTENT, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR PERFORMING THE METHOD - In a method for controlling an electronic device to output electronic content stored in a storage medium thereof via an output module thereof, the electronic device is configured to: display a first object associated with the electronic content and a second object associated with the output module on an operation screen of the electronic device; receive a user input command for establishing an operational relationship between the first and second objects; and automatically retrieve the electronic content from the storage medium, and output the electronic content via the output module in response to the user input command. An electronic device to perform the method is also disclosed. | 02-10-2011 |
20110035501 | TRAVERSAL OF SYMMETRIC NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR FOR MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIONS - Handling of multiple connections during NAT traversal for a node behind a symmetric NAT is disclosed. The likelihood of connection failure during symmetric NAT traversal may be reduced by serializing critical time windows after port prediction. Once a connection request has been sent for a first connection, port prediction for a subsequent connection may be delayed until a connectivity check has begun for the first connection. This process may be repeated to handle NAT traversal for multiple simultaneous connections to different nodes. | 02-10-2011 |
20110035502 | Distributed Kernel Operating System - An improved distributed operating system over a network of computer systems is described. Existing distributed operating systems have transmission performance limitations dictated by their inability to (1) reliably handle transient communication failures and rapid node reboots, (2) provide a transmission protocol that adapts to link reliability, and (3) allow transmissions to occur over an arbitrary combinations of communication links. The systems and methods described herein solve these problems by providing a reliable node-to-node session protocol that offers high performance message delivery and multi-interface management and support. This is done by transmitting all data between two nodes of the operating system over a single connection that may dynamically exploit multiple interfaces between the nodes. | 02-10-2011 |
20110040879 | Electroluminescent communication system between articles of apparel and the like - An article of apparel, or household fabric, having a power source, a switch and at least one electroluminescent or fabric strip for illuminating the article of apparel, or household article. In addition, the present invention can be used in a peer to peer network. The article may have a communication system including a transmitter and a receiver. Furthermore, the present invention can have electric circuitry that can be integrated with the electrical components so as to create different visual effects in response to signals from the communication system. The electroluminescent strips of the present invention can be designed to follow the contour of a trademark, logo, or character. Also, the electroluminescent strips can be designed to follow the stitching of the sneaker and follow the sneaker lace path. Switches of the present invention can include, preferably, a toggle switch, or if desired a pressure switch, a reed switch, or the like. The power source implemented is preferably a rechargeable battery. | 02-17-2011 |
20110040880 | TONE GENERATION SYSTEM CONTROLLING THE MUSIC SYSTEM - In a plurality of rooms, hubs are installed to build a star-shaped LAN, and tone-generation-related devices, such as a keyboard, tone generator device and speaker, are connected to the respective hubs. For example, in an internal network, the keyboard is logically connected to an input side of the tone generator device and a speaker is connected to an output side of the tone generator device, so as to build a tone generation system. The tone-generation-related devices are provided with respective network adaptors so that they can be readily connected to the LAN. Communication is carried out between the tone-generation-related devices, using a communication protocol intended for retransmission control. Each of the tone-generation-related devices is in the form of a processor device, which executes a program corresponding to a function of a desired processing element to thereby implement the desired processing element. Once a given tone-generation-related device, implementing a plurality of processing elements, is connected to the network, an internal connection between the processing elements is canceled. | 02-17-2011 |
20110040881 | SIP HEADER TO INDICATE MOBILITY TRANSFER OPERATION | 02-17-2011 |
20110047276 | ACCEPT AND RECEIVE ENHANCEMENTS - A server issues an enhanced accept and receive call to a client computer. The enhanced accept and receive call requires the server to subsequently receive a block of data from the client computer in order to establish a session connection between the client computer and a server resource. In response to the block of data from the client computer failing to be received by the server, the server prevents the session connection from being pushed onto an accept queue on the server until the server executes a corrective process. | 02-24-2011 |
20110047277 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING TRUST FOR SIP MESSAGES - A method for performing initial registration is provided. The method includes receiving a server timeout message, the server timeout message including at least a field set to a value equal to a value received during a first registration. The method further includes initiating restoration procedures by performing an initial registration. | 02-24-2011 |
20110047278 | DATA SYNCHRONISATION - A data synchronisation system comprising:
| 02-24-2011 |
20110055401 | Method For Asynchronous Multimedia Retrieval - The present invention relates to a method for asynchronous multimedia content retrieval, which can be applied to TV-Anytime standard or MPEG standard. In summary, an asynchronous multimedia retrieval method is provided as including: a client establishing the first session as requesting to the server; transmitting to the server the retrieval inquiry message for contents that the server needs; terminating the first session after the retrieval inquiry; establishing the second session and requesting to the server the result for the retrieval inquiry at a certain point in time that the previously set time has passed; and receiving the retrieval result from the server and terminating the second session. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055402 | EXPOSING AUTOMATON INFORMATION BASED ON AGGREGATION OF MEMBER INFORMATION - Architecture that exposes automaton information of an automaton based on aggregation of a set of member information and according to aggregation logic. The aggregation logic can include presence state, supported communications modalities, and time availability (e.g., business hours). The aggregation logic for presence state member information can be defined by the most available presence state of all persons the automaton it is hiding. The aggregation logic for capabilities member information can be the capabilities of the most available person the automaton is hiding. The aggregation logic for business hours member information can be defined by the largest interval possible covered by the persons hidden by the automaton. Other types of member information can be considered. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055403 | Collaboration agent based system architecture to support collaborative multimedia applications over wireless networks - In one embodiment, a method of sending data from a first node participating in a session of a collaborative application via a wireless network to a plurality of second nodes participating in the session of the collaborative application via a wired network includes generating a plurality of data streams corresponding to the plurality of second nodes at the first node, reducing the plurality of data streams to a single stream from among the plurality of data streams, and sending the single data stream to a collaboration agent associated with the first node and connected to the wired network. In another embodiment instances of the collaborative application are run at both the first node and the collaboration agent. In yet another embodiment, an instance of the collaborative application is run only at the collaboration agent which is connected to the first node via a bi-directional windows sharing link. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055404 | Device Management - A method for managing communication in a system having a device in communication with a server via a communication path which includes gateway. A communication session is initiated by transmitting a request signal from the device to the gateway. The signal is then routed through the gateway, and the signal is then transmitted from the gateway to the server. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055405 | System, method and apparatus for establishing interactive media session based on IP multimedia subsystem - A method and system for establishing an interactive media session based on IP Multimedia Subsystem, including: a terminal adapted to initiate an interactive media session request and receive a media session response; a serving-CSCF adapted to trigger the request to the application server according to a triggering rule and route the message; a proxy-CSCF adapted to forward the request and the response between the terminal and the serving-CSCF; an application server adapted to process the service request; a media control entity adapted to control resource allocation of the media carrier entity; and a media carrier entity adapted to allocate address ports for RTSP connection and RTP connection with the terminal. The present invention can be applied to a NGN network where the carrier and control are separated to improve the media delivery efficiency. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055406 | Maintaining session states within virtual machine environments - Sessions states within virtual machine (VM) environments are maintained. Each VM environment hosts a guest operating system (OS) and one or more application programs running. The guest OS and the application computer programs of each VM environment constitute a session. A connection broker maintains a state machine as to states of the sessions and permits transitions among the states in response to messages, commands, and internal decisions. Different types of agents may send the messages, and the commands. The states of the sessions may include a pending state and a number of other states. The pending state is an interim state that indicates a session is being transitioned from one of the other states to another of the other states. These other states may include an offline state, an online-down state, an online-up state, a suspended state, an active state, an idle state, a disconnected state, and a failed state. | 03-03-2011 |
20110060835 | COMMUNICATING WITH A USER DEVICE IN A COMPUTER ENVIRONMENT - Communicating with a user device in a computer network. A tracker peer is contacted and obtaining a list of peer nodes at a user device. A subset of peer nodes are selected from the list of peer nodes to act as relay nodes for a communication. A first form of communication is transmitted to at least one relay node for the at least one relay node to forward to at least one other user device, wherein the relay node is one of the subset of the peer nodes. The first form of communication is received at the user device from the at least one relay node forwarded from the at least one other user. A second form of communication is transmitted to the at least one relay node for the at least one relay node to forward to the at least one other user device, wherein the relay node is one of the subset of the peer nodes. | 03-10-2011 |
20110060836 | Method for Establishing a Paired Connection Between Media Devices - A method for establishing a paired connection between first and second media devices across a network includes transmitting a first information message across the network including an identifier that includes a request to pair the first and second media devices. When a second information message is received from the second media device within a first predetermined time period, the first device retrieves an identifier of the second device and transmits a confirmation message across the network including the device identifiers. A paired connection between the media devices is completed after a corresponding confirmation message from the second device is received within a second predetermined time period. | 03-10-2011 |
20110060837 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT BASED ON LTE/SAE SYSTEM - A method, system and device for establishing connection based on a LTE/SAE system. First, e-NodeB sends an S | 03-10-2011 |
20110066732 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, DATA ACQUISITION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is a data acquisition method including the steps of selecting one or more of at least one link destination, acquiring, before the link destination is selected, display control data including at least a structural unit in which information relating to a layout of a display screen is written, the display control data existing at the link destination selected in the previous step, extracting structural units included in the display control data before the prefetched link destination is selected, generating, before the prefetched link destination is selected, first structured data for display control by linking the extracted structural units in which information involving script processing is not written, generating, in a case the prefetched link destination is selected, second structured data for display control by linking the structural units, displaying a display screen using the first structured data, and redisplaying the display screen using the second structured data. | 03-17-2011 |
20110066733 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, DATA ACQUISITION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is a data acquisition method including the steps of selecting a link destination whose display is at least partially located in a region of a display screen corresponding to an operating tool, acquiring, before the link destination is selected, information relating to a layout of a display screen and display control data including at least a structural unit in which the information is written, the display control data and the information existing at the link destination, extracting structural units included in the display control data, in a case the prefetched link destination is selected, generating first structured data by linking the extracted structural units in which information involving script-process isn't written, generating second structured data by linking the extracted structural units, displaying a display screen using the first structured data, and redisplaying, at a stage the second structured data is generated, the display screen using the second structured data. | 03-17-2011 |
20110066734 | NETWORK LINKING METHODS AND APPARATUS - The presenting invention relates generally to indirect linking methods and apparatus. One claim recites a method including: a) using a programmed electronic processor, reading an index from color imagery steganographically modulated with the index; b) accessing a database with the index, the database comprising a plurality of records that link an index to a pointer which identifies a remote computer on a network; c) extracting a pointer from the database as a function of the index; and d) using the pointer to establish communication with the remote computer identified thereby. Of course, other combinations are provided and claimed as well. | 03-17-2011 |
20110066735 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IP SESSION KEEPALIVE USING BFD PROTOCOLS - A network device may include logic to establish an IP session, establish a BFD session within the established IP session, transmit BFD packets within the established BFD session, and determine that the established IP session is active based upon reception of the BFD packets. In another embodiment, the logic may also determine that an IP session is active using an inactivity timer that may also trigger transmission of BFD packets. | 03-17-2011 |
20110078312 | Method and system for monitoring incoming connection requests in a Peer-to-Peer network - The present invention relates to a system and method for controlling peer-to-peer (P2P) traffic in an internet service provider (ISP) network. The system includes an ISP server configured to determine whether to accept or reject an incoming connection request to connect to a requested peer from a requesting peer in a P2P application. According to one embodiment, the ISP is configured to determine whether to accept or reject the incoming connection request based on current peer connectivity and cost of the incoming connection request. According to another embodiment, the ISP server determines whether to accept or reject the incoming connection request based on preference information available at the ISP server. | 03-31-2011 |
20110078313 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A CONNECTION IN A CONNECTION ORIENTED IN-ORDER DELIVERY ENVIRONMENT - The present disclosure provides a system and method of establishing a connection between a client and a server in an in-order delivery environment. The disclosed system and method includes a client configured to request establishing a connection by sending a first type of message to a server, and the server is configured to confirm the ability of establishing the connection by sending to the client a second type of message leading to the server being connected. The first type of message starts a first client timer measuring a first predefined time period as a first maximum response time and receipt of the second type of message or a data message stops the first client timer. The connection is closed by sending a third type of message. | 03-31-2011 |
20110078314 | SIGNAL PROCESSING DEVICE, SIGNAL PROCESSING PROGRAM AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a signal processing device including: a packet receiving means for receiving a packet from a transmitting communication device; and a packet processing means for transmitting the received packet received by the packet receiving means, simply as received or after processing by a packet converting means, to a receiving communication device that is a destination of the packet, wherein when a communication session between a first transmitting communication device and the receiving communication device is established and the session is shifted to have a connection between a second transmitting communication device and the receiving communication device, the packet converting means converts the received packet received from the second transmitting communication device so as to maintain a consecutiveness related to a content of packets to be transmitted to the receiving communication device. | 03-31-2011 |
20110078315 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication system comprises a NAT device, a terminal device, and a communication control device. The communication control device comprises a first storage unit that stores a NAT address, a first receiving unit that receives a type request signal, a first determination unit that determines whether the NAT address matching a source IP address of the type request signal is stored in the first storage unit, and a first transmitting unit that transmits the type information associated with the NAT address matching the source IP address to the terminal device. The terminal device comprises a second transmitting unit that transmits the type request signal, a second receiving unit that receives the type information, and a communication control unit that performs Peer to Peer communication with another terminal device that is subordinate to another NAT device by performing communication using a method to establish communication based on the received type information. | 03-31-2011 |
20110078316 | Method And Element For Service Control - A service control element stores a user filter criterion. When it receives a session request identifying the user, it checks whether the session request matches the user filter criterion, and outputs the session request to a defined service platform when the session request matches the user filter criterion. The element is arranged to retrieve, before forwarding the request to the service platform, a capability information element that indicates the dynamic capability of a user to utilize the service provided by the service platform. If the information element indicates that the user is not capable to utilize the service provided by the service platform, the session is terminated. Incoming messages can be appropriately managed already in the network element responsible for service control, and thus additional load and unnecessary charging considerations can be avoided. | 03-31-2011 |
20110078317 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS WITH ROUTER DEVICE FOR MANAGING CONNECTIONS - A method and electronic apparatus is provided for establishing a connection in a first electronic apparatus to a second electronic apparatus using one of a plurality of clients. The method comprises determining whether the first electronic apparatus and the second electronic apparatus, to which a connection is requested, is operating in the same network; establishing the connection using a first client if the first and second electronic apparatuses are operating in the same network; and establishing the connection using a second client if the second electronic apparatus is operating in a different network than the first electronic apparatus. | 03-31-2011 |
20110082938 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY UPDATING A USER INTERFACE WITHIN A VIRTUAL COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - The present invention provides systems and methods for dynamically manipulating and/or reconfiguring a user interface within a virtual computing environment. Specifically, various systems and methods as provided by the present invention allow for dynamic manipulation or reconfiguration of a user interface within a computing session. Depending on the embodiment, the system and method may be used for sessions provided by an application control environment or a virtual computing environment. Embodiments of the invention enable dynamic manipulation, control, and reconfiguration of the user interface within a computing environment based on user interface rules. These user interface rules may be used to implement policy and access control on users of the computing session. | 04-07-2011 |
20110082939 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PROXY DISCOVERY AND NEGOTIATIONS BETWEEN NETWORK ENTITIES TO ESTABLISH PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A method for peer to peer communications is provided. The method includes receiving first set of information containing capabilities for a peer-to-peer communication. The method further includes communicating the first information to facilitate a peer-to-peer communication. The method includes utilizing a intermediary node to convey the capabilities and to further update the information/capabilities as the information changes over time. | 04-07-2011 |
20110082940 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ESTABLISH PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A method and device for peer-to-peer communications is provided. The method includes communication of the capabilities of a device to another device or network component. A peer to peer communication is established based on at least one of the capabilities of the device. The method may also include utilizing a control point or access point in conveying the capabilities of the device to another device. | 04-07-2011 |
20110082941 | METHOD OF PROVIDING DIRECT COMMUNICATION IN INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORK - In order for a peer node to perform direct communication with a correspondent peer node in an Internet protocol network, the peer node receives a virtual address of the correspondent peer node from a server, and then when the peer node can directly set a tunnel with the correspondent peer node, the peer node sets a tunnel with the correspondent peer node, and when the peer node cannot directly set a tunnel with the correspondent peer node, the peer node sets a tunnel with a tunnel repeater. Thereafter, the peer node connects a virtual address of the correspondent peer node as route information to the tunnel. Thereby, a packet using a virtual address of the correspondent peer node as a destination is transmitted to the correspondent peer node through a predetermined tunnel. | 04-07-2011 |
20110082942 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - A user invited to a session can see the content of the conversation exchanged in the session before participating in the session, so that he/she can easily decide whether or not to join the session. There are provided an invitation request transmitting section | 04-07-2011 |
20110087788 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING MULTIPLE INPUTS OF USERS OF A HOME NETWORK - Disclosed is a method and apparatus for processing multiple inputs from a plurality of users in a home network. A control point requests electronic devices in the home network to transmit input capability information, receives the input capability information as a response to the request from the electronic devices, and performs session setup using the input capability information by determining a receiver for receiving input signals and at least two senders for sending input signals. The control point transmits input signals transmitted by the at least two senders to the receiver. | 04-14-2011 |
20110093598 | DISPLAY OF PERSONA INFORMATION FOR PEER-TO-PEER SESSIONS - A method of operating a communication system comprises registering a first communication device with a peer-to-peer network as a first node associated with a first session participant and a first entity and registering a second communication device with the peer-to-peer network as a second node associated with a second session participant. The method further comprises initiating a communication session between the first node and the second node, transferring for display by the second communication device first persona information identifying the first session participant and the first entity, and exchanging user communications for the communication session between the first communication device and the second communication device. | 04-21-2011 |
20110099279 | Method and system for verifying logical connection - A method and system for maintaining a high reliability logical connection between hosts employs adaptive transparent pinging, clone blocking and bandwidth leveling to realize improvements in the areas of connection status verification, security and bandwidth management. In adaptive transparent pinging, a ping interval that defines a frequency at which ping messages are transmitted from an initiating host to a receiving host to check connection status is dynamically regulated based on data indicative of the reliability of a connection. In clone blocking, the receiving host verifies that a new connection that appears redundant is a re-established connection from the initiating host rather than a cloned connection. In bandwidth leveling, data bursts pending on initiating hosts that exceed a predetermined size are scheduled for transmission to receiving hosts. | 04-28-2011 |
20110106954 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INDUCTIVELY PAIRING DEVICES TO SHARE DATA OR RESOURCES - A computing device is configured to inductively communicate with one or more other devices. The device inductively communicates to (i) determine an identity or class of the second device, and (ii) perform a function that includes communicating with the second device. The function is performed automatically, and is based on the identity or class of the second device. | 05-05-2011 |
20110106955 | DATA COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, PROXY DEVICE, DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD - A technique for easily realizing data communication without limiting the application layer protocol during data communication while maintaining the proxy function. A mobile communication terminal ( | 05-05-2011 |
20110113142 | SMART CLIENT ROUTING - Architecture that facilitates communications between two network nodes of the different networks by providing a routing mechanism that uses alternative modalities driven entirely by policies that are authored and stored in a computing cloud and enforced on the client. This allows the selection of one network path over another path based on criteria such as, physical location of the hosts and service level agreements (SLAs) to be provided, for example. With respect for path selection, a packet can be routed through a datacenter closest to the hosts. With respect to SLAs, there may be different SLAs available to different clients. For clients with the highest bandwidth/uptime or other guarantees, a network path different from other types of clients can be selected. Additionally, connectivity can be allowed or disallowed based on other kinds of policy rules such as a virtual circle to which the hosts may belong. | 05-12-2011 |
20110113143 | VOICE SESSION AND DATA SESSION COORDINATION IN A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device has a data application and a voice application. The device establishes a data session between the data application and a data system. During the data session, the device receives a voice session request from a voice communication system, and in response, alerts the user of the request. The device receives a user acceptance of the voice session request, and in response, transfers a voice session acceptance indication from the voice application to the data application and tracks elapsed time since the user acceptance. The communication device transfers a voice session acceptance from the voice application to the voice communication system if the voice application receives a data application ready indication from the data application or if the elapsed time since the user acceptance reaches a set time period, whichever occurs first. | 05-12-2011 |
20110113144 | TERMINAL CONTROL METHOD AND SERVICE PROVISION SYSTEM USING THE SAME - To realize a service infrastructure capable of being used as a platform for various services to be implemented through a network. In a service provision system, each of a service control server | 05-12-2011 |
20110119386 | DIRECTING DATA IN A WEB BROWSER FROM A PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - Some embodiments provide a system for interacting with a web browser. During operation, the system establishes a network connection with the web browser from a portable electronic device. Next, the system provides data to the web browser using a web server on the portable electronic device. Finally, the system sends a set of control instructions from the web server to the web browser, wherein the control instructions direct the web browser to obtain and display the data. | 05-19-2011 |
20110119387 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MINIMIZING BANDWIDTH USAGE BETWEEN A COMMUNICATION SERVER AND A MEDIA DEVICE - A communication server implements a method that minimizes bandwidth usage between a media device and the communication server in a communication system where separate session and floor control protocols are used. Where multiple clients have established separate sessions to access a media source at a media device and upon determining that the multiple clients are attempting to access the same media source, the communication server implements floor control logic to tie multiple floor arbiters together across the separate sessions to cause a single media stream to be sent from the media source and received at the communication server for distribution to the clients, thereby minimizing the bandwidth on the uplink between the media device and the communication server. | 05-19-2011 |
20110119388 | Optimization of Multimedia Service Over an IMS Network - Predetermined multimedia services are provided to a plurality of users through a IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). A request is received at a placement server of a multimedia service by at least one user, and the placement server retrieves on a presence server information about the at least one user. The placement server identifies application servers including a multimedia application capable of providing the requested multimedia service, and the placement server selects an application server that is located a minimum average distance from at least one user. In response to the minimum average distance being greater than a predetermined threshold, a local application server is selected with an average distance from the user that is less than the predetermined threshold. A virtual image of the multimedia application is created on the selected local application server, and a connection is established between the user and the selected local application server. | 05-19-2011 |
20110125908 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROGRAMMING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL BACK-TO-BACK USER AGENTS - In one embodiment, the present disclosure is a method and apparatus for programming session initiation protocol back-to-back user agents. In one embodiment, a method for programming a telecommunication feature as a session initiation protocol back-to-back user agent includes receiving source code defining the feature, the source code using at least one abstraction that hides session initiation protocol signaling details required by the feature and generating executable code that causes a session initiation protocol server to execute the feature, in accordance with the abstractions. | 05-26-2011 |
20110125909 | In-Session Continuation of a Streaming Media Session - Methods and systems are provided for forwarding a media streaming session from one node to another node while the session is in progress. A streaming server may store data sent between nodes in the session. When one node is forwarded to a new node, the stored data may be used to transition to the new node with little or no interruption in data sent between nodes in the session. A user interface may allow a user to set preferences and control other aspects of the session forwarding features. | 05-26-2011 |
20110125910 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, CALL CONTROL SERVER DEVICE, AND CALL CONTROL PROGRAM - Upon receipt of an access request from a Web terminal, a service providing server transmits a shop ID stored in an external information database to the Web terminal. When the shop ID is selected by the Web terminal, the service providing server acquires external connection destination information, and notifies a SIP proxy server of the information via the Web terminal. When notified of the information, the SIP proxy server identifies internal connection destination information in an internal information database, based on an IP address added at the time of the notification of the external connection destination information. After making a call to a telephone device with the use of the identified internal connection destination information, the SIP proxy server makes a call to the shop with the use of the external connection destination information. After that, the SIP proxy server establishes a connection between the telephone device and the shop. | 05-26-2011 |
20110125911 | SIMULTANEOUS VISUAL AND TELEPHONIC ACCESS TO INTERACTIVE INFORMATION DELIVERY - A method and system for providing a visual interactive voice response session are provided. A visual interactive voice response server determines whether a session identifier database includes a session identifier that is associated with a first device. The visual interactive voice response server initiates the visual interactive voice response session with the first device when the session identifier database includes the session identifier that is associated with the first device. The session identifier that is associated with the first device is removed from the session identifier database when the visual interactive voice response session is terminated. | 05-26-2011 |
20110131330 | COLLOCATING DESKTOP VIRTUAL MACHINES TO PROXIMITY OF THE USER - A plurality of master desktop images for a plurality of users are stored at a plurality of geographically diverse data centers. At a first one of the data centers, a virtual desktop is constructed for a remote client. The virtual desktop is constructed from a given one of the master desktop images at the first one of the data centers and an individualized delta image for a user associated with the remote client. When it is determined that the remote client is at a geographical location wherein the first one of the data centers is not the closest one of the data centers to the remote client, the virtual desktop for the remote client is reconstructed at a second, closest, one of the data centers. The virtual desktop is reconstructed from a given one of the master desktop images at the second one of the data centers and the individualized delta image for the user associated with the remote client. A copy of the individualized delta image is moved from the first one of the data centers to the second one of the data centers to facilitate reconstructing the virtual desktop. | 06-02-2011 |
20110131331 | ALTERNATIVE BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT ALGORITHM - Methods, systems, and devices are provided that propose allocating bandwidth in a distributed network. According to a decentralized mode of operation, bandwidth between network devices is cooperatively shared and managed, allowing one or more call processing modules to selectively and intelligently place calls or perform activities. A single authoritative mode of operation for a given communication link is also provided, wherein one or more network devices may consult an authoritative member to determine if sufficient bandwidth is available to support an activity. Various triggering events or conditions may facilitate the transition from one mode to another. Audits or accountings are conducted, wherein devices may update or synchronize information stored in a control table related to system bandwidth. | 06-02-2011 |
20110131332 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING A MEDIA SESSION - Various methods for transferring a media session are provided. One example method includes triggering a media session transfer from a media receiver device, and providing a session transfer message to a network device. In this regard, the media receiver device and network device have communications connections to a network. Similar and related example methods and example apparatuses are also provided. | 06-02-2011 |
20110131333 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REMOTE IDENTIFICATION, MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL OF SEPARATE WIRELESS DEVICES BY LINKED COMMUNICATION AWARENESS AND SERVICE LOCATION - Systems and methods are operable to limit use of a Controlled Wireless Device within a controlled environment. An exemplary embodiment establishes a first wireless communication link between a Controlled Wireless Device and a Linked Context Aware Communication and Control Device (LCACCD) Platform, detects proximity of the Controlled Wireless Device to the controlled environment, communicates a control signal from the LCACCD Platform to the Controlled Wireless Device when the Controlled Wireless Device is within the controlled environment, and controls communications of the Controlled Wireless Device based upon the communicated control signal, wherein the Controlled Wireless Device is communicating over a second wireless link established with a wireless carrier network. | 06-02-2011 |
20110131334 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus includes a communication module, a connection request transmitter, a connection response receiver, a response time measuring module, a stability determination module, and a connection controller. The communication module executes close proximity wireless communication. The connection request transmitter transmits a connection request signal to an external device. The connection response receiver receives from the external device a connection response signal responding to the connection request signal. The response time measuring module measures a response time indicative of an elapsed time from the transmission of the connection request signal to the reception of the connection response signal. The stability determination module determines whether communication between the communication module and the external device is in a stable state based on the response time. The connection controller establishes connection between the communication module and the external device when the communication is in the stable state. | 06-02-2011 |
20110138058 | Server for routing connection to client device - The purpose of the present invention is to provide an Internet connection system capable of performing bidirectional communications between a home network and the Internet by relatively simple means and enabling manufacturers of client-side home network appliances to find a unique added value. | 06-09-2011 |
20110138059 | COMMUNICATION CHANNEL BETWEEN WEB APPLICATION AND PROCESS OUTSIDE BROWSER - One or more techniques and/or systems are disclosed herein for relaying a request to a process running on a computing device from a web client and receiving a response from the process. A bridge message client disposed in a web application, running in a browser on a computer, opens a local connection to a process running outside the browser. The bridge message client comprises a communication channel ID that identifies a communication channel to host the local connection to a bridge server, and a bridge message client ID facilitates communications from the bridge server to the web application. The bridge server is disposed outside of the browser environment, and can receive a request from the bridge message client and forward it to the process, and/or can receive a response to the request from the process and forward it to the bridge message client over the local connection. | 06-09-2011 |
20110138060 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SESSION DUPLICATION AND SESSION SHARING - A method and apparatus for session duplication within the advanced multimedia system (AMS) framework are disclosed. The method includes duplicating a session running on a first application or device on a second application or device. A method and apparatus for sharing media is disclosed. The method includes sharing media running on a first application or device with a second application or device. | 06-09-2011 |
20110138061 | ESTABLISHING AND UTILIZING TERMINAL SERVER DYNAMIC VIRTUAL CHANNELS - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for establishing and utilizing terminal server dynamic virtual channels. In some embodiments, a terminal server sends a new channel request to a terminal server. The client receives the new channel request and forwards the new channel request to a listener for a plug-in. The listener creates an instance of the client side plug-in and sends a channel accept to the terminal server. The terminal server receives the channel accept and creates an instance of a server side plug-in. The server and the client agree to use a unique identifier for identifying the established dynamic virtual channel. In other embodiments, data for a dynamic virtual channel is tunneled between computers over a static virtual channel. | 06-09-2011 |
20110138062 | RECIPROCAL PUBLIC TRUST RELATIONSHIP - Publicly accessible linking information is to establish a trusted relationship between reciprocally linked entities controlling web resources, such as websites or web logs. A method of establishing a trust relationship between two entities identifying a user-installed link to a second web resource in a first web resource. Next, the method determines when a reciprocal link is made in the second web resource directed to the first web resource and creates a trust relationship between the entities based on the reciprocal link. | 06-09-2011 |
20110138063 | Method and Apparatus for Reporting Uniform Resource Locator, Method and Apparatus for Setting Up Connection, and Communication System - A method and apparatus for reporting a Uniform Resource Locator (URL), a method and apparatus for setting up a connection, and a communication system are disclosed. The URL reporting method includes obtaining an Internet Protocol (IP) address and static information; registering the IP address and the static information with a Dynamic Domain Name System (DDNS) server; constructing a first connection request URL that carries the static information; and reporting the first connection request URL to an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). | 06-09-2011 |
20110145417 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD - There are provided a portable terminal device and a communication device connect control method that enable lessening of a time for waiting device search processing and processing for acquiring a DDD or an SDD of a normally-connected device. A device connect management unit | 06-16-2011 |
20110145418 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING TO VIRTUAL MACHINES, VIA A DESIGNATED WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DRIVER, ACCESS TO DATA ASSOCIATED WITH A CONNECTION TO A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - The methods and systems described herein are directed to providing, to virtual machines, access to data associated with a connection to a wireless local area network, in a computing device executing a hypervisor hosting a first virtual machine and a second virtual machine. A first driver executed by a first virtual machine of the first physical computing device establishes a network connection to a second physical computing device, via a wireless local area network interface of the first physical computing device. The first driver receives from a second driver executed by a second virtual machine of the first physical computing device, a request for a characteristic of the network connection. The first driver provides, responsive to the request, data comprising the requested characteristic to the second driver. | 06-16-2011 |
20110145419 | INTER-DEVICE MOBILITY SESSION RELEASE - A method and apparatus for performing session release are provided. For a transferred communication session between a plurality of wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) and a remote device, wherein at least one of the WTRUs performs the transferred communication session in association with a first Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and at least one other of the WTRUs performs the transferred communication session in association with a second IMS, session release may include releasing the transferred communication session, a portion thereof, one or more of the WTRUs, or a collaborative session associated with the transferred communication session while maintaining service continuity. Any one of the plurality of WTRUs or the remote device may initiate the session release by transmitting a release request. Any one of the plurality of WTRUs may control the transferred communication session and may modify or reject a release request. | 06-16-2011 |
20110153834 | Transparent Recovery of Transport Connections Using Packet Translation Techniques - Methods and apparatuses, including computer program products, are described for transparent recovery of transport connections. The method includes collecting a state associated with a first connection between a first server and a remote server via a first network socket and transmitting the state from a first networking module to a second networking module. The method includes storing the state, opening a second network socket based on failure of the first networking module, intercepting outbound packets associated with a request to initiate a second connection between the first server and the remote server via the second socket, modifying the intercepted packets based on the state, and transmitting the modified packets to the remote server to elicit an acknowledgement to maintain the first connection. The method includes receiving packets associated with the acknowledgment from the remote server, and modifying the received packets to acknowledge the request to initiate the second connection. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153835 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTIONS - The present invention relates to a system and method for controlling peer-to-peer connections in a Peer-to-Peer (P2P) streaming application for individual Internet Service Provider (ISP) networks over a localized overlay. The system may include a tracker local to a first ISP network configured to select edge peers among local peers of the first ISP network. The selected edge peers have external connections to peers outside the first ISP network in order to transfer sub-streams to or from the first ISP network, and the local peers not selected as edge peers have internal connections to other local peers within the first ISP network to transfer the sub-streams over the localized overlay. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153836 | DYNAMIC ATTRIBUTES FOR MOBILE BUSINESS OBJECTS - Embodiments of the present invention relate to system, method, computer program product embodiments and combinations and sub-combinations thereof for generating dynamic attribute elements and dynamic attributes for MBOs. An embodiment includes generating dynamic attribute elements for MBO metadata in a manner that enables a mobile application to directly access and modify dynamic attributes included within the dynamic attribute elements. In an embodiment, dynamic attributes are included within the dynamic attribute elements arbitrarily to synchronization sessions of a server and a mobile application. The embodiment also allows the mobile application to set a value associated with a dynamic attribute. Another embodiment includes embedding a dynamic attributes entity in generated client code and downloading dynamic MBO attributes and associated metadata when the client synchronizes with the server. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153837 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGEMENT OF ETHERNET PREMISE DEVICES - A system and method for managing customer premise equipment (CPE) devices. A wake signal is issued to the CPE device. Action parameters are communicated to the CPE device in response to receiving acknowledgement of the wake signal from the CPE device. A management session is established with the CPE device utilizing an address for secure communications in response to the CPE device acknowledging the action parameters. Communications are performed through the management session to perform operation, administration, and maintenance of the CPE device. The management session with the CPE device is terminated. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153838 | SESSION MONITORING OF VIRTUAL DESKTOPS IN A VIRTUAL MACHINE FARM - Disclosed are techniques for determining the status of virtual machine sessions on a computing device for a user by reading from a memory location written to by a program executing within a virtual machine. The memory location is preferably a registry key that contains the status of a remote user session operating on a guest operating system operational on the virtual machine, the virtual machine executing in a virtual environment comprising a plurality of virtual machines operating on a computing device. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153839 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SERVER SURGE PROTECTION IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for providing connection surge protection to one or more servers by an intermediary multi-core system. A packet processing engine of a multi-core device deployed as an intermediary between a plurality of clients and one or more servers determines an estimated number of total pending requests received by all packet processing engines based on a value of a local counter of received requests, the total number of pending requests received by all other packet processing engines at a last predetermined interval, and a rate of change of the total number of pending requests received by all other packet processing engines multiplied by the time since the last predetermined interval. The packet processing engine applies a surge protection policy to received pending requests responsive to the determined estimated number of total pending requests. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153840 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GSLB MEP CONNECTION MANAGEMENT ACROSS MULTIPLE CORE APPLIANCES - The present disclosure presents systems and methods for obtaining metric information by a multi-core GSLB intermediary device and providing global server load balancing services using the obtained information. A first core of a multi-core GSLB appliance establishes a transport layer connection to a remote load balancer at a site of a plurality of sites. The first core transmits a message to each of the other cores of the multi-core GSLB appliance that that the first core is a master core for receiving metric information from the load balancer. The first core receives metric information of the remote site from the load balancer. The first core propagates the metric information to each of the other cores of the GSLB appliance. A GSLB virtual server on a slave core receives a DNS request. The GSLB virtual server determines a DNS resolution for the DNS request based on the metric information. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153841 | OPERATION SETTING METHOD OF RELAY APPARATUS, RELAY APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORED WITH PROGRAM - A manipulation terminal is connected to a relay apparatus which is a target of operation setting, through a communication cable, and an address resolution request of which a target is an arbitrary IP address is broadcast-transmitted to the relay apparatus by the manipulation terminal. On the other hand, the relay apparatus performs a process of storing the target address of the address resolution request as a communication address and returning a MAC address of the relay apparatus to the manipulation terminal. A communication session is established between the manipulation terminal and the relay apparatus using the MAC address returned in this way, and the manipulation terminal performs the operation setting process through telnet. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153842 | CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR MULTIMEDIA STREAMING OVER A WIRELESS BROADBAND NETWORK - A control device, which is for use during multimedia streaming between a user terminal and a base station over a wireless broadband network, includes a parsing unit, a computing unit and a processing unit. The parsing unit parses a session signal for establishing a multimedia streaming session so as to acquire a call ID and a media descriptor of the multimedia streaming session. The computing unit receives the media descriptor thus acquired by the parsing unit, and computes a bandwidth needed for the multimedia streaming session based on the media descriptor. The processing unit receives the call ID and the bandwidth, and transmits a quality-of-service request signal to the base station according to the bandwidth and corresponding to the multimedia streaming session so as to request the base station to provide a quality of service corresponding to the bandwidth during the multimedia streaming session. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153843 | Multimedia Communication Using Co-Located Care of Address for Bearer Traffic - In a wireless communications system in which a mobile node seeks a communication session with a correspondent node by first signaling for initialization of the communication session through a first data path via an intermediate node. Thereafter, contents of the communication is established through a second data path in which the mobile node and the correspondent node communicate straightforwardly without going through the intermediate node. | 06-23-2011 |
20110161498 | SELF-SERVICE TERMINAL - A self-service terminal comprises: a plurality of session initiation devices, each associated with an initiation token, so that a customer can initiate a transaction using one of a plurality of different initiation tokens. The terminal further comprises a plurality of session suppliers, each session supplier being associated with one of the session initiation devices, and each session supplier being operable: (i) to receive from its associated session initiation device, information from an initiation token provided by a customer, and (ii) to create an electronic access token based on the received information. The terminal also comprises a session supplier aggregate operable to receive an electronic access token from one of the session suppliers for each session to be created; and a session component operable (i) to receive the electronic access token from the session supplier aggregate and (ii) to create a session based on the received electronic access token. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161499 | NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION METHOD, NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR MEDIA STREAMING - A network address translation method includes: configuring a network address translator (NAT) to receive a first control signal from a first user end indicating an intent to conduct media streaming, a media description in the first control signal including a private first address and a private first port; configuring the NAT to modify the first address and the first port to a public second address and a public second port, and to send a second control signal containing a media description that includes the second address and the second port to a control signal server; and configuring the NAT to receive a third control signal sent in response from a second user end via the control signal server, parse a media description in the third control signal to obtain a public third address and a public third port, and establish an address translation rule using the addresses and ports. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161500 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING PORTS FOR RTSP ACROSS CORES IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for systems and methods for handling real-time streaming protocol sessions by an intermediary multi-core system. When a multi-core intermediary receives a setup request for a real-time streaming protocol session, the intermediary processes and forwards the request to a server providing the streaming media. The server sets up an RTSP session and transmits a session identification to the multi-core intermediary. A core of the intermediary receives the transmitted session identification and determines an owner core of the session, based on a hash of the session identification. The core transmits the session information to the determined owner core, which selects two consecutive ports on which to establish listening services. The owner core then notifies all other cores to establish listening services on the same consecutive ports, such that any core that receives an RTSP control message from a client can handle it properly. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161501 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING DATA BETWEEN TWO HOSTS - A method for communicating video data between at least a first host and a second host comprises: identifying, at a server, an address of the first host, to which the second host may communicate video data, and a sequence number expected by a network security system coupled between the first host and the server; and communicating, from the second host to the first host, video data using the address of the first host and the sequence number expected. The method may further comprise: identifying, at the server, an address of the second host, to which the first host may communicate video data, and a second sequence number expected by a network security system coupled between the second host and the server; and communicating, from the first host to the second host, video data using the address of the second host and the second expected sequence number. The second host may be adapted to perform the act of communicating without use of an intermediate server. The method may also further comprise communicating periodically, from the first host to the server, through the network security system, so as to maintain an open communication channel through the network security system to the first host at the address of the first host. The address of the first host may include address information and port information. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161502 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACTIVATING NETWORK STORAGE, MESSAGE PROCESSING SERVER, AND CLIENT - A method for activating network storage includes: a message processing server receives a network storage request from a client; the message processing server establishes a session with a history function (HF) according to the network storage request, and sends the content from the session in which the client participates to the HF through the session with the HF. A system for activating network storage, a message processing server, and a client are also provided. With the present invention, the network storage is implemented more conveniently, and the user experience is improved. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161503 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIPLE PHYSICAL USE OF A SINGLE IDENTIFIER CODE SHARED BY A GROUP OF TERMINALS IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A method for conducting communication between a plurality of terminals and at least one control center via a network, the terminals being combined into a group, with all the terminals in that group having the same identifier code within the network, and attachment to the network and establishment of a connection between an individual terminal and the control center taking place within a predetermined time window with subsequent terminating of the connection and detachment from the network, and attachment to the network and establishment of a connection between the next terminal in that group and the control center taking place within the following time window, so that after a predeterminable time period has elapsed all the terminals assigned to the group were or could have been connected to the control center at least once. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161504 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING SESSION INFORMATION - A method and an apparatus for identifying session information are disclosed by the present invention, wherein the method includes: a sending end PCRF sends an S9 session message to a receiving end PCRF in order to transmit the Diameter session information, wherein the S9 session message carries the identification information identifying the Diameter session uniquely; the receiving end PCRF determines the Diameter session corresponding to the Diameter session information carried by the S9 session message according to the identification information. By the present invention, when the receiving end PCRF issues the policy control information, it issues the policy control information to a corresponding Gxx session or AF session according to the unique identification information carried by the S9 session, thereby it can consummate the application flow of the realization of the S9 roaming interface in the policy charging control frame. | 06-30-2011 |
20110167160 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A MULTIMEDIA GATEWAY COMPRISING AN IMSI - A multimedia gateway that has an ISIM is provided. The multimedia gateway comprises: request receiving means for receiving, from a client terminal, a request message that specifies a destination IMS AS and a communications protocol, and identifying an IMPU assigned to the client terminal, establishing means for establishing a session for communication with the IMS AS by means of the communications protocol, and establishing a connection with the IMS AS over the session, authentication information sending means for sending authentication information derived from the ISIM that contains the identified IMPU to the IMS AS, request sending means for sending the request message together with the identified IMPU to the IMS AS through the connection, response receiving means for receiving a response message from the IMS AS through the connection as a response to the request message, and response sending means for sending the response message to the client terminal. | 07-07-2011 |
20110167161 | METHOD OF LOCATING NAS CONTEXT - A method of locating NAS context relating to a network access server session in a communication network is provided, the method comprising receiving an Accounting Stop Request for a PDP context associated to a network access server session, comparing an Accounting Session ID implemented in the Accounting Stop Request with Accounting Session IDs associated with active network access server sessions, in case that no matching Accounting Session ID is found, determining whether a value of an identification parameter implemented in the received Accounting Stop Request matches a value of a corresponding identification parameter associated with an active network access server session, and locating a NAS context based on the result of matching identification parameters. | 07-07-2011 |
20110167162 | System for the Internet Connections, and Server for Routing Connection to a Client Machine - The purpose of the present invention is to provide an Internet connection system which is capable of benefiting from the IPv6 by relatively easy means and in which manufacturers of client-side devices can create added values for users. IPv6 packets are transmitted by a tunneling connection between a home network and a server on the Internet. Also terminal devices present in the home network can be uniquely recognized and controlled from outside via the server. Since all communications are performed via the server on the Internet regardless of the carrier and the ISP, the terminal device and all connections to the terminal device can be freely configured and controlled by the owner or the manufacturer of the server on the Internet. | 07-07-2011 |
20110173331 | SEAMLESSLY TRANSFERRING A COMMUNICATION - Seamlessly transferring a communication. At least one communication is established between a first device and a second device. The at least one communication is transferred from the second device to a third device without interrupting the at least one communication and without disconnecting the at least one communication from the first device. | 07-14-2011 |
20110173332 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL IN MULTI-PDN SCENARIO - A method for implementing Policy and Charging Control (PCC) in a multi-Packet Data Network (PDN) scenario is disclosed. The method includes: a Visited Policy Control and Charging Rules Function (VPCRF) receives PCC rules and the associated S9 sub-session information from a Home Policy Control and Charging Rules Function (HPCRF), and sends the PCC rules according to the associated S9 sub-session information. The S9 session message carries associated S9 sub-session information, and therefore, in a multi-PDN scenario, the S9 session can distinguish and handle creation, modification and deletion of the Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session and the gateway control session, and the VPCRF can understand the information delivered by the HPCRF, and send the information to the correct Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) or Bearer Binding and Event Reporting Function (BBERF) for enforcement; moreover, the VPCRF can report the PDN connection release information to the HPCRF, and the HPCRF releases the corresponding PDN connection, thus avoiding ineffective occupation of resources and ensuring correct policies. | 07-14-2011 |
20110179180 | COMMUNICATION SESSIONS AMONG DEVICES AND INTERFACES WITH MIXED CAPABILITIES - Users of various devices may participate in communication sessions, but only if the interfaces and components of such devices feature a minimum set of capabilities involved in the communication session type; e.g., in order to participate in a teleconference, the device of every user has to be capable of sending and receiving audio. Instead, a communication session server may automatically convert session items received from each user into interface-specific representations for each other user, based on the capabilities of the interface and device of the other user. For example, speech recognition may transform speech to text output; speech synthesis may transform text input to speech; and video recognition may identify individuals and gestures in a video stream and represent this information as text. The server may therefore host a “mixed” communication session, where each user may fully participate irrespective of the capabilities of the chosen device and interface. | 07-21-2011 |
20110179181 | Identifying User Role in IP Multimedia Subsystem - A Session Initiation Protocol Application Server for use within an IP Multimedia Subsystem. The Application Server comprises a receiving unit for receiving a Session Initiation Protocol message from a Serving Call Session Control Function, the Serving Call Session Control Function serving an IP Multimedia Subsystem user and the message containing within a message header an explicit identification of said user. A processing unit determines an action to be applied to said message and includes within a header of the message a role value defining a role of said user in respect of the action. A transmitter unit returns the message including the role value to said Serving Call Session Control Function. | 07-21-2011 |
20110179182 | METHOD FOR PAIRING A COMPUTER WITH A VIDEO CONFERENCE DEVICE - A method including: generating a random identification token on a computer, said identification token identifying the computer; modulating the identification token to an audio signal on the computer; causing, with the computer, a speaker to emit the audio signal; receiving, at video conference device, the audio signal with a microphone associated with the video conference device; demodulating the audio signal to the identification token in the video conference device; sending at least the identification token and a unique identifier of the video conference device to the computer; and establishing a communication session through a communication network, that both the computer and video conference device are communicatively connected to, from the computer to the video conference device enabling control of, and data transfer to, the video conference device from the computer. | 07-21-2011 |
20110179183 | NETWORK ADAPTER WITH TCP SUPPORT - A network adapter and corresponding method for its use are disclosed. The network adapter has an operational mode that allows a host CPU to offload transmission of a block of data to the adapter. The adapter segments the block into fragments, and builds a data packet for each fragment. The adapter transmits these packets with an adapter-implemented flow control. This flow control uses: a context engine that tracks flow control variables for a “context” established for the block; a context memory for storing the variables; and a receive filter that updates flow control information for the block based on ACK packets received from the remote endpoint receiving the data packets. Because the network adapter implements flow control for data blocks that the network adapter segments, intermediate ACK packets corresponding to that block can be intercepted by the adapter, before they pass to the host, conserving host resources. An added advantage is that the host CPU can offload data blocks larger than the remote endpoint's receive window size, since the adapter can follow the transmit window and transmit packets at appropriate intervals. This further decreases load on the host CPU, decreases latency, and improves bandwidth utilization. | 07-21-2011 |
20110185068 | MULTI-LINK REMOTE PROTOCOL - In various embodiments, a remote client is allowed to access at least a part of a connection service located on alternate sources other than the primary remote presentation server. In some embodiments, the remote presentation virtual channels may be split into multiple connections with the purpose of allowing better flow control. Some embodiments may be implemented in a virtual machine environment for cases in which the data to be transferred through a data channel is located in the host virtual machine partition but the remote endpoint is located on the guest virtual machine partition. | 07-28-2011 |
20110185069 | Method For Establishing A Local Media Connection In A Communication System - The present invention relates to a method for deciding, in an IP-based communication system, whether a local media/media release is allowed between a first and at least a second terminal. The method is characterized in that the decision is based on information established by an application server in an multimedia core network. The present invention further also relates to a session border controller unit, a session border controller, an application server and a computer program product for performing said method. | 07-28-2011 |
20110185070 | METHOD AND DEVICE OF SESSION CONTROL - A method and device of session control are used to resolve the problem that when there is a failure in the session control function bound with the user, the UE can not re-login in time or the session can not be continued. In the flow of the user initial login, an address information of P-CSCF bound with the user in HSS is saved, so that when the user is called, an available S-CSCF can get the address information of P-CSCF bound with the called user from the HSS, and inform the user to do re-initial login according to the address information of P-CSCF or complete the session continuation; further, the address information of the user in D-HSS is saved, so that when the user is called, an available A-CSCF can get the address information of the called user from the D-HSS, and inform the user to do re-initial login according to the address information of the called user or complete the session continuation. | 07-28-2011 |
20110191478 | QUICK ACCESS DISPLAY - A quick access display with a small screen is physically attached to the outside of a laptop computer. Selected and key information in formatted display frames is electronically pushed to the quick access display by an application program loaded to run on the laptop computer's operating system. The formatted display frames are communicated over a universal serial bus (USB), or wirelessly by radio frequency identification (RFID) chips, BLUETOOTH, or IEEE-802.11 Wi-Fi. Operating power for the quick access display is provided by long-life watch batteries and the electronics are implemented in low power MOS technologies. | 08-04-2011 |
20110191479 | SYSTEM FOR RAPIDLY ESTABLISHING HUMAN/MACHINE COMMUNICATION LINKS BY MAINTAINING SIMULTANEOUS AWARENESS OF MULTIPLE CALL-HOST ENDPOINT-STATES - A method and system are provided that enhance human/machine communication so as to more closely approximate natural human/human communication by more effectively establishing communications links for human-interactive media. Specifically, the speed and quality of the connection are improved by the method and system, resulting in a more natural user experience. The method includes a communication system receiving a call request from a requestor. The communication system has a Connection Proxy (CP) and a plurality of Endpoints (EPs). The CP has an endpoint state table (EST) configured to store state information associated with each of the plurality of endpoints (EPs). Based on the call request, the CP selects an EP using the EST. If the selected EP accepts the requested communications link, the CP establishes a communications link that excludes the CP itself. The CP also updates the EST based on a response to the call request from the selected EP. | 08-04-2011 |
20110191480 | PACKET-BASED DIGITAL DISPLAY INTERFACE SIGNAL MAPPING TO MICRO SERIAL INTERFACE - A passive cable adaptor for connecting a data source device with a display device is described. The adaptor has a packet-based interface connector at one end, the connector having a positive main link pin, a negative main link pin, a positive auxiliary channel pin, and a negative auxiliary channel pin. At the other end is a micro serial interface connector, wherein multimedia content is transmitted over the cable adaptor and electrical power is supplied over the cable adaptor simultaneously. The cable adaptor has an auxiliary and hot plug detect (HPD) controller utilized to map the auxiliary channel and HPD signals of the packet-based digital display to the micro serial interface ID signal. | 08-04-2011 |
20110191481 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSFERRING DATA - Data transfer systems and methods are disclosed. A method of transferring data includes initiating a session for transferring data, establishing a session connection between a first gateway and a second gateway, buffering a predetermined amount of data received by the first gateway, generating a data block using a session-layer protocol when the predetermined amount of data is buffered, and transmitting the data block from the first gateway to the second gateway over the session connection. A system for transferring data includes a first gateway, a second gateway, and a network. The first gateway includes memory for buffering received data and a processor operable to execute a session-layer protocol for generating a data block when a predetermined amount of data is buffered. The first gateway is configured to transmit the data block to the second gateway via the network during a session. | 08-04-2011 |
20110196969 | IN-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH SOCIAL NETWORKING - Generally described, aspects of the disclosed subject matter are directed to managing communications from a mobile device. In accordance with one embodiment, a method for establishing a communication session with a contact is provided. The method includes causing information about at least one contact associated with the user to be displayed on the mobile device and receiving input to initiate a communication session with the contact. Then, if the identified contact is associated with a CB radio, a CB based communication session is established in which audio is transmitted and received from the mobile device using a CB radio communication unit. On the other hand, if the identified contact is associated with a remote device capable of performing data-based communications, a data-based communication session is established and which data is transmitted and received in accordance with IP-based protocols. | 08-11-2011 |
20110196970 | REDIRECTION COMMUNICATION - A method and system of communicating data to or from a remote computer. The remote computer is accessed by a CPU as though it were a local IDE controller attached to a local IDE device. A peripheral device distinct from the CPU provides a set of virtual IDE device registers and an IDE controller to the central processing unit. The peripheral device receives data written to the set of virtual IDE device registers, and transmits the data into a network, addressed for reception by the remote computer. The remote computer receives the data, interprets it, and performs operations upon a mirror set of device data. The remote computer then responds, and transmits its response across the network to the peripheral device. The peripheral device communicates the response to the CPU in a fashion identical to an physical IDE controller attached to a physical IDE device. | 08-11-2011 |
20110202660 | DIVERSE SOURCE MESSAGE ASSOCIATION - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node and machine-readable storage medium including a policy and charging rules node (PCRN) receiving a plurality of related service requests from different devices. The PCRN may proceed to generate a policy and charging control (PCC) rule based on at least one service request and other information stored in the PCRN if a mate service request does not arrive during the duration of a waiting timer. If the mate service request arrives subsequent to the expiry of the waiting timer, the PCRN may then generate a subsequent PCC rule to replace the previously generated rule, with the new PCC rule incorporating information from both of the mate service requests. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202661 | SESSION-BASED TELECOMMUNICATIONS - A method for establishing bi-directional and session-based communication between IMS and GSM subscribers with the purpose of sending text information by using the SIP protocol and USSD services. The method defines an IP-USSD gateway that converts messages between the SIP and USSD protocols before relaying them. The communication session can be initiated by either party; the GSM subscriber or the IMS subscriber. A message, which an SIP client has sent, is thereby converted into a USSD message and conveyed to the GSM subscriber. Thus, the GSM subscriber can read the USSD message sent to the mobile phone, and in addition can see the name and surname of the sender and write an answer. Similarly, the SIP subscriber can read the message received and write an answer. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202662 | NETWORK NODE FOR AN AD-HOC NETWORK AND PROCESS FOR PROVIDING APPLICATION SERVICES IN AN AD-HOC NETWORK - A network node for an ad-hoc network having a plurality of network nodes of the same type, which provide one another with application services via wireless connections. The network node is configured to generate a list of all application services provided to it by other network nodes with associated quality classes and makes the list available to other network nodes as a list of the application services provided by it with such quality classes. At least one of the quality classes is dependent on movement vectors of at least one wireless connection, via which the respective application service is provided. The invention also relates to a method for providing application services in an ad-hoc network. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202663 | Method and Apparatus for Mobility Agent Recovery - Techniques for recovering Mobile Internet Protocol (IP) session(s) of a mobility agent in a Mobile IP network are described herein. In one embodiment of the invention, for each mobility session associated with a mobility agent, the mobility agent distributively backs up mobility agent specific information to the mobility agent peer associated with that mobility session. The mobility agent specific information is not used by the mobility agent peer. Upon the mobility agent inadvertently losing at least one mobility session, the mobility agent recovers the stored mobility agent specific information associated with those sessions from the mobility agent peers respectively associated with those sessions. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202664 | Method and Apparatus for Mobility Agent Recovery - Techniques for recovering Mobile Internet Protocol (IP) session(s) of a mobility agent in a Mobile IP network are described herein. In one embodiment of the invention, for each mobility session associated with a mobility agent, the mobility agent distributively backs up mobility agent specific information to the mobility agent peer associated with that mobility session. The mobility agent specific information is not used by the mobility agent peer. Upon the mobility agent inadvertently losing at least one mobility session, the mobility agent recovers the stored mobility agent specific information associated with those sessions from the mobility agent peers respectively associated with those sessions. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202665 | Establishing Unique Sessions for DNS Subscribers - A system establishes virtual DNS servers that are supported by a DNS server. Target IP addresses are assigned for the virtual DNS servers. Network capable devices are uniquely assigned to the virtual DNS servers for domain name resolution. Each network capable device accesses the communication network through a corresponding network device associated with a corresponding source IP address. A client's service plan is assigned to a first network capable device used by the client. The service plan is implemented through a DNS request under a session established between the first network capable device and its assigned first virtual DNS server. The session is uniquely identified by a first source IP address of a first network device used by the first network capable device to access the communication network and a first target IP address of the first virtual DNS server. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202666 | SESSION ESTABLISHMENT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for establishing a communication session in an IMS Centralized Services communication network. A Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server (SCC AS) receives a request from an originating device to establish a session with a target device. The request includes a plurality of codec identifiers that could be used by the originating device. The SCC AS sends a second request to establish the session to the target device. The SCC AS subsequently receives, from an intermediate node between the SCC AS and the target device, an invite message. The invite message includes an indication that a codec identifier has been selected from the plurality of codec identifiers. The SCC AS then sends a message to the intermediate node instructing the intermediate node to establish the session. | 08-18-2011 |
20110208866 | ADVANCED NETWORK CHARACTERIZATION - Some embodiments include a method for determining whether to establish a connection between a computer and a network. In some embodiments, the method includes: receiving first network information from a network; determining a first trust level for the network by matching the network information to provisioning information, wherein the provisioning information indicates the first trust level and an authentication method of the network; verifying that network supports the authentication method, wherein the verifying includes exchanging information with the network; after verifying that the network supports the authentication method, establishing a connection to the network, wherein the connection provides access to an Internet. | 08-25-2011 |
20110208867 | Performing Message Payload Processing Functions In A Network Element On Behalf Of An Application - A method is disclosed for performing message payload processing functions in a network element on behalf of an application. According to one aspect, a network element intercepts data packets comprising network layer or transport layer headers having an address of a destination which destination differs from the network element. The network element determines whether information contained in layer | 08-25-2011 |
20110208868 | PROACTIVE PRE-PROVISIONING FOR A CONTENT SHARING SESSION - An apparatus includes a communication interface and a controller associated with the communication interface where the controller is further configured to determine an affinity between a first device and at least one other device and create, based at least in part upon the determined affinity, one or more pre-provision packages. These pre-provision packages include data likely to be shared in the event that a content sharing session is ultimately entered into. The one or more pre-provision packages are then provided for storage upon at least one of the first device and the at least one other device. Then, when a request from the first device to engage in a content sharing session with the at least one other device is received, access to the one or more pre-provision packages is provided to at least one of the first device and the at least one other device. | 08-25-2011 |
20110213887 | SCHEDULABLE TRANSPORT FOR CONTRIBUTION SERVICES - In one embodiment a method includes receiving a request to schedule an audiovisual data streaming session, the request including an identifier of an encoder, a session time and an identifier of an invitee, generating a command configured to cause the encoder to begin encoding audiovisual content at the session time, and to stream encoded audiovisual content via the network, receiving an indication that the invitee has joined the audiovisual data streaming session, and generating a command configured to cause an audiovisual decoder designated by the invitee to begin decoding the encoded audiovisual content upon receipt of the encoded audiovisual content. | 09-01-2011 |
20110219121 | RESILIENT ROUTING FOR SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Resilient routing management approaches are provided based on primary/backup and failover/failback relationships in a clustered network environment, where each user and/or resource is assigned to a primary cluster and at least one backup cluster. A distributed handover mechanism enables global knowledge of primary/backup relationships between clusters and their assigned users or resources. | 09-08-2011 |
20110219122 | REMOTE CONTENT CLASSIFICATION AND TRANSMISSION USING MULTIPLE TRANSPORT CHANNELS - In various embodiments, methods and systems are disclosed for the implementation of multiple transport channels between the client and server. Each of the channels may be adapted to efficiently communicate data for a particular data type and thus be particularly well suited for its data-element characteristics and the detected link characteristics between the client and server. | 09-08-2011 |
20110219123 | NETWORK FIREWALL AND NAT TRAVERSAL FOR TCP AND RELATED PROTOCOLS - A message passing protocol allows two clients to establish a connection even when the clients are behind different NAT devices such as NAT firewalls. Beneficially, the protocol does not require that either client has knowledge of where the other client is located (e.g., behind the same NAT device or behind a different NAT device). When two clients want to establish a connection, the clients exchange identifying information with each other by passing the information through a rendezvous server. Based on the identifying information, each client determines and sends a plurality of synchronization packets to a number of different predicted addresses. When synchronization packets reach the actual addresses of both devices, a connection can be established between the clients. | 09-08-2011 |
20110219124 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TWO WAY COMMUNICATION AND CONTROLLING CONTENT IN A WEB BROWSER - A system and method for connected devices over a network includes: receiving, by an address registration server, a communication from a host device and a communication from an endpoint device; determining whether the host device and the endpoint device are connected to a single local network and whether the host device and the endpoint device are each executing a compatible application; and facilitating a network connection between the endpoint device and the host device over the local network by providing a private network address of the endpoint device to the host device. | 09-08-2011 |
20110219125 | Endoscopy device with integrated RFID and external network capability - A unit of equipment designed for use in endoscopic surgery includes radio frequency identification (RFID) circuitry and a network interface. The RFID circuitry can be used to store information of various types, such as component usage tracking information, user preferences, usage logs, error logs, device settings, etc. The network interface allows the unit to communicate over an external network with a remote server. Information, such as information stored in the RFID circuitry or in a separate memory, may be sent over the network to a desired destination, such as a server operated by the manufacturer of the equipment. | 09-08-2011 |
20110225302 | PARALLEL STREAMING - Embodiments of the present invention set forth techniques for a content player to stream a media file using multiple network connections. To stream the media file, the content player downloads metadata associated with a requested media file, establishes a network connection with multiple content servers (or multiple network connections with a single content server or both) and begins requesting portions of the media file. In response, the requested portions are transmitted to the content player. The content player may employ a predictive multi-connection scheduling approach to determine which network connection to use in downloading a given chunk. | 09-15-2011 |
20110225303 | FCIP COMMUNICATIONS WITH LOAD SHARING AND FAILOVER - An IP gateway device establishes distinct TCP sessions within a single FCIP tunnel, each TCP session being designated for a different priority of service (e.g., high, medium, low), plus a control stream. Each TCP session has its own TCP stack and its own settings for VLAN Tagging (IEEE 802.1Q), quality of service (IEEE 802.1P) and Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP). By distributing data streams assigned to different priorities of service into different TCP sessions within the FCIP tunnel, an IP gateway device can preserve the distinctions between the data stream priorities while the data traffic is within the IP network. By further distributing the data streams between different circuits and trunks by use of multiple circuits, failover and load balancing can occur within the FCIP tunnels. | 09-15-2011 |
20110225304 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING A VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL CONNECTION BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A system and method for establishing and maintaining a voice over internet protocol connection between wireless devices, in one example embodiment, may comprise a receiving module to receive a communication device identifier, and a request to establish a communication data link to another communication device. The communication device identifier may initially be received by a terminal from the communication device over a wireless data link connecting the communication device and the terminal. Subsequently, the terminal network address may be associated with the terminal, which received the communication device identifier. A processing module may be utilized to determine whether another communication device is reachable over a wireless data link to another terminal based on information stored in a register. Further, a communication module may be utilized to establish the communication data link between one communication device and another communication device subsequent to determining that another communication device is reachable by a terminal over the wireless data link. | 09-15-2011 |
20110225305 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING GROUP OWNER INTENT - A system comprising a first wireless device which comprises a first group owner intent determination unit. The first group owner intent determination unit is configured to determine a group owner intent value of the first wireless device based on: whether the first wireless device is configured to access a coexisting wireless network, the power remaining in the first wireless device at the time the group owner intent value determination is made, whether the first wireless device is a group owner in another peer to peer group, a received signal strength indication of the first wireless device, and/or whether the first wireless device is required to perform a cross-connection between an infrastructure basic service set and a peer to peer group. | 09-15-2011 |
20110225306 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR TRIGGERING A SERVICE NODE TO INITIATE A SESSION WITH A POLICY CHARGING AND RULES FUNCTION - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for initiating a session. The method includes steps occurring at a policy charging and rules function (PCRF) node. The method also includes determining, independent of contact from a service node, that the service node requires policy information. The method further includes in response to determining that the service node requires policy information, communicating a session independent trigger message to the service node, wherein the trigger message comprises information instructing the service node to initiate a session with the PCRF node to obtain the policy information from the PCRF node. | 09-15-2011 |
20110225307 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING RESPONSES WHEN EXECUTING A SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL OPERATION - An apparatus and method for reducing responses when executing a session protocol operation is disclosed. In accordance with an embodiment of the disclosure, a mobile device generates a binary encoded message having an indication from which a server can determine a session protocol operation to be performed without communicating all responses for the SIP transaction. The binary encoded message is sent from the mobile device and received by the server. In accordance with an embodiment of the disclosure, the server determines, based on the indication in the binary encoded message, the SIP transaction to be performed without communicating all SIP responses relating to the SIP transaction. The server then attempts the SIP transaction. By reducing the number of SIP responses, communication resources for the mobile device can be conserved. Also battery power for the mobile device can be conserved apparatus and method for reducing responses when executing a session initiation protocol operation | 09-15-2011 |
20110231556 | USING A PROPERTY OF A RECEIVED SIGNAL TO DETERMINE A DEVICE FOR FORMING A NETWORK CONNECTION - The described embodiments include an electronic device that uses a property of received signals to determine another device for forming a network connection. During operation, the electronic device receives a signal from each of two or more other devices. The electronic device then compares a property of each received signal to the other received signals to determine a signal that has a property most like a target property. Next, the electronic device selects the other device that was the source of the determined signal and forms the network connection with the selected other device. | 09-22-2011 |
20110231557 | Automatic Notification System and Process - Receiving a notification message by a mobile subscriber can include establishing a session with a notification service; maintaining a persistent communication connection with the notification service after the session is established; subscribing to a node hosted by the notification service, wherein the node is pre-provisioned for use by a mobile subscriber; and receiving from the notification service a notification message corresponding to the subscribed node. Further, a message can be transmitted over the communication connection to the notification service at a predetermined interval and it can be determined whether the communication connection is viable. Additionally, it can be determined that the communication connection is no longer viable if no response is received from the notification service, the period of the predetermined interval can be decreased, and another session with the notification service can be established. | 09-22-2011 |
20110231558 | Method and Apparatus for Establishing a POC Session - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of establishing a Push-to-talk over Cellular (PoC) communication session between an inviting PoC client and at least one invited PoC client using an IP Multimedia Subsystem network. The method comprises using the pre-established session procedure to negotiate media parameters between the inviting PoC client and a participating PoC server for the inviting PoC client. At the inviting PoC client, sending a Talk Burst Control Protocol (TBCP) or Media Burst Control Protocol (MBCP) message directly to its participating PoC server, the TBCP or MBCP message containing the PoC address of the at least one invited PoC client. At said participating PoC Server, in response to receipt of the TBCP or MBCP message, generating a SIP INVITE message and sending the SIP INVITE message towards a participating PoC server for the at least one invited PoC client. | 09-22-2011 |
20110238843 | DAMPENING INTERFACE FLAPPING - A device may include a control module and a line card. The control module may be configured to run a routing protocol to obtain routing information from network devices. The line card may include a processor. The processor may be configured to establish a bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) session with a remote device, determine whether an interface associated with the BFD session is flapping, terminate the BFD session when the interface is flapping, disable the interface when the interface is flapping, re-enable the interface after a dampening recovery period elapses, reestablish the BFD session, and send a BFD packet to the remote device. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238844 | Connection Management for M2M Device in A Mobile Communication Network - There is provided a method that relates to the setting up and/or maintaining of a connection between a machine-to-machine (M2M) device and a mobile communication network. In order to be able to adapt the connection management to the requirements of the M2M device, the M2M device may transmit an indication that it is an M2M device to the mobile communication network. At least one network node of the mobile communication network controls the setting up and/or the maintaining of the connection based on the indication. The network node may route a request for setting up the connection to a further network node based on the indication. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238845 | Correlation of Sessions in Case of Session Transfer in IMS Domain - The invention relates to session control in an IMS domain of a communications network and more particularly to techniques for performing session transfer in an IMS control node (SCC AS) for controlling centralized services in an IMS domain. One embodiment of an SCC AS ( | 09-29-2011 |
20110238846 | METHOD AND MOBILE USER EQUIPMENT FOR HANDLING MEDIA TYPES OF A COMMUNICATION SESSION IN AN IMS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND AN IMS NIDE - A method of and mobile User Equipment, UE, ( | 09-29-2011 |
20110246654 | Wireless Shared Resource Computing - The formation of a wireless device group for use in the shared resource computing environment involves establishing a wireless communication connection between a host wireless interface device and each of one or more dependent wireless interface devices, in which each dependent wireless interface devices is configured to not directly communicate with a computing device. Another wireless communication connection is established between the host wireless interface device and the computing device when the host wireless interface device is within a host connection distance of the computing device. | 10-06-2011 |
20110246655 | Remote Session Control - A method and system for remote session control of IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) sessions, wherein media is established using one or more devices, and multi-media session/session control for multi-media session is provided by a device which may or may not be the same as the device on which the media is established. A method and system is also provided to transfer media from one device to one or more devices retaining multi-media session/session control on a transferring device. | 10-06-2011 |
20110252144 | Apparatus and Method for Establishing and Utilizing Backup Communication Channels - An apparatus, method, and machine-readable medium are described for establishing, maintaining and utilizing backup channels in a peer-to-peer (“P2P”) network. For example, in one embodiment, each mobile device can establish a primary P2P communication channel with one or more other mobile devices. Once the primary channel is established, each mobile device can use the primary channel to exchange secondary channel connection data and can subsequently open one or more secondary P2P communication channels with the other mobile devices. Upon detecting that the primary P2P communication channel has failed or has degraded below a specified threshold (e.g., a bandwidth or bitrate threshold), one of the secondary P2P communication channels can be automatically promoted to a primary P2P communication channel. | 10-13-2011 |
20110252145 | Application Programming Interface, System, and Method for Collaborative Online Applications - An application framework including different application programming interfaces (APIs) is described which performs a variety of mobile device functions in response to API calls from applications. For example, in response to relatively simple API calls made by applications the application framework manages the complex tasks associated with invitations and matchmaking. By way of example, the details of complex transactions such as establishing peer-to-peer connections between mobile devices may be transparent to the application developer, thereby simplifying the application design process. The application framework may include an application daemon for communicating with a first set of services and an applications services module for communicating with a separate set of services. The application framework may also include a cache for caching data for each of the services based on different cache management policies driven by each of the services. The cache may be updated by push notification cache updates sent from each of the services. | 10-13-2011 |
20110252146 | ESTABLISHING ONLINE COMMUNICATION SESSIONS BETWEEN CLIENT COMPUTING DEVICES - A method and apparatus for assisting in establishing an online communication session between client computing devices. An online communication session invite request message is received from an initiating client computing device, the message includes connection data of the initiating computing device and an online communication session endpoint identifier for an intended recipient. A set of one or more push tokens that are associated with the identifier is determined, where each of the push tokens identifies a client computing device. An online communication session invite message that includes the connection data of the initiating client computing device is transmitted to a set of intended recipient client computing devices that correspond with the set of push tokens. An invite accepted message is received from at least one of the set of intended recipient client computing devices that includes connection data of that computing device. An invite accepted message is transmitted to the initiating computing device that includes the connection data of each accepting computing device to allow the initiating computing device and each accepting computing device to establish a direct peer-to-peer online communication session. | 10-13-2011 |
20110252147 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING AN ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING SYSTEM VIA A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and apparatus for accessing an enterprise resource planning system via a mobile device is described. In one embodiment, the method includes parsing data from a host application access application into at least one object in an application-specific format, converting the data into an intermediate format that is compatible with a mobile device and communicating the converted data to the mobile device. | 10-13-2011 |
20110252148 | Methods, Systems, and Software for Providing Service Integration Framework - A preferred embodiment of the subject invention comprises a system for implementing computer network services and applications, comprising a front-end component comprising one or more applications; a back-end component comprising one or more services; and an abstraction layer component operable to communicate with the front-end and back-end components. In another preferred embodiment, the subject invention comprises a system for linking applications and services, comprising: a vendor connectivity component; a business integration component; a security component; a utility component; and a back end connectivity component. | 10-13-2011 |
20110252149 | PROXY RESPONSE APPARATUS, PROXY RESPONSE METHOD IN PROXY RESPONSE APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A proxy response apparatus, including: a storage unit which establishes connection with a mobile terminal by TCP and stores message information included in a packet obtained from the mobile terminal; a response processing unit which receives a packet from an external apparatus, and responds whether message information included in the receive packet is effective or not to the message information stored in the storage unit; and a TCP processing unit which transmits a packet including a response message to the external apparatus without establishing radio connection with the mobile terminal, when the TCP processing unit inputs the response indicating effective from the response processing unit. | 10-13-2011 |
20110258327 | D2D Communications Considering Different Network Operators - There is stored a database of registration information associating UEs with cells under control of different network operators. In response to a inquiry from a first network operator that a first UE desires direct communications with a second UE, the registration information is used to coordinate between the first network operator and the second network operator to facilitate establishment of a direct communication link between the first UE and the second UE. In various embodiments the facilitating is enhancing the inquiry/page by adding a cell ID of the first UE's cell and adding pre-allocated radio resources in the first UE's cell for use by the second UE in responding to the page, and determining a single network which is not highly loaded and which can allocate resources for the D2D communications and directing one or both UEs to that single network. | 10-20-2011 |
20110258328 | Secure location session manager - A Secure Location Session Manager (SLSM) is an intelligent router for open mobile alliance (OMA) Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) Version 1.0 (and later) messages best implemented when multiple, geo-diverse SUPL servers are deployed in a distributed environment, such as an active-active redundant configuration within a wireless carrier's network. In a standalone option, the SLSM acts as a “middleman” for all SUPL positioning messages between a mobile device and a responsible SUPL server. In an embedded option, the SLSM resides within an existing server. The SLSM manages and stores session information for all pending and ongoing SUPL positioning sessions in internal tables for routing and load balancing purposes. The external interfaces of the SLSM consist of OMA ULP messages. | 10-20-2011 |
20110258329 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING ONLINE SERVICES CORRESPONDING TO MULTIPLE MOBILE DEVICES, SERVER, MOBILE DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method and a system for providing online services corresponding to multiple mobile devices, a server, a mobile device, and a computer program product are provided. The server provides a service website. In the present method, a login request of a user account of the service website is received from a terminal device. A first connection with a first mobile device of the user account is established, and a first device data of the first mobile device is obtained. A second connection with a second mobile device of the user account is established while maintaining the first connection, and a second device data of the second mobile device is obtained. A first online service corresponding to the first mobile device and a second online service corresponding to the second mobile device are provided on the service website according to the first device data and the second device data. | 10-20-2011 |
20110258330 | IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE, STORAGE DEVICE, IMAGE DISPLAY SYSTEM AND NETWORK SETUP METHOD - An image display system | 10-20-2011 |
20110264807 | Method of Operating a Signalling Gateway and an Application Server, and Signalling Gateway and Application Server - A method of operating a signalling gateway in a decoupled mode of operation for routing signalling messages between an SS7 and an IP-based network is provided. Further, the invention relates to a method of processing a connection oriented signalling message at an application server process, wherein the message is exchanged via a signalling gateway between an SS7 network node and the application server process. The application server process serves at least one application server in an IP-based network. The invention further provides a signalling gateway for routing signalling messages between an SS7 network and an IP-based network and an application server comprising an application server process for processing signalling messages, in particular connection oriented messages. | 10-27-2011 |
20110264808 | Refresh Requests in Soft-State Signalling - A power-saving synchronization of refresh requesting messages transmitted from a client terminal ( | 10-27-2011 |
20110264809 | METHOD FOR EXCHANGING DATA - The present invention relates to a method for exchanging data between at least two servers with use of a gateway. Preferably the method is applied to healthcare systems. Each server holds a unique federated identifier, which identifier identifies a single patient (P). Thus, it is possible for the servers to communicate with each other without having to reveal the true identity of patient. By creating one session pseudonym for each pair of providing server ( | 10-27-2011 |
20110264810 | ESTABLISHING A SPLIT-TERMINATED COMMUNICATION CONNECTION THROUGH A STATEFUL FIREWALL, WITH NETWORK TRANSPARENCY - A method and apparatus are provided for establishing a split-terminated client-server communication connection through a stateful firewall, with network transparency. In an environment in which a pair of network intermediaries is employed to optimize client-server communications, a first intermediary intercepts a client request for a new connection. The first intermediary probes the network for a counterpart near the server, and opens an optimized communication session with a second intermediary that responds affirmatively. Some or all client-server communications that transit the intermediaries' session are accelerated or otherwise optimized. The first intermediary's probe uses the client's source address, but a different port number, while the optimized intermediary session is opened using the client's source address and source port. Therefore, a network monitoring tool can monitor the end-to-end connection, and the stateful firewall will not reject the optimized session. | 10-27-2011 |
20110264811 | SIGNAL RELAY METHOD AND RELAY SERVER PERFORMING A RELAY OPERATION BETWEEN A PLURALITY OF FIRST TERMINALS AND A SECOND TERMINAL VIA A NETWORK - The present invention has an object to provide a server apparatus capable of accessing a terminal apparatus connected via an IP network to a router from an externally provided terminal apparatus in a simple and firm manner without previously performing complex setting operation. | 10-27-2011 |
20110270991 | ESTABLISHING A REMOTE DESKTOP - A method includes receiving an IP address via a non-IP protocol communication interface, the IP address associated with an operating system environment established on a computing device; storing the received IP address in memory; responsive to a cessation of communication via the non-IP protocol communication interface, accessing the IP address stored in memory and transmitting the accessed IP address via an IP protocol network interface; and receiving information via the IP protocol network interface, the information issued by the operating system environment established on the computing device associated with the IP address. Various other apparatuses, systems, methods, etc., are also disclosed. | 11-03-2011 |
20110270992 | ENHANCED FLIGHT CREW DISPLAY FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE CONTROLLER/PILOT DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS (CPDLC) VERSIONS - An avionics system comprising a human machine interface configured to display a user interface and a control device is provided. The control device coupled to the human machine interface, wherein the control device is configured to send and receive controller/pilot data link communications (CPDLC) messages and adjust the user interface based on a first CPDLC version of an established first CPDLC session. | 11-03-2011 |
20110270993 | CAPABILITY GRABBING PEER DEVICE FUNCTIONALITY IN SIP - A method for enhancing the capability grabbing peer device functionality in Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is disclosed. The method includes associating a session originating from a first terminal ( | 11-03-2011 |
20110270994 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COORDINATING PEER COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for wireless communication. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be configured to provide a first peer connection with a first node, provide a second peer connection with a second node, and coordinate communication between the first and second nodes via the first and second peer connections. | 11-03-2011 |
20110270995 | CORRELATING COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - The present invention relates to a session handling entity and an application server (AS) in a communication system, the session handling entity (S-CSCF) is obtaining, from a register entity, a correlation identity for a registering private user identity of a user, transmitting the correlation identity as part of a registration procedure to the application server, and the application server initiates, based on a received session request associated with the user, at least one session request towards corresponding number of devices of the user wherein the application server is configured to check the correlation identity to ensure that not more than one session request is initiated for each device of the user. | 11-03-2011 |
20110270996 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING CLOSED USER NETWORK USING IP TUNNELING MECHANISM AND CLOSED USER NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for configuring a closed user network (CUN) using an IP tunneling mechanism and a CUN system are disclosed. In particular, disclosed is a technique of establishing a tunnel between a tunnel end edge device (TEED) and a control server by using an IP tunneling mechanism to allow terminals connected to the TEED to perform communications by using a closed IP, enabling the TEED to provide a network address translation (NAT) function so that the TEED can perform data forwarding like a general NAT, without performing tunneling on a destination IP outside the closed IP section, to perform communication, and allowing a terminal located in an area where the TEED is not provided to directly establish a tunnel with the control server by using a client software to thereby perform communications with a terminal or a server connected to the TEED by using the closed IP. | 11-03-2011 |
20110270997 | Deferred Invocation of Communication Services - In one embodiment, a network device determines one or more conditions for invoking one or more real applications to the network device for a session. This determination may be made at the initiation of the session, such as when a SIP INVITE message is received. The one or more conditions allow real applications to be invoked when a future event satisfies the condition. When it is determined that a condition is satisfied, a real application associated with the condition is then invoked. Accordingly, conditions may be set for real applications that may be tested against future events that have not yet occurred. This allows deferred invocation of real applications. Accordingly, if real applications are not needed for a session, then they are not invoked. But, when a real application is needed, it can be invoked. | 11-03-2011 |
20110270998 | Method For Establishing Secure Communication Link Between Computers Of Virtual Private Network - A technique is disclosed for establishing a secure communication link between a first computer and a second computer over a computer network. Initially, a secure communication mode of communication is enabled at a first computer without a user entering any cryptographic information for establishing the secure communication mode of communication. Then, a secure communication link is established between the first computer and a second computer over a computer network based on the enabled secure communication mode of communication. The secure communication link is a virtual private network communication link over the computer network in which one or more data values that vary according to a pseudo-random sequence are inserted into each data packet. | 11-03-2011 |
20110276696 | Provider Connection Framework - A library of routines may serve as a connection point between multiple services. Each service may be a consumer or provider of data, and may be connected through the library using a registry service. The library may include a provider access mechanism through which provider services may transmit availability of an interface, as well as a consumer access mechanism through which an interface to be consumed may be transmitted. A registry service may match providers with consumers and facilitate communication between the two. The library may be configured to allow providers and consumers to be added or removed at any time. | 11-10-2011 |
20110276697 | Remote Session Management - Provided is reporting session information for a session upstream from a server. A data processing system receives a session handshake from a first client for a session between the server and the first client. The system receives a session-descriptor for a session between a second client and the first client before handling a nested session. The system determines whether a user has made an upstream session request. The system obtains session data from an upstream data structure, responsive to a determination that the user has made an upstream session request. The system renders the session data based on the upstream session request. | 11-10-2011 |
20110276698 | Method for Establishing a Paired Connection Between Media Devices - A method for establishing a paired connection between first and second media devices across a network includes transmitting a first information message across the network including an identifier that includes a request to pair the first and second media devices. When a second information message is received from the second media device within a first predetermined time period, the first device retrieves an identifier of the second device and transmits a confirmation message across the network including the device identifiers. A paired connection between the media devices is completed after a corresponding confirmation message from the second device is received within a second predetermined time period. | 11-10-2011 |
20110276699 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ALLOCATION OF CLASSES OF SERVICE TO NETWORK CONNECTIONS CORRESPONDING TO VIRTUAL CHANNELS - A system for allocating a different class of service to each network connection in a plurality of network connections, where each network connection corresponds to one or more virtual channels. The system can include a plurality of virtual channels that connect a first computer and a second computer. Each virtual channel can service at least a portion of the network traffic generated using a remote-display protocol. The system can also include a plurality of network connections, where each network connection corresponds to at least one of the virtual channels. Each network connection of the system can have an assigned port number and an assigned class of service that corresponds to a transmission priority level. The class of service assigned to each network connection can be unique from the classes of service assigned to other network connections. | 11-10-2011 |
20110276700 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PEER-TO-PEER ENDPOINT MESSAGING - A system and method are disclosed for messaging between endpoints in a peer-to-peer hybrid network. In one example, the method includes establishing a peer-to-peer communication session between a first endpoint and a second endpoint and between the first endpoint and a third endpoint. The first endpoint then bridges the communication sessions to include both the second and third endpoints. | 11-10-2011 |
20110276701 | System and Method to Trigger a Mobile Device in Different Domains Based on Unsuccessful Initialization or Handover - A system to promote communication in a second domain responsive to a failure in a first domain. The system includes a first domain for communicating, and a second domain for communicating. The system includes a rejection message and a mobile device. The rejection message transmitted upon a failure of a call in the first domain. The mobile device configured to communicate in both the first domain and the second domain. The mobile device configured to attempt the call in the second domain responsive to receiving the rejection message in the first domain. | 11-10-2011 |
20110283001 | TETHERING METHOD AND MOBILE DEVICE ADAPTED THERETO - A mobile device and a method for providing a tethering service via a security mode and a list of preferred mobile devices are provided. The method includes determining, when the mobile device receives a connection request from a client mobile device, a number of client mobile devices that are currently connected to the mobile device, determining, when the number of connected client mobile devices is less than a preset maximum connection number, the number of created Basic Service Sets (BSSs), determining, when the number of BSSs is less than a preset maximum creation number, the identification-information regarding the client mobile device that requested connection, and providing a tethering service to the client mobile device according to the determined identification-information. | 11-17-2011 |
20110283002 | Selectively Communicating Data Of A Peripheral Device To Plural Sending Computers - A network arrangemen includes a receiving computer connected over a network to plural sending computers. A first session is established between the receiving computer and a first of the plural sending computers, where the first session involves providing data of a peripheral device attached to the receiving computer to the first sending computer, and where the data of the peripheral device is provided to a first device driver of the peripheral device in the first sending computer. A second session is established between the receiving computer and a second of the plural sending computers, where the second session involves providing the data of the peripheral device attached to the receiving computer to the second sending computer, and where the data of the peripheral device is provided to a second device driver of the peripheral device in the second sending computer. | 11-17-2011 |
20110283003 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BILLING SYSTEM INTERFACE FAILOVER RESOLUTION - A determination is made whether a first application server of a group of N application servers, N being at least two, is a coordinator of the group. Responsive to determining that the first application server is the coordinator of the group, a connection to a billing system is established, via a terminal server, by the first application server. A determination is made whether a second application server of the group of N application servers is the coordinator of the group. Responsive to determining that the second application server is not the coordinator of the group, a periodic check is made whether the second application server of the group of N application servers is the coordinator of the group. The second application server may later be determined to be the coordinator of the group, when the first server experiences difficulty. Once it is determined that the second application server now is the coordinator of the group, a connection is established to the billing system, via the terminal server, by the second application server. | 11-17-2011 |
20110289219 | SIP ANCHOR POINTS TO POPULATE COMMON COMMUNICATION LOGS - The concept of a centralized communication log is provided. Anchor points, and specifically Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) anchor points, serve as a media and call control point that is established on a per-user basis which can then be leveraged by a communication log service. Such a communication log service is able to determine accurate and real-time communicant information for a communication session and populate a centralized communication log with the same. Such a communication log is, therefore, accurate with respect to multiple users in a system, highly available, and scaled horizontally. | 11-24-2011 |
20110289220 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTEGRATING METADATA AND DATA OF A SESSION - Embodiments of the invention are directed to a system and method for reconstructing a session. A method may include receiving audio and metadata packets related to a session. Audio data may be recorded and metadata information may be extracted from the metadata packets and stored in association with the audio data. A session may be reconstructed by simultaneously replaying the audio data and presenting a visual representation of the metadata. | 11-24-2011 |
20110289221 | Multilevel Routing - A communication system comprising a plurality of nodes that are capable of establishing a communication connection between two or more clients, the plurality of nodes being arranged in a hierarchy in which a node comprised in one level of the hierarchy is more likely to be reachable by a client trying to establish a communication connection with another client than a node comprised in a lower level of the hierarchy, the communication system being arranged such that, when a client determines that a node is unreachable for establishing a communication connection between it and another client, that communication connection is instead established by a node comprised in a higher level of the hierarchy than the unreachable node. | 11-24-2011 |
20110289222 | CLIENT-SERVER SESSION PARALLELISM - Using client-server session parallelism (CSSP), a client device establishes multiple network communication sessions with different remote servers and requests the same unsegmented data item from each server. Whichever copy of the unsegmented data item is received earliest at the client device is provided to an application. The CSSP software may be part of a network stack, or it may be part of a particular application such as a browser or a media player. The servers are not necessarily CSSP-aware, but when they are, sessions may be load-balanced. CSSP sessions may also be transferred to other CSSP-aware servers in view of server loads, imminent server reboots, or other events. A CSSP client may notify a CSSP server of status information describing session(s) established at the client with other server(s), allowing the server to reallocate bandwidth to other clients when the CSSP client has sufficient alternate data sources. | 11-24-2011 |
20110289223 | METHOD OF DISTINGUISHING A PLURALITY OF UES SHARING ONE PUID AND A DEVICE THEREOF - The present invention provides with a method of distinguishing a plurality of calling UEs sharing a PUID in a calling S-CSCF of IMS network and the device thereof. When a calling UE using a shared PUID in the calling-party network requests to establish a session with some called UE in the called-party network, the calling S-CSCF adds a extension identification corresponding to the calling UE into the session request message from the calling UE and sends the session request message with the extension identification added therein to the called UE in the called-party network, such that the called UE may realize which one is the actual calling UE according to the extension identification in the session request message and the shared PUID used by the calling UE. Therefore, after completion of such session, the called UE may re-establish a session with the calling UE according to the extension identification of the calling UE and the shared PUID thereof. | 11-24-2011 |
20110289224 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ESTABLISHING COLLABORATIVE COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN DEVICES USING AMBIENT AUDIO - Various embodiments of the present invention are directed to systems and methods for enabling two or more devices in the same ambient audio environment to become automatically interconnected so that information can be exchanged between the devices. The two or more device detect substantially the same sounds, such as people talking in a meeting, automatically determine this fact and enter the devices into an information and document sharing relationship via a network. | 11-24-2011 |
20110289225 | Load Balancing of Server Clusters - A load balancing scheme is described for a server cluster. An application identifier is received by the cluster from a client desiring to connect to the application. Each one of the servers in the cluster independently hashes the application identifier into a unique number. This unique number is used to determine a preferred one of the servers for the connection. The servers then each calculate a priority code using the unique number, a load level for each server, and/or a node identifier assigned to the servers in the cluster. If the preferred cluster server is available, it transmits its priority code to the client before the other servers transmit their priority codes. Otherwise, each of the available cluster servers transmits their priority codes to the client. The client selects the cluster server with the most favorable priority for making the connection. | 11-24-2011 |
20110296030 | SINGLE RUI RENDERER ON A VARIETY OF DEVICES WITH DIFFERENT CAPABILITIES - Remote user interface rendering devices are able to adaptively degrade the user experience in a manner that is predictable utilizing the method and system described. Capability groups used are a set of interrelated functionalities that are supported as a whole by the rendering device. If the rendering device does not support any feature in a capability group, the remaining features in the same capability group are automatically disabled for the rendering device. The capability groups are able to be assigned priorities so that higher priority capability groups are evaluated first. | 12-01-2011 |
20110296031 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication system is arranged to provide a communication service to a communication terminal. The communication system comprises a packet data network arranged to communicate data packets supporting the communication service to and from the communication terminal via a data path through the packet data network, a path computational element arranged to control the data path, an application server arranged to control the communication service and an internet multimedia sub-system operable to control the application server. The application server is operable to provide the communication service to the communication terminal in response to a registration request transmitted from the communication terminal to the internet protocol multimedia sub-system requesting an establishment of the communication service. When establishing the communication service, the internet protocol multimedia sub-system is operable to communicate an adaptation message to the path computational element including information indicating service quality parameters associated with the communication service. The path computational element is operable to calculate the data path in accordance with the service quality parameters and to adapt the packet data network in accordance with the calculated data path. | 12-01-2011 |
20110296032 | Resources Allocation Flexibility - A method for an application function (AF) device in a wireless cellular network including the steps of determining with a processing unit whether an application service requires confirmation that a transmission path for corresponding application service media is available to progress set up of an application service session. There is the step of sending a message generated by the processing unit through a network interfacing unit to a policy and charging rule function (PCRP) server to indicate whether the application service requires confirmation that the transmission path for the corresponding application service media is available. An application function (AF) device in a wireless cellular network including a processing unit which determines whether an application service requires confirmation that a transmission path for corresponding application service media is available to progress set up of an application service session. The AF device includes a network interfacing unit that sends a message generated by the processing unit to a policy and charging rule function (PCRF) server indicating whether the application service requires confirmation that the transmission path for the corresponding application service media is available. A method for a policy and charging rule function (PCRF) server in a wireless cellular network. A policy and charging rule function (PCRF) server in a wireless cellular network. | 12-01-2011 |
20110296033 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING CLICK TO DIAL SERVICE TO MULTIMEDIA CONFERENCE SERVICE - The present invention discloses a system and method for switching click to dial (CTD) service to multimedia conference service. The method comprises: a CTD service is performed between one user equipment (UE) and another; an application serve invites at least one of the UEs and makes said at least one of the UEs take media negotiation with the media server so as to carry out the multimedia conference service, wherein the application server is in charge of realizing not only the CTD service but also the multimedia conference service. The application server invites at least one of the UEs and makes said at least one of the UEs take media negotiation with the media server so as to carry out the multimedia conference service, thus the limitation that extra UEs cannot be joined in the call in the CTD service is overcome. | 12-01-2011 |
20110296034 | ACCESS CHANGE FOR RE-ROUTING A CONNECTION - There is proposed a method and corresponding apparatuses allowing a change from a packet switched communication domain to a circuit switched communication domain. When a user equipment as a connection terminating point receives a connection initialization message with a media flow, such as audio, which cannot be delivered by the packet switched access, it sends a specific response rejecting the connection via the packet switched access to an application server for service centralization and continuity. In the application server, it is checked whether several conditions are met in order to determine whether the communication connection comprising the media flow is allowed to be changed to the circuit switched domain. If yes, the communication connection is changed from the packet switched communication domain to the circuit switched communication domain. | 12-01-2011 |
20110296035 | CHARGING CONTROL IN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - For controlling charging in an Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem, it is detected whether a session initiated in the Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem is associated with a service requiring special charging control, and charging information is added to messages signalling establishment or modification of the session in the Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem in accordance with the detection result. | 12-01-2011 |
20110302313 | Method and System for Utilizing a Gateway to Enable Peer-to-Peer Communications in Service Provider Networks - A broadband gateway may be operable to receive network topology information to enable peer-to-peer communications between a first communication device and a second communication device. The first communication device is communicatively coupled to the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may be operable to handle at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. A communication link which may bypass core layer network components and/or resources for enabling the peer-to-peer communications between the first communication device and the second communication device may be established by the broadband gateway, based on the received network topology information, a location of the first communication device and a location of the second communication device. The broadband gateway may establish the communication link to enable the peer-to-peer communications by marking traffic such as by inserting QinQ tags into traffic between the first communication device and the second communication device. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302314 | EDGE TRAVERSAL SERVICE DORMANCY - A system maintains a dormant state in the host, in which no beacons (or “bubbles”) are transmitted from the host when no application or service (collectively, “processes”) of the host is accepting unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service. When at least one application or service begins to accept unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host enters a qualified state and begins transmitting the beacons. As each additional application or service begins to accept such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is maintained. As applications and services terminate acceptance of such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is decremented. When the last application or service terminates acceptance of unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host re-enters the dormant state and ceases transmission of its beacons. | 12-08-2011 |
20110307614 | Techniques For Efficient Remote Presentation Session Connectivity And Routing - Techniques are disclosed for efficient remote presentation session connectivity and routing. In an embodiment, the roles of a remote presentation session deployment involved in receiving a connection from a client and determining a virtual machine (VM) to serve the client's remote presentation session are consolidated on one or more servers of the deployment that host such VMs. When this consolidated role receives a connection set up communication from a client, it uses information local to it and its server to determine a VM to serve the remote presentation session. Where the deployment comprises a plurality of such servers, the consolidated role may communicate with an inter-server connection broker to determine a different server that will conduct the remote presentation session. | 12-15-2011 |
20110307615 | METHOD AND MECHANISM FOR IMPLEMENTING TAGGED SESSION POOLS - An improved method, mechanism, and system for implementing, generating, and maintaining for implementing session pools is disclosed. A session in a session pool can be customized to with a specific set of affinities and attributes. Tags can be associated with the customized sessions. When a later request is made for a session having a set of desired characteristics, the tags can be used to search for and identify a session in the session pool having the requested characteristics. Also disclosed is a method, mechanism, and system for dynamic sizing of session pools. | 12-15-2011 |
20110307616 | LOW-LEVEL REMOTE SHARING OF LOCAL DEVICES IN A REMOTE ACCESS SESSION ACROSS A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, a device is connected to a first computer via a first local communication port of the first computer. If the device is configured to autoconnect with a second computer upon connection of the device to the first computer, a remote access session is established between the first computer and the second computer. Low-level local communication from the device is intercepted at the first local communication port of the first computer. The low-level local communication is transmitted from the first computer to the second computer via the remote access session. The low-level local communication is injected to a second local communication port of the second computer to thereby provide an autoconnection of the device to the second computer. | 12-15-2011 |
20110314162 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION BY HNB - The method for establishing a connection by a HNB comprising steps of: the HNB transmitting an “attachment request” message to an operation and maintenance center (OMC); the OMC transmitting an “attachment response” message to the HNB; the HNB establishing a connection with an MME indicated by the “attachment response” message. With the method proposed in the present invention, a UE can switch between HNBs in the same CSG through interface X | 12-22-2011 |
20110314163 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR SMART APPLIANCES - A communications module, and a consumer device comprising the communications model, is provided for use in a communication network with one or more consumer devices or “smart” appliances. The communications module includes a wireless transceiver for communication with the network, for example in accordance with the ZigBee protocol, and an interface for communicating with a host processor of the consumer device. The module receives scheduled event data over a wireless link on behalf of the host processor, and schedules events for execution by the host processor upon receipt of commands transmitted by the module. The communications module may include a virtual host module, which translates commands between a protocol used by the host processor and a protocol used by the communications module. The communications module is also configured to automatically seek and join a network, and to discover and bind to services provided over the network. | 12-22-2011 |
20110314164 | INTELLIGENT NETWORK STORAGE PLANNING WITHIN A CLUSTERED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide an integrated host and subsystem port selection methodology that uses performance measurements combined with information about active data paths. This technique also helps in resilient fabric planning by selecting ports from redundant fabrics. In a typical embodiment, host port to storage port pairs that create a path between a host and a storage device will be identified. From these pairs, a set of host port to storage port candidates for communicate data from the host to the storage device will be identified based on a set of resiliency constraints. Then, a specific host port to storage port pair will be selected from the set based on a lowest joint workload measurement. A path will then be created between the specific host port and storage port, and data will be communicated from the host to the storage device via the path. | 12-22-2011 |
20110314165 | HIGH AVAILABILITY BY LETTING APPLICATION SESSION PROCESSING OCCUR INDEPENDENT OF PROTOCOL SERVERS - Embodiments of the invention provide systems and methods for providing high availability in a session supporting multiple protocols. More specifically, embodiments of the present invention provide for high availability processing by decoupling an application session from protocol processing. That is, protocol processing can be performed at protocol nodes specific to each protocol session. The protocol nodes can then pass messages to and from a session node that performs session processing other than the protocol processing. The session of the first session node can be replicated on a second session node and, upon a failure of the first session node, control of the session can be passed to the second session node. The session can then be continued on the second session node according to a number of different models described herein. | 12-22-2011 |
20110314166 | End-to-End Address Transfer - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of facilitating the end-to-end transfer of a URI between a plurality of SIP entities. The method comprising generating a SIP message and including the URI to be transferred in a Contact header of the message and including in the Contact header a parameter indicating to a back-to-back user agent that this URI is not to be changed or replaced. | 12-22-2011 |
20110320609 | Handling Of A Communication Session - Method, device and computer program product for handling a communication session at a device, by executing a communication session handling program at the device, the communication session handling program comprising a communication session handling part for handling the communication session and an interfacing part for linking with a communication session control interface. An application executed at the device provides, to a user of the device, a communication session control interface for the communication session handled by the communication session handling part of the communication session handling program, the application linking with the interfacing part of the communication session handling program. On detecting that the application has ceased to provide the communication session control interface, the interfacing part of the communication session handling program links, without dropping the communication session, to a further communication session control interface provided at the device for continuation of the communication session handled by the communication session handling part. | 12-29-2011 |
20110320610 | PROVIDING CONTENT TO CLIENT DEVICE - Content is provided to a client device. A request is received from the client device at a content management service which has access to a database of content and a database of devices on a network. The request identifies content requested by a client. The content management service designates a content source. Capability information is received from the client device. The content management service determines whether the client device has capabilities corresponding to the content identified by the request, using the capability information. Responsive to a determination that the client device has the capabilities, the client device is provided with information to facilitate direct communication between the client device and the content source. Responsive to a determination that the client device does not have the capabilities, a communication channel is constructed between the client device and one or more other devices which have capabilities corresponding to the content. | 12-29-2011 |
20110320611 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication device includes an identification information storage stores identification information based on which a predetermined terminal device is identified, an initial setting storage storing, as an initial setting, a communication setting with which a direct communication is enabled with respect to the predetermined terminal device identified by the identification information stored in the identification information storage, an acquiring unit acquires a connection setting to connect an access point, a transmission unit transmits the connection setting acquired by the acquiring unit and an instruction to connect with the access point in accordance with the connection setting to the predetermined terminal deice in accordance with the initial setting stored in the initial setting storage, and a setting unit makes the communication device connectable to the access point with the connection setting acquired by the acquiring unit after the connection setting and the instruction are transmitted by the transmission unit. | 12-29-2011 |
20110320612 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS, WIRELESS DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus comprises a communication device, a first controller, a second controller, and a player. The communication device has a close proximity wireless communication function. The first controller establishes connection between a wireless device and the communication device in a proximity state. The second controller connects the electronic apparatus to a server through the close proximity wireless communication function and a wireless communication function of the wireless device. The player plays a content received from the server through the close proximity wireless communication function and the wireless communication function of the wireless device, to halt playing the content when the proximity state is released during the playing, and resume playing the content when the proximity state is restored. | 12-29-2011 |
20110320613 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN USERS AND PROFESSIONAL SERVICE PROVIDERS - The invention relates to a method of establishing communication between one or more users and one or more professional service providers. The professional service provides include, but are not limited to legal professionals, medical professionals, doctors, taxation professionals, accounting professionals, and financial professionals. Information corresponding to one or more professional service requirements of the user is obtained. The information includes basic information and confidential information. The basic information is transmitted to the one or more professional service providers based on the one or more professional service requirements of the user. Thereafter, communication is established between the user and the one or more professional service providers based on conflict of interest and an affirmative confirmation from the one or more professional service providers. | 12-29-2011 |
20110320614 | Device, System and Method for Providing Distributed Online Services - A device, system, and method is provided for running mobile applications, including a server for running applications and a client installed in a mobile device. The client may connect to the server via a network. The client may display content, receive user input, and send user input to the server. The server may use the client to receive user input and to display content for running applications for the mobile device. | 12-29-2011 |
20110320615 | PROFILE AND CAPABILITY OF WAP-TERMINAL WITH EXTERNAL DEVICES CONNECTED - Data communication system and a method in a data communication system comprising a terminal, e.g. a mobile phone, adapted to communicate with an application server using a wireless transmission protocol, preferably WAP, including a terminal profile. The wireless transmission protocol also includes an attached device's profile that is dynamically updated with data related to a device attached to the terminal. | 12-29-2011 |
20120005351 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AN APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ACROSS APPLICATION ELEMENTS - In one embodiment, a method includes generating a Session Description Protocol (SDP) construct, the SDP construct being arranged to be included in a first signaling flow. The method also includes providing an attribute in the SDP construct. The attribute identifies an application type associated with a first traffic flow. Finally, the SDP construct is forwarded on the first signaling flow. | 01-05-2012 |
20120005352 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, PROGRAM, AND METHOD - An information processing method for transmitting a provisional response signal, the information processing method includes: receiving a request signal indicating a request for processing; determining whether a load to be processed in a local device exceeds or equals to a threshold value; transmitting a provisional response signal that stops re-transmission of the request signal to a transmission source of the request signal when it is determined that the load to be processed exceeds or equals to the threshold value in the determining operation and the request signal is received; and transmiting the provisional response signal to the transmission source of the request signal when it is determined that the load to be processed falls below the threshold value in the determining operation and a specific time period elapses after the request signal is received. | 01-05-2012 |
20120005353 | NETWORKED COMPUTER SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING AND OPERATING IN A VIRTUAL REALITY ENVIRONMENT - The present invention relates to interactive virtual reality networked computer systems and methods that facilitate communication and operation in a virtual reality environment. The virtual reality networked computer system has an infrastructure that includes a number of users, hosts and servers. The interconnected hosts and servers allow users to effectively locate, activate, access and interact within virtual reality environments in a variety of different ways. For example, users can establish user groups such that interaction within the virtual reality environment occurs between hosts (accessed by users) without the need of a central or dedicated server. | 01-05-2012 |
20120005354 | WIRELESS POINT THAT PROVIDES FUNCTIONS FOR A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK TO BE SEPARATED BETWEEN THE WIRELESS POINT AND ONE OR MORE CONTROL NODES, AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SERVICE IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK HAVING FUNCTIONS SEPARATED BETWEEN A WIRELESS POINT AND ONE OR MORE CONTROL NODES - A method for negotiations between various entities of a wireless local area network (WLAN) including negotiations between controlling nodes (CNs) and wireless access points (WAPs) and negotiations between WAPs is disclosed. These negotiations are used for the purpose of establishing the capabilities of the various entities, determining how such capabilities may be optimally divided among the negotiating entities and then dividing the capabilities among the entities based on this determination. The capabilities include those required for the operation, control and management of the WLAN entities and the encompassing WLAN. The disclosed method introduces means for flexibly accommodating the varying degrees of differences in capabilities among the WLAN entities between the WLAN entities including dynamic changes in WLAN topologies. | 01-05-2012 |
20120011256 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM STORED THEREIN, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing apparatus acquires operation information of a user, and executes an application based on the operation information. While the application is being executed, the information processing apparatus repeatedly searches for other unspecified information processing apparatuses by using a wireless communication function, and establishes a connection with the one or more of the other information processing apparatuses having been searched for. The information processing apparatus executes a communication application to communicate with the connected one or more of the other information processing apparatuses, based on the operation information and on operation information relating to the one or more of the other information processing apparatuses. | 01-12-2012 |
20120011257 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING TRANSFER OF COLLABORATIVE SESSION CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BASED ON INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method for performing inter-user equipment (UE) transfer (IUT) of collaborative session control performed by a UE in a network system based on an Internet protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) is provided. The method includes transmitting to an IMS network element a subscription message for requesting notification of information regarding other UE, receiving from the IMS network element a subscription acceptance message in response to the subscription message, receiving from the IMS network element a notification message comprising information regarding at least one different UE, and if a UE for transferring the collaborative session control is selected by the at least one different UE, performing a process of transferring the collaborative session control to the selected UE. A signaling overhead caused by a failure in the transfer of collaborative session control can be reduced. | 01-12-2012 |
20120016996 | SIP-BASED CALL SESSION SERVER AND MESSAGE-ROUTING METHOD - A method and SIP-based Call Session Server for routing SIP messages. A Network and Transport layer receives an incoming SIP message and forwards it to one of a plurality of SIP message routing process instances in a SIP Message Routing Framework. The receiving SIP message routing process instance determines a Routing-Key based upon at least one header field in the incoming message, and based upon the Routing-Key, forwards the incoming message to a selected one of a plurality of Back-to-Back User Agent (B2BUA) instances in a Call Session Control Framework. The selected B2BUA instance creates an outgoing SIP message utilizing the Routing-Key to generate a From-Tag in an outgoing request message, or to generate a To-Tag in an outgoing response message, and then forwards the outgoing message to the Network and Transport layer, which transmits the outgoing message. | 01-19-2012 |
20120016997 | RECORDING MEDIUM STORING COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE - A computer acquires correspondence data including a plurality of combinations of identifiers of selected computers, in which parallel processes are started, and identifiers of the parallel processes, wherein the selected computers are among a plurality of computers connected to a multipath network having relay devices extending over two or more hierarchies. The computer specifies a network identifier to be used for distributing communication paths among the selected computers for every selected computer that includes an identifier in the correspondence data, wherein the specified network identifiers is among network identifiers of respective communication paths in the multipath network, and the specified network identifier corresponds to each identifier of a plurality of computers, and is used for routing. | 01-19-2012 |
20120023238 | HOME HUB FOR IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS)/WEB SERVICES INTERACTION - Systems and methods for home hub for IMS/Web services interaction are described. In one aspect, a data communication gateway operating as a home hub includes a processor that executes computer program instructions to provide IMS/Web services interaction to one or more client computing devices. The client computing device(s) are operatively coupled to the home hub. The client computing device(s) are not Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)-enabled devices. To provide SIP- or IMS-based services to such client computing devices, the home hub registers on behalf of the client computing device(s) to a SIP network. The home hub replies to SIP messages on behalf of the SIP network registered device(s) to process all SIP request(s) and provide the registered device(s) with corresponding SIP-based service(s). | 01-26-2012 |
20120023239 | Creation Method of Multimedia Service and System Thereof - The present invention relates to a method for creating multimedia services comprising: creating a signaling link between the first node and the second node; and the second node negotiating multimedia with the first node via the signaling link to establish a media channel for transmitting stream of the multimedia services and complete creation of the multimedia services at the second node. The present invention also relates to a system for creating multimedia services. Therefore, the present invention allows the signaling link between the first node and the second node to be established and to be used for multimedia negotiation to create the media channel and complete the creation of the multimedia services at the second node so as to implement the unified creation of the multimedia services and simplify the scheduling of the multimedia stream. | 01-26-2012 |
20120023240 | METHOD FOR GENERATING A COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN DEVICES, AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - A method and apparatus for establishing a communication link between a first device and a second device are provided. The method includes transmitting, to the second device, a connection request frame requesting to set a communication link; and receiving, from the second device, the connection request frame including first encoding selection information selecting an encoding method to be applied to content to be transmitted between the first and second devices from among a digital transmission content protection (DTCP) technology and a high-bandwidth digital content protection (HDCP) technology, a connection response frame approving a request to set the communication link by the connection request frame, the connection response frame including second encoding selection information selecting an encoding method identical to the encoding method selected by the connection request frame. | 01-26-2012 |
20120030360 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZED NETWORKS - An apparatus and method for network routing is provided. Synchronized networks are disclosed which enable fast connection set up and release in a tiered hierarchy of circuit switched nodes. Nodes in the network aggregate and disaggregate data according to a transform algorithm allowing for dynamic frame and frame segment sizing. Connections within the network are organized by paired connections performing aggregation and disaggregation according to control vectors. | 02-02-2012 |
20120030361 | PROXIMITY SYNCHRONIZING AUDIO GATEWAY DEVICE - A digital audio gateway device for use in a wireless network of digital audio playback devices. The gateway device is wirelessly linked to one or more digital audio playback devices to provide a gateway to the Internet for the digital audio playback devices. In addition to functioning as a gateway, the device provides additional functionality and may act as a cache of digital audio data for the various digital audio players connected in the wireless network and may also act to automatically update digital audio content on the audio players, synchronize digital audio content and playlists between the digital audio players and continue automatically or upon user request a particular playlist as the user moves from one digital audio player to another. | 02-02-2012 |
20120030362 | TRANSMITTING PACKETS FROM DEVICE IN NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS WITH OTHER DEVICE UTILIZING MULTIPLE VIRTUAL NETWORK CONNECTIONS - A method includes detecting, at a device, a request for a network connection from an application running on the device; spawning first and second virtual machines for network connections that virtualize network capabilities of the device such that first and second virtual network connections are provided; using the first virtual network connection, establishing a first connection with another device over a first path; using the second virtual connection, establishing a second connection with the other device over a second path; determining that the second path represents a trusted path; determining that a first packet does not need to be routed via a trusted connection; transmitting the first packet using the first virtual network connection for communication via the first path; determining that a second packet needs to be routed via a trusted connection; and transmitting the second packet using the second virtual network connection for communication via the second path. | 02-02-2012 |
20120036269 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One of objects is to reduce a load in a session management and relay process on an SOAP-SIP adaptor for providing a 3PCC service. The SOAP-SIP adaptor (hereinafter the adaptor) receives a connection request message between a first terminal and a second terminal from a Web server, and establishes the sessions with each of the first terminal and the second terminal. After establishing the sessions with each of the first terminal and the second terminal, the adaptor sends a transfer request (REFER) of session to a call control device. Thereafter, the call control device manages session between the first terminal and the second terminal each having established the session with the adaptor. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036270 | IP Multimedia Subsystem User Identity Handling - A method of handling IP Multimedia Public Identity registration within an IP Multimedia Subsystem network. The method comprises receiving at a Call Session Control Function a SIP REGISTER message including a completed IP Multimedia Public Identity Attribute-Value-Pair and no IP Multimedia Private Identity. The method further comprises deriving at the Call Session Control Function an IP Multimedia Private Identity using the IP Multimedia Public Identity and sending a Cx query from the Call Session Control Function to a Home Subscriber Server, the query including the IP Multimedia Public Identity and the derived IP Multimedia Private Identity. The Home Subscriber Server identifies a subsubscription using the IP Multimedia Public Identity, and determines that the derived IP Multimedia Private Identity is not associated with said subscription. The HSS the identifies a default IP Multimedia Private Identity associated with subscription associated with said subscription, and returns a Cx response to said Call Session Control Function including said default IP Multimedia Private Identity. The Call Session Control Function uses the received, default IP Multimedia Private Identity to further handle said SIP message. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036271 | Network Initiated Alerts to Devices Using a Local Connection - Systems and techniques for managing local communication between a network access point and a host device. Upon connection by a host device to an access point, a local connection link is established between the access point and the host device. A network connection may be established between the access point and the host device, with the network connection being able to pass through the host device to enable communication with and beyond an access network to which the access point provides a connection. Local messages may be passed between the access point and the host device over the local connection link, separately from and independent of communication that may occur over the network connection. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036272 | Method and System for Handling Connection Setup in a Network - Certain embodiments of a method and system for handling connection setup in a network may comprise a network interface hardware device (NIHW) that may be operable to receive a services list and/or connection acceptance criteria from a first guest operating system running on a host system, receive a connection request from a second guest operating system running on the host system, and determine whether to allow establishment of the requested connection based on one or both of the services list and the connection acceptance criteria. The determination may be made prior to or during connection set up. The NIHW may maintain a connection state comprising information regarding set up of the requested connection. The services list may comprises one or more of a local network address, a local transport address, a network protocol, and a transport protocol. The communicated acceptance criteria may comprises packet filtering operations and/or security operations. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036273 | LOAD BALANCING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) SERVERS - A device receives Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) requests that include registration information, and load balances a SIP call based on the registration information of the SIP requests. | 02-09-2012 |
20120042081 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING A MULTI-TIERED REGISTRATION SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL - A communication system for using a multi-tiered registration session initiation protocol (SIP) includes: a client, a relay server and a plurality of SIP servers. The relay server is connected with the SIP servers and the client. The relay server is configured to establish a connection with the client and register with each of the SIP servers so as to select at least one of the SIP servers for direct communication with the client, thereby solving the conventional problem of incompatibilities existing between the client and SIP servers and between the SIP servers and further saving communication costs for the client in dialing various numbers. | 02-16-2012 |
20120042082 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL IN A NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION ENVIRONMENT - A communication system for using the session initiation protocol (SIP) in a network address translation (NAT) environment is provided, which includes a client, a relay server and a SIP server. The relay server is connected to the SIP server and connected to the client through a NAT server. The relay server is configured to establish connection with the client and register with the SIP server so as to allow direct communication between the client and the SIP server, thereby conducting authentication and management of the client and further solving the conventional problem of incompatibility between the SIP server and the client. | 02-16-2012 |
20120042083 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING A LARGE MESSAGE MODE CPM MESSAGE TO GROUP - The present invention provides a method and a system for sending a large message mode converged IP messaging (CPM) message. The method is used for sending a large message mode CPM message to a target group; a sender CPM client sends a session invitation message of the large message mode CPM message; after receiving the session invitation message, a CPM controlling function entity sends the session invitation message to each receiver address in the target group; a receiver CPM client receives the session invitation message and carries out a media negotiation with the controlling function entity; the controlling function entity carries out a media negotiation with the sender CPM client to determine a media transmission link between the sender CPM client and the receiver CPM client; and the sender CPM client sends the content of the large message mode CPM message to the receiver CPM client via the media transmission link. According to the technical solutions provided in the present invention, the large message mode CPM message can be sent to the target group. | 02-16-2012 |
20120047269 | Network Selection Methods And Apparatus With Use Of A Master Service Management Module And A Prioritized List Of Multiple Aggregator Service Profiles - A communication device is configured to store one or more aggregator service application modules for use in accessing one or more different aggregator services. Each aggregator service offers access through a plurality of offered wireless networks identified by a plurality of offered wireless network identifiers. The communication device maintains a prioritized list of profiles which include one or more aggregator service profiles associated with the one or more aggregator services. A scanning operation is performed for identifying one or more available wireless networks in a geographic area of the device, for producing a scan list of one or more available wireless network identifiers corresponding to the one or more available wireless networks. One of the aggregator service profiles is selected from the prioritized list, causing one of the aggregator service application modules corresponding to the selected profile to be invoked. The invoked module causes one of the available wireless network identifiers from the scan list that matches one of the offered wireless network identifiers to be selected, if such matching identifier exists. A connection is established with one of the available wireless networks corresponding to the selected available wireless network identifier, for accessing a selected aggregator service corresponding to the selected aggregator service profile. | 02-23-2012 |
20120047270 | DIRECTING MODALITIES OVER DIFFERENT NETWORKS IN MULTIMODAL COMMUNICATIONS - Selected modalities of a multimodal communication session may be diverted over different networks by an administrator or automatically to reduce burden on utilized networks. Modalities may be selected and diverted over different networks including the Internet for the same multimodal communication session based on network conditions, communication session attributes, participant attributes, and similar factors. | 02-23-2012 |
20120047271 | NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF PASSING DATA PACKETS THROUGH THE NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION DEVICE - A network address translation (NAT) device requests a network server to transmit an invitation packet sent by a first client to a second client, receives a reply invitation packet transmitted by the network server, and passes the reply invitation packet to the first client. The NAT device requests the network server to transmit a session packet sent by the first client to the second client, and receives a reply session packet directly sent from the second client. The NAT device passes the reply session packet through the NAT device to reach the first client on condition that a destination port in the reply session packet is the same as a source port in the session packet, so as to establish communication between the first client and the second client. | 02-23-2012 |
20120047272 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND BASE STATION FOR MAINTAINING A NETWORK CONNECTION - An electronic device and wireless base station for maintaining a persistent connection are provided. In an embodiment, a system includes an electronic device that connects to a web-server via a physical link that is bandwidth-constrained. The physical link also includes a wireless base station and at least one network address translation (“NAT”) router that is configured to terminate idle connections between the client and the web-server. One of the electronic device and the wireless base station is configured to send keep-alive packets to the web-server in order to reduce the likelihood of the NAT router terminating the connection. The keep-alive packets are sent on a variable basis that is intended to reduce bandwidth consumption while ensuring that the NAT router does not deem the connection idle and terminate the connection. | 02-23-2012 |
20120059939 | EFFICIENT CONNECTION MANAGEMENT AND DATA SYNCHRONIZATION - Call admission control (“CAC”) servers in a pool are fully connected to one another. Session data received at one of the CAC servers in a pool is synchronized to each of the other CAC servers in the pool by way of the connections. Each CAC server in a first pool may also establish a connection with exactly one CAC server in a second pool. Status updates and commit data is synchronized from a CAC server in the first pool to a CAC server in the second pool. The commit data may then be synchronized to each of the CAC servers in the second pool. | 03-08-2012 |
20120059940 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND DATA SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD - A data synchronization method establishes a communication channel between a terminal device and a cloud server through a network. The terminal device accesses the cloud server through the communication channel, and registers a private data space in a data center of the cloud server. Then the method transmits data of the terminal device to the private data space through the communication channel according to user requirements, to back up the data of the terminal device to the private data space. | 03-08-2012 |
20120059941 | MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION IN A VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT - To set up a multimedia communication between a visiting user and a visited user who are initially present respectively in different virtual spaces in a virtual environment managed by a server (SC) to which the respective terminals (TC) of the visiting user and the visited user are connected via a packet network (RP), the server sets up a video communication between the visited user and the visiting user, following a virtual movement of the visiting user within a virtual space providing access to the space in which the visited user is present, and sets up an audio communication between the visited user and the visiting user, following a virtual movement of the visiting user into the space in which the visited user is present. | 03-08-2012 |
20120059942 | Method and System for Session Modification - A method and system for session modification are provided. The method includes these steps: A home policy and charging rules function (h-PCRF) sends a policy and charging control (PCC) rule providing message to a policy and charging enforcement function (PCEF) b according to a received PCC rule request message, an application layer service message, or an h-PCRF self-trigger event; and the h-PCRF sends a PCC rule providing message to the PCEF a according to a PCC rule response message received from the PCEF b. With this present disclosure, session modification may be implemented when two or more PCEFs are included in the PCC architecture of a system architecture evolution (SAE) system. | 03-08-2012 |
20120059943 | Establishing a Communication Session - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of operating an IP Multimedia Subsystem Application Server to facilitate a communication session between a first user and a second user at a required Quality of Service. The method comprises receiving a notification that a Policy and Charging Rules function associated with the first user has not authorised said required Quality of Service (B | 03-08-2012 |
20120066398 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PLUG AND PLAY BETWEEN HOST AND CLIENT - A system, method, and computer program product are provided for plug and play between a host and client. The system includes a client device configured to be communicatively connected to a host device, the client device including at least a portion of memory configured to store computer code for allowing the host device to identify and control the client device. Additionally, the client device is configured such that the host device is not required to have pre-installed the computer code for allowing the host device to identify and control the client device, prior to being communicatively connected to the client device, and the client device is further configured such that when the client device is communicatively connected to the host device, the client device is configured to transfer the computer code for allowing the host device to identify and control the client device to the host device for installation. | 03-15-2012 |
20120079118 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DURING A PRE-BOOT PHASE OF A COMPUTING DEVICE - A system, device, and method for facilitating wireless communications during a pre-boot phase of a computing device includes establishing a communications interface between a unified extensible firmware interface executed on the computing device and a wireless transceiver of the computing device during a pre-boot phase of the computing device. An OOB processor of the computing device processes data communications between the unified extensible firmware interface and the wireless communication circuit during the pre-boot phase by reformatting the data communications between wired and wireless communication standards. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079119 | INTERACTING WITH CLOUD-BASED APPLICATIONS USING UNRELATED DEVICES - Systems and method provide logic facilitating an interaction between a networked server and multiple, unrelated devices. In one implementation, a computer-implemented method enables a user of a device to interact with or control multiple, unrelated devices across a could computing environment using a networked server. The method includes receiving, at the networked server, an instruction from the control device. A corresponding instruction understandable by an unrelated controlled device is generated by the networked server, and the corresponding instruction is operable to cause the controlled device to perform the received instruction. The networked server may transmit the corresponding instruction to the controlled device. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079120 | CONTENT SHARING FOR SOCIAL ENGAGEMENT - A user is provided the ability to request through a set top box or other terminal that a media session be replicated to another terminal. The control channel associated with the replicated media session is assigned to the requesting terminal so that the user of the requesting terminal can control the playback experience of a plurality of different terminals. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079121 | System and method for dynamic adaptive player cells for multi-player environments - There is provided a system and method for dynamic adaptive player cells for multi-player environments. There is provided a method comprising establishing connections to host clients over a network, evaluating matching criteria to assign the clients to player cells, reevaluating the matching criteria to determine client transitions of the clients within the player cells, and sending, using the connections, data of the client transitions to output a visual translation of the client transitions to displays connected to the clients. By continually reevaluating the matching criteria and reconfiguring the composition of the player cells using low cost distributed server infrastructure, users may be optimally matched to the most relevant and interesting users. Additionally, by using the visual translation to depict the client transitions in a natural looking manner, the operation of the player cells can be made transparent to users, thereby removing interface complexity and attracting novice users. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079122 | DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF A NETWORK CONNECTION BASED ON SECURITY RESTRICTIONS - Systems and methods for providing access to an enterprise network from a remote computer are described. In one example, a system includes a mobile device configurable for connection to the remote computer, the mobile device adapted to establish secure communication to the enterprise network and a connection server application located on the mobile device for receiving a request from the remote computer specifying a location and a connection path and selectively providing to the remote computer access to the enterprise network via the mobile device based on the request. Other implementations are possible. | 03-29-2012 |
20120084446 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An electronic device includes a storage, a communication device and a controller. The storage stores information identifying the electronic device. The controller, when starting connection of the electronic device with a first other electronic device, sends the information identifying the electronic device to a second other electronic device when the first other electronic device is connected to the second other electronic device, and connects the electronic device to the first other electronic device when a request for connection with the first other electronic device is received, the first other electronic device receiving the information identifying the electronic device from the other second electronic device. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084447 | End-Point Identifiers in SIP - A system and method for uniquely identifying an SIP device extends the SIP communications protocol with an end point identifier, carried for example in the header of an SIP transmission. The end point identifier is useful for routing, registration, subscription, and authentication. The end point (device) of a given user epid can be uniquely identified by creating a key from an epid and a user's address-of-record (URI). This in turn enables improved connection management and security association management when the connections/IP addresses are transient, such as when HTTPS tunneling is used. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084448 | Communication Control Device, Communication System and Communication Method - A communication control device includes: a device connection unit that is configured to establish connection to a plurality of communication devices; a controller that is configured to control communication between the plurality of communication devices, which is connected to the communication control device by the device connection unit, and a counterpart device via a line; and a memory that is configured to store protection-target information including at least information for communication with the plurality of communication devices connected by the device connection unit. The controller is configured to: register at least one communication device from among communication devices connectable by the device connection unit; determine whether or not the at least one registered communication device is connected by the device connection unit; and when the at least one registered communication device is determined to be connected, permit an output of predefined protection-target information for the connected communication device. | 04-05-2012 |
20120089739 | EXPEDITED RESOURCE NEGOTIATION IN SIP - A method of expediting resource negotiation in a modified Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) reduces the number of messages exchanged for resource negotiation, thereby reducing the latencies involved in session setup. The method entails sending an INVITE message having a modified SIP header containing an indication that the originator's terminal seeks a fast session setup. The INVITE message further contains a list of all codecs available at the originator's terminal and how many each type of media component are required. These codecs can be provided in an order of preference. The answerer selects the codecs for the requested media types from the list of available codecs without engaging in a back-and-forth resource negotiation for the codecs. The result is that the session can be set up with fewer messages which provides quicker session setup than in the prior art. | 04-12-2012 |
20120089740 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SELECTING AN SVC OPERATION POINT, AND METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION OF SVC OPERATION POINTS - A method for selecting an SVC operation point is provided, which includes: receiving an SDP message, where the SDP message includes a unique ID of each operation point and characteristic parameters of at least one operation point of multiple operation points, where the unique ID includes a layer-ID; selecting an operation point from the multiple operation points; and sending a session setup request that includes the unique ID of the selected operation point. A server device and a client device are also provided. Through the method and the device, each operation point may be uniquely identified, and the mapping relationship between each operation point and characteristic parameters is clarified. | 04-12-2012 |
20120096171 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENTERPRISE NODES THAT ARE CONTAINED WITHIN A PUBLIC CLOUD TO COMMUNICATE WITH PRIVATE ENTERPRISE INFRASTRUCTURE DEPENDENCIES - An agent is deployed to a node of an enterprise network, where the agent is configured to establish communication with the enterprise network after migration of the node to a cloud infrastructure. Further, the node is migrated to the cloud infrastructure, and communication is established between the node and the enterprise network using the agent. | 04-19-2012 |
20120096172 | Method and apparatus for remotely controlling a computer with peer-to-peer command and data transfer - A remote access session is established between client and host computers with the assistance of a gateway. The gateway requests the host computer to send a plurality of data packets to different external addresses and monitors the network ports used for these outgoing packets. The gateway then uses the network port information to predict which port the host will use to transmit future outgoing data packets. A similar process is performed on the client computer. The gateway then directs the client computer to send further data packets to the network address and the predicted port of the host computer. Similarly, the host computer is directed to send further data packets to the network address and predicted port of the client computer. The computers are then directly connected together so that further data communications bypass the gateway. | 04-19-2012 |
20120102204 | SYSTEM AND METHOD EMPLOYING AN AGILE NETWORK PROTOCOL FOR SECURE COMMUNICATIONS USING SECURE DOMAIN NAMES - A system and method connect a first network device and a second network device by initiating a secure communication link. The system includes one or more servers configured to: receive, from the first network device, a request to look up a network address of the second network device based on an identifier associated with the second network device; determine, in response to the request, whether the second network device is available for a secure communications service; and initiate a secure communication link between the first network device and the second network device based on a determination that the second network device is available for the secure communications service; wherein the secure communications service uses the secure communication link to communicate at least one of video data and audio data between the first network device and the second network device. | 04-26-2012 |
20120102205 | RELAY DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A relay device requests a status notification of another relay device to a server device. When the relay device is notified that the other relay device is under a logged-out status, the relay device stands by. When the relay device is notified that the other relay device has logged in, the relay device transmits a connection request to the server device. The server device relays the connection request to the other relay device. A response is transmitted from the other relay device to the server device, and further relayed to the relay device. Accordingly, a TCP connection is established between the relay device and the other relay device. A communication device connected to a different network can transmit and receive data to and from the relay device via the other relay device. | 04-26-2012 |
20120102206 | SYSTEM AND METHOD EMPLOYING AN AGILE NETWORK PROTOCOL FOR SECURE COMMUNICATIONS USING SECURE DOMAIN NAMES - A client device comprises: (a) a memory, (b) an application program, and (c) a signal processing configuration. The memory is configured and arranged to facilitate a connection of the client device with a target device over a secure communication link created based on (i) an address request generated by the client device, and (ii) a determination as a result of the address request that the target device is a device with which a secure communication link can be established when the requested address is identified in an address lookup. The application program is configured and arranged so as to allow participation in audio/video communications with the target device over the secure communication link once the secure communication link is established. The signal processing configuration is arranged to execute the application program. | 04-26-2012 |
20120110191 | NETWORK NODES THAT ESTABLISH SESSIONS USING EXISTING CONNECTIONS IDENTIFIED IN A CENTRAL DATABASE - Network nodes can add information to a central database that identifies their connections to other network nodes. The central database can thereby serve as a repository of information indicating connections between network nodes. When a first network node needs to establish a session to a second network node, it can interrogate the central database to learn what existing connections, if any, can be used for the session. When existing connections provide more than one available pathway between the first and second network nodes, the first network node may select among the existing connections in response to quality of service values that are provided by the central database for those connections. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110192 | LIGHT WEIGHT PROTOCOL AND AGENT IN A NETWORK COMMUNICATION - Systems and methods are provided for using a light weight protocol (LWP) and protocol agent in a network communication system. A protocol agent receives a message in LWP from an end node. The message in LWP is directed to a destination network node that uses a network protocol that the end node is incapable of supporting, such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) or other network protocols. The protocol agent determines a network protocol to map the message to, and generates a message in the determined network protocol based on the received LWP message. The protocol agent then sends the generated message to the destination network node. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110193 | RESELECTION SYSTEM FOR BEARER BINDING AND EVENT REPORTING FUNCTION AND METHOD THEREOF - The present invention discloses a method for a bearer binding and event report function relocation so as to implement deferred linking of the policy and charging control session in the roaming scenario. The present invention implements the deferred linking of the policy and charging control session in roaming scenarios of home roaming and local breakout by establishing a new subsession of the S9 session between a visited PCRF and a home PCRF in a process of the BBERF relocation, and linking the new subsession of the S9 session to the Gxx session established between the destination BBERF and the visited PCRF and the corresponding Gx session. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110194 | DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - Provided is a data communication method of establishing a plurality of TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) connections between a first information processing device and a second information processing device and communicating each piece of data, which is divided for each prescribed unit, through the plurality of established TCP connections. In the method, the first information processing device dynamically changes the number of TCP connections with the second information processing device by notifying connection-upper-limit information, which represents the upper limit of the number of TCP connections to be established with the second information processing device, to the second information processing device, and by changing the connection-upper-limit information to be notified. | 05-03-2012 |
20120117248 | Restarting Network Reachability Protocol Sessions Based on Transport Layer Authentication - In an embodiment, a method comprises establishing a first data communications session with a first router. In response to receiving a first request to establish a second data communications session, a probe message that is configured to test whether the first data communications session or the first router is responsive is sent to the first router. In response to determining that the first router has not acknowledged the probe message before a probe timer has expired, and receiving a second request to establish the second data communications session, the second data communications session with the first router is established and a state for the first data communications session is deleted. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117249 | MOBILE DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a mobile device and a control method thereof. The mobile device includes: a communication section or unit which communicates with a plurality of external devices on a predetermined network; a sensor section or unit which detects an indication direction of the mobile device with reference to a specific part of a casing of the mobile device; and a control section or unit which selects external device location information corresponding to the indication direction of the mobile device detected by the sensor section or unit among a plurality of external device location information corresponding to the plurality of respective external devices, and controls the communication section to start communication with an external device corresponding to the selected external device location information. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117250 | MULTIPLE CLIENT COMPUTING DEVICE INVITATIONS FOR ONLINE COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - An online communication session invitation request message for an online communication session is received from an initiating client computing device. The invitation request message includes connection data of the initiating client computing device and an online communication session endpoint identifier of an intended participant of the online communication session. The session endpoint identifier is associated with a plurality of push tokens that correspond to a plurality of recipient client computing devices respectively. An invitation request message is sent in the form of a push notification message to each of the plurality of recipient client computing devices using the corresponding push tokens. Each invitation request message includes the connection data of the initiating client computing device. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117251 | Method for Reselecting Bearer Binding and Event Report Function - The invention provides a method for a Bearer Binding and Event Report Function (BBERF) relocation, which is used in a process of the BBERF relocation after establishing a first Internet Protocol (IP) Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session for User Equipment (UE) and establishing a first gateway control session, a first Gx session, an S9 session and a first subsession of the S9 session which are used to perform policy control to said first IP-CAN session in an Evolved Packet System. In the process of the BBERF relocation, a subsession of the S9 session established before handover of UE is linked to the gateway control session established between the destination BBERF and the visited PCRF and the corresponding Gx session according to the session identity information, thereby achieving deferred linking of policy and charging sessions in roaming scenarios of home routed and local breakout. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117252 | DYNAMIC SHARED RISK NODE GROUP (SRNG) MEMBERSHIP DISCOVERY - In one embodiment, a network device determines identities of each peer device in a second routing domain attached to edge devices in a first routing domain. The network device associates each address prefix reachable in the second routing domain with an identity of each peer device in the second routing domain that advertised the address prefix and with an identity of one or more edge devices in the first routing domain to which that peer device is attached. The network device determines an address prefix is associated with a same identity of a peer device in the second routing domain but with different edge devices in the first routing domain. The network device assigns the different edge devices in the first routing domain associated with the determined address prefix to a shared risk node group (SRNG). | 05-10-2012 |
20120124217 | Adjusting The Connection Idle Timeout In Connection Pools - An approach is provided that responds to a connection request to connect to an external network entity using a connection from a managed connection pool. The connection pool is managed by selecting connections from the connection pool that includes one or more currently unused connections with the external network entity. One of the selected connections is validated by comparing an idle time associated with each of the selected connections to a maximum idle time value corresponding to the external network entity. The maximum idle time value being previously identified at the information handling system. The validated connection is then used to connect to the external network entity to satisfy the connection request. | 05-17-2012 |
20120124218 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SERVER - A communication system and server includes a first memory for storing terminal information of a first terminal and a second terminal, a second memory for storing outgoing call history information of at least either the first terminal or the second terminal, a third memory for storing incoming call history information of at least either the first terminal or the second terminal; and a processing unit for reading out the information from the first memory to control at least either information of the second memory or the third memory in accordance with information contained in a notification from the communication device when setting the connection between at least either the first terminal or the second terminal and the communication device, therefore, two parties to be communicated with each other specify a connection terminal of a call source. | 05-17-2012 |
20120124219 | Full-Duplex Bi-Directional Communication Over a Remote Procedure Call Based Communications Protocol, and Applications Thereof - Systems and methods for reducing the cost but increasing the performance caused in streaming data between a client and a server are described herein. Embodiments of the present invention relate to reducing the cost but increasing the performance by the traditional data streaming where two TCP connections, one for each direction of traffic is used. Further embodiments allow a server in communication with one or more clients using a RPC based communication protocol to bi-directional stream not on two TCP connections but a single TCP connection. In one embodiment, this is achieved, by transmitting from the client to the server an initial handshake. If the server receives the handshake, then the client streams a request stream to the server and the server streams a response stream to the client simultaneously over the same single TCP connection establishing full-duplex streaming. | 05-17-2012 |
20120124220 | Method for Implementing Policy and Charging Control in a Roaming Scene - A method for performing policy and charging control in different roaming scenarios includes: establishing multiple Packet Data Network (PDN) connections to the same Access Point Name (APN), and performing relocation of a Bearer Binding and Event Report Function (BBERF) after establishing multiple PDN connections to the same APN. This method implements the policy and charging control on multiple PDN connections established to one APN in the roaming scenarios of the home routed and local breakout. | 05-17-2012 |
20120124221 | ELEMENT TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A terminal allows immediate receipt of notification, while holding down the load on a management control device. The terminal has a timer value storage for storing a timer value, a counter for counting the cycle indicated by the timer value, a connection request part for transmitting a connection request to the management control device every time when the counting is finished, an event detector for detecting an event, and a timer value modifier for modifying the timer value to a value indicating a shorter cycle, upon occurrence of the event. The connection request part further transmits the connection request to the management control device, upon occurrence of detecting the event, and the timer value modifier modifies the timer value a value indicating a longer cycle, upon receiving a message indicating that there is no processing request from the management control device. | 05-17-2012 |
20120124222 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFER OF CALL CONTROL - Means and methodology for a SIP Invite receiving node to withdraw from the SIP session set-up loop by replying a redirect message to the SIP Invite sending node. The redirect message contains information for setting up alternative SIP session, said information being available in the SIP Invite receiving node. This information is needed by the SIP invite sending node for establishing an alternative SIP session as well as information needed by other nodes and applications further on in the SIP session set-up loop. The SIP Invite sending node is specially adapted to retrieve the information from the redirect message for establishing a new SIP session based on and containing the information from the redirect message. Several implementations are given for use in an IP Multimedia Subsystem of a telecommunication network. | 05-17-2012 |
20120124223 | GENERALIZED PROXIMITY SERVICE - A system and method for identifying network endpoints that provide a service of interest orders endpoints according to their network proximity to a requesting client. The requesting client may then contact the closest available providing endpoint, thus increasing the efficiency of usage of network resources while decreasing latency and enhancing reliability. In an embodiment of the invention, when a connection to the nearest providing endpoint cannot be established, a mechanism for locating a next-closest alternative endpoint is provided. | 05-17-2012 |
20120131202 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING FAILOVER COMMUNICATION SERVICES - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a Home Subscriber Server having a processor adapted to receive from a Serving CSCF (S-CSCF) device a request for a subscription profile of a communication device to register the communication device, to detect from the request that the communication device is registered with a primary communication resource and that the communication device is to be registered with the S-CSCF device as a secondary communication resource, and to provide the S-CSCF device the subscription profile without de-registering the communication device from the primary communication resource and without directing the S-CSCF device to the primary communication resource. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-24-2012 |
20120131203 | Processor Allocation for Multi-Core Architectures - Methods, computing devices, and computer readable storage media for testing network connections are disclosed. A first processor of a plurality of processors may define a new TCP connection. The first processor may apply a hash function to determine an appropriate one of the plurality of processors to open the new TCP connection. The first processor may write data defining the new TCP connection to a queue associated with the appropriate processor. The appropriate processor may retrieve the data defining the new TCP connection from the queue and open the new TCP connection. | 05-24-2012 |
20120131204 | SELECTIVELY GRANTING A FLOOR DURING SET-UP OF A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - An embodiment is directed to an application server configured to set-up a communication session within a wireless communications system. The application server receives, from a session originator, a request to initiate the communication session with a set of session targets, and then transmits one or more call announcement messages for announcing the communication session to the set of session targets. The application server determines information associated with a probability that the set of session targets will fail to accept the announced communication session, and/or delay information associated with when call responses will arrive from the set of session targets in response to the one or more call announcement messages. The application server selectively grants a floor of the communication session to the session originator based on the determined information. | 05-24-2012 |
20120131205 | Predetermined Ports for Multi-Core Architectures - Methods, computing devices, and computer readable storage media to test network connections using a port unit having a plurality of processors. A plurality of transmission control protocol (TCP) connections to be initiated by the port unit during a test session may be defined. For each processor, an associated set of predetermined source port numbers corresponding to the plurality of TCP connections may be determined. A first processor of the plurality of processors may open TCP connections, via the network, from the defined plurality of TCP connections, wherein each TCP connection may be opened using the corresponding source port number from the set of source port numbers associated with the first processor. | 05-24-2012 |
20120131206 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND PROGRAM FOR COMMUNICATION CONNECTION BY POLLING - A communication connection system, a communication connection method, and a communication connection program is capable of establishing push-type communication by not connection request from a client side but a server side, in communication between terminals or a terminal and a server. A polling server | 05-24-2012 |
20120131207 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR RELEASING RESOURCES - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for releasing resources. The method includes: querying a reservation record according to information about a current session; judging whether a reservation record exists according to a result of the query; judging whether a conflicting session exists according to reservation information in the reservation record if the reservation record exists; obtaining reservation information of the conflicting session if the conflicting session exists, and releasing a corresponding reserved service unit according to the reservation information of the conflicting session; and reserving a service unit for the current session, storing reservation information of the current session, and forming a reservation record for the current session if no reservation record exists or no conflicting session exists or the corresponding reserved service unit is released. | 05-24-2012 |
20120131208 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF USER SESSIONS IN A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Methods for establishing an SSL/VPN session on behalf of a user of a client where the user has a previously existing session are described. Methods include receiving, by an appliance, a request from a first client operated by a user to establish a virtual private network session; creating, by the appliance, a temporary virtual private network session with the client; identifying, by the appliance, an existing virtual private network session previously established on behalf of the user; terminating the previous session; and creating a new virtual private network session with the client using the temporary session. Other methods may further include transmitting a request to a user corresponding to whether to terminate one or more previous sessions, and transferring session data from a previously existing session to a current session. Corresponding systems are also described. | 05-24-2012 |
20120137008 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR INTER-USER EQUIPMENT TRANSFERS - A method for identifying an incoming request for an inter user equipment (UE) transfer. The method may include, but is not limited to, any one or combination of receiving an indicator for an inter-UE transfer (IUT) request from a subscription for which a first media and a second media communication session between a first UE and a second UE has been established, the IUT request associated with a third UE using at least one of XML and a media feature tag within a portion of a message request; and routing the IUT request to a service centralization and continuity application server. | 05-31-2012 |
20120137009 | APPARATUS, SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING INCOMING AND OUTGOING COMMUNICATION - A system and method for managing incoming and outgoing communications may include a definition of if, when, and who may communicate with a recipient. The identification of the communication may be concealed in that no actual addresses, phone numbers, or other addressing identifications are required to be exchanged by the communication initiator and recipient. In an example, if the database contains call management settings for a call recipient, the application logic may evaluate the rules to determine if a particular caller is authorized to connect with the call recipient at the current time and date. The application logic may connect the call utilizing the public telephone switch. The caller and call recipient phone numbers may be stored in a database. | 05-31-2012 |
20120144044 | SYSTEM FOR AND METHOD OF DYNAMICALLY DEPLOYING SERVERS - A system for and method of dynamically deploying servers is presented. The system and method may include establishing a communication link with a deployment client workstation, capturing data associated with the deployment client workstation, creating a deployment file based at least in part on the data associated with the deployment client workstation, and providing the deployment file to a deployment server engine via a network. | 06-07-2012 |
20120144045 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING ONE-WAY REMOTE METHOD INVOCATION FOR SESSION REPLICATION IN A SERVER CLUSTER - A system and method can support one-way Remote Method Invocation (RMI) session replication in a middleware machine environment, such as a server cluster. The server cluster can include a primary application server and a secondary application server. The primary application server receives a request with a session from a client, maintain the session information, and replicate the session information to a secondary application server using one-way Remote Method Invocation (RMI). The primary application server can then respond to the client based on the session information after receiving a return message of the one-way RMI from a network socket associate with the primary application server. The benefit of using one-way RMI is that the primary application server does not have to wait for an acknowledgment from the secondary application server instance, since the underlying transport protocol guarantees that the session data has been successfully transmitted to the second server instance. | 06-07-2012 |
20120144046 | Method, Apparatus, and System for Service Control Via I1 Interface - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for service control via an I1 interface. The method includes: sending a Session Initiation Protocol Invite message to a user equipment through a Gm interface; if receiving a response message returned by the user equipment, where the response message indicates that the user equipment chooses to use a circuit switched bearer and use an I1 interface for control, sending an I1 Invite message to the user equipment through the I1 interface, where I1 Invite message carries information indicating that Gm interface control falls back to the I1 interface control and information used to associate the Session Initiation Protocol Invite message. | 06-07-2012 |
20120151067 | Method and System for Extending Memory Capacity of a Mobile Device Using Proximate Devices and Multicasting - An improved download capability for mobile devices, without requiring increasing of the local memory of such devices, by providing a set of multimedia devices with the capability to create a cooperative download grid where multiple instrumented devices can be aggregated together according to predefined profiles. This capability is useful in at least two different scenarios. The first is when a SIP enabled device must download a large file having a capacity that is larger than the available memory of the SIP device. The second is when a SIP enabled device must download a file but cannot be connected for a long enough time to accomplish the download. If the SIP device is in proximity to other compatible devices such as Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) or Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), these devices are operable to be dynamically aggregated to provide a download grid with multiprotocol support that allows optimized downloading. | 06-14-2012 |
20120151068 | ENDPOINT WEB MONITORING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASURING POPULARITY OF A SERVICE OR APPLICATION ON A WEB SERVER - A system is provided that includes an artificial connection generator and a probe machine. The artificial connection generator is configured to establish one or more artificial connections with a server that at least partially hosts one or more services or applications for access by clients. The probe machine is configured to control a number of artificial connections with the server by the artificial connection generator. The probe machine also is configured to establish a probing connection with a server to determine a service time of the server that is indicative of a time period involved with execution by the server of one or more requests to the server. The probe machine is configured to derive a number of actual connections between the clients and the server based on changes in the service time of the server when the number of artificial connections with the server is varied. | 06-14-2012 |
20120151069 | PROTOCOL LINK LAYER - A link is a software abstraction that represents a direct connection between two CoCo nodes. The link layer detects the presence of neighboring devices and establishes links to them. A protocol abstraction layer converts data frames that arrive on network interfaces into packet objects used by the COCO Protocol Suite. | 06-14-2012 |
20120151070 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING NETWORK PROXY - A method and system for implementing network proxy are provided. The method includes: establishing a first connection between a client and a server through a proxy adapter, so as to enable the client to acquire status information of the server through the first connection; and if the status information of the server shows that the server is in a turn-on state, establishing a second connection between the client and the server, so as to enable the client and the server to transmit a data packet through the second connection. Through the method for implementing network proxy, the client acquires the status information of the server through the first connection, and only when the status information of the server is the turn-on state, could the second connection between the client and the server be established, thereby ensuring the reliability of establishing the second connection, and improving the user experience. | 06-14-2012 |
20120151071 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR ESTABLISHING PT SESSION IN ORDER TO USE PT BOX - A PT (Push-To) service among SIP based session services, and particularly, a method and terminal for establishing a PT session in order to allow a certain user to use a PT box service under control of a PT server in a SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) based service, are discussed. According to an embodiment, the method of providing a Push-To (PT) box service, includes storing, in a PT server, PT box setting information of a terminal; receiving, by the PT server, a session invitation directed to the terminal; and determining, by the PT server, a routing of the session invitation to a PT box for the terminal based on at least the PT box setting information. | 06-14-2012 |
20120151072 | Establishing Unique Sessions for DNS Subscribers - A system establishes virtual DNS servers that are supported by a DNS server. Target IP addresses are assigned for the virtual DNS servers. Network capable devices are uniquely assigned to the virtual DNS servers for domain name resolution. Each network capable device accesses the communication network through a corresponding network device associated with a corresponding source IP address. A client's service plan is assigned to a first network capable device used by the client. The service plan is implemented through a DNS request under a session established between the first network capable device and its assigned first virtual DNS server. The session is uniquely identified by a first source IP address of a first network device used by the first network capable device to access the communication network and a first target IP address of the first virtual DNS server. | 06-14-2012 |
20120158972 | ENHANCED CONTENT CONSUMPTION - Enhanced content consumption is provided by establishing a pairing between two computing devices, wherein at least one of the two computing devices provides a primary consumption experience of a digital content item, so that a secondary consumption experience can be provided via operation of at least one of the two computing devices. The method further comprises presenting, using at least one of the two computing devices, the digital content item for consumption by a user. The method further comprises performing one or more supplemental consumption functions with the other of the two computing devices. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158973 | CUSTODIAN-BASED ROUTING IN CONTENT-CENTRIC NETWORKS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for facilitating custodian-based routing. During operation, the system receives, at a computing device, a request for a piece of content from a user, and determines whether the content is available locally. In response to the content not being available locally, the system identifies a remote custodian device that stores the content. The custodian device is not identified by its physical address. The system then identifies a communication endpoint associated with the identified custodian device, and maps a physical address corresponding to the identified communication endpoint. The system establishes a connection to the communication endpoint using the mapped physical address to obtain the requested content. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158974 | INTER-WORKING BETWEEN NETWORK ADDRESS TYPE (ANAT) ENDPOINTS AND INTERATIVE CONNECTIVITY ESTABLISHMENT (ICE) ENDPOINTS - A method for inter-working between an alternative network address type (ANAT) endpoint and an interactive connectivity establishment (ICE) is provided. The method may include identifying one or more network addresses operable to be used to communicate with a alternative network address type (ANAT) endpoint. One or more candidates operable to be used for interactive connectivity establishment (ICE) traversal may also be identified. A preferred network address may be determined from the one or more network addresses based on an ANAT endpoint preference. A corresponding candidate may be determined based on the ANAT endpoint preference. The corresponding candidate may use a candidate address to communicate. A media stream may be established between the preferred network address and the corresponding candidate address. | 06-21-2012 |
20120166652 | ADVANCED SIMULTANEOUS AND SEQUENTIAL SIP FORKING - Systems and methods for simultaneous and sequential routing are described. In one aspect, at least one computing device in an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network implements a method for improving simultaneous and sequential Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) forking. More specifically, the message is received from a first device associated with a first user to establish a session with a second device of multiple devices associated with a second user. Responsive to receiving the message, and independent of whether the multiple devices are registered to a same SIP registrar (Serving Call Session Control Function) in the IMS network, a simultaneous or parallel SIP session is established to ring respective ones of the multiple devices. | 06-28-2012 |
20120166653 | FACILITATING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS WITH CONTROL SERVER AND DEVICES UTILIZING VIRTUAL NETWORK CONNECTIONS - A method includes communicating network connection information from a control server to each of a subset of devices for enabling an open network connection between each of the devices; spawning, by each device of the subset, a plurality of virtual machines for network connections that virtualize network capabilities of the device; establishing, by each device of the subset, a respective open network connection with each of the other devices of the subset using a respective spawned virtual machine and network connection information received from the control server; and communicating, by one or more devices of the subset, via each of the open network connections that are established with such one or more devices, data, whereby each such one or more devices of the subset functions in part as a server by serving data to other devices of the subset. | 06-28-2012 |
20120166654 | Card Toolkit Support for IP Multimedia Subsystem - A method, system and computer-usable medium are provide for managing the Open Channel for IMS command correctly the UICC to have knowledge about the specific status codes the ME received from IMS. This knowledge allows the UICC to make a smarter decision on what it attempts to do to access IMS. Accordingly, the UICC is provided with detailed information about the status codes from the IMS service to allow the UICC to make an informed decision. If the UICC does not have such knowledge, it is possible that the UICC will send potentially unwanted commands to the ME to establish access to IMS. | 06-28-2012 |
20120173735 | Radio Tool and Method for the Operation Thereof - A method for wireless communication between at least two portable tools is disclosed. The tools each comprise a mechanism for wireless communication and also a data memory and a tool controller. The first tool is configured as a server and the second tool is configured as a client, wherein the second tool sets up a communication link to the first tool. | 07-05-2012 |
20120173736 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING A USER EQUIPMENT LACKING GLOBALLY ROUTABLE USER AGENT URI - GRUU SUPPORT IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - IMS - A Core Network is provided for supporting an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) enabled User Equipment (UE), the UE lacking Globally Routable User Agent URI (GRUU) support in an IMS of a communication network. The Core Network includes: an interworking entity, configured to receive a first Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message from the UE, wherein the first message lacks GRUU-related data, to modify the first SIP message by adding GRUU-related data, to receive a second SIP message to be sent to the UE, wherein the second message includes GRUU-related data, and to modify the second message by removing GRUU-related data. The interworking entity is one of: a Proxy-Call State Control Function (P-CSCF) entity; a Serving-Call State Control Function (S-CSCF) entity; and a Session Border Controller (SBC). | 07-05-2012 |
20120173737 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA PROCESSING - A computer-implemented method for protecting data being transferred during a session with an application is presented. In response to receiving a session request that includes an application identifier for an application, a data processing node establishes a session with the application and assigns a session identifier for that session. A session response, which includes the session identifier, to the session request is sent. In response to receiving a first request that includes the session identifier, a first pipe in the session is established. This first pipe enables data related to the first request to be isolated according to an assigned first pipe identifier for the first pipe. A first response to the first request is sent, wherein the first response comprises the session identifier and the first pipe identifier. | 07-05-2012 |
20120173738 | System And Method For Communicating With An Electronic Exchange In An Electronic Trading Environment - System and methods for a connection proxy server are described. According to an example method described herein, a connection proxy server stores subscription, product tables as well as other downloads that are provided to a client terminal during initialization stage as well as later during a trading session. Upon detecting that a connection between the client terminal and a gateway is lost, the connection proxy maintains a communication session created for the client terminal at the gateway and receives data intended for the client terminal. If the connection is re-established between the client terminal and the gateway during a predetermined period of time, the connection proxy provides the stored data to the client terminal thus avoiding a surge in processing resources at the gateway due to the necessary downloads. | 07-05-2012 |
20120173739 | FORMAT NEGOTIATION FOR MEDIA REMOTING SCENARIOS - Format negotiation for media remoting involves at least one media data format. In an example embodiment, a media format negotiation for playing media data is begun between a server and a client. The media data format is transferred from the server to the client. A notification that indicates if an attempt at the client to construct a media topology responsive to the media data format was a success or a failure is transferred from the client to the server. Whether and/or how the media data is to be transferred from the server to the client may be impacted by the notification. | 07-05-2012 |
20120179827 | ACCESS SESSION CONTROLLER, IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM AND REGISTRATION AND SESSION METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are an access session controller, an IP multimedia subsystem and registration and session establishment methods thereof, where the access session controller includes a message reception module, a service trigger configuration module, a session control module and a message transmission module. The IP multimedia subsystem includes the access session controller and a network-wide home subscriber server system. The registration method includes: initiating, by the access session controller, an authentication information request to the network-wide home subscriber server system. The session establishment method includes: directly process, by the access session controller, the request message initiated from a user to establish a session. The foregoing solutions can simplify the signaling processing flow and reduce the network complexity. | 07-12-2012 |
20120179828 | SERVER APPARATUS, SESSION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, METHOD, SYSTEM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM OF PROGRAM - An apparatus includes a memory and a processor to executes a procedure, the procedure including storing, in the memory of the apparatus, identification information for identifying a session used for first access made to the server apparatus, until a certain length of time elapses from access time of the first access, obtaining the time information which indicates access time of an access made to another server apparatus, and when time information, which indicates access time of second access made to the another server apparatus after the first access by using the same session as the session used for the first access, is obtained by the obtaining until the certain length of time elapses from access time of the first access, controlling the memory to store the identification information until the certain length of time further elapses from the access time indicated by the obtained time information. | 07-12-2012 |
20120179829 | System and Method for Enabling a Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection - A system and method are provided that enable a registrar or other server or proxy device to be used to provide a path between a pair of endpoint devices for exchanging addressing information, in order to establish a direct P2P connection. Once that connection is established, the connection may be used for any P2P data communications, e.g. SIP establishment of a VoIP call, instant messaging, online gaming, file transfer, multimedia streaming, etc. In this way, each endpoint device possesses a list of candidate addresses to establish a direct P2P connection, which may then be used for any type of communication. By relying on a registrar or other server to enable the candidate lists to be exchanged, control can still be maintained if necessary, since the candidate lists can be modified, e.g. to enable a transparent interception, to impose or remove security restrictions, etc. | 07-12-2012 |
20120185599 | METHODS FOR CONTROLLING ONGOING TRIGGERED SUPL SESSION BY SLP AND NETWORK-SIDE SUPL AGENT - A method for controlling an ongoing network-initiated triggered session in compliance with a Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) standard is provided, and the method proposes that the SUPL Agent sends a request to the SUPL Location Platform (SLP), so that the SLP further indicates the target SUPL Enabled Terminal (SET) to pause the ongoing network-initiated triggered session via a SUPL TRIGGERED STOP message. Also, a method for controlling an ongoing SET-initiated triggered session is provided, and the method proposes that the SLP indicates the target SET to pause the ongoing SET-initiated triggered session via a SUPL TRIGGERED STOP message. | 07-19-2012 |
20120185600 | Control of Codec Negotiation for Communication Connection - The invention relates to a session control entity, method and a computer program product for receiving a request for a session, deciding on removal of a user plane gateway from a user plane of the session, extracting, when the user plane gateway is to be removed, a first codec list in the second encoding and removing the first codec list from the request for the session. Further, removing a second codec list in the first encoding from the request for the session, deriving a third codec list, when the user plane gateway is to be removed, from the first codec list, or, when the user plane gateway is not to be removed, from the second codec list, including in the request for the session, a third codec list in the first encoding, and transmitting the request for the session. | 07-19-2012 |
20120185601 | Method For Optimally Utilizing A Peer To Peer Network - In accordance with an embodiment of the invention, there is provided a method for splitting a load of monitoring a peer to peer network. The method has a first node in the peer to peer network receiving information reported by a second node in the peer to peer network, including information concerning which nodes are connected to the second node. The method further has the first node connecting to nodes different from the nodes that are connected to the second node using the received information. The method still further has the first node reporting information, including information concerning which nodes are connected to the first node, such that the second node also has access to the reported information, thereby splitting the load of monitoring the peer to peer network among the first and second nodes. | 07-19-2012 |
20120185602 | METHOD FOR SECURE USER PLANE (SUPL) VERSION NEGOTIATION - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to a system and method for negotiating a version of Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) between a network entity and a SUPL enabled terminal. In a particular implementation, a SUPL initiation message is transmitted from a network entity to a SUPL entity, where the SUPL initiation message identifies a plurality of SUPL versions capable of supporting a desired service. A response is received from the SUPL entity that is based, at least in part, on an ability of the SUPL entity to support at least one of the plurality of versions. | 07-19-2012 |
20120185603 | RELAY SERVER AND RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a relay server, a routing group information sharing unit shares routing group information, which is prepared by grouping routing control points including at least two of a first relay server in a relay group, a second relay server in the relay group, a client terminal connected to the first relay server, and a client terminal connected to the second relay server. A routing session establishment unit establishes a routing session, which enables a communication packet to be routed via the routing control points, for each group indicated in the routing group information while referring to relay server information. | 07-19-2012 |
20120191861 | Cardless Contact Information Exchange - In one embodiment, a method includes determining that a first user registered for an event. A first user identifier for the event is determined upon the first user registering for the event. The first user identifier is associated with the first user. A message is received from the first user. The message includes a second user identifier associated with a second user. The second user identifier is determined for the second user upon the second user registering for the event. A computing device automatically connects the second user and the first user using the first user identifier and the second user identifier. | 07-26-2012 |
20120191862 | Content Pre-fetching and CDN Assist Methods in a Wireless Mobile Network - The current invention is applicable to a RAN-cache or proxy operating in a wireless mobile network that is functioning as a transparent inline device intercepting wireless mobile protocols such as UMTS, LTE, WIMAX, CDMA etc.), or a traffic off-load device connected to multiple interfaces towards the Core/Internet. The current invention identifies methods for pre-fetching content by emulating portions of a mobile client for gaining connectivity through the mobile-core network, or to use session contexts of other mobile clients in a way not to significantly effect charging and billing for the preloaded content. The pre-load decision of what to pre-load and when to pre-load may be locally derived within the RAN-cache/Proxy device, or in-coordination with a locally connected CDN (Content Delivery Network) device. Other embodiments of the current invention include the RAN-cache/Proxy providing interconnectivity from the locally connected CDN device to other CDN devices through the Mobile Core Network (SGSN/GGSN in UMTS, S-GW/P-GW in LTE etc.). | 07-26-2012 |
20120191863 | PRIVATE MULTIMEDIA CONTENTS BROADCASTING EQUIPMENT WHICH USES ISM RADIO FREQUENCY BAND OR U-NII 5GHz RADIO FREQUENCY BAND, PRIVATE MULTIMEDIA CONTENTS BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - An individual multimedia contents broadcasting equipment is disclosed, which includes an individual broadcast process unit which provides a private IP through a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) to a receiving terminal, which requests a connection, and makes a connection of the receiving terminal through a radio network, and transmits a broadcast content to the connected receiving terminal; and a radio communication unit which forms a radio network and communicates data with the connected receiving terminal through the radio network. | 07-26-2012 |
20120191864 | MEDIATED NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION TRAVERSAL - A method of establishing a connection traversing at least one network address translation (NAT) gateway is presented. In the method, a bind request is sent from a source device to a mediation element via a NAT gateway. A bind response associated with the bind request is received. A connection request is sent to the mediation element. The mediation element causes the connection request to be sent to a destination device. A connection response associated with the connection request is received. A hello message is sent to a predicted destination address. The predicted destination address is based on an address received in the connection response. A data connection is established between the source device and the destination device using the predicted destination address. | 07-26-2012 |
20120198078 | ADAPTIVE NETWORK COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES - Adaptive network communication techniques are described. In one or more implementations, a determination is made by a client device that a request, which is to be communicated to a content provider via a network, is for content that is accessible via the content provider upon authentication of credentials transmitted to the content provider from the client device. Responsive to the determination, an initial communication is formed by the client device for receipt by the content provider that includes the credentials without waiting for the content provider to request the credentials from the client device. | 08-02-2012 |
20120198079 | PARALLEL TRANSMISSIONS OVER HTTP CONNECTIONS - One example embodiment includes a system for transmitting data from a source system to a target system over an HTTP network. The system includes a user client, where the user client receives data to transmit from a source system to a target system. The system also includes a source tunnel. The source tunnel is configured to receive the data from the client and break the data into pieces for individual transmission. The source tunnel is also configured to establish a plurality of connections with a target system and transmit the pieces of the plurality on connections. | 08-02-2012 |
20120198080 | Method of Performing Multiple Connection and Related Communication Device - A method of performing multiple connections for a vehicle head unit in a telematic system is disclosed. The method comprises assigning at least one internet protocol (IP) address to at least one mobile device (MD); and connecting to the least one MD. | 08-02-2012 |
20120198081 | COEXISTENCE OF USER EQUIPMENT INITIATED AND NETWORK INITIATED QUALITY OF SERVICE FLOWS - Systems, methods and apparatus for quality of service (QoS) flows in a communication system are provided. In one aspect a method is providing for establishing a QoS flow for an application in a user equipment device. The method includes receiving QoS information from one of an application and a network. The method further includes establishing a QoS communication flow for the application based on the received information. The method also includes receiving QoS information from the other of the application and the network and modifying the established QoS communication flow based on the additional information. | 08-02-2012 |
20120203913 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FEDERATION OF PROXY-BASED AND PROXY-FREE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A method and system for federation of proxy-based and proxy-free communications systems is disclosed. In one embodiment, a computer-executable method comprises broadcasting a network address of a federation computer with an identification of the federation computer as a server for domains operating on a proxy-less protocol. The method includes establishing communications with a server on the network according to a proxy-less communications protocol to receive data bound for a destination domain that operates according to a proxy-based communications protocol and to receive data bound for a destination domain that operates according to a proxy-less communications protocol. Further, the method calls for establishing communications with a proxy on the network according to a proxy-based protocol to receive data bound for a destination domain. | 08-09-2012 |
20120203914 | NETWORKED MOBILE ROUTER - A mobile router, comprises a communications agent operable such that its initial communication to the network utilizes the main server information to establish a first communication with the main server. The mobile router further comprises a microprocessor operable with the communications agent to interact with the main server to upload configuration information to the main server. The communications agent is operable to receive group server identification information from the main server when communicating with the main server a second time. The microprocessor is operable to store the group server identification information. The group server information comprises information identifying one or more servers corresponding with a predetermined group assigned by the main server. The communications agent utilizes the group server identification information for subsequent communication via the network. | 08-09-2012 |
20120203915 | NETWORKED MOBILE ROUTER - A method for operating a wireless mobile router comprises the steps of storing information comprising configuration information and main server information utilizable to identify a main network server; establishing initial communication via a wireless link to a network comprising a main server and a plurality of group servers; directing the initial communication to the main server; uploading the configuration information to the main server via said network; establishing a second communication to the main server; receiving group server identification information from said main server during the second communication; storing the group server identification information comprising information identifying one or more servers corresponding with a predetermined group assigned by the main server; and utilizing the group server identification information for subsequent communication via the network. | 08-09-2012 |
20120203916 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION - An apparatus and method of communication include establishing, by a first communication device, a proximity-based connection with a another communication device, transmitting a first public network address of the first communication device over the proximity-based connection, receiving a second public network address of another communication device over the proximity-based connection, and establishing a communication session over a wide area connection using the first public network address and the second public network address. | 08-09-2012 |
20120210006 | SESSION BASED SUPPORT OF MULIPLE 3GPP STANDARDS VERSIONS - Embodiments are disclosed that enable a device such as a policy and charging rules function (PCRF) node to operate with other nodes in a long term evolution (LTE) network that are operating at different respective major-minor release combinations of the 3 | 08-16-2012 |
20120210007 | DENIAL OF SERVICE DETECTION AND PREVENTION USING DIALOG LEVEL FILTERING - A method may include receiving a session initiation protocol (SIP) request message and determining whether a dialog exists corresponding to the request message. The method may also include determining whether the dialog is in a first phase or a second phase when a dialog exists corresponding to the session control protocol message and querying a table indicating valid protocol requests for the determined phase to determine whether the received request message is valid. The method may include rejecting the request message when determined that the request message is not valid. | 08-16-2012 |
20120210008 | Method and Mobile Communication System Capable of Establishing Peer-to-Peer Transmission - A method for establishing peer-to-peer (P2P) transmission in a mobile communication system includes a first mobile station requesting the mobile communication system for a first Internet Protocol (IP) address and transmitting a message to a second mobile station to indicate the second mobile station to trigger the P2P transmission when the first mobile station starts to establish the P2P transmission with the second mobile station, the second mobile station requesting the mobile communication system for a second IP address according to the message, the first and second mobile stations updating receiving statuses of the first and second IP addresses to a server device, and the server device outputting information of the second IP address to the first mobile station after the first and second mobile stations obtain the first and second IP addresses, to allow the first mobile station to establish the P2P transmission with the second mobile station accordingly. | 08-16-2012 |
20120215926 | Mechanism for Quick Data Path Setup by Cloning Session Content - A custom interface depth may be provided. A content stream, such as a three-dimensional television signal, comprising a plurality of video planes may be displayed. In response to receiving a request to adjust a depth of at least one of the video planes, the display depth of the requested video plane may be adjusted relative to at least one other video plane. | 08-23-2012 |
20120215927 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DECODING TRAFFIC OVER PROXY SERVERS - Methods and systems for applying surveillance to client computers that communicate via proxy servers. A decoding system accepts communication packets from a communication network. Based on the received packets, the decoding system identifies that a certain client computer conducts a communication session with a target server via a proxy server. The decoding system processes the packets so as to correlate the identity of the client computer with the identity of the target server. The correlated identities may comprise, for example, Internet Protocol (IP) addresses or Uniform Resource Locators (URLs). | 08-23-2012 |
20120215928 | Methods and Systems for Presence Publication Using SIP Register Feature Tags - Systems and methods for publishing presence information can be performed to reduce the amount of signaling associated with presence publication. A method for publishing presence service information to a presence server includes: receiving, at a registrar node, a session initiation protocol (SIP) message originated by a user equipment (UE) over the air interface; and transmitting a third party register message based upon the received SIP message, from the registrar node, toward a presence server using network signaling, wherein the third party register message includes at least one of information associated with the user of the UE, capabilities of the UE and presence related services offered by the UE. | 08-23-2012 |
20120215929 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DEVICES COMMUNICATING OVER A NETWORK - Systems and methods are described for establishing a connection between a client and a server that are each communicating via a network. The methods and techniques may be used, for example, to establish a media streaming connection between a media player and a placeshifting device when a firewall or other impediment to direct network connections exists. A relay server receives connection requests from the client and from the server via the network. In response to receiving the requests, a first connection is established between the relay server and the client and a second connection between the relay server and the server. Data received by the relay server on each of the first and second connections is relayed to the other of the first and second connections to thereby establish the connection between the client and the server via the relay server. | 08-23-2012 |
20120221734 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM STORED THEREIN, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - A search for another information processing apparatus and a predetermined access point is automatically performed. When a result of the search is the other portable information processing apparatus, a process of automatically performing data communication with the other information processing apparatus is performed. On the other hand, when the result of the search is the access point, a process of automatically performing data communication via the access point is performed. | 08-30-2012 |
20120221735 | MULTIDEVICE SESSION ESTABLISHMENT FOR MULTIMODAL BROWSING - Systems, methods, apparatuses and computer program products for establishing a single session for processing a multimodal application with multiple devices and for distributing the multimodal application amongst the multiple devices participating in the single session based on the respective capabilities of each device are provided. A system, method and computer program product for allowing new devices operated by the same user to join in the previously established session for processing the multimodal application where the capabilities of the new device exceed that of all devices currently participating in the session are also provided. | 08-30-2012 |
20120221736 | DEVICE CONTROL APPARATUS, CLIENT APPARATUS, DEVICE CONTROL METHOD, AND DEVICE CONTROL SYSTEM - There is provided a device control apparatus which makes it possible to dispense with device monitoring (polling) by a client apparatus to thereby reduce traffic on a network. A device server | 08-30-2012 |
20120226812 | Method and system for subscription service in IP multimedia subsystem network - A method for subscription service in an IP multimedia subsystem is disclosed. A Session Border Controller (SBC) establishes IP channels between the SBC and an IMS terminal as well as between the SBC and a Resource List Server (RLS) after receiving a status subscribe request message from the IMS terminal; and the RLS sends the status information and an acknowledgment message to the IMS terminal through the IP channels after finding subscribed status information for the IMS terminal. A system for a subscription service in an IP multimedia subsystem network is further disclosed. The IP channels established in the present disclosure to transmit the subscription information on the RLS not only can transmit a great amount of information, but also has higher efficiency of information transmission, as long as the IMS terminal has a capability of processing IP data packets. | 09-06-2012 |
20120226813 | COMPUTER NETWORK, COMPUTER SYSTEM, COMPUTER-IMPLEMENTED METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MANAGING SESSION TOKENS - A computer network for managing session tokens may include a client operable to run a client application; a web server hosting at least one web service; and a session token manager. The session token manager may be operable to receive a check out message along with user credentials from the client application, wherein the user credentials identify a user operating the client application; process the check out message to determine a session token from a pool of session tokens managed for the user; and send a token identifier (token ID) to the client application pointing to the determined session token, wherein the session token can be used by the client application to point to and/or to re-use a previously established session with the web service without re-establishing a new session. | 09-06-2012 |
20120226814 | TOPOLOGY HIDING OF A NETWORK FOR AN ADMINISTRATIVE INTERFACE BETWEEN NETWORKS - An administrative interface is provided between a first network and a second network, where the administrative interface is separate from one or more communications session signaling interfaces between the first network and second network. At least one of authorization, authentication, and accounting messages is communicated over the administrative interface. A module associated with the administrative interface is provided to perform topology hiding of the first network such that topology information of the first network is hidden from the second network. | 09-06-2012 |
20120233333 | Resource Negotiation for Cloud Services Using a Messaging and Presence Protocol - Techniques are provided for sending from a client in a first network device a first session-initiate message to a second network device that is configured to provide network layer, data link layer, or associated convergence layer based service connection information in order for the second network device to accept or reject a network layer, data link layer, or associated convergence layer based service connection with the first network device. The first session-initiate message is based on a messaging and presence protocol. A session-accept message is received at the client in the first network device that is configured to accept the service connection and provide a network layer, data link layer, or associated convergence layer based service connection information in order for the first network device to establish the service connection with the second network device. The session-accept message is based on the messaging and presence protocol. In response to receiving the session-accept message, the service connection is established. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233334 | SHARED MEDIA ACCESS FOR REAL TIME FIRST AND THIRD PARTY CONTROL - A communication system provides for establishing a communication environment where multiple media applications can share the same communication channel in a communication session. When establishing a communication session, an application or media application can create a token that can include information regarding resources assigned to or to be used with the communication session. The token may then be used and interpreted by other applications. When communicating during a communication session, the applications and/or components negotiate for access to ports or communication channels assigned to the communication session. Thus, two or more applications may use the same port(s) during the session by obtaining the token and accessing the resources assigned to the token. In this way, fewer ports or channels are used by the multiple applications by sharing resources. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233335 | AUXILIARY HOST AND SESSIONS - A method for establishing a session between a policy and charging rules node (PCRN) and an auxiliary host, includes: receiving, at the PCRN, an application session request message from a packet data network gateway (PGW); establishing an access session with the packet data network gateway; receiving, at the PCRN, an auxiliary session request message from the auxiliary host; and establishing an auxiliary access session with the auxiliary host corresponding to the access session with the packet data network gateway. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233336 | Situation-Driven Spontaneous Networking - In an exemplary embodiment, a method is disclosed that includes, in an electronic device, forming a hypothesis that a situation exists based on one or more situation definitions and data from one or more sensors accessible by the electronic device. The method includes searching for other electronic devices via one or more network interfaces in the electronic device and establishing a network with one or more other electronic devices found during the searching. The method also includes receiving information from the one or more other electronic devices, the information corresponding to the situation. The method further includes, based at least on the information, modifying the hypothesis that the situation exists. Apparatus and computer readable memory media are also disclosed. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233337 | Method and system for policy and charging control based on time period - The disclosure discloses a method for Policy and Charging Control (PCC) based on a time period, which comprises: when a Policy and Charging Rule Function (PCRF) entity provides Quality of Service (QoS) rules to a Bearer Binding and Event Reporting Function (BBERF) entity, a time indication of activation and/or deactivation of the QoS rules is provided at the same time. The disclosure also discloses a system for PCC based on a time period, which comprises: a providing unit located in the PCRF entity and configured to provide QoS rules and a time indication of activation and/or deactivation of the QoS rules to the BBERF entity at the same time. The disclosure ensures the consistency between the time of activating the QoS rules by the BBERF entity and the time of activating the PCC rules by the Policy and Control Enforcement Function (PCEF) entity, and the technical scheme is simple and practical. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233338 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus comprises: a detection unit configured to detect a communicable network; a determination unit configured, if a plurality of networks are detected by the detection unit, to determine a base station constructing the detected networks; and a connection unit configured to perform connection processing in accordance with the result of determination by the determination unit. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233339 | Transport System for Instant Messaging - An exemplary method involves creating a master session over a first connection through a server; and creating a virtual channel over the connection, the virtual channel operable to communicate a feature session. The method may involve establishing a direct connection that bypasses the server, and switching communication of the feature session to the direct connection. A system for network communication includes a plurality of transport bridges, each transport bridge corresponding to an active network device configuration, and a switching module operable to choose one of the transport bridges to form a connection between two computing devices based on the active network device configuration. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233340 | HANDHELD COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT ATTEMPTS TO ESTABLISH AN ALTERNATIVE NETWORK LINK UPON FAILING TO ESTABLISH A REQUESTED NETWORK LINK - A computer system that attempts to establish an alternative network link upon failing to establish a requested network link is described. The computer system may encounter conditions where access to numerous networks, in particular wireless networks, is not available. Rather than only providing an error message to the user upon a failed attempt to establish the requested network link, the computer system determines whether the user has designated an alternative network link in case the requested network link cannot be established, whereas the alternative network link is selected from the plurality of network links that the computer system is configured to support. If an alternative network link has been designated, the computer system attempts to establish the alternative network link. Hence, the user experience is made smooth and uneventful when the requested network link cannot be established. | 09-13-2012 |
20120239816 | METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR TDF SESSION ESTABLISHMENT - The present invention faces the issue of racing conditions occurring during the establishment of an IP-CAN session in PCC architecture and a TDF session between a PCRF and a TDF of the PCC architecture. To overcome this issue, the present invention provides for cooperating apparatuses carrying out a method of establishing a Traffic Detection Function “TDF” session in a Policy and Charging Control “PCC” architecture with a Policy and Charging control Rules Function “PCRF”, a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function “PCEF” and a TDF, the method comprising the steps of: signalling an IP-CAN session establishment from a PCEF towards a PCRF; selecting at the PCRF a TDF for detecting and reporting traffic through the IP-CAN session; initiating from the PCRF establishment of a TDF session with the TDF; submitting from the PCRF towards the TDF the ADC rules to be installed for the IP-CAN session; and submitting from the PCRF towards the PCEF the PCC rules to be installed for the IP-CAN session. This method thus ensures that the TDF session has been established before having completed the establishment of the IP-CAN session. | 09-20-2012 |
20120246325 | NETWORK NODE AND METHOD TO CONTROL ROUTING OR BYPASSING OF DEPLOYED TRAFFIC DETECTION FUNCTION NODES - A network is described herein which can control, through subscriber profile data and/or policy preconfigured control data, whether deep packet inspection for data flow/s for an Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session established by an end user should take place, or not, according to a defined “User Privacy Policy”, and, in the former case, to which traffic detection function (TDF) node the data flow(s) should be directed. | 09-27-2012 |
20120246326 | MECHANISM TO CONVEY DYNAMIC CHARGING INFORMATION OVER SIP - A system and method of providing charging information to the participants for a session is disclosed. User A initiates a session to user B, by sending an invitation message. The message contains an application body. A first method talks about basic charging framework involving network level manipulation and second method being an offer answer model for charging. In network level manipulation, the user A sends an invitation message to proxy server which modifies the application body of the message before sending the message to user B. In offer answer model for charging, user A initiates an offer for charging, which is sent to user B and means of negotiation is involved between both. Means of negotiation allows implementing different charging schemes, and User B or User B's network can also initiate the charging offer. | 09-27-2012 |
20120246327 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR NETWORK ACCESS - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communication technologies, and disclose a method and device for network access. The method includes: detecting whether a notification message reported by an x digital subscriber line module is received within a set time, wherein the notification message is used for indicating that the x digital subscriber line module is connected to a network successfully; if yes, establishing a connection between a service terminal and the x digital subscriber line module so that the service terminal accesses the network through the x digital subscriber line module; and if no, establishing a connection between the service terminal and a 3G data card module so that the service terminal accesses the network through the 3G data card module. | 09-27-2012 |
20120254446 | METHOD TO CREATE A COMPOSITE RUI FROM MULTIPLE RUIs - A compositing device lessens a rendering/processing load for rendering devices by processing one or more sessions instead of requiring the rendering devices to do so. The compositing device is able to receive one or more sessions from one or more source devices and process the sessions either together or separately. Then, either a composited session or a selected session is sent to be displayed by a rendering device. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254447 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE TO RESUME A REMOTE DESKTOP SESSION - Example methods, systems and articles of manufacture to resume remote desktop sessions are disclosed. A disclosed example method to resume a remote desktop session with a first computing device includes sending a query packet containing a first value representing a user identifier from a second computer device to a third computing device, receiving a response packet containing a second value representing the first computing device from the third computing device, and resuming at the second computing device the remote desktop session with the first computing device using the value. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254448 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTION OF NETWORK TRANSPORT WITHIN A MOBILE DEVICE - In a mobile device, one of a plurality of network transports may be used for a connection request. The ideal network transport may be selected by executing a connection selection policy that is stored within the device. The connection selection policy may include one or more network transport evaluators that are each configured to weight the available network transports according to various criteria. Examples of network transport evaluators include evaluators that are dependent on geolocation, security levels, or battery status. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254449 | CONTROLLING A DATA EXCHANGE SESSION BETWEEN TERMINALS OF A FIRST USER AND AT LEAST ONE TERMINAL OF A SECOND USER - A method, device, program, server and terminal are provided for monitoring a data-exchange session between first terminals belonging to a first user and at least one second terminal belonging to a second user. The method includes, after the first user receives an invitation to establish a session, creating a first group of the first terminals belonging to the first user suitable for enabling the session to be established with the first group. | 10-04-2012 |
20120259984 | Ancillary data support in session initiation protocol (SIP) messaging - A SIP ancillary data server provides host to auxiliary data for an emergency SIP session (call) uniquely referred to in a transported SIP header. In a manner similar to how location is represented in an emergency call, a SIP header is extended. The extended SIP Header contains one of two possible types of content elements: either (a) a content pointer element to a SIP Message body part (a “cid:”, or content identifier); or (b) an (a.k.a, “info_URI” in this document). | 10-11-2012 |
20120259985 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY - A method for providing improved wireless connectivity for wireless devices operating in a heterogeneous multi-RAT environment may include receiving, at a network device, information indicative of one or more radio access technologies detected by a user equipment (UE) in corresponding locations where the received information is received in connection with a session initiation protocol (SIP) procedure, and causing provision of the received information to an access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF). A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided. | 10-11-2012 |
20120259986 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PRESERVE DIALOGS IN CLUSTERED ENVIRONMENTS IN CASE OF NODE FAILURE - The present disclosure provides a system and method to preserve dialogs in clustered environments in case of node failure. In accordance with one embodiment, there is provided a method for performing a transaction call between an originating device and a terminating device, comprising: receiving, by a originating proxy server in a first cluster, a SIP message from the originating device over a first connection; and sending, by the originating proxy server, the SIP message to a routing proxy server in a second server cluster. | 10-11-2012 |
20120259987 | DETECTING AN INACTIVE CLIENT DURING A COMMUNICATION SESSION - A communication session is established between a first device and a browser on a second device. The communication session is a persistent hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) session in which a transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) connection persists throughout the persistent HTTP session. A question is transmitted from the first device to the browser on the second device. In response to the first device receiving an illogical response to the question from the second device, the communication session between the first device and the second device is terminated. | 10-11-2012 |
20120265886 | SERVICE TEMPLATES FOR AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - The present invention provides a call/session control function for an Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem where a service template may be invoked in lieu of a single multimedia service. The service template identifies a number of multimedia services and associated logic for invoking the multimedia services, once the service template is invoked. In operation, a signaling message is received and appropriate filtering criteria are retrieved for the signaling message. Filtering criteria define a set of rules identifying any multimedia services that need to be invoked in light of receiving the signaling message. The filtering criteria will identify a service template, and perhaps other multimedia services to invoke directly. If a service template is invoked, the service template is obtained and the logic controlling invocation of the associated multimedia services is applied to effect invocation of the multimedia services. | 10-18-2012 |
20120271955 | Mechanisms for role negotiation in the establishment of secure communication channels in peer-to-peer environments - Methods of establishing secure communication channels in peer-to-peer environments are provided that eliminate role conflicts between peers by determining which peer will act as a client and which the peer will act as a server in a secure connection handshake. In one embodiment, an attribute of the handshake messages are used in a tiebreaker process to determine which peer assumes the role of the server. In another embodiment, the attribute may be used to compute a wait period for each peer, or the wait period may be based on a random time period, and the peers cancel their request and resent requests after waiting their respective time periods. | 10-25-2012 |
20120271956 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROGRAM - A transmission apparatus holds user information of an external device for a predetermined period of time and maintains a second protocol session between the own apparatus and another transmission apparatus for the predetermined period of time when a first protocol session between the external device and the own apparatus is disconnected. After the first protocol session is newly established, when a log-in is requested from an external device within the predetermined period of time, the transmission apparatus determines whether the user information of the external device that requested the log-in matches the user information it holds. When these pieces of user information match, the transmission apparatus connects the first protocol session newly established with the second protocol session maintained. | 10-25-2012 |
20120278490 | DISTRIBUTED MACHINE-TO-MACHINE CONNECTIVITY - Connections and/or transmission times to or from machine-to-machine (M2M) type devices are staggered and/or randomized. M2M data/call sessions are distributed during a time interval. The distributed connections during a time frame can be random, pseudorandom, and/or distributed in accordance with a scheme to mitigate network congestion. | 11-01-2012 |
20120278491 | Session Management Technique - A system for managing sessions between a client and multiple servers includes: a receiver for receiving, as a proxy for each of the servers, a request from the client to any of the servers; a determination unit for determining, upon receipt of the request from the client to any of the servers, whether sessions established between the client and the multiple servers are maintained; a disconnection unit for disconnecting, on condition that a session between the client and any of the multiple servers is already disconnected, the sessions established between the client and the servers different from the disconnected server; and a forward unit for forwarding, on condition that the sessions established between the client and all of the multiple servers are maintained, the received request to the destination server for the request. | 11-01-2012 |
20120278492 | USING A SERVER'S CAPABILITY PROFILE TO ESTABLISH A CONNECTION - A network device connects between a client and a server. The network device is configured to store information regarding a capability of the server; receive a first message, from the client, intended for the server; obtain the stored information regarding the capability of the server; generate a second message that includes the information regarding the capability of the server; send the second message to the client; receive a third message from the client; and establish, based on the third message, a connection between the client and the server. | 11-01-2012 |
20120284412 | NETWORKING DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE CREATION OF PORTABLE PROXIMITY COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present disclosure relates to a networking device, a system and a method for the creation of a portable proximity communication network. A networking device comprises a communication interface and a networking component for establishing connections of the networking device, via the communication interface, with any one of a plurality of communication devices. The networking component is capable of establishing a connection with a peer networking device for creating a long range based communication network. | 11-08-2012 |
20120284413 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, SERVER DEVICE, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION - A pairing server ( | 11-08-2012 |
20120284414 | Method, System and Network Nodes for Performing a SIP Transaction in a Session Initiation Protocol Based Communications Network - Method, system and network nodes for performing a SIP transaction, such as a SIP Invite transaction, in a Session Initiation Protocol based communications network from a first node to a third node via a second node. The second node acts as a proxy that receives a SIP message from the first node and, instead of forwarding the message to the third node, transmits a pivot request to the first node requesting the first node to forward the message directly to the third node. The first node forwards the message directly to the third node, and during the remainder of the SIP transaction further SIP messages are exchanged between the first and third node directly. | 11-08-2012 |
20120284415 | Electronic Device and Base Station for Maintaining a Network Connection - An electronic device and wireless base station for maintaining a persistent connection are provided. In an embodiment, a system includes an electronic device that connects to a web server via a physical link that is bandwidth-constrained. The physical link also includes a wireless base station and at least one network address translation (“NAT”) router that is configured to terminate idle connections between the client and the web-server. One of the electronic device and the wireless base station is configured to send keep-alive packets to the web-server in order to reduce the likelihood of the NAT router terminating the connection. The keep-alive packets are sent on a variable basis that is intended to reduce bandwidth consumption while ensuring that the NAT router does not deem the connection idle and terminate the connection. | 11-08-2012 |
20120290727 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INCREASING PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL SESSIONS IN DATA NETWORKS - A method for increasing the performance of a transmission control protocol (TCP) session transmitted over a telephony local loop between a client and a server. The method comprises: providing a proxy system between the client and the server, the client and the server being coupled through a network; intercepting, at the proxy system, a request transmitted by the client; transparently establishing a first TCP session between the client and the proxy system, and a second TCP session between the proxy system and the server; and storing data, received from the server in response to the request, in a buffer at the proxy system, when throughput between the server and proxy system is greater than throughput between the proxy system and the client. | 11-15-2012 |
20120290728 | Data card and method for quickly establishing dial-up connection thereof - The disclosure provides a method for quickly establishing a dial-up connection by using a data card, which comprises: when a mobile terminal initiates the dial-up connection from a computer, performing both a process of initiating a wireless connection establishment through a Unified Messaging (Um) port and a process of initiating a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server through a Remote Messaging (Rm) port at the same time. Compared with the prior art, in the technical solution of the disclosure, the time for initiating the DHCP server by the terminal equipment (TE) is advanced and is identical to the time for initiating the wireless transmission connection establishment, thus the Um side and the Rm side can initiate the dial-up flow at the same time, and the time for waiting DHCP discover messages and the time for waiting the wireless connection establishment overlap, in this way, the purpose of shortening dial-up time and realizing quick dial-up is achieved. | 11-15-2012 |
20120297074 | PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION IN SCHEDULED TASK PERFORMANCE - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: determining, by the session management node, a next task time for a session; storing the next task time; waiting for a period of time; after waiting, determining whether a task should be performed with respect to the session based on the next task time; and if the task should be performed with respect to the session, sending a message to at least one other node in the subscriber network including an indication that the task should be performed with respect to the session. | 11-22-2012 |
20120297075 | DEVICE INTERCONNECTION AND SERVICE DISCOVERY VIA A COMMUNICATION CLOUD - A system, method, and computer program product for allowing network enabled devices to interconnect via auto-discovery and manual discovery. The interconnections are made via a communication cloud, which is a resource on a server that acts as a transmission channel between authorized devices. The protocol includes a Communication Cloud Assignment that defines a process for designating a device to a cloud. Once a device is connected to a cloud, it uses a Service Discovery/Delivery Protocol to request and/or advertise its services to other devices on the cloud. Devices with appropriate criteria such as the same IP address, subnet, service protocol etc. will be placed on the same cloud; thus, those devices will automatically discover each other and their services. A device may be manually directed from its originating cloud to another cloud when a special code is entered. | 11-22-2012 |
20120297076 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION ENTITY - This disclosure discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for selecting a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) entity. The method comprises: when an IP Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session is established for a User Equipment (UE), the Diameter Routing Agent (DRA) receives a message from a gateway, and selects the PCRF entity for the IP-CAN session according to the main identifier in the message, wherein the UEs sharing the subscription information have the same main identifier. This disclosure can solves the problem that a conflict is caused in PCC since different PCRF entities are used for the PCC when multiple users share the subscription information. | 11-22-2012 |
20120297077 | TECHNOLOGIES FOR DETECTING ERRONEOUS RESUMPTIONS IN A CONTINUATION BASED RUNTIME - Technologies for enabling a continuation based runtime to accept or reject external stimulus and, in addition, to determine if an external stimulus may be valid for processing at a later point in execution. | 11-22-2012 |
20120303822 | MULTIPATH OVERLAY NETWORK AND ITS MULTIPATH MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL - A method of wireless communication includes aggregating data in a streaming communication session from a source node in a destination aggregator node, wherein data in the streaming session is transported over multiple paths from the source node to the aggregator node via a multipath overlay network discovered by the source node and the aggregator node. | 11-29-2012 |
20120303823 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HOST AND OS AGNOSTIC MANAGEMENT OF CONNECTED DEVICES THROUGH NETWORK CONTROLLED STATE ALTERATION - A method and system for establishing network connectivity with a device is disclosed. A connectivity platform detects a plurality of networks. A network policy of each of the plurality of networks is determined. A signal quality of each of the plurality of networks is determined. The network policy and the signal quality of each of the plurality of networks is analyzed. A connection is established between the device and the first network of the plurality of networks based on the analysis of the network policy and the signal quality of each of the plurality of networks. | 11-29-2012 |
20120303824 | CLOUD-ASSISTED NETWORK DEVICE INTEGRATION - A system for integrating a networked device into a domain is described and includes: a network operation control coupled with a local server and including a device class determiner for establishing a device class for at least one device residing in a domain at a premises, wherein based on the establishing the device class, an action is enabled to be mapped to the device, thereby enabling an application to run on and utilize a capability of said device; and a domain manager coupled with a remote server and the network operation control, the domain manager including, coupled with the remote server: an action identifier; a device driver determiner; a comparer; and a device driver implementer for, based on comparing by the comparer, implementing a device driver associated with the device when a first protocol corresponds to a second protocol such that the action is enabled for performance. | 11-29-2012 |
20120311161 | DUAL-PHASE CONTENT SYNCHRONIZATION - Metadata is synchronized between a mobile device and a remote node over a first network, where the metadata specifies media content to be synchronized between the mobile device and the remote node. Subsequently a network connection is established with the remote node over a second network. The media content is bi-directionally synchronized between the mobile device and the remote node over the second network based on the metadata that was synchronized over the first network. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311162 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR VALIDATING TRANSACTION ACTIVITY WITH AT LEAST ONE SESSION IDENTIFIER - Various embodiments provide systems for validating transaction activity a user may perform on a website in which the user has engaged in an initial interactive session. According to particular embodiments, the system comprises a memory and at least one processor configured to: (a) receive, from the website, information identifying the user and information that the user is engaging in the initial interactive session with the website; and (b) after receiving the information: (1) validate one or more transaction activities the user can engage in during an interactive session with the website; (2) issue a session identifier that is associated with the plurality of validated transaction activities, the website, and the initial interactive session with the website; and (3) store the session identifier along with the information identifying the user, the website, and the initial interactive session in the memory. Associated methods are also provided. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311163 | PROVIDING TELEPHONY SERVICES TO TERMINALS BEHIND A FIREWALL AND/OR A NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR - A method and apparatus for allowing telephony or other types of media communications and services to be provided for a device ( | 12-06-2012 |
20120311164 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of controlling connection establishment to transmit or receive A/V data in a wireless network is provided. The method of controlling connection establishment to transmit or receive A/V data in a first device of a wireless network that includes a coordinator and at least one device comprises transmitting connection request information required to request connection establishment with a second device and a connection request message which includes capability information of the first device to the second device and receiving a connection response message from the second device in response to the connection request message. | 12-06-2012 |
20120324117 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING NETWORK CONNECTIONS USING THE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method for providing a plurality of network connections using an electronic device presets a first Access Point Name (APN) to connect the electronic device to a wireless network. A first transmission channel is established and activated to transmit data between a first application and the wireless network according to the first APN, in response to determining that the first application has a need to access the wireless network. The method further creates a second APN if a second application in the electronic device needs to access the wireless network while the first transmission channel is activated. A second transmission channel is established and activated to transmit data between the second application and the wireless network according to the second APN. | 12-20-2012 |
20120324118 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING TECHNICAL SUPPORT - A system and method are disclosed for facilitating technical support of equipment at multiple different geographic equipment locations such as hospitals and others, by a number of different vendors or manufacturers at still different geographic locations. Service calls are completed by means of a central portal which establishes an electronic communication path between portable computer customer support devices and manufacturer support devices. Soft buttons on the customer support devices may be selectively activated individually to call the central portal which then completes the establishment of communication between portable computer customer support devices and selected manufacturer support devices. | 12-20-2012 |
20120324119 | Energy Management System And Method, Including Auto-Provisioning Capability Using Near Field Communication - According to an aspect of the disclosure, a provisioning system for a network includes a first device associated with a site. The first device includes an RFID reader associated therewith. The system also includes a second device including a device identifier associated therewith. The device identifier includes information about the second device to assist in joining it to the network. The RFID reader is configured to read the device identifier on the second device to obtain information about the second device. Based on the information about the second device it can then be joined to the network by the first device. | 12-20-2012 |
20120331153 | Establishing A Data Communications Connection Between A Lightweight Kernel In A Compute Node Of A Parallel Computer And An Input-Output ('I/O') Node Of The Parallel Computer - Establishing a data communications connection between a lightweight kernel in a compute node of a parallel computer and an input-output (‘I/O’) node of the parallel computer, including: configuring the compute node with the network address and port value for data communications with the I/O node; establishing a queue pair on the compute node, the queue pair identified by a queue pair number (‘QPN’); receiving, in the I/O node on the parallel computer from the lightweight kernel, a connection request message; establishing by the I/O node on the I/O node a queue pair identified by a QPN for communications with the compute node; and establishing by the I/O node the requested connection by sending to the lightweight kernel a connection reply message. | 12-27-2012 |
20120331154 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION BETWEEN DEVICES USING CACHED CONNECTION INFORMATION - Disclosed are an apparatus and method of performing a connection setup between two or more endpoint devices communication over a data network. An example connection setup operation may include receiving an initial command at the at least two endpoint devices, retrieving at least one IP address from a cache file in response to the initial command, assigning a port number to the at least one retrieved IP address based on a common session identifier (ID) shared between the at least two endpoint devices, and listening for a connection communication message on the assigned port number associated with the at least one IP address. | 12-27-2012 |
20120331155 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION BETWEEN DEVICES USING CACHED CONNECTION INFORMATION - Disclosed are an apparatus and method of caching connection information used to establish a communication connection setup between at least two endpoint devices across a data network. One example method of operation may include exchanging at least one interface address and at least one globally unique identifier between the at least two endpoint devices. The method may also provide retrieving a last successful connection setup information based on the at least one globally unique identifier and the at least one interface address, assigning at least one port number to the at least one interface address via at least one of the two endpoint devices, exchanging at least one rendezvous message between the at least two endpoint devices to share connection setup information, and storing at least one of the at least one interface address, that at least one globally unique identifier, the last successful connection setup information, and the at least one port number in a cache file. | 12-27-2012 |
20120331156 | WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM, METHODS AND APPARATUS - Methods, systems and apparatus for controlling wireless target devices, such as, for example, appliances or other electrically powered devices, or power circuits for providing power to such target devices. A user of a smart device, such as, for example, a cell phone, can conveniently configure the smart device for communication with the target devices, and control the target devices using the smart device via a local network or remotely away from the local network. The target device can broadcast a network for use in configuring the smart device for use in controlling the target device. | 12-27-2012 |
20120331157 | Selecting A Network Connection For Data Communications With A Networked Device - Selecting a network connection for data communications with a networked device, including: identifying a plurality of networks available for data communications with the networked device, each network having network connection attributes; and selecting one of the plurality of networks in dependence upon the network connection attributes and the direction of data transfer. | 12-27-2012 |
20120331158 | System and Method for Determining Trust for SIP Messages - A method in a user agent (UA) is provided. The method includes sending a SIP REGISTER request, and receiving a SIP REGISTER response message. The SIP REGISTER response message has a first header field that includes an identifier associated with a trusted network node. The method also includes receiving a SIP message having a second header field for indicating a URI, and sending a SIP communication if the URI matches the identifier associated with the trusted network node. | 12-27-2012 |
20120331159 | Method and Apparatus for Identifying an IMS Service - A User Equipment (UE) and IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network node for indicating the IMS services and IMS applications to which a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message relates. An IMS communication service identifier and an IMS application reference are added to the SIP message. The identifier and the reference may be added as Feature Tags. The reference may also be added as an a-line augmenting an m-line in a Session Description Protocol (SDP) part of the SIP message. | 12-27-2012 |
20130007285 | MAPPING AN APPLICATION SESSION TO A COMPATIBLE MULTIPLE GRANTS PER INTERVAL SERVICE FLOW - A method to map an application session to a compatible multiple grants per interval (MGI) service flow is provided. The method includes the steps of sorting available MGI service flows according to a duration of their grant intervals in a first list and sorting application sessions according to a maximum size of a packet in an application session in a second list. The method further includes the step of mapping an application session from the second list to a MGI service flow in the first list if a maximum size and periodicity of packets in the application session are compatible with a grant size and grant interval of the MGI service flow and transmitting packets corresponding to the application session in the mapped MGI service flow. | 01-03-2013 |
20130007286 | USER SESSION ROUTING BETWEEN MOBILE NETWORK GATEWAYS - In general, techniques are described for dynamically redirecting session requests received with a mobile network gateway to another gateway of the mobile network. Heterogeneous static and dynamic capabilities among gateways of the mobile network lead some gateways unable to service a particular session requested by a wireless device attached to the mobile network. A set of policies configured within the gateways by a mobile network operator and applied by the gateway enable the gateway to identify and offload session requests to another gateway of the mobile network that has the present capability to service the session. The policies may define conditions and actions to provide flexible routing of the user session to an appropriate gateway. | 01-03-2013 |
20130007287 | Dynamic Multicast Session Setup in LTE Networks - Methods, systems, and apparatuses dynamically setting up bearers to support Internet protocol (IP) multicast traffic in various networks are provided. The method may be performed by joining an IP multicast group in response to receiving a request to initiate an IP multicast transmission session within a network, the request including at least one transmission session parameter; determining at least one synchronization area within the network for the IP multicast transmission session of the request based at least in part on the at least one transmission session parameter; and initiating an IP multicast transmission session between an application server and at least one user equipment end-point within the at least one synchronization area. | 01-03-2013 |
20130007288 | SYSTEM FOR MANAGING AUDIO/VIDEO STREAMS USING APPLICATION LAYER STRUCTURES IN AN AVB NETWORK - A system that includes a talker, a listener, and a controller may communicate over an Ethernet Audio/Video Bridging network. The controller may communicate control messages to manage data streams between the talker and the listener through one or more application layer interfaces of the talker and the listener. Based on the control messages, the talker and the listener may communicate using a Stream Reservation Protocol to reserve connection for, or remove connection from, the data streams. The talker and listener may communicate the success of reserving or removing the connections to the controller through the application layer interfaces. | 01-03-2013 |
20130007289 | REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM AND REMOTE CONTROL METHOD OF THE SAME - Provided is a remote control system and a remote control method of the same. The remote control system includes a first driver installed on a first device connected with a terminal through universal serial bus (USB) and configured to perform USB communication with the terminal, and a second driver installed on a second device connected with the first device via a network and configured to communicate with the first driver via the network. Here, the first and second drivers constitute a remote device driver for driving the terminal, and the second device transmits a command for controlling the terminal through the remote device driver and displays a display image of the terminal provided from the terminal through the remote device driver. | 01-03-2013 |
20130007290 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION SERVICE - Provided is a system and method for providing a communication service. According to exemplary embodiments of the present invention, a synchronization session integrated among a plurality of user terminals that use a communication service may be set, and control result data corresponding to terminal control information selected by at least one of user terminals may be provided to user terminals. | 01-03-2013 |
20130013791 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL (TCP) THROUGHPUT OPTIMIZATION IN MOBILE WIRELESS NETWORKS - A device establishes a first transmission control protocol (TCP) connection with a client device associated with a wireless network, and establishes a second TCP connection with a server device associated with the wireless network. The device also provides a first TCP window size to the client device via the first TCP connection, and provides a second TCP window size to the server device via the second TCP connection, where the first TCP window size is different than the second TCP window size. | 01-10-2013 |
20130013792 | Triggering With QoS Parameters - The present disclosure relates to a method and system for triggering at least one terminal to establish a communication path between the terminal and a server, the communication path including at least one data connection. The method includes transmitting a trigger message to the terminal, the trigger message including connection information indicating a first type of the data connection. | 01-10-2013 |
20130013793 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR HANDLING MACHINETO-MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS - The present invention faces the issues of communicating Machine-To-Machine Devices with Machine-To-Machine Servers for remote control of said Machine-To-Machine Devices (4 | 01-10-2013 |
20130013794 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING IP-CAN SESSION - A method and an apparatus for creating an Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session are disclosed herein. The method includes: creating, by a First Policy and Charging Enforcement Function entity, PCEFa entity, a session with a Policy and Charging Rules Function entity, PCRF entity; performing, by the PCEFa entity, mobility registration with a second Policy and Charging Enforcement Function entity, PCEFb entity; creating, by the PCEFb entity, a session with the PCRF entity; and sending, by the PCRF entity, a session information to the PCEFa entity and the PCEFb entity. mobility The apparatus includes: a PCEFa entity, a PCEFb entity, and a PCRF entity. The method and the apparatus for creating an IP-CAN session under the present disclosure accomplish the purpose of creating an IP-CAN session in the new PCC architecture. | 01-10-2013 |
20130013795 | ESTABLISHING SECURE COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN COMPUTERS OF VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - A technique is disclosed for establishing a secure communication link between a first computer and a second computer over a computer network. Initially, a secure communication mode of communication is enabled at a first computer without a user entering any cryptographic information for establishing the secure communication mode of communication. Then, a secure communication link is established between the first computer and a second computer over a computer network based on the enabled secure communication mode of communication. The secure communication link is a virtual private network communication link over the computer network in which one or more data values that vary according to a pseudo-random sequence are inserted into each data packet. | 01-10-2013 |
20130019020 | SMART WIRELESS CONNECTIONAANM Kang; FengAACI San DiegoAAST CAAACO USAAGP Kang; Feng San Diego CA USAANM Treebs; LelandAACI San DiegoAAST CAAACO USAAGP Treebs; Leland San Diego CA USAANM Zhou; YiAACI San DiegoAAST CAAACO USAAGP Zhou; Yi San Diego CA US - Disclosed are approaches for automatically forming a wireless connection for a computing device. In one embodiment, a method can include: determining that a first wireless connection for a computing device has been lost; receiving a browser indication from a browser running on the computing device that a second wireless connection is desired for the computing device; providing, in response to the browser indication, an automatic connection indication to a user of the computing device via a user interface; receiving an acceptance indication from the user interface in response to the automatic connection indication; and establishing the second wireless connection for the computing device in response to the acceptance indication from the user interface. | 01-17-2013 |
20130019021 | DATA PATH SELECTION METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION SESSIONAANM LAU; PriscillaAACI FremontAAST CAAACO USAAGP LAU; Priscilla Fremont CA US - A network controller may receive a communication session request from a user device via a network gateway. The communication session request may include a request to establish a communication session between two or more devices. The network controller may also determine that a communication session corresponding to the communication session request requires a network boarder controller, access a data structure that associates network gateways with network border controllers according to distance, and use the data structure to identify a network border controller that is located nearest to the network gateway. The network controller may establish a communication session comprising a data transport path between the network gateway and the network border controller, of a plurality of network border controllers, nearest to the network gateway. | 01-17-2013 |
20130024574 | COMMUNICATION SESSION ALLOCATION - A network device may receive an incoming call for a user device requesting a communication session corresponding to a particular communication session type, where the user device is attached to a first access network. The network device may identify the first access network and determine whether a first centralized network supports the communication session type in the first access network. When the first centralized network supports the communication session type in the first access network, the network device may designate the first centralized network to service the incoming call. When the first centralized network does not support the communication session type in the first access network, the network device may designate a second centralized network to service the incoming call. | 01-24-2013 |
20130024575 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING LEGACY DEVICES ACCESS TO A SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) BASED NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing legacy devices access to a session initiation protocol (SIP) based network are disclosed. One exemplary system comprises a session initiation protocol (SIP) based access proxy element communicatively coupled to a SIP based network that includes a registration engine configured to create a mapped entry in a database that associates an assigned SIP registration identifier to an identifier corresponding to a legacy endpoint device and configured to register the legacy endpoint device into the SIP based network using the assigned SIP registration identifier. The SIP based access proxy element further includes a session management module configured to establish a communications session involving the registered legacy endpoint device by interworking between a legacy control protocol and a SIP based call control protocol using the mapped entry in the database. | 01-24-2013 |
20130024576 | Proximity-Based Detection - Proximity-based detection is described. In one or more implementations, an identifier is received wirelessly by a computing device from another computing device that is directly communicated from the other computing device such that the identifier is not communicated via an intermediary device. The other computing device is identified by comparing the identifier to one or more identifiers stored locally by the computing device. A notification is output for display that indicates the other computing device is within a predefined proximity to the computing device and that identifies the other computing device using data associated with the identifier that is stored locally by the computing device. | 01-24-2013 |
20130024577 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A RELATIONSHIP BASED ON A PRIOR ASSOCIATION - Disclosed herein are systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for automatically establishing trusted relationships between users across organizational boundaries. A user makes a request to his system to create a trusted relationship with an individual of another organization. The system then analyzes the previous communication history between the user and the other individual, and, based on that analysis, sends a query to the other individual's system. The system then receives a response from the other individual's system, and if the response matches an expected response the system forms a trusted relationship between the user and the other individual. | 01-24-2013 |
20130024578 | Method and system for distributed initiation of USB over network data plane connections - Connecting USB devices with USB hosts over a network supporting distributed initiations of USB connections over the network, including the following steps: Connecting non-collocated USB hosts with respective non-collocated USB host adaptors (USBHs), according to USB specification timings. Connecting non-collocated USB devices with respective non-collocated USB device adaptors (USBDs). Enabling the USBDs and the USBHs to communicate over the network and to discover the presence and capabilities of one another. Initiating, by the USBDs or the USBHs, via the network control plane, USB-over-network-data-plane connections between the USB devices and the USB hosts. And operating at least two of the USB-over-network-data-plane connections essentially simultaneously and without any common network node. | 01-24-2013 |
20130031256 | Method And Apparatus For Reliable Session Migration - Various embodiments provide a reliable session migration method and apparatus without requiring additional option headers to each packet or inducing transmission delay. This is achieved by utilizing aggregated checksums that facilitate session migration upon a migration event. Advantageously, some such embodiments may permit applications to continue when the endpoint device physically moves from one access network. Similarly, some such embodiments may allow dynamic migration access networks based on load, pricing or other factors. Moreover, some such embodiments may permit traffic to be split along multiple paths so as to increase the aggregate throughput. | 01-31-2013 |
20130031257 | Secure XDM Communication Between IMS Networks - Requests between first and second IMS network domains are communicated by receiving an XDM request in the first domain. The XDM request relates to an XML document that can be accessed via the XDM request from a location in the second domain. A SIP request is created that includes information identifying it as a request that relates to an XDM request. The SIP request is sent to the second domain so that the SIP request can be routed to the location in the second domain based on the identifying information in the SIP request. A connection for XDM requests between the first and second domains is established. | 01-31-2013 |
20130031258 | NETWORK CONNECTION DEVICE AND METHOD - A network connection device includes: one or more network devices; a network switching control section configured to determine a second network as a candidate network to which connection is subsequently switched from a first network to which a network device is currently connecting; a network relation state determination section configured to determine whether or not the network device is used for forming a PAN; a disconnection-caused disadvantage determination section configured to determine whether or not a disadvantage to a user will be caused by switching connection to the second network, based on the result of the determination by the network relation state determination section; and a switching acceptability determination section configured to prohibit switching connection to the second network when the result of the determination is that a disadvantage to the user will be caused. | 01-31-2013 |
20130031259 | Method of Discovering Operator-Provided Network Services Using IMS - A method, session managing node and arrangement for providing a network service address of at least one network service of a first operator IMS network to a third party service provider (3PSP) are disclosed, wherein the 3PSP has no business agreement with the first operator. A first application of a mobile station communicates with a second application via a first network, resulting in the setup of an IMS session between the mobile station and the 3PSP. A network service address of at least one network service, provided by the first operator IMS network, is inserted into a SIP message of the IMS session in a session managing node of the first operator IMS network and delivered to the 3PSP, where it is forwarded to the second application. If required, the second application may access the one or more network services via the first network, using the retrieved network address. | 01-31-2013 |
20130036228 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION AND RELAY SYSTEM - A communication device is configured to relay a signal between a first device to perform as a connection start terminal and a second device to perform as a connection end device, the communication device including: a processor configured to execute a procedure, the procedure including: establishing, with the second device, sessions meaning logical connections in communication; deciding whether an unused session remains in the established sessions for a command to be transferred to the second device, the command being generated by the first device; in a case of identifying that the unused session remains in the established sessions when the command is received, exchanging the command with the second device by using the unused session; and communicating messages to the second device by using the established sessions within a particular period of time of the second device, the established sessions being continuously maintained in the particular period of time. | 02-07-2013 |
20130036229 | METHOD OF MANAGING CONNECTION BETWEEN PERSONAL NETWORK AND CPNS SERVICE IN CPNS SYSTEM - A method of managing a connection between a Personal Network (PN) and a Converged Personal Network Service (CPNS) server by a first device in a CPNS system including the personal network configured between the first device and a second device including at least one of a Personal Network Entity (PNE) and a Personal Network GateWay (PNGW) and the CPNS server connected with the personal network through a first communication network is provided. The method includes identifying the second device including the PNGW by using device mode information indicating whether the second device included in a PN inventory includes the PNE and the PNGW; requesting a connection between the CPNS server and the second device through the first communication network; and terminating the connection to the CPNS server according to the connection between the CPNS server and the second device through the first communication network. | 02-07-2013 |
20130036230 | SOCIAL NETWORK CONNECTIONS - The present invention relates to methods and apparatus for maintaining network connections. One or more new communication events for a first user are identified and a social graph builder receives data relating to the one or more new communication events wherein the data includes data relating to a second user. The social graph builder modifies a social network graph for the first user based on the received data if the identified one or more new communication events fulfills one or more predefined criteria. | 02-07-2013 |
20130042010 | ACCESS ESTABLISHMENT TO LOCALLY CONNECTABLE DEVICE - In a non-limiting and exemplary embodiment, a method is provided for arranging access to locally connectable devices. A target direction is estimated on the basis of a user input. A communication device residing substantially at the target direction is defined. Before or after the identification of the communication device, access information associated with the communications device is received without establishing a connection to the communication device and without any information of earlier connection to the communication device. The device at target direction communication device and/or a service is connected on the basis of the access information associated with the identified communication device. | 02-14-2013 |
20130042011 | COMMUNICATION NODES AND NETWORK NODES - Disclosed is a technique for reducing the number of event report messages sent from many communication nodes (MTC devices). Upon detecting an event (smoke detection by a smoke sensor), an MTC device A | 02-14-2013 |
20130054815 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING CHARGED CONNECTION USING SCREEN SHARING APPLICATION BETWEEN MULTI- PLATFORMS - A method of establishing a charged connection using a screen sharing application between multi-platforms is disclosed. A transmitting end application is installed in a transmitting end apparatus of a sharing source. A receiving end application is installed in a receiving end apparatus of a sharing target. If the transmitting end application is a charged version, an unlimited connection is established for performing screen sharing between the transmitting end apparatus and any receiving end apparatus. If the transmitting end application is a free version, the method further confirms if the receiving end application is a charged version for deciding whether a limited connection or an unlimited connection should be established. Thus, it is assured that either the transmitting end application or the receiving end application is a charged version, the interests of application developers are protected and users are free from paying twice for establishing one connection. | 02-28-2013 |
20130054816 | Determining Validity of SIP Messages Without Parsing - Methods and apparatus are provided for determining the validity of SIP messages, such as self-similar messages, without parsing the message. A SIP message is processed by creating a feature vector matrix of the SIP message; processing the feature vector matrix using a plurality of classifiers; combining results generated by the plurality of classifiers to obtain a combined result; and processing the SIP message based on the combined result. The plurality of classifiers can be trained on a training data set. The SIP message can optionally be classified, for example, as a normal message or an anomalous message based on the combined result. In addition, the SIP message can optionally be processed or rejected based on the combined result. The results generated by the plurality of classifiers are combined using a combination function, such as a voting rule or a logistic regression. | 02-28-2013 |
20130054817 | DISAGGREGATED SERVER LOAD BALANCING - Various systems, processes, and products may be used to provide disaggregated server load balancing. In particular implementations, systems, processes, and products may include the ability to receive a connection request at an application delivery controller from a client device, analyze the connection request to determine one of a plurality of application delivery controller agents to handle the connection request, send the connection request to the determined application delivery controller agent, and analyze the connection at the determined application delivery controller agent request to determine an application server to handle the connection request. | 02-28-2013 |
20130054818 | PROCESSING TERMINAL AND PROCESSING METHOD - A processing terminal has a communication unit that establishes a connection with a server and conducts communication; a processing unit that executes predetermined processing based on information acquired from the server through the communication; a disconnection detecting unit that detects a disconnection of the connection; and a reconnecting unit that repeatedly attempts a reconnection with the server at first timing that is random and meets conditions that an expected value of the interval of the attempts is a predetermined certain value in a case where a disconnection of the connection is detected. | 02-28-2013 |
20130054819 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCELERATING TRANSMISSION OF DATA BETWEEN NETWORK DEVICES - A method and system for transferring data between a sender and a receiver in a packet-based network is disclosed. The method comprises establishing a data channel, establishing a feedback channel, sending data to the receiver over the data channel, sending an acknowledgment to a sender on the feedback channel at a predetermined interval, using the acknowledgment to track data sent successfully and unsuccessfully to the receiver, resending data unsuccessfully sent to the receiver, and self-tuning to optimize throughput based upon the acknowledgement and react to changing network conditions. | 02-28-2013 |
20130054820 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BROWSING USING MULTIPLE COORDINATED DEVICE SETS - Systems and methods for navigating hypermedia using multiple coordinated input/output device sets. Disclosed systems and methods allow a user and/or an author to control what resources are presented on which device sets (whether they are integrated or not), and provide for coordinating browsing activities to enable such a user interface to be employed across multiple independent systems. Disclosed systems and methods also support new and enriched aspects and applications of hypermedia browsing and related business activities. | 02-28-2013 |
20130060949 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS THAT CONTROLS SESSION ESTABLISHMENT, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication control apparatus which is capable of transmitting a message to a plurality of destinations by broadcasting using SIP, and also avoiding a situation in which other SIP services cannot be used. A connection request message received from a transmitting-side terminal apparatus via a network is transmitted to destinations associated with an address included in a connection request message. It is determined whether or not a predetermined designation is made as to the connection request message, and when it is determined that the predetermined designation is made as to the connection request message, response messages are received from all receiving-side terminal apparatuses which are the destinations, then a connection response message is transmitted to the transmitting-side terminal apparatus, and all the receiving-side terminal apparatuses which are the destinations and the transmitting-side terminal apparatus are connected to each other by one session. | 03-07-2013 |
20130060950 | PROCESSING CONTROL SERVER, PROCESSING CONTROL METHOD, AND PROCESSING TERMINAL - A processing control server has a first communication unit that communicates with a processing terminal by using a first connection based on HTTP; a second communication unit that communicates with the processing terminal by using a second connection that is different from the first connection; and a processing control unit that transmits object data to the processing terminal based on HTTP after acquiring a processing request, and requests the processing terminal to cancel processing of the object data by using the second connection in response to acquisition of a cancellation request. | 03-07-2013 |
20130060951 | COMMUNICATION MEDIATING APPARATUS FOR MEDIATING COMMUNICATION OVER NETWORK - A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition attached to a metal surface. The composition includes an acrylic copolymer obtained by polymerizing a monomer mixture, the monomer mixture including: at least one monomer (monomer m1) selected from alkyl(meth)acrylates represented by the formula (I): CH | 03-07-2013 |
20130060952 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING COLLABORATIVE SESSION - The present invention discloses a method, a device, and a system for establishing a collaborative session, and belongs to the field of communication. The method includes: receiving, by a network control device, a session establishment request that carries media stream description information and is sent by a control UE; and according to the media stream description information carried in the received session establishment request, establishing, by the network control device, on the control UE a media stream with a remote UE, and establishing on a controlled UE a media stream with the remote UE. In the present invention, the control UE sends the media stream description information to the network control device, so that the network control device establishes media streams on the control UE and the controlled UE with the remote UE, thereby enabling the media streams to be established on different UEs at the same time. | 03-07-2013 |
20130067094 | DIRECTLY TRANSFERING DATA BETWEEN DEVICES - A method for directly transferring data between devices includes, with a first computing system that is able to wirelessly associate with a computer network, establishing a direct data-link layer connection to a second computing system that is acting as a data sink, and with the first computing system transmitting data to the second computing system over the connection without transferring the data over the network. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067095 | SMB2 SCALEOUT - Systems and methods are disclosed for clients and servers operating in a scaled cluster environment. Efficiencies are introduced to the process of connecting a client to a clustered environment by providing the client with the ability to attempt a connection with multiple servers in parallel. Servers operating the in the clustered environment are also capable of providing persistent storage of file handles and other state information. Ownership of the state information and persistent handles may be transferred between servers, thereby providing clients with the opportunity to move from one server to another while maintaining access to resources in the clustered environment. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067096 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTION OF COMMUNICATION ACTIVITIES OF A METER BOARD - Described herein are embodiments of methods and systems for detecting communications of a first meter board by a second meter board. In accordance with one aspect, a method is provided for detecting communications of a first meter board by a second meter board. In one embodiment, the method includes: receiving a signal, wherein the signal indicates a presence of communication activities between a first processor and another device over a network. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067097 | Switching Between Connectivity Types To Maintain Connectivity - Techniques are provided for leveraging narrowband connectivity (such as dial-up communications or other types of low bandwidth communications) to provision or configure broadband connectivity between a broadband access provider and a broadband device, such as a DSL modem or a cable modem. Specifically, because narrowband connectivity does not require advance configuration or provisioning by the host system of connectivity parameters for an access-seeking device, a modem at an access-seeking device may be leveraged to establish a narrowband connection between that device and a host system and to enable an exchange or negotiation of connectivity parameters necessary to enable future broadband connectivity. Thus, once established, the narrowband connection may be used as a conduit for communicating required provisioning information between the broadband-enabling host and the access-seeking device to enable broadband connectivity by the device in the future. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067098 | Remote Access to Resources - The invention provides systems and methods for securely transmitting data between a roaming computer and a managed network service over a shared public network. A secure connection is created between the roaming computer and a server computer that hosts or acts as a secure gateway to the managed network service. The connection is set up and established by a client agent installed on the roaming computer and a connection component of the managed service on the server computer. The client agent and the connection component of the managed service operate, on an initial request from the roaming computer to the managed service to negotiate the secure connection using certificate-based client authentication. The client certificate preferably includes user-specific attributes that can be extracted by the connection component and made available to the managed service to apply processing rules specific to the user. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067099 | MULTI-MODE ENDPOINT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHODS THEREOF - A method, apparatus, and communication network system that allows an endpoint to be simultaneously registered with more than one communications server is described. In one embodiment, the communication network system includes a network, a plurality of communications servers that are coupled to the network, and a plurality of endpoints coupled to the network. Each endpoint is capable of being simultaneously registered with more than one communications server. A communication method for an endpoint involves registering a first logical line of the endpoint with a first communications server, and registering a second logical line of the endpoint with a second communications server. Consequently, flexibility is obtained by allowing an endpoint to choose the registering communications server for each logical line of the endpoint. | 03-14-2013 |
20130073736 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication device configured to receive content from a server via a network, comprises a storage unit configured to store content received from the server in a cache, a display unit configured to display the content stored in the storage unit, a control unit configured to switch connection to the network to one of a plurality of communication lines having different communication rates, and a setting unit configured to set the size of the content received from the server and the number of histories stored in the cache, in accordance with the communication line to which connection has been switched by the control unit. | 03-21-2013 |
20130073737 | Proximity Synchronizing Audio Gateway Device - A digital audio gateway device for use in a wireless network of digital audio playback devices. The gateway device is wirelessly linked to one or more digital audio playback devices to provide a gateway to the Internet for the digital audio playback devices. In addition to functioning as a gateway, the device provides additional functionality and may act as a cache of digital audio data for the various digital audio players connected in the wireless network and may also act to automatically update digital audio content on the audio players, synchronize digital audio content and playlists between the digital audio players and continue automatically or upon user request a particular playlist as the user moves from one digital audio player to another. | 03-21-2013 |
20130073738 | Method and Apparatus for Browsing Using Multiple Coordinated Device Sets - Systems and methods for navigating hypermedia using multiple coordinated input/output device sets. Disclosed systems and methods allow a user and/or an author to control what resources are presented on which device sets (whether they are integrated or not), and provide for coordinating browsing activities to enable such a user interface to be employed across multiple independent systems. Disclosed systems and methods also support new and enriched aspects and applications of hypermedia browsing and related business activities. | 03-21-2013 |
20130080644 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, SERVER DEVICE, DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM STORING DATA COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - An example mobile terminal is a terminal for transmitting and receiving data to and from a server device via an access point by wireless communication. The mobile terminal includes an identification information storage unit configured to store a terminal ID, a signal receiver configured to receive a broadcast signal containing a plurality of terminal IDs transmitted from the server device via the access point, an ID determiner configured to determine whether or not any of the terminal IDs contained in the received signal corresponds to the terminal ID of this mobile terminal, a connection requester configured to, when the ID determiner determines that one of the terminal IDs corresponds to the terminal ID of this mobile terminal, request a wireless connection to the access point, and a data communicator configured to transmit or receive data to or from the server device via the access point by wireless communication. | 03-28-2013 |
20130080645 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES - The present invention provides a method and a system for providing at least one communications service to one or more service providers by a communications service provider. Communications capabilities of the communications service provider are sliced into a plurality of virtual slices and each of the plurality of virtual slices is configured for a different service provider from among the one or more service providers. At least one communications service is provided to each of the one or more service providers through a respective configured virtual slice by the communications service provider. Each of the one or more service providers further provides the communications service to a user through the respective configured virtual slice in collaboration with the communications service provider. | 03-28-2013 |
20130091287 | SYSTEM FOR CONTACT SUBSCRIPTION INVITATIONS IN A CROSS-DOMAIN CONVERGED ADDRESS BOOK SYSTEM - A system and method provides subscription invitations for an address book service. The system receives contact subscription invitation requests from originating clients. Contact data from the contact subscription invitation request is extracted. A session initiation protocol (SIP) message based on the extracted contact data is generated. The SIP message includes a user resource identifier (URI) to some or all of the originating client's Personal Contact Card (PCC). A SIP message is then transmitted to remote address book server. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091288 | Discovering And Connecting Wireless Devices Without Discoverability - Pairing among computing devices is achieved without any of the device entering discoverable mode. An inquiring device obtains a list of MAC addresses and transmits connection requests using the MAC addresses. Any device within reception distance that has the same MAC address would respond to the request. Upon receiving the response, the two devices would pair up. A beacon may be used to store MAC addresses and related data. Computing devices may send inquiries to the beacon and receive in return MAC addresses corresponding to the inquiry. The devices may then transmit pairing requests using these MAC addresses. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091289 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING A COMMUNICATION SESSION FOR AN UNREGISTERED INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) DEVICE - Methods and apparatus for handling a communication session for an unregistered Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) device are disclosed. An example method includes, in response to receiving an internet protocol multimedia subsystem session initiation message from a user endpoint, determining whether the user endpoint is registered; and, when the user endpoint is determined to be unregistered: determining whether the internet protocol multimedia subsystem session initiation message is directed to an exception endpoint by performing a lookup on a list; determining whether a profile for the unregistered user endpoint is available; when the profile for the user endpoint determined to be unregistered is unavailable, loading a default profile; and establishing an internet protocol multimedia subsystem session on behalf of the user endpoint determined to be unregistered when the internet protocol multimedia subsystem session initiation message is directed to the exception endpoint. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091290 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing system ( | 04-11-2013 |
20130097324 | Selective Reestablishment of Cable Modem Internet Protocol Connectivity - Techniques are generally directed to selective reestablishment of Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity between a cable modem and a cable modem termination system (CMTS). IP connectivity between the cable modem and the CMTS is initially established through execution of a plurality of connectivity steps. After IP connectivity is lost, the cable modem determines which of the plurality of connectivity steps are desired for use in reestablishing IP connectivity, and sends a message to the CMTS indicating the desired IP connectivity step. The CMTS determines if the desired connectivity steps identified in the message may be used to reestablish IP connectivity, and sends a response message to the cable modem indicating if the desired connectivity steps may be used. IP connectivity is then reestablished using at least the desired connectivity steps. | 04-18-2013 |
20130097325 | PCRN SESSION ARCHITECTURE FOR ROAMING - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a node for creating a virtual IP-CAN session, the method including: receiving, at the network node, a S9 message; creating a S9 session; creating a virtual IP-CAN session associated with the S9 session; persisting the S9 session; and transmitting an answer S9 message. | 04-18-2013 |
20130097326 | VISITED PCRF S9 SESSION ID GENERATION - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a network node for generating a S9 session ID, the method including: receiving, at the network node, an attachment request from a user equipment (UE); creating a DIAMETER session ID; attaching a timestamp and UE ID to the DIAMETER session ID resulting in a S9 session ID; and initiating a S9 session with a home PCRN using the S9 session ID. | 04-18-2013 |
20130097327 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PUSHING INFORMATION FROM A SERVER TO A MOBILE DEVICE - A system is provided for providing content to a plurality of mobile electronic devices, where at least some of the mobile electronic devices have wireless communications capabilities. A first network comprises a wireless network system for communicating with at least some of the mobile electronic devices through wireless sessions; a wired to wireless gateway module connected to the wireless network system for interfacing between a wireless portion of the first network and a wired portion of the first network; a session control module interfacing with the wired to wireless gateway module for managing the wireless sessions and wired sessions; and a relay server module interfacing with the session control module and the wired to wireless gateway module, the relay server module for providing relayed content to the mobile electronic devices. A second network comprises an external server for providing content to the mobile electronic devices. | 04-18-2013 |
20130097328 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ENABLING FEATURES PROVIDED BY A FIRST PRESENTATION LAYER PROTOCOL IN A SESSION IMPLEMENTED ACCORDING TO A SECOND PRESENTATION LAYER PROTOCOL - A method for enabling a feature provided by a first presentation layer protocol, within a session established according to a second presentation layer protocol includes intercepting, by a hooking component executing on a first machine, a request, by an operating system executing on the first machine, for an indication whether the first machine established a session with a second machine according to a first presentation layer protocol. The method includes determining that the first machine established a session according to a second presentation layer protocol. The method includes identifying a type of a function within the operating system that generated the request for the indication. The method includes indicating that the first machine established the session according to the first presentation layer protocol, responsive to the identification of the type. The method includes enabling functionality provided for use in sessions established according to the first presentation layer protocol. | 04-18-2013 |
20130103840 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS THAT CONTROLS CONNECTION OF DEVICES, METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE APPARATUS, AND DEVICE CONTROL SYSTEM - An information processing apparatus which is capable of performing device connection control for connection to more devices than the maximum connectable devices defined by the device interface standard or the SDK. A device server communication module generates communication threads for controlling data communication with device servers according to requests from higher-layer software. Each communication thread generates a device stack for controlling a device via an associated device server connected thereto in such a manner as if the device were directly connected to the apparatus. When a connection notification indicative of connection with the device is received, the communication thread attempts to detect a device stack in a non-data transmission and reception state from the device stacks, and connects to the device server via the detected device stack to perform data transmission and reception. | 04-25-2013 |
20130103841 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATED SERVER SIDE BROKERING OF A CONNECTION TO A REMOTE DEVICE - Systems and methods described herein provide for automated brokering of a remote connection to a device between entities, including support personnel, work queues and automated support tools. The automated brokering of the remote connection may be based on a work flow or events detecting during service to the remote device. In one example deployment, a centralized service provides support services to multiple customer devices. For each device, the centralized service establishes a remote connection to the device via a remote connectivity tool. Based on the type of work to perform, the centralized service may automatically provide the remote connection to a support automation tool to automatically deliver a local automation service to the device or to a remote support agent to access the device via the remote connection. | 04-25-2013 |
20130103842 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUSES FOR APPLICATION SERVICE LAYER (ASL) INTER-NETWORKING - Systems and/or methods for providing internetworking among application services layers (ASLs) of different network technologies may be provided. For example, a tunnel anchor point (TAP) may be established. The TAP may be configured to enable communication between a local application in the network and a remote application in a different network. At the TAP, an ASL tunnel may be created to the local application in the network to facilitate the communication. Additionally, a message from the local application may be received where at least a portion of the message may be configured to be provided to a remote ASL and the remote application in the different network to which the local application wishes to communicate. At least the portion of the message may be provided to the remote ASL and the remote application in the different network. | 04-25-2013 |
20130103843 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN A PROGRAMMING DEVICE AND AN AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY FIELD DEVICE - In a method for establishing a communication link between a programming device and an automation technology field device with an activatable DHCP server, the programming device is configured to automatically obtain a network address from a DHCP server upon connection to a field device with such activatable DHCP server or upon connection to a network with at least one field device having an activatable DHCP server. | 04-25-2013 |
20130111039 | APPARATUS SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROXIMITY-BASED SERVICE DISCOVERY AND SESSION SHARING | 05-02-2013 |
20130111040 | Auto-Split DNS | 05-02-2013 |
20130111041 | ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION WITH A USER DEVICE | 05-02-2013 |
20130111042 | ROUTE LOOKUP RESOLUTION | 05-02-2013 |
20130117455 | Splicing Persistent Connections - A method of connecting a client to a server by a load balancer associated with a plurality of servers. The method includes establishing a first connection for transmission of packets between the load balancer and the client, selecting a server to service the client, and splicing the first connection with a second connection between the load balancer and the selected server, the second connection being established before the first connection. | 05-09-2013 |
20130117456 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING CONNECTION - A method and apparatus for managing connection is disclosed, which is capable of realizing an efficient management through a bi-directional connection, the method comprising pairing two uni-directional connections between a receiver and a transmitter, if Internet service to be provided requires bi-directional data delivery capability; and creating a second uni-directional connection by assigning the second uni-directional connection at the time of creating a first uni-directional connection for the Internet service, wherein the first uni-directional connection is opposite to the second uni-directional connection. | 05-09-2013 |
20130117457 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR FACILITATING TRANSFER OF SESSIONS BETWEEN USER DEVICES - Methods and systems for facilitating transfer of an active session from a first device to a second device associated with the same user. A network server is configured to enable the switching or swapping of an active session from one device to another device, where both devices are associated with a common user address. The switching or swapping is implemented with no or minimal effect on the active session or awareness of the remote party. The device switch may be performed in relation to any active session, including VoIP, video conferencing, or other media sessions. | 05-09-2013 |
20130124736 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING AUTO CONNECTION OF SENSOR NODE BASED ON SENSOR DATA - Provided is an apparatus and method for setting a sensor node to be automatically connected. An apparatus for setting a connection of a sensor node may include: a data receiver to receive, from the sensor node, sensor data that is measured by the sensor node; a node type determining unit to determine a type of the sensor node based on the received sensor data; and a sensor node setting unit to set the sensor node to be automatically connected based on the determined type of the sensor node. | 05-16-2013 |
20130124737 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus receives, from a first apparatus which has established a communication session, a signal indicating a state in which the communication session should be maintained. If the signal is not received from the first apparatus within a predetermined period of time while the communication session with the first apparatus is established, and a communication session establishment request is received from a second apparatus, the communication apparatus disconnects the communication session with the first apparatus. | 05-16-2013 |
20130124738 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRAFFIC IDENTIFICATION - Embodiments for enabling traffic content identification by a wireless transmit/receive unit are provided. The WTRU may store interface binding entries in a database associating links in a web page to various traffic content types, such as video, audio, and text. Upon a request to access one of the links, a socket may be created based on a data mobility policy associated with the traffic content type. Alternately, the database may associate the links directly to interface types based on the data mobility policies. The Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) may provide the data mobility policies to the WTRU. | 05-16-2013 |
20130124739 | MEDIATION SERVER, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND CONNECTING METHOD - A mediation server for mediating subscription information to a communication device from a network operator providing network connectivity is provided. The server includes a management unit for managing context information of a communication device, which includes data relating to service provided by a network operator; an obtaining unit for obtaining device information of the communication device, which includes data needed to obtain subscription information from a network operator; a selecting unit for selecting, using the context information, a network operator that provides the best service to the communication device out of network operators that are able to provide network connectivity to the communication device; and a request unit for sending a request, with the obtained device information to the selected network operator, for subscription information which is to be used for the communication device to connect to the selected network operator as a home network operator. | 05-16-2013 |
20130132588 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SESSION DESCRIPTION FOR A MEDIA SESSION - In one embodiment, a method includes constructing at a source node, a session description pointer to a session description for a media session, inserting the session description pointer in a packet in a media stream of the media session, and transmitting the packet to a receiver node. The session description pointer is configured for use in obtaining the session description by an intermediate node located between the source node and the receiver node. An apparatus is also disclosed. | 05-23-2013 |
20130132589 | Media delivery by preferred communication format - The present disclosure relates to communication formats and more particularly, to media delivery by preferred communication formats. In one illustrative embodiment, communications between an originator and receiver can be converted into a format preference based on the receiver's context. The context can refer to device type, application usage, time of day, location and user role. The originator can be free to choose their desired format of communication and the recipient can be equally free to choose the best suited format to receive the message. In outgoing communications, the receiver can use their own defined format and the communications can be converted into the originator's chosen format. Media format conversion can be performed unilaterally, for example, the first person can send an email which can be translated to speech for the second person who responds by voice which can be received as voice by the first person. | 05-23-2013 |
20130132590 | Managing Session Data of a Composite Service Session in a Communication Network - The present invention relates to a method for managing session data of a composite service session in a communication network, the composite service session originating from executing a composite service. The method comprises determining ( | 05-23-2013 |
20130132591 | Method for the Operating of a Field Device - A method for the operating of a field device of process automation technology, wherein data is exchanged via a connection between the field device and an operating device, for operating the field device, wherein the connection is established via a communication interface on the field device and a communication interface on the operating device, and wherein the communication interface of the operating device is a hardware communication interface, which is emulated by software, as an Ethernet interface. | 05-23-2013 |
20130138818 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING AN AUTOMATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM OPERATING ACCORDING TO THE METHOD - A method and a corresponding system for accessing with a programming device an automation system having at least one automation device, includes the steps of establishing an indirect connection between the programming device and the at least one automation device via a conference server located remote from both the automation system and the programming device, said conference server having access to at least one virtual machine comprising engineering software, transmitting engineering data from the conference server to the at least one automation device in response to operator control actions at the programming device, remotely executing with the programming device via the conference server a virtual machine comprising engineering software, and transmitting via the conference server at least screen dumps of the virtual machine to the programming device. | 05-30-2013 |
20130138819 | FILE SERVER DEVICE - Communication is established between communication terminals arranged in different LANS while realizing dynamic response to reduction in server load, movement of communication terminal, and the like. A relay server is arranged in a LAN and can communicate with an SIP server arranged in a WAN. For instance, a first relay server exchanges account information of the communication terminals in the respective LAN with a second relay server. If exchanged account information is changed in one relay server, the account information after the change is notified to the other relay server. One relay server determines the other relay server based on the exchanged account information and relays communication data between the communication terminals through the other relay server. | 05-30-2013 |
20130138820 | COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT THAT PERFORMS COMMUNICATIONS VIA NETWORK, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Communication equipment which is capable of reducing communication time when transmitting a plurality of data using SIP. When a plurality of data are to be transmitted, a connection request message for requesting a plurality of media sessions is transmitted. Upon receiving a connection response message in response to the connection request message, it is determined whether or not the plurality of media sessions have been permitted in the connection request message. When it is determined that the plurality of media sessions have been permitted, the plurality of media sessions are established, and transmit each of the plurality of data is transmitted in each of the media sessions. | 05-30-2013 |
20130138821 | Method and System for Providing Call Waiting Features in a SIP-Based Network - A method that includes receiving a first call request from a second user to a first user, establishing a first dialog between a network element and the first user, establishing a second dialog between the network element and the second user, establishing a third dialog between the network element and a third user in response to a second call request from a third user, establishing a fourth dialog between the network element and the first user as a result of establishing the third dialog, waiting for a response from the first user in the fourth dialog and receiving one or more indications of actions from the first user to manage the disposition of the second call request. | 05-30-2013 |
20130138822 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING MEDIA CHANNEL BASED ON RELAY - The disclosure discloses a method and a system for establishing a media channel based on relay. The method comprises: during a session negotiation process between a first User Equipment (UE) and a second UE, a media relay control server allocating a first service identifier and a second service identifier, transmitting the first service identifier to the first UE, transmitting the second service identifier to the second UE, and transmitting the first service identifier and the second service identifier to a media relay device; the media relay device receiving the service identifiers reported by the first UE and the second UE; the media relay device verifying, according to the first service identifier and the second identifier transmitted by the media relay control server, the service identifiers reported by the first UE and the second UE, and establishing a media channel between the first UE and the second UE if the verification is passed. Through this disclosure, the security of connections between network nodes is improved. | 05-30-2013 |
20130145035 | TCP PROCESSING FOR DEVICES - A data processing system comprising: a host processing device supporting a host transport engine operable to establish one or more transport streams over a network with a remote peer, the host transport engine maintaining state for each transport stream; and device hardware comprising: a device application; a device transport engine operable to perform transport processing of a transport stream on behalf of the device application; wherein the host transport engine is configured to, on establishing a first transport stream for termination at the device application, pass sufficient state to the device transport engine so as to permit the device transport engine to perform transport processing of the first transport stream. | 06-06-2013 |
20130145036 | CONNECTION FORWARDING - Two or more network traffic processors connected with the same LAN and WAN are identified as neighbors. Neighboring network traffic processors cooperate to overcome asymmetric routing, thereby ensuring that related sequences of network traffic are processed by the same network proxy. A network proxy can be included in a network traffic processor or as a standalone unit. A network traffic processor that intercepts a new connection initiation by a client assigns a network proxy to handle all messages associated with that connection. The network traffic processor conveys connection information to neighboring network traffic processors. The neighboring network traffic processors use the connection information to redirect network traffic associated with the connection to the assigned network proxy, thereby overcoming the effects of asymmetric routing. The assigned network proxy handles redirected network traffic in much the same way that it would handle network traffic received directly. | 06-06-2013 |
20130145037 | UNICAST/MULTICAST MEDIA EDGE PROXY WITH FAST CHANNEL SWITCHING - A system, method, and media edge proxy, MEP, for providing media data such as Internet Protocol Television, IPTV, or Internet radio channels to a media client. The MEP obtains the media data from a media server utilizing a temporary unicast connection and provides the media data obtained from the server to the media client for an initial time period. Upon determining that the initial time period has expired, the MEP obtains the media data via multicast from a multicast router, provides the media data obtained from the router to the media client, and releases the temporary unicast connection. The invention reduces channel switching delay and thus improves quality-of-experience for the end-user. The invention also avoids excessive IGMP JOIN/LEAVE signaling when a user switches quickly through channels. | 06-06-2013 |
20130151713 | Performing An Allreduce Operation On A Plurality Of Compute Nodes Of A Parallel Computer - Methods, apparatus, and products are disclosed for performing an allreduce operation on a plurality of compute nodes of a parallel computer, each node including at least two processing cores, that include: establishing, for each node, a plurality of logical rings, each ring including a different set of at least one core on that node, each ring including the cores on at least two of the nodes; iteratively for each node: assigning each core of that node to one of the rings established for that node to which the core has not previously been assigned, and performing, for each ring for that node, a global allreduce operation using contribution data for the cores assigned to that ring or any global allreduce results from previous global allreduce operations, yielding current global allreduce results for each core; and performing, for each node, a local allreduce operation using the global allreduce results. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151714 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE NETWORK HEARTBEAT MESSAGE FOR TCP CHANNEL - A method and apparatus for a client to continue to receive updates from a server when a channel has been disconnected before the expiration of a heartbeat timer is disclosed. The method includes sending a heartbeat message from the client to the server wherein the heartbeat message is sent at the expiration of a timer having a first time interval that is less than the first timeout duration period of the server. The method includes detecting that the channel is disconnected before the expiration of the first time interval and then determining a second timeout duration period from detecting the channel is disconnected. After determining the second time out duration, the method includes resetting the first time interval to a second time interval for the sending of the heartbeat message wherein the second time interval being less than the second timeout duration period. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151715 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS THAT PERFORMS COMMUNICATION USING T.38 PROTOCOL, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus which is capable of performing communications using the T.38 protocol by means of a SIP server that does not support the T.38 protocol. Audio is selected among a plurality of media types, and a first session establishment request for establishing a first session with a destination with which the communication apparatus is to communicate is transmitted to a SIP server. An address of the destination is obtained from a response transmitted from the SIP server in response to the first session establishment request. The first session established in response to the first session establishment request is disconnected. Image is selected among the plurality of media types, and a second session establishment request for communicating with the destination is transmitted to the destination using the obtained address. Image data is transmitted to the destination through the second session established in response to the second session establishment request. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151716 | METHOD FOR SECURE USER PLANE (SUPL) VERSION NEGOTIATION - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to a system and method for negotiating a version of Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) between a network entity and a SUPL enabled terminal. In a particular implementation, a SUPL initiation message is transmitted from a network entity to a SUPL entity, where the SUPL initiation message identifies a plurality of SUPL versions capable of supporting a desired service. A response is received from the SUPL entity that is based, at least in part, on an ability of the SUPL entity to support at least one of the plurality of versions. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151717 | SUSTAINING SESSION CONNECTIONS - In an embodiment, techniques for sustaining session connections are provided. The techniques send heartbeat messages when not sending a message may cause the session connection to close because of a timeout condition. Heartbeat messages are valid transport layer messages that will be ignored by protocols at higher levels of a data communications stack. As an example, the techniques may send a TCP message containing only a carriage return and line feed (“CRLF”) in its payload. Because the TCP layer considers a message containing only a CRLF to be a valid TCP message, intermediary computing devices such as proxy servers may not interpret heartbeat messages as “keep alive” messages, and may sustain session connections. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151718 | OFFERING AND PROVISIONING SECURED WIRELESSVIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK SERVICES - An electronic device may present a user interface for making selections related to connecting to a network or selecting a network from a plurality of available networks. Additionally, a user interface may give a user an opportunity to secure to an open, unsecure, connection, for example, an ad-hoc wireless connection, such as may be found at a coffee shop. A selection of security offerings may be made from a user interface screen including pre-populated service providers. A user may be allowed to save preferences for connecting to new networks, as well as preferences related to previously used networks. Further, the user may save preferences for invoking security services on a per-network or pan-network basis. The security service may a known tunneling protocol (i.e. VPN), such as L2TP or PPTP. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151719 | DETERMINING AN EFFICIENT KEEP-ALIVE INTERVAL FOR A NETWORK CONNECTION - Systems and methods for use in communication between a client and a server, via a networking device, are provided. The method may include sending a request to establish a data connection from the client to the server via the networking device, setting a data connection keep-alive interval for the data connection to a predetermined safe value, and sending a request to establish a test connection between the client and the server. The method may further include determining an efficient keep-alive interval for communication between the client and server via the networking device, using the test connection, setting the data connection keep-alive interval to the efficient keep-alive interval determined using the test connection, and uploading the efficient keep-alive interval from the client to the server in an efficient keep-alive interval notification message, for communication to other clients connected to the server. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151720 | NETWORK ENTITY AND METHOD FOR MANAGING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS TOWARDS A USER ENTITY IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network entity for managing Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) communications towards a user entity in a communication network. The network entity has a receiver and a processor. The receiver is configured to receive a first SIP message. The processor is configured to generate a second SIP message in response to receiving the first SIP message, the second SIP message having user-specific data relating to the user entity. | 06-13-2013 |
20130159535 | Handover Method and System of Dual-Mode Communication Terminal - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a handover method and system of a dual-mode communication terminal. A first mode and a second mode of the dual-mode communication terminal adopt a master-slave universal serial bus USB driver structure. The methods includes: A host triggers initiating of network access to a second network by the dual-mode communication terminal; the host maintains occupation of an IP address which is in a first network by the dual-mode communication terminal, and obtains an Internet protocol IP address which is of the dual-mode communication terminal and in the second network; if the IP address in the second network is the same as a current IP address which is of the dual-mode communication terminal and in the first network, the host uses, in the second network, the IP address. | 06-20-2013 |
20130159536 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - An image processing device executing a job in cooperation with a server, comprises: an external terminal connecting part for establishing connection that allows communication with an external terminal; a server connecting part for conducting a negotiation to execute the job with the server and establishing connection with the server in response to receipt of a request from the external terminal; a transmission part for sending information that is received from the external terminal and addressed to the server after rewriting a source address of the information to an address of the image processing device; a screen image control part for outputting screen image information to the external terminal in response to receipt of the screen image information from the server; and a job execution control part for starting execution of the job with the server in accordance with a control command after receiving the control command from the server. | 06-20-2013 |
20130159537 | DEVICE AND METHOD CAPABLE OF SEARCHING FOR AVAILABLE SERVICE - A method capable of searching for a surrounding device based on a desired service is provided. The method includes transmitting a service search request including information regarding a target service to nearby devices; receiving a service search response from the nearby device supporting the target service; analyzing service information of the nearby device supporting the target service, which is included in the service search response; selecting the nearby device supporting the target service based on a result of the analyzed service information; and performing the target service by establishing a session with the selected device. | 06-20-2013 |
20130159538 | Switching Between Connectivity Types to Maintain Connectivity - Techniques are provided for leveraging narrowband connectivity (such as dial-up communications or other types of low bandwidth communications) to provision or configure broadband connectivity between a broadband access provider and a broadband device, such as a DSL modem or a cable modem. Specifically, because narrowband connectivity does not require advance configuration or provisioning by the host system of connectivity parameters for an access-seeking device, a modem at an access-seeking device may be leveraged to establish a narrowband connection between that device and a host system and to enable an exchange or negotiation of connectivity parameters necessary to enable future broadband connectivity. Thus, once established, the narrowband connection may be used as a conduit for communicating required provisioning information between the broadband-enabling host and the access-seeking device to enable broadband connectivity by the device in the future. | 06-20-2013 |
20130166759 | APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS OF IP ADDRESS DISCOVERY FOR TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP - A method of peer discovery in a communications network includes transmitting, by a first client station, a request to a second client station; receiving a response of the second client station, at least one of the request and the response including a local IP address of the corresponding client station; and establishing a tunneled direct link setup (TDLS)direct link between the first client station and the second client station based on the local IP address. | 06-27-2013 |
20130166760 | LOAD SENSITIVE DATA SESSION SCHEDULING MECHANISMS OF WIRELESS/WIRELINE ACCESS NETWORKS - A method and apparatus to link user requirements of data sessions to the network conditions provides an application making an advance request corresponding to a data session, which a communication device may immediately acknowledge but will attend to the request at its convenience. The data session setup is based on the actual network conditions which are either sensed by the device or provided by an agent in the network. The method may be overlaid on top of existing wireless handsets using existing technologies. Hence, all the flexibility and configurability associated with data sessions offered by the existing solutions may remain intact with added features for the customer and the operator. In various exemplary embodiments, the method may use a network load measurement capability in the device and/or a network agent. | 06-27-2013 |
20130173810 | System and Method of Enabling a Multi-Chassis Virtual Switch for Virtual Server Network Provisioning - A multi-chassis server system has several chassis, each including a chassis management controller (CMC) and a blade server with a blade management controller (BMC) and a virtual switch (VS). The first CMC establishes management sessions with the second CMC and the first BMC. The second CMC establishes a management session with the second BMC. A switch path on a virtual switch is provided via a management session to the first CMC and another switch path on another virtual switch is provided via a management session to the second chassis management controller and by another management session to the first CMC. The switch paths are aggregated into a chassis management controller virtual switch on the first chassis management controller. | 07-04-2013 |
20130173811 | NETWORK SYSTEM OF HOME APPLIANCE AND NETWORK SETUP METHOD OF THE SAME - A network system of a home appliance configured to set up a network of the home appliance by using a terminal, and a network set-up method of the same, after converting a home appliance having built with a WIFI module into an AP to enable the terminal to be connected to an AP home appliance, the information stored at the terminal is transmitted to the AP home appliance, and thus the WIFI may be set up without a separate manipulation of a user at the time of setting up the WIFI of the home appliance without adding an input/output apparatus such as a display apparatus or an interface, the set-up value of the AP, the device information, and the device authentication key may be changed, and thus is safer from hack attacks, an AP is not needed to be provided, and thus a cost-related advantage may be obtained. | 07-04-2013 |
20130179580 | DYNAMIC VPN ADDRESS ALLOCATION - Methods and related systems are presented that relate to automatically avoiding address conflicts when establishing a secure communications link over a public network between a local computer, associated with a local network, and a remote computer, located outside the local network. In order to avoid address conflict, addresses reserved for use by the local network and addresses reserved for use by the remote network are determined. At least one local address is selected from among available local addresses such that the selected local address is an address that does not conflict with the reserved addresses of the local network and the reserved addresses of the remote network. The selected local address is used in connection with establishment of the secure communications link between the local computer and the remote computer. | 07-11-2013 |
20130179581 | SIP Server Overload Control - There is provided a system, method and computer program product for managing network communications to a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server. In the system, a packet limiter receives packets relating to SIP messages from a network and selectively forwards said packets for initial SIP processing. A work scheduler then accesses the result of the initial SIP processing and determines whether to proceed with further SIP processing based on a level of system activity. If a level of system activity is such that the system should proceed with further SIP processing, then further SIP processing may be scheduled. Initial SIP processing may involve one or more of parsing, request handling and response handling. Further SIP processing may involve one or more of initiating a new dialog, processing SIP messages relating to an existing dialog and processing messages that do not require a dialog. | 07-11-2013 |
20130185440 | Ice Based Nat Traversal - An originating P-CSCF node receives a SIP INVITE request from first user equipment (UE) that originates a call to a second UE. If a relay candidate address for the first UE is not present in the SIP INVITE request, the SIP INVITE request is modified to include a first address provided by an originating IMS-AGW node as a relay candidate for the first UE and forwarded to the second UE. The originating P-CSDF node receives a SIP INVITE response message from the second UE in response to the SIP INVITE request. If a relay candidate address for the second UE is not present in the SIP INVITE response, the SIP invite response is modified to include a second address provided by an originating IMS-AGW node as a relay candidate for the second UE and forwarded t the first UE. The address information is used by both UEs in ICE operations. | 07-18-2013 |
20130185441 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF MANAGING CONNECTIVITY STATUS FOR THE SAME - The present invention provides a method of managing connection status for a channel connecting a server device to a mobile radio communication device including a client/server pair ( | 07-18-2013 |
20130185442 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USER PERSONA MANAGEMENT - Systems and techniques for managing a user persona presented in a communication session. In response to a request from an originating user for a communication session, a persona manager for the originating user is invoked, examining request details and the nature and context of the requested communication session and selecting a persona for the user, selection of the persona being employed to indicate services associated with the communication. Similarly, in response to a request from an originating user for a communication session, a persona manager for the receiving user to whom the request is directed examines details of the request and the nature and context of the communication session and makes decisions relating to persona selection for the receiving user. The decision may involve accepting a persona indicated in the originating user's request, or selecting a different persona and creating routing a request to be routed to the receiving user. | 07-18-2013 |
20130185443 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR AGGREGATING PRESENCE INFORMATION TO PROVIDE A SIMPLIFIED UNIFIED PRESENCE - Methods and systems for providing simplified presence for a user are described. The user has a plurality of associated communication devices registered with a communications server, and each communication device enables at least one communication service class. The server has a user data entry associating the user with each of the plurality of communication devices. To hide the details of the user-associated devices from third parties, a virtual device is defined and associated with the user. Presence information received at the server from the various devices is aggregated together to create aggregated presence information that indicates at least the service classes available from the user-associated devices based on the received presence information. A virtual device presence document is generated containing the aggregated presence information and is provided to a presence server as presence information associated with the user. | 07-18-2013 |
20130185444 | SWITCHING BETWEEN CONNECTIVITY TYPES TO MAINTAIN CONNECTIVITY - Techniques are provided for leveraging narrowband connectivity (such as dial-up communications or other types of low bandwidth communications) to provision or configure broadband connectivity between a broadband access provider and a broadband device, such as a DSL modem or a cable modem. Specifically, because narrowband connectivity does not require advance configuration or provisioning by the host system of connectivity parameters for an access-seeking device, a modem at an access-seeking device may be leveraged to establish a narrowband connection between that device and a host system and to enable an exchange or negotiation of connectivity parameters necessary to enable future broadband connectivity. Thus, once established, the narrowband connection may be used as a conduit for communicating required provisioning information between the broadband-enabling host and the access-seeking device to enable broadband connectivity by the device in the future. | 07-18-2013 |
20130191545 | INFORMATION SENDING METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention disclose an information sending method, device, and system, which are applied in the field of communications technologies. In the embodiments of the present invention, a control point sends a connection request to a target user equipment, where the connection request includes a guidance identifier, so as to request the target user equipment to receive detail information sent by the control point; after displaying the guidance identifier to a user and receiving a guidance identifier selected by the user, the user equipment sends a connection request acceptance message to the control point; and the control point may send detail information that corresponds to the guidance identifier to the target user equipment, where the guidance identifier is selected by the user and included in the connection request acceptance message, thereby implementing information guidance for the user by the control point. | 07-25-2013 |
20130198391 | System And Method For Main Page Identification In Web Decoding - Web pages may be rendered from a main page data element and a plurality of embedded data elements, which are separately fetched by a browser. Herein is provided a web decoder which includes a learning engine adapted to receive human indications of data elements which are unimportant and accordingly to adjust the web decoder's procedures for determining which data elements are displayed to the user. The learning engine may receive human indications of important data elements and uses both types of indications in its further determinations. Optionally, rule generalizations are performed in a manner which searches for parameters which differentiate between important and unimportant data elements. The rule generalizations optionally concentrate on groups of data elements having at least a predetermined number of parameters having the same values for both important and unimportant data elements, reducing the chances that a generalization rule will find important data elements as unimportant. | 08-01-2013 |
20130198392 | METHODS AND DEVICES TO DETERMINE A PREFERRED ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and electronic devices to provide a preferred device mode on a first electronic device and a second electronic device are described. In one example aspect, the present disclosure describes a method for determining a preferred device on a first electronic device and a second electronic device. The first and second electronic devices may have established a connection between them. The method includes: receiving a request related to an application on the first electronic device; sending the request to the second electronic device; initiating processing the request on the first electronic device; determining which of the first electronic device and the second electronic device is a preferred device to process the request; if the first electronic device is the preferred device, completing processing of the request on the first electronic device; and if the second electronic device is the preferred device, processing the request on the second electronic device. | 08-01-2013 |
20130198393 | SERVICE BUS SYSTEM, SERVICE BUS DEVICE, AND METHOD FOR ASSURING CONNECTION UNIQUENESS - A service bus system includes: a plurality of first devices each coupled with a client; a plurality of second devices each to perform a service; a first service bus device through which sequences of a session between the first and second devices are communicated, including: a prediction unit to predict one or more other service bus devices through which connection between the first and second devices in a second or later sequence of the session is established; and a transmission unit to transmit information indicating the connection in the first sequence of the session to the one or more other service bus devices predicted; and a second service bus device including: a storage unit to hold the information transmitted from the first service bus device; and a connection unit to establish the connection in the second or later sequence of the session by using the connection information held. | 08-01-2013 |
20130198394 | COMMUNICATING WITH A USER DEVICE - A methods and systems for communicating are disclosed. A request is received at a first device to communicate with a second device. Contact is initiated with the second device via a data center. A first form of communication is transmitted to the second device without requiring the transmitting to be routed through a central server. The first form of communication is received from the second device without requiring the receiving to be routed through a central server. A second form of communication is transmitted to the second device without requiring the transmitting to be routed through a central server. | 08-01-2013 |
20130198395 | SOCKS TUNNELING FOR FIREWALL TRAVERSAL - The present invention provides a unique way of implementing the SOCKS protocol for establishing connections through a firewall. In general, instead of having a SOCKS server implemented entirely in the firewall, SOCKS servers are implemented on both a server and a client, which are configured to communicate with each other through the firewall. The SOCKS servers on the server and client allow multiple objects on both the server and the client to communicate with each other through a single port through the firewall, wherein the SOCKS servers on the server and the client cooperate with each other and their respective objects to allow the objects to establish the connections. | 08-01-2013 |
20130198396 | METHOD FOR EFFICIENT INITIALIZATION OF A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for efficient initialization of a telecommunications network includes: establishing a physical communication channel between an access node of the telecommunications network and a configuration device; providing, by the telecommunications network, via an Internet Protocol Edge node, a public or private Internet Protocol address to the configuration device for use by the configuration device to communicate with the Internet Protocol Edge node of the telecommunications network; and assigning, by the telecommunications network, a configuration and installation functionality level to the public or private Internet Protocol address. | 08-01-2013 |
20130205031 | Method, Computer Readable Medium And System For Scaling Medical Applications In A Public Cloud Data Center - A method for providing scaled applications in a cloud data center is disclosed. The method includes receiving a request from a user to use one of a plurality of applications maintained in a memory of a cloud data center. The method further includes assigning one of a plurality of instantiations of a service manager to the user and establishing, using the assigned instantiation of the service manager, a connection between the user and an instance of the requested application for a duration of a user session. | 08-08-2013 |
20130205032 | PAIRED COMMUNICATION BETWEEN AN IMPLANTED MEDICAL DEVICE AND AN EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE - A method of identifying an external device that sent a message and then determining whether to process the message based in part on the identity of the external device that sent the message. The implanted device receives a message from the external device and identifies an external device ID in the received message. The external device ID identifies the external device that sent the message. The implanted device then compares the external device ID from the message to a stored list of approved external device IDs. The implanted device processes the message when the external device ID matches one or the approved external device IDs in the stored list of approved external device IDs. However, the message is disregarded when the external device ID does not match any of the approved external device IDs in the stored list of approved external device IDs. | 08-08-2013 |
20130212286 | COMMUNICATION SESSION CLONING USING BARCODES - Method to clone a communication session from a first device to a second device, including: receiving a request to identify the communication session; rendering an information message comprising an identification of the communication session, wherein the information message is configured to be transmitted from the first device; acquiring the information message from the second device to clone the communication session onto the second device; bridging the second device to the communication session without dropping the first device from the communication session, to produce a cloned communication session; and sending a confirmation message, wherein no prior association between the first device and the second device is used during the cloning. | 08-15-2013 |
20130212287 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling Sessions From One or More Devices - An apparatus and mechanism to manage multi-modal real-time or quasi real-time sessions such as voice, video, instant messaging, or web-conferencing across multiple devices through a simple subscription to a session management service. A user can subscribe to the service from many devices (e.g. mobile device, desk phone, personal computer, internet appliance, internet TV, communication terminal, etc.) and through the service seamlessly move sessions back and forth between subscribed devices. In a preferred embodiment, a user utilizes a “virtual slider” in a simple “two touch” procedure to effectuate the movement of a communication session from one device to another device via the service. | 08-15-2013 |
20130219070 | RESOLVING DEVICE SPECIFIC IDENTIFIERS TO A USER IDENTIFIER TO INITIATE A DIALOG ESTABLISHMENT WITH DEVICES OF A USER - Systems and methods are described that allow a calling party to establish a dialog, or attempt to establish a dialog, with multiple devices associated with the party being called, even when the calling party does not know a user identifier associated with the multiple devices. A calling party may provide a device specific identifier, which can be resolved to a user identifier associated with the multiple devices. | 08-22-2013 |
20130227147 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CREATING WEB SERVICE COMPOSITIONS - Exemplary embodiments provide systems and methods for connecting services, including web services, using intermediate data exchange objects to create composition services. Data exchange objects may be service independent objects that represent the inputs and/or outputs of various services. The systems and methods may employ data exchange objects to determine whether two services are composable and to implement and execute composite services according to the data exchange objects. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227148 | Full-Duplex Bi-Directional Communication Over a Remote Procedure Call Based Communications Protocol, and Applications Thereof - Systems and methods for reducing the cost but increasing the performance caused in streaming data between a client and a server are described herein. Embodiments of the present invention relate to reducing the cost but increasing the performance by the traditional data streaming where two TCP connections, one for each direction of traffic is used. Further embodiments allow a server in communication with one or more clients using a RPC based communication protocol to bi-directional stream not on two TCP connections but a single TCP connection. In one embodiment, this is achieved by transmitting from the client to the server an initial handshake. if the server receives the handshake, then the client streams a request stream to the server and the server streams a response stream to the client simultaneously over the same single TCP connection establishing full-duplex streaming. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227149 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING A COMMUNICATION SESSION AND DEVICE - A method for providing a communication session may include establishing, during an established communication session between a first communication device and another communication device, a communication connection with a second communication device; determining, as to whether one or more communication services provided in the communication session by the first communication device should be provided by the second communication device; and in case at least one of the communication services provided in the communication session should be provided by the second communication device, establishing a communication session connection for the at least one communication service of the communication session, and providing the at least one communication service by the second communication device within the established communication session. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227150 | NETWORK SYSTEM - Provided is a network system. The network system includes a first component performing a preset function, the first component having a first device code and a second component exchanging information with the first component to be communicably connected to the first component, the second component having a second device code. When a command for communicable connection is inputted into the first component or the second component, a connection sequence is generated from the component in which the command is inputted to exchange an IP address and the device code of each of the components between one component generating the connection sequence and the other component receiving the connection sequence. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227151 | PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK-TO-NETWORK INTERCONNECTION INTERFACE - An exemplary method includes at least on network element of a first network domain exchanging signaling and media border processing information with at least one network element of a second network domain by way of a secure packet-switched connection, exchanging service policy information with the at least one network element of the second network domain by way of the secure packet-switched connection, peering sessions associated with different service types between the first network domain and the second network domain by way of a packet-switched network-to-network interconnection interface (“NNII”) in accordance with the exchanged signaling and media border processing information, and enforcing different performance threshold specified by the service policy information for peering the sessions associated with the different service types. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227152 | METHOD FOR SEARCHING FOR DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING SAME - Provided are a device discovery method and a communication device thereof. The method includes: transmitting a probe request frame; receiving a probe response frame including session information on a client connected to a group owner (GO), from the GO among source and sink devices belonging to the display group; and determining whether to associate with the display group by using the session information in the probe response frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130232272 | Optimal Source Interface Selection - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate to selecting a source interface with which to establish a connection. In aspects, a profile for each network location a host has seen is maintained in a data store. The profile includes information about the network interfaces available to a source host at the network location. This information indicates, among other things, the reliability of each interface of the source host. Based on the profile, an interface is selected with which to establish a connection. If the interface is unsuccessful in establishing the connection, the interface is de-prioritized and another interface may be selected. | 09-05-2013 |
20130238806 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING AN EXTENDED SOCKET API FOR APPLICATION SERVICES - Methods and apparatus for providing an extended socket API are disclosed. A method for providing a socket API according to an implementation of the invention may include: receiving data at a first network socket; opening a second network socket; associating the first network socket and the second network socket using a socket file descriptor of a client-side connection; and directing the data from the first network socket to the second network socket. When an application service utilizes the socket API, the method may further include processing the data, i.e., performing a service. | 09-12-2013 |
20130238807 | Vehicle Network Connectivity Management - A system and method for determining a network is disclosed. The system comprises a requesting module and a determination module. The requesting module sends a request from a vehicle for network data to a connectivity server. The request includes vehicle data describing a current location of the vehicle and a destination for the vehicle. The requested network data is associated with the vehicle data. The determination module receives the network data relating to one or more networks. The determination module caches the network data and determines which network to connect to from the one or more networks based at least in part on the network data. | 09-12-2013 |
20130238808 | MOBILE LINK SYSTEM, METHOD & APPARATUS - A system is provided for communication between a mobile device and an Enterprise Network. A gateway provides an end-to-end connection between the gateway and the mobile device. A controller is adapted to interpret data from a proprietary protocol. The data is communicated between the Enterprise Network and the mobile device via the end-to-end connection. | 09-12-2013 |
20130246627 | NETWORK ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD USING ADAPTIVE PROXIES - A method, system and computer program for providing multilevel security to a computer network. The method comprises the step of receiving a first communication packet on at least one network interface port from an outside network. The method further includes the steps of filtering the first packet in one of at least two levels of security comprising a first level of security which examines the content information of the packet and a second level of security which examines the first packet excluding the content information of the packet. The system includes a first packet filter configured to filter its input packets by examining content information of its packets and a second packet filter configured to filter its input packets by examining the header information without examining the content information of its packets. The system further includes a third filter which is configured to forward a number of packets to one of the first and second filters, thereby providing security to the computer network. The computer program includes a first module located in an application layer, a second module located in a network layer, and a third module located in a kernel space and configured to examine a number of packets received by the computer network from at least one outside network and to forward the number of packets to one of the first and second modules after examining the number of packets. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246628 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MANAGING AT LEAST ONE ASPECT OF A CONNECTION BASED ON APPLICATION BEHAVIOR - A system, method, and computer program product are provided for managing at least one aspect of a connection based on application behavior. In use, a connection request is received from an application. Additionally, a behavior of the application is identified. Furthermore, at least one aspect of a connection made in response to the connection request is managed, based on the behavior. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246629 | Connecting to a Cloud Service for Secure Access - A client may connect to a server over an insecure network by downloading and configuring a secure connection mechanism to the server. The secure connection mechanism may allow the client to join a domain when connected to the server and access domain level services. The server may receive a request from the client, classify the connection type, and used the classification to determine whether the request originated off premises. If so, the server may send a configuration mechanism to the client, which may then establish a secure connection to the server. Once the secure connection is established, the server may join the client to the server's domain and begin secure operations. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246630 | Dynamic web session clean-up - A “sign-off” cookie is generated and stored upon initiation of a web session between a client and a web application executing on a server. The sign-off cookie preferably comprises both an identifier for the session (a “session ID”) together with an identifier (such as a URL) for a sign-off resource (associated with a sign-off mechanism) that can be used to clean-up the web session following its termination. The sign-off cookie may be returned to the client and/or retained within a proxy. Upon termination of the web session, the URL in the sign-off cookie is used to initiate a request to the sign-off mechanism to clean-up the web session. This approach provides for dynamic web session clean-up without requiring any pre-configuration of the sign-off mechanism. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246631 | CONTENT DELIVERY MECHANISMS FOR MULTICAST COMMUNICATION - Content delivery by a network node in a network is optimized. The network node is communicatively coupled between multiple client devices and at least one content service provider. A media streaming service provided by a content service provider is received at the network node over a first unicast link. The service is transmitted from the network node to a first requestor device via a second unicast link. A request from a second requestor device for the service is intercepted by the network node. If it is determined that a multicast optimization threshold has been reached and/or exceeded, the service is transmitted from the network node to the first and second requestor devices using a single multicast link, while the service is received from the content service provider over the first unicast link. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246632 | MANAGING EARLY MEDIA FOR COMMUNICATION SESSIONS ESTABLISHING VIA THE SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) - A communications device sends an invite to a communication session to multiple target devices and receives first and second media streams from first and second target devices prior to receiving a signaling indication that any of the multiple target devices accepts the invite. The communications device selects between the first and second media streams based upon (i) information contained in a first packet of the first or second media streams and/or (ii) signaling information that indicates a forking context for the communication session. The communication device plays the selected media stream prior to receipt of the signaling indication. In another embodiment, after sending the invite, the communications device detects a network address and port information from (i) a media stream from a target device, and (ii) from a signaling message. The communication device sends media to the target device based on the detected information. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246633 | System and method for communications - A system, tool, device, method, are provided to allow for two parties to communicate with a third party observing. A communication with a specific entity is offered for sale or for auction via a website or web feed or twitter or other. Once the communication is purchased, an operator effects the connection between the parties. If the operator is human, the operator is allowed opportunity to watch and chat individually with each entity. If the operator is a voice recognition software robot or other automated device, the operator is preprogrammed with certain terms and topics and indicators that are unacceptable and require an alarm for an actual operator or halt a connection altogether, among other options. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246634 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING CLIENTS WITH SERVER - The present invention discloses a method for connecting clients with a server. The method includes: the client obtains random number seed information; the client calculates out a random delay time according to the random number seed information and a random function after the client is disconnected from the server, wherein the random delay time is a delay time for reconnection between the client and the server; and the client sends a connection request to the server upon expiry of the random delay time. Therefore, when the server is restarted or breaks down, each client delays the connection according to the random delay time calculated by them respectively, thereby preventing plenty of clients from requesting to connect to the server simultaneously and avoiding service interruption of the server. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246635 | Technique for Bundling in Link Aggregation - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for applying multiple Link Aggregation Group (LAG) entities on the same set of physical links, thus making bundling of individual services or conversations possible by the different LAG entities within Link Aggregation. Each LAG entity is configured such that a single physical link is Active and all the other links are Standby. Each LAG entity may be regarded as a “bundle.” Thus the services/conversations are bundled into a LAG entity and are handed-off on the Active link during normal operation. If service hand-off is not possible on the Active link (e.g., due to a failure), then the LAG entity switches over to a Standby link thus the service/conversation is handed-off on that formerly Standby link. Bundling may simplify operations of control and signaling. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246636 | PROVIDING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION WITH SESSION REQUESTS - The present invention allows a communication client to send a session request to initiate a session with a receiving communication client, wherein the session request includes additional information configured to allow the receiving communication client to take an action in association with the communication session. The additional information may include context indicia, which may identify an association related to the subject matter of the session, or a specific instruction to take the action in association with the communication session. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246637 | Device-Pairing by Reading an Address Provided in Device-Readable Form - A system is described for allowing a user, operating a trusted device, to remotely log into a server via a potentially untrustworthy client. The system operates by establishing a first secure connection between the client and the server. The system then establishes a second secure connection between the device and the server through the client. The user then remotely logs into the server over the second secure connection using the device. The second secure connection is tunneled within the first secure connection, preventing the untrustworthy client from discovering personal information associated with the user. According to one feature, prior to forming the second secure connection, the user can establish a pairing relationship with the client by reading an address of the client using any kind of reading mechanism. According to another feature, the device can receive marketing information in the course of a transaction. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246638 | Content Pre-Fetching And CDN Assist Methods In A Wireless Mobile Network - The current invention is applicable to a RAN-cache or proxy operating in a wireless mobile network that is functioning as a transparent inline device intercepting wireless mobile protocols such as UMTS, LTE, WIMAX, CDMA etc.), or a traffic off-load device connected to multiple interfaces towards the Core/Internet. The current invention identifies methods for pre-fetching content by emulating portions of a mobile client for gaining connectivity through the mobile-core network, or to use session contexts of other mobile clients in a way not to significantly effect charging and billing for the preloaded content. The pre-load decision of what to pre-load and when to pre-load may be locally derived within the RAN-cache/Proxy device, or in-coordination with a locally connected CDN (Content Delivery Network) device. Other embodiments of the current invention include the RAN-cache/Proxy providing interconnectivity from the locally connected CDN device to other CDN devices through the Mobile Core Network (SGSN/GGSN in UMTS, S-GW/P-GW in LTE etc.). | 09-19-2013 |
20130254408 | Ephemeral Communication - In an embodiment, method(s) and system(s) for providing ephemeral communication is described herein. In an implementation, the method may include determining one or more request keywords associated with a request received from a requesting terminal. The request may be intended for initiating communication. The method may further include transmitting, based on the one or more request keywords, a notification to each of a plurality of target terminals over a communication network for joining a communication group. The method may also include initiating the communication between the requesting terminal and at least one target terminal from the plurality of target terminals. The communication may be initiated upon receiving an acceptance notification from the at least one target terminal to join the communication group. | 09-26-2013 |
20130254409 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF MANAGING DATA TRANSMISSION, AND RECORDING MEDIUM STORING TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - A transmission system is accessible to association information that associates, for each one of one or more sessions, terminal identification information for identifying each one of a plurality of transmission terminals that are currently participating in the session, with reservation identification information for identifying reservation of communication on which the session is based. The transmission system obtains reservation identification information associated with the counterpart transmission terminal using the association information and counterpart terminal identification information. The transmission system determines whether reservation identification information associated with the request transmission terminal matches the reservation identification information associated with the counterpart transmission terminal to generate a determination result. Based on the determination result, a request for starting communication with the counterpart transmission terminal is accepted or rejected. | 09-26-2013 |
20130254410 | SYSTEM FOR MANAGING SESSIONS AND CONNECTIONS IN A NETWORK - A modular architecture for use in a network device such as a Remote Authentication Server (RAS) includes a number of interconnected objects associated with processes, services, access protocols and other functionality provided on the device. Objects may also be associated with users, sessions or other data structures that may be accessed by any of the functional objects in the device. Additional services and updates may easily be implemented into this architecture without disrupting user connections. Redundant copies of the objects may be maintained in memory to facilitate the provision of carrier grade performance by swapping out failed components m the event of a fault. | 09-26-2013 |
20130268681 | Method and Apparatuses for End-to-Edge Media Protection in ANIMS System - An IMS system includes an IMS initiator user entity. The system includes an IMS responder user entity that is called by the initiator user entity. The system includes a calling side S-CSCF in communication with the caller entity which receives an INVITE having a first protection offer and parameters for key establishment from the caller entity, removes the first protection offer from the INVITE and forwards the INVITE without the first protection offer. The system includes a receiving end S-CSCF in communication with the responder user entity and the calling side S-CSCF which receives the INVITE without the first protection offer and checks that the responder user entity supports the protection, inserts a second protection offer into the INVITE and forwards the INVITE to the responder user entity, wherein the responder user entity accepts the INVITE including the second protection offer and answers with an acknowledgment having a first protection accept. A method for supporting a call by a telecommunications node. | 10-10-2013 |
20130268682 | TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION TRAVERSAL - A transmission system and a transmission method for network address translation traversal are provided. The transmission system includes a private network device, a network address record device, a public network device and a network address translation server. The network address record device records an inner network address of the private network device and an outer network address corresponding to the inner network address. The public network device inquires the inner network address of the private network device and the outer network address corresponding to the inner network address from the network address record device, and generates a packet according to the inner network address and the outer network address corresponding to the inner network address. The network address translation server receives the packet from the public network device, and transmits the packet to the public network device. | 10-10-2013 |
20130268683 | SYSTEM AND METHOD EMPLOYING AN AGILE NETWORK PROTOCOL FOR SECURE COMMUNICATIONS USING SECURE DOMAIN NAMES - A network device comprises a storage device storing an application program for a secure communications service; and at least one processor configured to execute the application program enabling the network device to: (a) send a request to look up a network address of a second network device based on an identifier; (b) receive an indication that the second network device is available for the secure communications service, the indication including the requested network address of the second network device and provisioning information for a secure communication link; (c) connect to the second network device over the secure communication link, using the received network address of the second network device and the provisioning information for the secure communication link; and (d) communicate at least one of video data and audio data with the second network device using the secure communications service via the secure communication link. | 10-10-2013 |
20130268684 | DEVICE FOR MULTIPLE ETHERNET CONNECTION TO A COMPUTER UNIT AND COMPUTER UNIT ASSEMBLY AND EQUIPMENT LINKED TOGETHER - A device for making multiple connections to a computer unit, the device comprising at least one main connection provided with a connector for connection to the computer unit and connected via a switch module to a plurality of secondary connections, each provided with an external connector and together presenting an overall data rate equal to a maximum data rate of the main connection. An assembly comprising a computer unit and pieces of equipment connected thereto by a multiple connection device. | 10-10-2013 |
20130275603 | TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING PROTOCOL INFORMATION - The present invention applies to telecommunication networks, such as wireless mobile networks. In particular, the present invention deals with providing more efficient use of the resources of such mobile networks. The present invention provides in a wireless mobile telecommunications network, having a wireless mobile access interface, a message filter function adapted to remove, store and/or adapt header information from messages transferred to/from a wireless mobile device. The present invention is based on using the SIP signalling channel within the workings of a mobile network system more efficiently. | 10-17-2013 |
20130275604 | RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELAY SERVERS - A virtual network is dynamically created when constructing a relay communication system including a plurality of relay servers that are arranged to communicate with each other. In the relay communication system, the VLAN client terminals defining a VLAN group are allowed to share VLAN group information. In addition, a VLAN session between VLAN devices as activatable VLAN client terminals is established based on the VLAN group information, and the VLAN devices are allowed to share virtual address information created when the VLAN group is activated. If the VLAN device defining the activated VLAN group is suspended, suspension of the VLAN device is notified, and a VLAN device about which the suspension has been notified is deleted from the virtual address information. The VLAN session related to the VLAN device about which the suspension has been notified is closed. | 10-17-2013 |
20130282911 | INVASIVE SOCKET MANAGER - A server initiating shut down of a transport control protocol (TCP) connection when a radio connection is terminated is problematic because a new radio connection must be established for the sole purpose of shutting down the TCP connection. Hence, network and terminal resources for establishing the radio connection are wasted. Accordingly, a method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for initiating a closing of a transport layer connection at a client are provided. The apparatus determines whether a functionality associated with the transport layer connection satisfies at least one criterion, and closes the transport layer connection when the functionality satisfies the at least one criterion while a radio layer connection is available. As a result, the TCP connection is shut down by the client before the server can activate a new radio connection for the sole purpose of terminating the TCP connection. | 10-24-2013 |
20130290547 | SYSTEM FOR MANAGING PERSISTENT CONNECTIONS - A system for managing persistent connections includes a network and a first device to administer persistent connections of other devices to the network. The system also includes a processor and a database to store information related to each existing persistent connection. The system further includes a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium including instructions causing the processor to: control the first device to establish a persistent connection between a second device and the network, determine whether the second device connection is an additional persistent connection or an existing persistent connection, analyze the information for each existing persistent connection to determine whether the system has reached a maximum number of existing persistent connections, remove information related to one of the existing persistent connections based on a predetermined rule when the system has reached the maximum number of existing persistent connections, and record information related to the second device persistent connection. | 10-31-2013 |
20130297806 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR BALANCING INCOMING CONNECTIONS ACROSS MULTIPLE CORES - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for balancing incoming connections across multiple cores are disclosed. According to one method, the method occurs at a first processor of a multi-core connection server. The first processor is one of multiple processors of the multi-core connection server configured to receive notification of incoming connection requests associated with a socket and to request the connection requests from a queue. The method includes accepting a first connection request from a queue. The method also includes determining whether a connection quota has been reached. The method further includes in response to determining that the connection quota has been reached, performing an appropriate action based on state information associated with other processors. | 11-07-2013 |
20130297807 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SERVING APPLICATION PROGRAMS TO DEVICES - A computer system includes a computer server having memory, an operating system program, and an application program stored in said memory and compatible with the operating system program. The computer server is configured to establish via a communication network a direct connection with a client device having an operating system program different than the server's operating system program to permit a user of the client device to execute the application program on the computer server. | 11-07-2013 |
20130297808 | Backup Method and Backup Device for TCP Connection - The present invention discloses a backup method and backup device. The backup method for the TCP connection provided by embodiments of the present invention includes: processing a first input packet, and generating, according to a processing result of the first input packet, a new transmission control protocol status and a new socket status; backing up the generated transmission control protocol status and the generated socket status to a transmission control module of the standby board; sending a second input packet to an application module; receiving a first output packet; processing the first output packet, and generating, according to a processing result of first output packet, a new transmission control protocol status and a new socket status; and backing up the transmission control protocol status and the socket status. The present invention further discloses a backup device for a TCP connection. | 11-07-2013 |
20130297809 | PROVIDING TELEPHONY SERVICES TO TERMINALS BEHIND A FIREWALL AND/OR A NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR - A method and apparatus for allowing telephony or other types of media communications and services to be provided for a device ( | 11-07-2013 |
20130304927 | NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION-BASED METHOD OF BYPASSING INTERNET ACCESS DENIAL - The network address translation (NAT)-based method of bypassing Internet access denial uses NAT as an identity-hiding technique to bypass Internet access denial. The victim network uses NAT routers as a gateway to connect to neighboring networks, and uses a set of non-blocked Internet protocol (IP) addresses as the NAT routers' external public IP addresses. These addresses are not part of the IP ranges registered to the victim network. Rather, they are obtained from a neighboring network. The outgoing packets, therefore, will not be blocked by the malicious ISP, as they will not be recognized as part of the victim network. The method is scalable and has minimal network performance impact. Although NAT introduces some connectivity limitations, these are overcome by using application-layer routing for server reachability behind NAT, and NAT traversal techniques for peer-to-peer (P2P) applications. | 11-14-2013 |
20130304928 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING LATENCY IN A DISTRIBUTED TELEPHONY NETWORK - A system and method of preferred embodiments include at a signaling gateway of a first region, receiving a communication invitation of a first endpoint from a communication provider; signaling the communication invitation to a communication-processing server in a second region; in response to communication processing of the communication-processing server, dynamically directing signaling and media of the communication according to processing instructions and resources available in at least the first and two regions; wherein dynamically directing signaling and media communication of the communication comprises selectively routing media communication exclusively through communication resources of the first region if resources are available in the first region or selectively routing media communication between the first endpoint, the gateway, and at least the communication-processing server if media resources are not in the first region. | 11-14-2013 |
20130304929 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING LATENCY IN A DISTRIBUTED TELEPHONY NETWORK - A system and method of preferred embodiments include at a signaling gateway of a first region, receiving a communication invitation of a first endpoint from a communication provider; signaling the communication invitation to a communication-processing server in a second region; in response to communication processing of the communication-processing server, dynamically directing signaling and media of the communication according to processing instructions and resources available in at least the first and two regions; wherein dynamically directing signaling and media communication of the communication comprises selectively routing media communication exclusively through communication resources of the first region if resources are available in the first region or selectively routing media communication between the first endpoint, the gateway, and at least the communication-processing server if media resources are not in the first region. | 11-14-2013 |
20130311663 | OVERLAY TUNNEL INFORMATION EXCHANGE PROTOCOL - In one embodiment, a method for exchanging overlay tunnel information includes receiving an information exchange packet, at a first end point station, from each end point station in a virtual network having a specified virtual network identifier (VNID); and processing each received information exchange packet to retrieve information about connections at each end point station in the virtual network having the specified VNID, wherein each end point station either terminates or originates a tunnel shared by the first end point station in an overlay network. In this way, the information may be used to respond to address resolution protocol (ARP) requests sent locally in lieu of flooding the ARP request. Other systems, methods, and computer program products are also presented regarding the overlay tunnel information exchange protocol, according to various embodiments. | 11-21-2013 |
20130311664 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF A REAL-TIME, SHARABLE BROWSING EXPERIENCE ON A GUEST DEVICE - The present invention describes a method and apparatus for the implementation of a real-time, sharable web browsing experience on a guest device, utilizing the transfer of URL and form data information. The present invention further describes a method for joining a synchronized browsing session administered by a synchronization server, comprising activating a hyperlink associated with the synchronized browsing session, sending a request to join the synchronized browsing session to the synchronization server in response to the activation of the hyperlink, and joining the synchronized browsing session. The present invention further describes a method for implementing a synchronized browsing session, comprising receiving information related to a shared web browsing interaction performed by a host device from a synchronization server, and performing the shared web browsing interaction based on the information received from the synchronization server. | 11-21-2013 |
20130318245 | ANYCAST-BASED CONTENT DELIVERY WITH MOBILITY SUPPORT - A system may identify a first intermediary device responsible for delivering an anycast stream in a first service area associated with a first foreign agent, identify an active anycast stream, identify a second foreign agent associated with a mobility event, identify a second intermediary device responsible for delivering the active anycast stream in a second service area associated with the second foreign agent, receive an indication that the second intermediary device is different from the first intermediary device, establish a content tunnel between the first foreign agent and the second foreign agent, and route communications associated with the active anycast stream over the content tunnel. | 11-28-2013 |
20130318246 | TCP Connection Relocation - TCP connections are moved between parallel devices and links during either connection setup or during active operation. | 11-28-2013 |
20130318247 | Device Linking - Device linking is described. In one or more implementations, data is maintained at a network service that describes characteristics of a plurality of devices that are associated with a user account of the network service. A communication is formed to be received by one of the plurality of devices that includes a portion of the data that pertains to another one of the plurality of devices and that is suitable by the receiving device to discover the other one of the plurality of devices to initiate a local network connection between the devices. | 11-28-2013 |
20130318248 | Apparatus and Method for Directing a Communication Session to a Communication Device of a Group of Devices Having a Common Registration Identity - An apparatus, and an associated method, for directing communications of a communication session to a selected communication device, or devices, of a group of commonly-registered devices. A device-direction policy is created and stored at a network entity. The policy identifies preferred devices to which communications of a communication session are to be provided. A SIP Invite, or other communication-session initiation message, is provided to the network entity. The network entity detects the message, accesses the policy, and forwards on the message in accordance with the policy. | 11-28-2013 |
20130326069 | Configuring Wireless Devices Over a Wireless Connection - Approaches for a network attached device and method for establishing a wireless network are described. A client device connects to the wireless network in a session and sends configuration data relating to the wireless network over the wireless network. The configuration data is received and the wireless network is reconfigured. Without interrupting the session, the client device automatically attempts to contact the reconfigured wireless network. | 12-05-2013 |
20130326070 | CASCADING ARCHITECTURE FOR AUDIO AND VIDEO STREAMS - An approach to supplying a data stream, for e.g., an internet-based video conference, to multiple client devices in a network, including attempting, at a first client device, to join an Internet Protocol (IP) multicast session in a network in which the first client device is operating and, if unsuccessful to attempt to join a unicast transmission of the data stream from a network node other than the meeting server and that is in a same subnet as the first client device, and if the unicast join within the same subnet is unsuccessful, registering the first client device with the meeting server to obtain at least one candidate node from which to receive the data stream. | 12-05-2013 |
20130326071 | Maintaining Session Initiation Protocol Application Session Affinity in SIP Container Cluster Environments - A system for maintaining SIP application session affinity, the system including a destination inspector configured to inspect a SIP request to determine whether the SIP request indicates as its destination a logical name of a SIP container, a request router configured to route the SIP request to the SIP container that is identified by the logical name if the SIP request indicates as its destination the logical name of the SIP container, and a destination assignor configured to assign the SIP request to a SIP container in accordance with a predefined assignment protocol if the SIP request does not indicate as its destination the logical name of a SIP container. | 12-05-2013 |
20130326072 | Seamless Hand-Off of Combined Unified Communications and Virtual Desktop Infrastructure Sessions - A host device receives from a user at a first client device a first login request for hosted virtual desktop (HVD) services. A first virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) session is started upon receiving a valid first login request. A first unified communications (UC) session is established between the first client device and an endpoint device. A second login request is received from the user at a second client device, the second login request configured to request HVD services. A second VDI session is started to mediate an HVD session for the user upon receiving a valid second login request. A second UC session is established between the second client device and the endpoint device. A media communication session associated with the first UC session is transferred from the first client device to the second client device after the second VDI session is started and the second UC session is established. | 12-05-2013 |
20130326073 | DISTRIBUTED SYNCHRONOUS BATCH RECONFIGURATION OF A NETWORK - A novel alternative concept for handling dynamic provisioning changes and ongoing network reconfiguration and incremental reoptimization in general. A prime motivation is concern about the dependency of existing concepts for dynamic provisioning on the real-time coherence of databases of network state at diverse geographic locations. Not only is the continual updating of such global state everywhere in the network an intensive real-time load, but inevitable incoherencies pose hazards in network operation. The alternative proposal is a framework that makes use precise time synchronization and the computational power of network nodes to solve identical local instances of incremental reoptimization problems in situ. The new scheme removes the database coherency hazard, reduces signaling volumes, and increases resource efficiencies in service provisioning. It also provides a framework in general for continually ongoing incremental or (if desired) total reoptimization of network configuration. | 12-05-2013 |
20130326074 | MOBILE NETWORK APPLICATION TEST - Embodiments relate to a method, system, and computer program product for testing a mobile network application. An aspect includes a method that receives a test request for a mobile network application and activating a test session window on a browser of a mobile device according to the test request. The method also includes obtaining a request in hypertext markup language (HTTP) that corresponds to the test request such that the HTTP request contains session information for the test session window and sending the HTTP request to the mobile network application. An HTTP response containing session information is then received from the mobile network application. | 12-05-2013 |
20130326075 | Handling of a Communication Session - Embodiments describe handling a communication session at a device, by executing a communication session handling program at the device, the communication session handling program comprising a communication session handling part for handling the communication session and an interfacing part for linking with a communication session control interface. An application executed at the device provides, to a user of the device, a communication session control interface for the communication session handled by the communication session handling part of the communication session handling program, the application linking with the interfacing part of the communication session handling program. On detecting that the application has ceased to provide the communication session control interface, the interfacing part of the communication session handling program links, without dropping the communication session, to a further communication session control interface provided at the device for continuation of the communication session handled by the communication session handling part. | 12-05-2013 |
20130332615 | COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND METHODS FOR OPERATING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device may include a message generator configured to generate a message in accordance with a command set to use a communication service provided by a communication session setup protocol; and a modem circuit coupled to the message generator and configured to operate in accordance with the message generated by the message generator; wherein the message generator is configured to generate the message comprising a command to at least one of control or establish an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem service. | 12-12-2013 |
20130332616 | INTERACTIVE SESSIONS WITH PARTICIPANTS AND PROVIDERS - Computer program products, methods, systems, apparatus, and computing entities are provided for sessions with participants and providers. For example, in one embodiment, a provider can interact with multiple participants to conduct interactive treatment sessions. Further, a participant can interact with multiple providers to conduct interactive treatment sessions. For the interactive treatment sessions, motion data and video data of the participant can be simultaneously displayed to the provider. | 12-12-2013 |
20130332617 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC DESTINATION ADDRESS CONTROL IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - An arrangement to direct a packet sent out from an arbitrary apparatus connected to a network to a predetermined authentication server without changing the configuration of a computer network. A packet transmitted from apparatus, such as a personal computer, newly connected to the network, is guided to an authentication server via communication control apparatus. The communication control apparatus replaces a MAC address of the destination addresses of another server, which is included in the ARP cache of the personal computer, with the MAC address of the communication control apparatus to guide the packet from the personal computer to the communication control apparatus. The communication control apparatus further transmits the received packet to a predetermined authentication server. | 12-12-2013 |
20130339531 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AN IDENTITY - The invention relates to a session control entity, method and computer program for receiving a first identity of a calling user from a subscription entity, wherein the first identity is an identity for displaying to a called user, receiving a request from the calling user, including the first identity in the request as an identity for displaying to the called user, and, transmitting the request towards the called user. | 12-19-2013 |
20130346622 | Online computing system - An online computing system hosting a plurality of computing projects in the form of database records allows users to search computing projects by search keys, project ID or category names, conduct computation for found projects, and create new computing projects at client computer; and each computing job was done by searching the database, selecting a computing project by clicking on one of the found links on the search result page, and providing data in a computing data input form for submission. | 12-26-2013 |
20130346623 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING A PRIVATE SURVEILLANCE NETWORK THROUGH L2TP - According to an example, to access a surveillance network through a Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol (L2TP) includes a private network IP address is assigned to a public network user device, and a route of a surveillance segment is transmitted to the public network user device, such that, after the route of the surveillance segment is received by the public network user device, an IP address of the L2TP virtual interface of the public network user device is configured as a next-hop of the route. When an access request to a surveillance device in the private network is initiated, a routing table of the public network user device is searched to find a matching route of the surveillance segment according to an IP address of the surveillance device. The access request is transmitted to an L2TP server through the L2TP virtual interface, and forwarded to the surveillance device. | 12-26-2013 |
20140006629 | Selection of Network-to-Network Interface Device | 01-02-2014 |
20140006630 | SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) FOR MESSAGE THROTTLING | 01-02-2014 |
20140006631 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATION SESSION-BASED INITIATION OF NETWORKED TERMINALS | 01-02-2014 |
20140006632 | Multiplexer Load Balancer for Session Initiation Protocol Traffic | 01-02-2014 |
20140006633 | MOBILE TERMINAL, SERVICE SEARCH METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM | 01-02-2014 |
20140012996 | GATEWAY FOR THE SURVIVABILITY OF AN ENTERPRISE NETWORK USING SIP - In one embodiment, the gateway includes a trunk interface module (TI) for coupling the gateway to a trunk of the public network (PSTN), a media Server module (MS) coupled to an enterprise network, a transcoder module (TC), a call control module (CC), and a proxy module (PRO). The proxy module is configured to forward each SIP message received by the gateway, according to the IP address contained in a SIP Request-URI in this message. The SIP message is either sent to the Call Control module (CC) if this IP address is the address of the gateway, or to the data compression module (DC) if the IP address is the address of the main SIP Server (MSS). The proxy module is configured to add, in the latter case, its own IP address in Path header on each Register method; and, for each other SIP method sent to the main SIP Server (MSS), suppress its own IP address in the Route header. The gateway includes a management and configuration module (MC) configured to receive and store a rescue call number to be used for establishing the backup link (BL). | 01-09-2014 |
20140019626 | PROVIDING UNIFIED COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES - Methods and apparatuses, including computer program products, are described for providing unified communication services for communication sessions between client devices. A plurality of globally-distributed computing device clusters are coupled to each other over a communication network. Each cluster is configured to receive, from a client device, a transaction request associated with a communication session, including a presence event. Each cluster comprises a SIP server configured to process the transaction request, an event queue configured to extract the presence event from the transaction request for storage in the event queue, and a session state handler configured to retrieve the presence event from the event queue and notify an XMPP server of the presence event. The SIP server, XMPP server, and session state handler each stores and retrieves data associated with the communication session in a database shard at the cluster. The shards of each cluster collectively comprise a single logical database. | 01-16-2014 |
20140019627 | Method and Apparatus for the Fast Detection of Connectivity Loss Between Devices in a Network - A method and apparatus for quickly determining the status of a network device in a network communicates status inquiry messages over the forwarding plane of one network device to at least one neighboring network device. The status inquiry messages indicate the connectivity status with at least one neighboring network device. | 01-16-2014 |
20140025829 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING A MOBILE DEVICE TO A GLOBAL NETWORK USING A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK CONNECTION - A system and method for providing access between a remotely located content provider server and a mobile device has a virtual private network server for receiving a request for access to the remotely located content provider and establishing a virtual private network connection from the mobile device to the virtual private network server responsive to the request for access to the remotely located content provider. The virtual private network server further establishes a second connection from the virtual private network server to the remotely located content provider server and maintains the virtual private network connection and the second connection to enable a transport of data between the mobile device and the remotely located content provider. | 01-23-2014 |
20140025830 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE RATE DETERMINATION IN MOBILE VIDEO STREAMING - A system, method and apparatus to dynamically tune parameters impacting bitrate selection to control thereby client bandwidth usage. | 01-23-2014 |
20140032769 | Method and Apparatus for Communication Between a Vehicle Based Computing System and a Remote Application - A vehicle-based computing apparatus includes a computer processor in communication with persistent and non-persistent memory. The apparatus also includes a local wireless transceiver in communication with the computer processor and configured to communicate wirelessly with a wireless device located at the vehicle. The processor is operable to receive, through the wireless transceiver, a connection request sent from a nomadic wireless device, the connection request including at least a name of an application seeking to communicate with the processor. The processor is further operable to receive at least one secondary communication from the nomadic device, once the connection request has been processed. The secondary communication is at least one of a speak alert command, a display text command, a create phrase command, and a prompt and listen command. | 01-30-2014 |
20140040482 | System and Method for Communicating Enterprise Information via Hybrid and Peer-to-Peer Cloud Networks - Various systems, computer program products, and methods for communicating enterprise information between a mobile device and a backend enterprise server via a cloud network are described. According to the invention, a plug server coupled between the mobile device and the cloud network may be used. In various implementations of the invention, the plug server is local to the mobile device and provides a connection to the mobile device via a short range communications link, which may include a short range wireless communications link. The plug server mimics or otherwise provides functionality of a middleware server typically found in the cloud network. The invention may be particularly useful in areas and/or times when the mobile device experiences limited connectivity to the cloud network via, for example, a cellular data network or other communication link provided by a network provider. | 02-06-2014 |
20140040483 | BGP PEER PRIORITIZATION IN NETWORKS - A method for establishing routes to neighboring networks during an initialization sequence according to a prioritized order may include detecting a power-cycling event and accessing a plurality of identifiers stored in a memory device that persisted through the power-cycling event. Each of the plurality of identifiers may be associated with a network. The networks may include first networks that are coupled to network endpoints, and second networks that are capable of coupling to the one or more first networks. For each network, the method may further include accessing a priority field in the memory device that may be associated with the network. The respective priority field can be based on an order in which communications should be established with the network and application layer information. The method may also include attempting to establish communications with each of the plurality of networks in an order based on the priority fields. | 02-06-2014 |
20140040484 | END-POINT IDENTIFIERS IN SIP - A system and method for uniquely identifying an SIP device extends the SIP communications protocol with an end point identifier, carried for example in the header of an SIP transmission. The end point identifier is useful for routing, registration, subscription, and authentication. The end point (device) of a given user epid can be uniquely identified by creating a key from an epid and a user's address-of-record (URI). This in turn enables improved connection management and security association management when the connections/IP addresses are transient, such as when HTTPS tunneling is used. | 02-06-2014 |
20140040485 | Specification of a Software Architecture for Capability and Quality-Of-Service Negotiations and Session Establishment for Distributed Multimedia Applications - A system for establishing a session between two entities in a telecommunications network. The system includes the following Application Programming Interfaces (APIs): a Management API representing an interface between the system and an entity managing it, an API representing an interface between the system, middleware and/or an application using services offered by the system, and a generic session-layer protocol API representing an interface between the system and a User Agent of a session-layer protocol. | 02-06-2014 |
20140040486 | MOBILITY IN A MULTI-ACCESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Various embodiments provide a terminal capable of establishing multiple communication sessions with a public network proxy through different access networks. The terminal actively communicates with the public network proxy to control which of the multiple communication paths are active, as well as control the transition from actively using one communication path to using another. The public network proxy facilitates data and voice sessions between the terminal and any number of other communication devices. In one embodiment, the communication sessions are reserved tunneling sessions, and the terminal cooperates with the public network proxy to effectively control how many tunneling sessions are established, how many tunneling sessions are active at any given time, and the transition from one tunneling session to another for active communications. Each of the communication or tunneling sessions may be established over different access networks using different communication technologies and protocols. | 02-06-2014 |
20140040487 | FLEXIBLE FAILOVER CONFIGURATION - A method is described that involves offering a user different persistent scope choices including: a) internal to a computing system that the deployment descriptor is to be sent to; and, b) external to the computing system that the deployment descriptor is to be sent to. The method also involves offering a user different persistence frequency choices including: a) persisting per request; and, b) persisting per session state information attribute change. The method also involves generating a deployment descriptor that reflects the user's choice of the persistence scope and persistence frequency. | 02-06-2014 |
20140047121 | FAST SETUP RESPONSE PREDICTION - Mechanisms are provided to accelerate Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) setup messages. A client transmits an RTSP request to a server. The server responds to the request and preemptively responds with acknowledgements for messages not yet received. For example, a server responds to an RTSP describe message with an RTSP describe acknowledgement, an RTSP setup acknowledgement, and an RTSP play response before setup and play messages are received by the server or even transmitted by the client. The client processes the anticipatory responses and transmits setup and play responses when the anticipatory responses are processed. | 02-13-2014 |
20140052868 | COBROWSING MACROS - Methods and systems of conducting co-browsing sessions may involve joining a co-browsing session with another peer device, receiving a plurality of web requests in a particular sequence from a macro, and transmitting the plurality of web requests in the particular sequence to a server associated with the co-browsing session. In one example, the particular sequence defines a navigation path to a requested resource. | 02-20-2014 |
20140052869 | Operation Mode of Processor - A computing device to detect a communication protocol between the computing device and a second computing device, to identify operating parameters associated with the communication protocol, and to modify a mode of operation of a processor based on the operating parameter. | 02-20-2014 |
20140052870 | NAT TRAVERSAL FOR MEDIA CONFERENCING - Methods for establishing a direct peer-to-peer (“P2P”) connection between two computers are disclosed. In particular, the methods are designed to work in cases where one or both of the computers are connected to a private network, such private networks being interconnected via a public network, such as the Internet. The connections between the private network and the public network are facilitated by network address translation (“NAT”). | 02-20-2014 |
20140059235 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING ADVERTISEMENTS TO PROVIDE INFORMATION REGARDING CONNECTION SETUP - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for reducing the time required for connection setup including, but not limited to, the time required for connection setup for devices discovered utilizing a low energy technology. In the context of a method performed by a slave device to be discovered, an advertisement may be generated including an indication of a capability to perform a predefined type of connection setup for initiating wireless communications. The method also causes the advertisement to be transmitted and receives a response to the advertisement from another device including one or more parameters relating to the predefined type of connection setup. The method also supports the connection setup with the another device in accordance with the one or more parameters. Corresponding apparatus and computer program products as employed by both master and slave devices are also provided. | 02-27-2014 |
20140059236 | Process for Peer-To-Peer Download of Software Installer - A system, method, and computer-readable medium are disclosed for performing automated, peer-to-peer migrations of entitled digital assets. A first identifier corresponding to a source system, and a first set of entitlement data corresponding to a set of digital assets installed on the source system, are processed to generate a first set of entitlements entitling the source system to use the set of digital assets. The first identifier is then cross-referenced to a second identifier corresponding to a target system. A migration request and the second identifier are received from the target system, which are then processed to initiate the migration of the digital assets from the source system to the target system. The second identifier and the first set of entitlement data are subsequently processed to generate a second set of digital asset entitlements entitling the target system to use the set of digital assets. | 02-27-2014 |
20140059237 | SCHEDULING AND CONDUCTING A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITH A REMOTE AGENT - Disclosed herein are systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for conducting and scheduling a communication session with a remote agent. A communication session can be scheduled using a scheduling interface configured to present scheduling data. Upon scheduling a communication session, the user can be sent a confirmation message including the details of the scheduled communication session. The user can enter the communication session via a launch page configured to allow entrance to the communication session during a scheduled time period. Prior to the time period, the launch page can present the user with a clock indicating the remaining time until the user can enter. Upon entering the communication session, the user is presented with a communication session interface enabled with a primary communication method. Communication methods can be added or terminated with terminating the communication session as long as one communication method remains active. | 02-27-2014 |
20140059238 | STREAMING MEDIA - A method for providing a session invitation protocol (SIP) session between a first and a second entity. An SIP session is established between the first and second entity. At least one media stream is transmitted from the first entity to the second entity. At least one of transmission, storage and play back of the at least one media stream is controlled in the SIP session at the first and/or second entity. | 02-27-2014 |
20140068086 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING USERS BASED ON A MEASURE OF CORRELATION - One embodiment of the present invention sets forth a technique for connecting users based on a measure of correlation. The method involves receiving a first activity data element associated with a first user, where the first activity data element includes activity information related to a first software application, receiving a second activity data element associated with a second user, where the second activity data element includes activity information related to the first software application, and determining, via a processing unit, a measure of correlation between the first and second activity data elements. The method further involves determining, based on the measure of correlation between the first and second activity data elements, that a connection between the first user and the second user should be facilitated, and facilitating a connection between the first user and the second user. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068087 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO NEGOTIATE FLOW CONTROL FOR A COMMUNICATION SESSION - Methods and apparatus are disclosed to negotiate flow control for a communication session. Example methods disclosed herein include sending, via the communication session, a request to a peer to change a flow control mechanism for the communication session, receiving, via a communication session, a reply from the peer, the reply indicating whether the request to change the flow control mechanism for the communication session has been accepted, and performing subsequent flow control for the communication session based on the reply. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068088 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROCESSING MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) ADDRESSES - Described are a system and method for processing a media access control (MAC) address. A communication is established between a processing device and a network port of a data switching device. The data switching device assigns a MAC address to the processing device. The assigned MAC address is directly associated with the network port of the data switching device absent a learning mechanism. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068089 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING CONTROL RELATIONSHIPS, CONFIGURATION DEVICE, NETWORKED DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method for establishing control relationships between at least two networked devices is conceived. Further a corresponding configuration device, networked device and non-transitory computer program product are provided. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068090 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTENT SHARING - Embodiments of the present invention relate to a method for content sharing, where the method includes: receiving a content share request, establishing a share session with a receiving terminal, and sharing session content, which is played on a first initiating terminal, with the receiving terminal; and receiving a state notification about transferring the played session content from the first initiating terminal to a second initiating terminal, and according to the state notification, ending the share session or continuing to share the session content continuously played on the second initiating terminal. According to the embodiments of the present invention, CoD content watched on the initiating terminal can be shared, and when transfer occurs between display terminals of the content share initiator, a content share AS can perceive the transfer, and continuity of the share session can be ensured. The present invention further relates to a device for content sharing. | 03-06-2014 |
20140082204 | Seamless Engagement and Disengagement of Transport Layer Security Proxy Services - Techniques are presented for seamless engagement and disengagement of Transport Layer Security proxy services. A first initial message of a handshaking procedure for a first secure communication session between a first device and a second device is intercepted at a proxy device. The first initial message of the handshaking procedure is saved at the proxy device. A second initial message of a second handshaking procedure for a second secure communication session between the proxy device and the second device is sent from the proxy device to the second device. It is determined from the second handshaking procedure that inspection of the first secure communication session is not to be performed by the proxy device. The first secure communication session is established without examination of the communication traffic by the proxy device. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082205 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR POST-DISCOVERY COMMUNICATION WITHIN A NEIGHBORHOOD-AWARE NETWORK - In a particular embodiment, a method includes determining, at a first mobile device, a post-discovery communication technique for communicating within a mobile device cluster after a discovery interval. During the discovery interval, a discovery message may be sent. The discovery message indicates the post-discovery communication protocol for communicating within the mobile device cluster after the discovery interval. The discovery message may further indicate a time interval for sending and receiving a paging request. In response to the receipt of the discovery message a second mobile devices may send a paging request, the paging request including a security information request. The method further includes sending from the first mobile device a paging response including security information and exchanging one or more post-discovery communications with the second mobile device using the security information. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082206 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA SESSION IDENTIFICATION, TRACKING, AND ANALYSIS - In a networked system connecting a subscriber to a content source via one or more networks, a computer-implemented method includes instantiating a session model for a media session between the subscriber and the content source, the session model to generate session metadata from application-layer interactions between the subscriber and the content source. The method further includes instantiating an interaction model in response to detecting an application-layer interaction in a transport flow of the subscriber, the application-layer interaction comprising media data for the media session. The method also includes generating, at the interaction model, interaction metadata representative of the application-layer interaction, and processing at least one of the interaction metadata and the media data at the session model to generate session metadata responsive to matching the interaction model to the session model. | 03-20-2014 |
20140089513 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a first and a second processing unit. The first processing unit generates a control signal related to connection settings. The second processing unit supports wireless systems and is configured to transmit a first frame including first information related to at least one of the plurality of wireless systems by any of the wireless systems, grasp, based on a second frame received from another wireless communication apparatus, a wireless system supported by the other wireless communication apparatus, select a wireless system used for data exchange with the other wireless communication apparatus based on the second information indicating the grasped wireless system. | 03-27-2014 |
20140089514 | Methods, Systems and Devices for Automatic Linking of Activity Tracking Devices To User Devices - Methods, systems and devices are provided for automatically linking a device to an activity tracking device. One method includes obtaining, at the device, a semi-unique identifier from a website. The semi-unique identifier is for an activity tracker that has been paired to a user account of the website. The method includes scanning, by the device, for the semi-unique identifier. The scanning is of advertising messages generated by one or more activity trackers. The method identifies the activity tracker by matching the advertised semi-unique identifier to the semi-unique identifier obtained from the website. The method then includes establishing a link between the activity tracker and the device. The link is established without requiring user initiation to link the activity tracker to the device. | 03-27-2014 |
20140095723 | BYPASSING OR REDIRECTING A COMMUNICATION BASED ON THE FAILURE OF AN INSERTED APPLICATION - The system and method allow enhanced capabilities for Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) dialogs (communication sessions) between SIP devices. The SIP dialogs have applications that are inserted into the SIP dialog such as a Back-to-Back User Agent (B2BUA) or a proxy application. After the initial dialog is established and these applications fail or become unavailable, the system and method allow the applications to be bypassed or have the SIP dialog redirected to an alternative application. This provides a better user experience because the SIP dialog (e.g., a SIP telephone call) will not be dropped if the application fails mid-dialog. | 04-03-2014 |
20140101321 | Redirecting of Network Traffic for Application of Stateful Services - Techniques are presented herein for redirection between any number of network devices that are distributed to any number of sites. A first message of a flow is received from a network endpoint at a first network device. A relationship between the endpoint and the first network device is registered in a directory that maps endpoints for network devices. A state for the flow is stored at the first network device. A second message is received for the flow which is indicative of the first endpoint at a second network device. It is determined that the second network device does not store the flow state for the flow. Querying is performed to receive information indicative of the relationship between the endpoint and the first network device. The received information is stored in a cache at the second network device. Services are applied to the second message according to the stored information. | 04-10-2014 |
20140101322 | MANAGING MID-DIALOG SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) MESSAGES - Processing mid-dialog SIP messages by receiving a mid-dialog SIP message from a SIP user agent client, creating a new SIP session, associating the new SIP session with the mid-dialog SIP message, identifying an application that is associated with the mid-dialog SIP message, providing to the application the mid-dialog SIP message in the context of the new SIP session, receiving an acknowledgement from the application that the application will accept the mid-dialog SIP message, and responsive to receiving the acknowledgement, providing to the application the mid-dialog SIP message in the context of the new SIP session. | 04-10-2014 |
20140108664 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING PORT MULTIPLEXING IN A SERVER ENVIRONMENT - A system and method can support port multiplexing in a server environment, e.g. in a distributed data grid. The server environment can comprise a port to receive one or more request, wherein the port is adapted to be associated with different port address values and the port operates to receive one or more connection requests. Additionally, the server environment allows a plurality of sockets to utilize the different port address values to support multiplexing of sockets over the port, and a multiplexed socket provider can be used to provide the plurality of sockets. | 04-17-2014 |
20140108665 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR BRIDGING BETWEEN PUBLIC AND PRIVATE CLOUDS THROUGH MULTILEVEL API INTEGRATION - The present disclosure is directed to multi-level application programming interface (API) integration of a distributed enterprise application architecture deployed across datacenter/private cloud and public cloud, such as end-to-end configuration of bridging two virtual or physical datacenters via a cloud bridge using simple/user-friendly configuration interfaces and API calls. Seamless integration of infrastructure from various providers with proprietary APIs can be achieved, without requiring user intervention or reconfiguration. Accordingly, the solution masks the inherent complexity and architectural expertise required to effectively use the cloud bridging solution with the various Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS) architectures and technologies. | 04-17-2014 |
20140108666 | MAINTAINING A COMMUNICATION PATH FROM A HOST TO A STORAGE SUBSYSTEM IN A NETWORK - Provided are a method, system, computer storage device, and storage area network for maintaining a communication path from a host to a storage subsystem in a network. A storage subsystem controls data transfer and access to a storage devices in a network, wherein the storage subsystem is coupled to a switch and the switch is coupled to a host in the network. A topological storage is coupled to the host, the switch and the storage subsystem, for storing a topological coupling relationship between the host and the switch and a topological coupling relationship between the switch and the storage subsystem. In response to determining a failed path between the storage subsystem and the switch coupled to the storage subsystem, the storage subsystem determines a first port on the storage subsystem in the failed path. The storage subsystem determines from the topology storage the topological coupling relationship between the host and the switch and the topological coupling relationship between the switch and the storage subsystem. The storage subsystem redirects, based on the topological coupling relationships, a message sent to the first port of the storage subsystem to an operational second port in the storage subsystem coupled to the switch. | 04-17-2014 |
20140115170 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BRIDGING COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - An approach is provided for bridging communication sessions among multiple devices. A communication bridging platform determines to receive a request for establishing a communication session between a first device and a second device. The request specifies, at least in part, a third device with a first static link to the first device and a second static link to the second device. The communication bridging platform determines to establish a temporary link between the first device and the second device via the first static link and the second static link, and then determines to conduct the communication session over the temporary link. | 04-24-2014 |
20140115171 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS, NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING PRIVATE NETWORK - An electronic apparatus includes a communication unit connected to a first unit network and configured for communication with a plurality of unit networks comprising a plurality of clients, and a controller configured to control the electronic apparatus within the first unit network to operate in one of a proxy mode and a node mode if the plurality of clients form a private network, wherein the controller controls the electronic apparatus to directly communicate with a second unit network in the proxy mode, and controls the electronic apparatus to be connected to another client of the first unit network operating in the proxy mode and communicate with the second unit network through the other client in the node mode, and when the electronic apparatus operates in the node mode, the controller selectively changes the operational mode to the proxy mode depending on a private network service provided to the electronic apparatus. | 04-24-2014 |
20140115172 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE - In a communication terminal device, a receiving unit establishes a non-persistent connection with an Operating System OS of a computer and receives a request from the OS via the non-persistent connection. A response generating unit generates data for response to the request. A transmitting unit transmits the data for response to the OS via the non-persistent connection after a predetermined waiting time elapses from reception of the request. The non-persistent connection is established every time the OS transmits the request and is closed by the OS's reception of the response. | 04-24-2014 |
20140115173 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - An information processing system includes at least one first information processing device and a second information processing device. The second information processing device includes: an acquiring unit that acquires a second information in which IP information assigned to a first information processing device and first information that is different from the IP information and specifies the first information processing device are associated with each other; a second storage unit that stores at least one piece of the second information; a first receiving unit that receives an input character string input by a user; and a determining unit that determines a first information processing device identified by IP information included in second information that includes first information corresponding to the input character string among the at least one piece of the second information as a first information processing device to execute a process requested from the user. | 04-24-2014 |
20140115174 | Network Address Translation Traversals for Peer-to-Peer Networks - In a networking environment, multiple end-users applications running on computing devices may operate behind a respective NAT device. Information transferred from one end-user application to another can be accomplished by establishing a connection from one private network to another. The NAT device translates information related to an end-user application operating within a private network to information that is understood by the public network environment. This translated information is communicated to the associated NAT device of the intended recipient. The NAT device of the intended recipient translates the public environment related information to information for the end-user in the private network. | 04-24-2014 |
20140122726 | UPDATING SERVICES DURING REAL-TIME COMMUNICATION AND SHARING-EXPERIENCE SESSIONS - Disclosed herein are representative embodiments of tools and techniques for updating services in sharing-experience sessions during communications calls. According to one exemplary technique, a first computing device initiates a communications call and receives capability information for a second computing device. The capability information for the second computing device includes information indicating attributes of a service supported by the second computing device. Additionally, the first computing device evaluates the capability information to determine that the service is supported by the first and second computing devices. The first computing device initiates a sharing-experience session that includes the service. An update message comprising update information for the service is received, and based on the received update information, content of the service is updated. | 05-01-2014 |
20140122727 | Routing Traffic for Applications by a Software Router Co-Resident in Application Memory Space of a General Purpose Computer - The embodiments described herein provide mechanism that allows an embedded router software image and an application to run in the user application memory space of a general purpose computer. A connection is established with an operating system device configured to route packets between the application and the software router and route, by the software router, network traffic to and from the application by way of the connection. The application may be connected to other applications in the user application memory space or connected to applications that are external to the general purpose computer. | 05-01-2014 |
20140122728 | Server Apparatus and Method of Operating A Network - A server apparatus accesses a terminal apparatus connected via an IP network to a router from an externally provided terminal apparatus in a simple and firm manner without previously performing a complex setting operation. The server apparatus includes (1) a connection information transmitting unit, when specific information of a second terminal apparatus connected via a router to an IP (Internet Protocol) network is received from a first terminal apparatus connected via the IP network to the connection information transmitting unit, which transmits connection information to the first terminal apparatus, with the connection information being employed to access the second terminal apparatus from the first terminal apparatus, and (2) a relay unit, when the relay unit is accessed from the first terminal apparatus by employing the connection information transmitted by the connection information transmitting unit, which relays the first terminal apparatus to the second terminal apparatus having the specific information. | 05-01-2014 |
20140129722 | PSUEDO WIRE MERGE FOR IPTV - A pseudo-wire merge is disclosed. Communicating with a first communication server enables registration of a first endpoint with the first communication server thereby enabling the first endpoint to establish a communication session under control of the first communication server with a second endpoint coupled to the communication network. Communicating with a second communication server enables registration of the first endpoint with the second communication server while the first endpoint is registered with the first communication server thereby enabling the first endpoint to establish a communication session over the communication network selectively either under the control of the second communication server or under the control of the first communication server. | 05-08-2014 |
20140129723 | Connection Rate Management in Wide Ports - A method for managing a request for an outbound connection is provided. The method includes the step of receiving the request for the outbound connection. The request includes a specified connection speed. The method also includes the step of comparing the request for the outbound connection to a plurality of outbound connection options. A further step of the method includes selecting an outbound connection from the plurality of outbound connection options. The selected outbound connection has a connection speed at least equal to the specified connection speed. The selected outbound connection also has the lowest connection speed of the outbound connection options having a connection speed at least equal to the specified connection speed. | 05-08-2014 |
20140129724 | END NETWORK DECIDER - According to one embodiment, an apparatus may store a mapping of a plurality of applications to a plurality of end networks. The apparatus may receive a request associated with executing an application from the plurality of applications and determine, based at least in part upon the mapping, an end network from the plurality of end networks that participates in the execution of the application. The end network may be mapped to the application. The apparatus may then establish a connection to the end network such that communications associated with the application are directed through the connection. | 05-08-2014 |
20140129725 | SmartLight Interaction System - The interfacing computer system mediates connections between user devices and peripheral devices. The system includes a platform server computer having an input/output port that supports communication with a plurality of devices using the IP protocol. The platform server computer is programmed to provide a peripheral device registration function whereby information about a peripheral device is stored in the associated memory. The platform server computer is further programmed to provide a user device authentication function whereby information about a user device is stored in the associated memory and accessed by the at least one processor to mediate how a registered peripheral device may be accessed by said user device. The platform server computer also provides an information routing function whereby source information originating from a first device is routed through the input/output port to a device other than the first device and according to instructions provided to the platform server computer by a user device. | 05-08-2014 |
20140136718 | DETECTING QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR UNIFIED COMMUNICATION AND COLLABORATION (UC&C) ON INTERNETWORKS - QoS support is detected during discovery of potential media paths between a source and a destination by examining the markings of each available media path and selecting a more suitable media candidate based on a set of QoS prioritization rules. Optionally, each endpoint may update a UC&C monitoring service with the QoS results of the candidate list discovery process so that any automated diagnostic and auditing systems can be alerted to any misconfigured Network Elements. | 05-15-2014 |
20140136719 | METHODS, COMPUTER PROGRAMS, TRANSACTION SERVERS AND COMPUTER SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING TRANSACTIONS - The invention relates to a method, computer program and computer system for processing transactions. The method comprises providing a plurality of input connectors which interface towards a plurality of external data systems; providing a plurality of action connectors which interface towards a plurality of external data systems; receiving an input with one of the input connectors; determining, whether the input relates to a predetermined service of a customer; creating a transaction based on the input, when linking the received input to a predetermined service of a customer; processing the transaction to determine at least one output action; providing the at least one output action to at least one of the action connectors; and providing an output with the at least one action connector based on the at least one output action. | 05-15-2014 |
20140143430 | System and Method for Peer-to-Peer Management Through Policy and Context Replication - A method of context replication including receiving a first context item at a first system in a network, determining that the first system is a context management master system, establishing a first peer-to-peer session with a second system in the network in response to determining that the first system is the context management master system, and providing, from the first system, the first context item to the second system. | 05-22-2014 |
20140143431 | MULTI-CDN DIGITAL CONTENT STREAMING - Techniques for optimizing a plurality of parallel network connections for a digital content stream through a network between a plurality of content servers and a content player. Embodiments determine an indication of network performance for each of the plurality of parallel network connections. Additionally, upon determining that a first one the plurality of parallel network connections is underperforming, based on whether the indication of network performance associated with the first parallel network connection satisfies a threshold level of performance, the first parallel network connection is dropped. Upon determining that a total throughput for the digital content stream is less than a minimum threshold of network performance, embodiments select a content server with which to establish a new parallel network connection, based on historical network performance data associated with the selected content server, and also establishing the new parallel network connection to the selected content server. | 05-22-2014 |
20140143432 | DIRECT FILE TRANSFER BETWEEN SUBSCRIBERS OF A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Systems and techniques for transferring a file from a first client associated with a first subscriber to a communications system to a second client associated with a second subscriber to the communications system by connecting from the first client to a communications system host; sending, through the communications system host, a request to the second client to establish a direct connection to the second client; when the second client accepts the request, establishing a direct connection to the second client that bypasses the communications system host; and transferring a file over the direct connection. | 05-22-2014 |
20140149593 | Multi-Streaming Communication Session - A communication session between a first communication device and a second communication device is hosted in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A contact server functions as a bridge service between the first communication device and the second communication device. A communication link between the first communication device and the contact server or the second communication device and the contact server is initially a voice-over IP (VoIP) communication link over a wireless data network comprised of a first packet data media stream. The contact server receives the first packet data media stream and at least one other packet data media stream from the first communication device and combines them into a single packet data media stream before transmitting the combined single packet data media stream to the second communication device. | 05-29-2014 |
20140156854 | Collaboration Handoff - A collaboration handoff method for seamlessly passing a communication session between devices includes connecting a first device and a second device to enable communication between the first and second devices using an intermediary device to initiate a communication session. A request may be received from one of the first device and a third device to switch to the third device for communication with the second device. Communication session data for the first device may be identified at the intermediary device. The third device may be connected with the second device within the communication session and the communication session data may be transmitted to the third device. | 06-05-2014 |
20140156855 | BINDING MULTIPLE ADDRESSES TO A SOCKET IN A NETWORK SYSTEM - A TCP/IP socket extension may bind a single socket to more than one IP address. The socket API extension may allow a user to bind a socket to a list of IP addresses instead of a single IP address. Additional socket APIs may allow applications to bind an existing socket to one or more additional IP addresses. Bind-specific support may enhance a user's capability to specify one or more IPv4 addresses and/or IPv6 addresses or other addresses to bind to a generic server information handling system (IHS). The method may convert a generic server IHS into a bind-specific server IHS that accepts new connections over both the IPv4 and IPv6 network transports and/or other network transports without requiring changes to the server IHS. A modified TCP/IP stack may provide support for multiple sockets. The method may map multiple address/port/protocol tuples to the same socket. | 06-05-2014 |
20140156856 | CONTROL OF CONNECTION BETWEEN DEVICES - For controlling connection between at least a user communicating device (UCD) and a network entity (NE) through a telecommunication network (TN), a controlling device (CD) linked to the network entity (NE) interrogates a social network system (SNS) to retrieve profile data of the user of the communicating device (UCD), and applies a policy to control the connection between the network entity (NE) and the user communicating device (UCD), the policy depending on the profile data including at least a social relationship between the user of the communicating device (UCD) and the user owning the network entity (NE). | 06-05-2014 |
20140164626 | CONNECTION MODEL-BASED CONTROL OF CONCURRENT CONNECTION COUNT AND PROPERTIES - A connection request including a connection model key and a partner system attribute of the partner system requesting a connection is received at an application server from a partner system. Using a predefined connection model, as determination is made as to whether the received connection model key and the received partner system attribute respectively match a configured connection model key and a configured authorized partner system attribute within the predefined connection model. In response to determining that the received connection model key and the received partner system attribute match the respective configured connection model key and the configured authorized partner system attribute within the predefined connection model, a connection is created that includes a first unique connection name derived from the received partner system attribute. | 06-12-2014 |
20140164627 | PEER-TO-PEER PERFORMANCE - Embodiments disclosed herein generally relate to improving distribution of digital content in a peer-to-peer network. For example, future snapshots of a peer-to-peer network are predicted and used to determine that a computing device may be better off waiting until a future point in time to download specific digital content. For another example, computing devices are mapped into different groups based on location information, and inter-group information is used to identify other computing devices for a computing device to send download requests for digital content. For a further example, information indicative of scarcity associated with different digital content units is used to prioritize distribution of the digital content units. For still another example, computing devices are grouped into clusters and different computing devices within the same cluster download different digital content units so that the computing devices within the same cluster collectively obtain all of the different digital content units. | 06-12-2014 |
20140164628 | MANAGEMENT OF STREAM OPERATORS WITH DYNAMIC CONNECTIONS - One embodiment is directed to a method for processing a stream of tuples in a stream-based application. A stream operator may receive a stream of tuples. A stream manager may determine whether a dynamic connection exists at a first stream operator. The dynamic connection may connect the first stream operator to a second stream operator. The stream manager may poll the first stream operator and the second stream operator for a presence of the dynamic connection. The stream manager may modify processing of one or more upstream stream operators in response to a change in use of the dynamic connection. | 06-12-2014 |
20140164629 | SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED METHODOLOGY FOR PROXIMITY DETECTION AND DEVICE ASSOCIATION USING ULTRASOUND - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving ultrasound frequency sweeps in a sound receiving device. Each of the plurality of ultrasound frequency sweeps is centered on one of at least two predetermined frequencies. The method also includes converting the ultrasound frequency sweeps into an ultrasound message based on a central frequency of each of the ultrasound frequency sweeps received, and placing the ultrasound message into a receive buffer. Then at least a network address is extracted from the ultrasound message, and the network address is used to establish a communication session over a data network with a telecommunications device. | 06-12-2014 |
20140164630 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOADING A LANDING PAGE - A Universal Serial Bus (USB) modem/Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) device is provided that when connected to a host device, presents itself as an Ethernet endpoint to the host device, without requiring additional software/drivers to be downloaded to the host device. Embedded in the USB modem/WWAN device are various modules that provide functionality allowing either automatic connection to the Internet or redirection to a local Web User Interface (UI) that a user may employ to configure the USB modem/WWAN device and/or manually connect to the Internet. Additionally, the USB modem/WWAN device employs predetermined rules to determine whether or not/how the redirection occurs, including in scenarios where wireless connectivity to the Internet is unavailable. | 06-12-2014 |
20140164631 | CONNECTION MODEL-BASED CONTROL OF CONCURRENT CONNECTION COUNT AND PROPERTIES - A connection request including a connection model key and a partner system attribute of the partner system requesting a connection is received at an application server from a partner system. Using a predefined connection model, as determination is made as to whether the received connection model key and the received partner system attribute respectively match a configured connection model key and a configured authorized partner system attribute within the predefined connection model. In response to determining that the received connection model key and the received partner system attribute match the respective configured connection model key and the configured authorized partner system attribute within the predefined connection model, a connection is created that includes a first unique connection name derived from the received partner system attribute. | 06-12-2014 |
20140164632 | APPLICATION EXECUTION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method and an apparatus for executing an application are provided. The application execution method of the present disclosure includes connecting a first external device, receiving, from the first external device, connection information for use in connecting to a second external device, connecting to the second external device using the connection information, and transmitting, when a transfer command is received, application execution state information to the second external device. The application execution method of the present disclosure is capable of allowing the user to execute the application conveniently. | 06-12-2014 |
20140164633 | Method, Device and System For Session Binding - Disclosed are a method, device and system for session binding. The method includes: a PCRF or BPCF receives a first session from a fixed network, wherein the first session carries an IP address and a port number set; the PCRF or BPCF receives a second session from an AF or a Traffic Detection Function (TDF), wherein the second session carries an IP address and port number information; and the PCRF or BPCF binds the first session to the second session according to the IP addresses and the port number information. The disclosure solves the problem of inaccurate session binding in the scenario where a mobile terminal directly accesses mobile network services via a fixed network. | 06-12-2014 |
20140173119 | CONTEXT AWARE HELP SYSTEM - A context aware help system generates context data for web sessions. The context data may be used either by a human operator or by an automated response system to help resolve user web session problems. For example, a user may initiate a telephone call to the context aware help during a web session. The context data may be displayed to a telephone operator in response to the telephone call. The telephone operator may use the context data to determine what web pages and user inputs were previously entered during the web session. This allows the telephone operator to quickly analyze web session problems and provide more effective and efficient web session support. The help system may alternatively, or in addition, provide other types of automated audio or data support. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173120 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION, COMPUTER SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER - A method for establishing a communication between a plurality of computers and a data processing device through a network, the method including: reporting, when a change occurs in a communication state between the plurality of computers and the data processing device, the change in the communication state to another computer; recognizing, from among the plurality of computers, a computer which establishes a communication with the data processing device, based on a notice of the change in the communication state; and establishing, when a number of computers for which each of the plurality of computers recognizes to have established a communication with the data processing device is not greater than a predetermined prescribed number, a communication with the data processing device, with a request from the data processing device. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173121 | METHOD, DEVICE AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM FOR CLIENT INTERACTION OF A NETWORK APPLICATION EXECUTED BY COMPUTER - A method for client interaction of a network application executed by computer including: acquiring an interactive instruction of the network application in the session window, transferring the interactive instruction to a connected client in the session by a client interface of the session window, and updating the web application page in the client following the interactive instruction, to get an updated network application web page. The client is a client that generates the session window. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173122 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING SIMULTANEOUS MULTI-AGENT ACCESS FOR COMMAND EXECUTION THROUGH A SINGLE CLIENT - One example procedure of managing agents via a session client may include selecting multiple endpoint devices to manage, establishing a connection to a server, and identifying at least two agent identifiers identifying multiple agents corresponding to the multiple endpoint devices. The procedure may also include transmitting a session setup command to the server including the at least two agent identifiers and receiving a confirmation that a session has been established between the session client and the multiple agents of the multiple endpoint devices. | 06-19-2014 |
20140181311 | DATABASE SESSION DEPENDENT ROUTING - A network device issues a globally unique identifier (GUID) to an application for use in a database read/write session. The network device determines a session key based on the GUID. The network device determines a total number of database nodes available to handle a read/write session with the application, and determines one of the database nodes to route a session to based on applying a modulo function to the session key and to the determined total number of database nodes. The network device, when determining the one of the database nodes to route the session to, applies the function (X mod Y)+1, where X is the session key and Y is the total number of database nodes available to handle the read/write session with the application. | 06-26-2014 |
20140181312 | Systems and Methods for Peer-to-Peer IMS - Systems and methods for peer-to-peer communication between user equipment using IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) functionality are provided. Each peer user equipment includes an IMS server and the peer-to-peer communication is established independent of network-based IMS servers. A third user equipment that does not include an IMS server can join the peer-to-peer communication using network-based IMS servers. | 06-26-2014 |
20140181313 | System and Method for Communicating with an Electronic Exchange in an Electronic Trading Environment - System and methods for a connection proxy server are described. According to an example method described herein, a connection proxy server stores subscription, product tables as well as other downloads that are provided to a client terminal during initialization stage as well as later during a trading session. Upon detecting that a connection between the client terminal and a gateway is lost, the connection proxy maintains a communication session created for the client terminal at the gateway and receives data intended for the client terminal. If the connection is re-established between the client terminal and the gateway during a predetermined period of time, the connection proxy provides the stored data to the client terminal thus avoiding a surge in processing resources at the gateway due to the necessary downloads. | 06-26-2014 |
20140181314 | METHODS CIRCUITS DEVICES SYSTEMS AND ASSOCIATED COMPUTER EXECUTABLE CODE FOR WEB AUGMENTATION - Disclosed are methods, circuits, devices, systems and associated computer executable code for generating a web-projection. One or more scripts, defining web-projections, are executed, initiating communication sessions with one or more webpage servers defined in the scripts. Specific content(s) defined in the script, from the one or more webpage servers, is retrieved, translated and injected into corresponding web-projections prior to being served to a requesting client web browser. | 06-26-2014 |
20140189134 | System and Method for NAS Server Test Load Generation - System and method embodiments are provided herein to test Network Attached Storage (NAS) server performance by generating a sufficient load in NAS client sessions. A test device is configured to run as many needed NAS clients to generate enough NAS session load for evaluating the NAS server performance. An embodiment comprises a method for testing a NAS server comprising starting a NAS client, establishing a session between the NAS client and the NAS server, exchanging communications for the session at a network stack layer below the NAS client, terminating the NAS client, starting a second NAS client, establishing a subsequent session between the second NAS client and the NAS server, exchanging communications for the subsequent session at the network stack layer while exchanging communications for the session, and terminating the second NAS client. | 07-03-2014 |
20140189135 | Methods, Systems, and Media for Secure Connection Management - Methods, systems and media for secure connection management are provided. In some embodiments, methods for secure connection management are provided, the methods comprising: detecting, using a hardware processor, a new network connection; determining that the new network connection is not a secure connection; establishing a virtual private network connection in response to determining that the new network connection is not secure; and upon establishing the virtual private network connection, indicating to a user that the virtual private connection is established. | 07-03-2014 |
20140201376 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE HANDLING OF REDUNDANT LONG POLL - A server for handling long poll requests receives requests containing both a client identifier and an indication of a last long poll execution time. These parameters allow the server to determine if resources dedicated to previous long polls from the client have been released. If there may still be resourced dedicated, they are released so that the new poll can be established and no redundant long polls are maintained. | 07-17-2014 |
20140201377 | PORTAL MULTI-DEVICE SESSION CONTEXT PRESERVATION - A computer-implemented method includes: detecting, in a system running a portal, that a first portal session for a first user exists with regard to a first device operated by the first user; receiving a session transfer command that the first user generates using the first device and that indicates at least a second device; in response to the session transfer command, providing session information to the second device that reflects the first portal session; receiving a session initiation command that a second user generates using the second device, the session initiation command generated by the second device based on at least part of the session information; and in response to the session initiation command, creating a second portal session in the system, the second portal session corresponding to the first portal session. | 07-17-2014 |
20140201378 | GENERIC COMPANION-MESSAGING BETWEEN MEDIA PLATFORMS - Various embodiments, methods, and systems for communicating via a generic companion-messaging session are provided. The generic companion-messaging session includes a base platform running a base platform application and a companion platform running a companion platform application. An initialization message that automatically pairs the companion platform application and the base platform application is sent from the companion platform to the base platform for a generic companion-messaging session. The companion platform is connected to an encrypted communication channel for the generic companion-messaging session with the base platform. The encrypted communication channel supports bidirectional communication over a plurality of connections. A connection from the plurality of connections is determined for routing a message. The message is routed via a direct connection when the direct connection with the base platform is determined and the message is routed via an indirect connection when the indirect connection with the base platform is determined. | 07-17-2014 |
20140207957 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONNECTING MEDIA DEVICES THROUGH WEB SOCKETS - Systems and methods are described herein for connecting client devices to applications on a server using web sockets. In one aspect, the systems and methods described provide for a routing table that may be used to direct communications between a client device and an application on a web server. The routing table may overcome challenges of implementing web sockets under current constraints of the web socket specification, the HTTP specification, and server implementations. | 07-24-2014 |
20140207958 | VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ROUTING DEVICE AND METHOD THEREOF - A virtual private network communication system, a routing device and a method thereof are provided. The system includes a server and a plurality of routing devices. The routing devices respectively transmit registration information to the server, wherein the registration information includes a recognition string. The routing devices include a first routing device and a second routing device. The first routing device transmits a positioning request to the server, and the server transmits the positioning request to a part of or all of the routing devices according to the recognition string. When the second routing device receives the positioning request, the second routing device transmits positioning information according to the positioning request to the first routing device via the server. The first routing device directly establishes a connection with the second routing device according to the positioning information and transmits data after the connection is established. | 07-24-2014 |
20140207959 | DISTRIBUTED ASSOCIATION ENGINE - A computer-implemented method for a distributed association engine, comprising searching, by a processor, for one or more objects of interest within a spatial bounded area, identifying, by the processor, the one or more objects of interest responsive to the search, and mapping, by the processor, one or more relationships between a user and the one or more objects of interest in a personal network. | 07-24-2014 |
20140207960 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING TRANSMISSION DELAY OF HTTP PROTOCOL AND PROCESSING LOAD OF HTTP SERVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for managing and controlling wireless connection of a HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) proxy device in a wireless communication network are provided. The method includes receiving one of information indicating a wireless connection deactivation of an HTTP client performing HTTP communication and information indicating a change in an Internet Protocol (IP) address of the HTTP client from a predetermined node of the wireless communication network; and deactivating a connection with an HTTP server if the received information indicates the wireless connection deactivation of an HTTP client performing the HTTP communication; and maintaining a connection with an HTTP server if the received information indicates the change in the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the HTTP client. | 07-24-2014 |
20140207961 | CHIP AND COMPUTER SYSTEM - A computer system is provided. The computer system comprises a network module and an input device. The network module receives remote information from a remote host through a network. The input device receives first input information, a display device and a chip. The display device comprises a display panel and an on-screen display (OSD) control module. The chip comprises a control connection interface and a control module. The control connection interface is electrically connected to the OSD control module. The control module is electrically connected to the network module, the input device and the control connection interface to control the OSD control module through the control connection interface according to the remote information or the first input information to further control the display function of the display panel | 07-24-2014 |
20140215081 | ADAPTIVE DATA CONNECTION RETRY BY A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for adaptive data connection retry by a wireless communication device is provided. The method can include detecting a failed attempt by the wireless communication device to establish a data connection for an application. The method can further include selecting a data retry pattern having a predefined association with the application from a set of predefined data retry patterns. The set of predefined data retry patterns can be defined based at least in part on application usage data collected by a network entity from wireless communication devices. The method can additionally include retrying data connection establishment in accordance with the selected data retry pattern. | 07-31-2014 |
20140215082 | SIGNALING OPTIMIZATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK FOR TRAFFIC UTILIZING PROPRIETARY AND NON-PROPRIETARY PROTOCOLS - An architecture for optimizing signaling for arbitrary proprietary and non-proprietary protocols. In one embodiment, a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) stream is passed as a byte stream from an application to a local proxy over a first session, from the local proxy to a proxy server over a second TCP session, and from the proxy server to a content server over a third TCP session. The local proxy observes and identifies patterns within the byte stream, without being aware of the underlying protocol. Once a pattern is identified, the second TCP session is torn down such that the first TCP session replays the pattern to the application, and third TCP session replays the pattern to the content server. Once either side detects a change in the pattern, the second TCP session is re-established to deliver the changed content to the other end. | 07-31-2014 |
20140237123 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A contactability of a user can be maintained by identifying a secondary device and causing a contact device to establish a communication session with the secondary device when a primary device becomes unavailable. In some embodiments, when a power level of a primary device falls below a threshold, the primary device can identify a secondary device previously associated with the primary device. The secondary device can receive a signal periodically from the primary device. In response to ceasing to receive the signal that is being sent periodically from the primary device, the secondary device in some embodiments can send a notification to a contact device to inform the contact device to send a communication request to the secondary device. The secondary device can receive the communication request from the contact device and establish a communication session with the contact device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140237124 | SCRIPTING SUPPORT FOR DATA IDENTIFIERS, VOICE RECOGNITION AND SPEECH IN A TELNET SESSION - Methods of adding data identifiers and speech/voice recognition functionality are disclosed. A telnet client runs one or more scripts that add data identifiers to data fields in a telnet session. The input data is inserted in the corresponding fields based on data identifiers. Scripts run only on the telnet client without modifications to the server applications. Further disclosed are methods for providing speech recognition and voice functionality to telnet clients. Portions of input data are converted to voice and played to the user. A user also may provide input to certain fields of the telnet session by using his voice. Scripts running on the telnet client convert the user's voice into text and is inserted to corresponding fields. | 08-21-2014 |
20140237125 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE CONNECTION - The present invention discloses a method, an apparatus, and a system for establishing a device-to-device connection, and relates to the field of communications technologies. The method includes: obtaining, by a device-to-device D2D server, registration information of a first device needing to perform D2D communication; performing pre-matching for the first device according to the registration information of the first device to find a second device; and triggering an evolved Node Base eNB to establish a D2D communication link between the first device and the second device. In the present invention, a D2D server triggers an eNB to establish a direct device-to-device connection between two devices. | 08-21-2014 |
20140237126 | Sharing Location Information During A Communication Session - In one embodiment, a method includes establishing a communication session between a first device and a second device. The first device is a mobile computing device. The location of the first device is received at the second device. The location of the first device is displayed on a graphical user interface of the second device during the communication session. | 08-21-2014 |
20140237127 | Extending SIP P-Served User Header Over IMS Interfaces - The invention provides a method of handling SIP messages in an IMS core network. The method comprises receiving a first network entity, a first SI P message that includes an identification of a served user to which the first SIP message relates. The first IMS network entity is in the served user's home network. The first SIP message is forwarded as a second SIP message to a second network entity in the served user's home IMS core network. The second SI P message includes a P-Served-User, PSU, header identifying the served user. | 08-21-2014 |
20140237128 | Method and wireless terminal device for rapidly establishing dual-stack wireless connection - A method and wireless terminal device for rapidly establishing a dual-stack wireless connection. The wireless terminal device sends various types of packet data protocol (PDP) activation requests after being registered onto a wireless network, and determines an Internet Protocol (IP) type supported by the network based on a result returned by the network; after receiving a connection instruction from a user, the wireless terminal device initiates one PDP activation request corresponding to a determined IP type supported by the network; if a result that the PDP activation is performed successfully is returned by the network, the wireless terminal device establishes a data connection. Compared to the related art, the wireless terminal device of the present disclosure determines the IP type supported by the network in advance when it is registered onto the network, and thus may prevent a fall-back process and rapidly establish the connection when receiving the connection instruction. | 08-21-2014 |
20140244850 | Method for Recoverable Message Exchange Independent of Network Protocols - A method is described to allow a device to retrieve a message, that is separated into a plurality of fragments, from a data source, wherein the method involves: establishing a first network connection with the data source; receiving a subset of the plurality of fragments; determining the first network connection has ended before completion of said message; establishing one or more subsequent network connections with the data source; and receiving any of the plurality of fragments not within the subset. The characteristics (for example: application protocol, security, speed, reach, bandwidth capability, cost of usage, network type, physical layer type, data-link layer type, or IP address of one or both of the first and second devices) of the first network connection can be potentially different than the subsequent network connections. | 08-28-2014 |
20140250233 | Selective Zone Control Session Termination - A mechanism is provided in a data processing system for selective zone control session termination. A zone control service executing in the data processing system creates logical zoning definitions in memory for each client session. Each client session attempts to make changes to a fabric. Responsive to the zone control service receiving a request to commit a session from a given client and changes made by the given client during the session not conflicting with changes made by another client in a concurrent session based on the logical zoning definitions, the zone control service applies the changes made by the given client during the session to the fabric. | 09-04-2014 |
20140258547 | SINGLE SIGN-ON PROCESSING FOR ASSOCIATED MOBILE APPLICATIONS - Systems, methods and computer-readable media are disclosed for performing single sign-on processing between associated mobile applications. The single sign-on processing may include processing to generate an interaction session between a user and a back-end server associated with a mobile application based at least in part on one or more existing interaction sessions between the user and one or more back-end servers associated with one or more other mobile applications. In order to establish an interaction session with an associated back-end server, a mobile application may leverage existing interaction sessions that have already been established in connection with the launching of other associated mobile applications. | 09-11-2014 |
20140258548 | PLAYBACK CONTROL DEVICE, PLAYBACK CONTROL SYSTEM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A playback control device includes an identification part configured to identify one of communication terminals based on identification data associated with a request to play session data including at least one of image data and sound data; a first acquisition part configured to acquire session data which has been communicated in a session in which the communication terminals have joined; a second acquisition part configured to acquire, in response to the identification data, time data representing at least a time period in which the identified communication terminal had joined the session; and a control part configured to, in response to the time data, allow playing of the session data for the time period in which the identified communication terminal had joined the session and disallow playing of the session data for the time period in which the identified communication terminal had not joined the session. | 09-11-2014 |
20140258549 | TECHNIQUES FOR PROVIDING CONNECTIONS TO SERVICES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Methods and apparatus for mediating user access to services over a network are described. Access is provided by a service network host to a plurality of connectors providing access to a plurality of services over the network. The services are provided by entities independent from the service network host. The connectors including a first connector are configured to communicate with a first service using a first format to retrieve or modify data associated with the first service. The first connector is further configured to identify one or more methods or data fields of the first service. The service network host is further configured to provide, to a computer associated with a user over the network, one or more directions for using the first connector to display and/or modify data from the first service over the network. | 09-11-2014 |
20140258550 | AUTOMATIC AD-HOC NETWORK CREATION AND COALESCING USING WPS - A device previously configured as a registrar and that has established an independent ad-hoc network is automatically discovered by another device also previously configured as a registrar. To form an ad-hoc wireless network between these two devices, each device periodically enters a scanning mode to scan for and intercept beacons transmitted by the other device. Upon such interception, one of the devices becomes an enrollee in accordance with a predefined condition and in response to a user selected option. Subsequently, the enrollee modifies its beacons to include an attribute, such as the MAC address, associated with the other device. After intercepting the modified beacon, the remaining registrar prompts it user to decide whether to allow the enrollee to join the registrar's network. If the user responds affirmatively, a handshake is performed between the two devices and a subsequent attempt is made by the enrollee to join the registrar's network. | 09-11-2014 |
20140280980 | Connecting Consumers with Providers - A computer-implemented method includes receiving, from a computing device used by a first service provider, a request to transfer a communication connection established between a device used by a consumer of services and the device used by the first service provider, with the transfer request directed to an available second, service provider; determining, by a brokerage system, one or more available second service providers; establishing, by the brokerage system based on a selected second service provider, a second communication channel with a device used by the selected second service provider; and causing, by the brokerage system, a disconnection of the first communication channel and a transfer of the connection of the first communication channel from the first communication channel to the second communication channel. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280981 | APPLICATION CONNECTION FOR DEVICES IN A NETWORK - A method for application connection comprises receiving a list of application active sessions by a first electronic device based on location of the active sessions in relation to a location of the first electronic device, and selecting an active session using the first electronic device to gain access for connection to a first application by the first electronic device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280982 | SECURE TRANSMISSION OF MEDIA DURING A COMMUNICATION SESSION - Methods for secure transmission of data during a communication session are provided herein. In some embodiments, the method includes establishing a secure voice communication session between a first electronic device and second electronic device in a communications network, and sending secure data over the established voice communication session using information associated with the established voice communication session. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280983 | Methods And Systems For Pairing Devices - Disclosed herein are methods and systems for pairing devices such as control devices and user devices, by determining location information relating to one or more of the control devices and the user devices. Location information can be used to identify at least one user device proximate to the control device. The method and system then identifies a selected user device to be paired with the control device. The control device is then paired with the selected user device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280984 | Method for Transparently Connecting Augmented Network Socket Operations - A method at one or more computers having memory and one or more processors includes detecting establishment of a connection between a first process and a second process; determining whether an augmented communications service is available for the connection between the first process and second process; in accordance with a determination that the augmented communications service is available, configuring the connection between the first process and the second process to make use of the augmented communications service with no modification to the executable codes of the first process and the second process; and in accordance with a determination that the augmented communications service is not available, configuring the connection between the first process and the second process to make use of a non-augmented communications service. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280985 | Portable Platform for Networked Computing - In one embodiment, a portable, networked, computing device comprises a processor, a plurality of radios, and a memory. The device may be operable to pair, by at least one of the radios, with a device associated with a user. The device may then monitor, by one of the radios, a signal for a connection established with a first network. When the device determines that the signal for the first network has dropped below a threshold level of quality, it may enable access point mode for at least one of the paired devices by turning on a radio to establish a connection with a second network and thereby providing connectivity to the second network for the at least one of the paired devices. If multiple networks are available, the device may select an optimal network based on an assessment of one or more factors. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280986 | DELIVERY ACKNOWLEDGMENT IN EVENT STREAM PROCESSING - A method of acknowledging receipt of an event block object is provided. First connection information for connecting to an event stream processing (ESP) engine executing at a first computing device is received. A first connection to the ESP engine is established using the received first connection information. Second connection information for connecting to a publishing client executing at a second computing device is received. A second connection to the publishing client is established using the received second connection information, wherein the first connection differs from the second connection. An event block object is received from the ESP engine using the established first connection, wherein the event block object includes a unique identifier for the event block object. Successful processing of the event block object is determined. Responsive to the successful processing determination, an acknowledgment message including the unique identifier is sent to the publishing client using the established second connection. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280987 | APPLICATION PROGRAMMING INTERFACE ENABLING COMMUNICATION FEATURES FOR DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS - Systems and methods are described for enabling browser-to-phone and browser-to-browser communications to be enhanced with enterprise communication features. Specifically, a Collaboration Environment is disclosed with the ability to interface a browser with an enterprise communication network. The Collaboration Environment is exposed to browsers via a media server and/or websocket and is enabled to communicate with the browsers via a purpose-built library. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280988 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PARALLEL MULTIPLEXING BETWEEN SERVERS IN A CLUSTER - Systems and methods are provided for providing parallel muxing between servers in a cluster. One such system can include a cluster of one or more high performance computing systems, each including one or more processors and a high performance memory. The cluster communicates over an InfiniBand network. The system can also include a middleware environment, executing on the cluster, that includes one or more application server instances. The system can further include a plurality of muxers, wherein each application server instance includes at least one muxer. Each muxer can receive information from a plurality of threads to transmit to a different muxer on a different application server instance over the Infiniband network using a plurality of parallel channels. | 09-18-2014 |
20140289419 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR TRANSFERRING A WEBSITE STATE ACROSS USER DEVICES USING A COOKIE - In accordance with embodiments, there are provided mechanisms and methods for transferring a website state across user devices using a cookie. These mechanisms and methods for transferring a website state across user devices using a cookie can use the cookie provide sharing of browser information among the user devices. The ability to provide sharing of browser information via a cookie can enable a user of one device to access the state of a browsing session with a website performed on another device, with minimal involvement by a backend system. | 09-25-2014 |
20140289420 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MEDIA IN A DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for processing communication media in a regionally distributed communication platform that includes at a first platform region, establishing a communication session comprising establishing a media communication to at least one endpoint from the first region and establishing signaling communication to a second platform region; selecting a media resource in response to a change in media processing requirements of the communication session; when the selected media resource is outside the first region, routing media communication through a media resource outside of the first region; when the media resource is available in the first region, routing media communication through the media resource of the first region; and when the media resource is outside of the second region, storing the media communication in the first region at least temporarily and tunneling a branch of the media communication to a central media service in the second region. | 09-25-2014 |
20140297876 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTEGRATING APPLICATIONS AND RELATED COMMUNICATIONS - An approach is provided for presenting communications between users. A request to initiate a communication session between a first device and a second device is received. The communication session is associated with content presented by an application. Presentation of a user interface of the application to depict the content is caused, at lead in part. Representation of the communication session as an element of the user interface is caused, at least in part. Manipulation of the element controls the communication session. | 10-02-2014 |
20140297877 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PAIRING A TERMINAL AND A USER ACCOUNT - A pairing must be performed between a terminal, referred to as terminal to be paired, and a user account for a service implemented by at least one device connected to a first communication network. The terminal to be paired is connected via a second communication network to a gateway which interconnects the first and second communication networks by performing an address translation by means of a public address routable on the first communication network. A pairing device performs steps: of obtaining ( | 10-02-2014 |
20140297878 | Communication Control Device, Server, Communication System and Computer Readable Medium - According to an embodiment, a communication control device includes a first connecting unit, a connection maintaining unit, and a disconnection detector. The first connecting unit is configured to connect to a server via a network and establish connection with the server. The connection maintaining unit is configured to transmit a packet for maintaining the connection to the server when a non-communication state of the connection continues for a predetermine time. The disconnection detector is configured to detect a packet stoppage state. When the disconnection detector has detected the packet stoppage state, the connection maintaining unit shortens the predetermined time. | 10-02-2014 |
20140297879 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TELECOM NETWORK PROVIDING SESSION SERVICE TO INTERNET - A method for a telecom network to provide a session service to an internet is disclosed. The internet is connected with the telecom network via an access gateway or via an access-side device which has been updated to support an internet application protocol. The method includes: an internet user establishes a session with a telecom user or another internet user through the telecom network. A system for a telecom network to provide a session service to an internet is also disclosed. In the disclosure, the access-side device of the telecom network is updated to enable the access-side device to support the internet application protocol, and the internet and the telecom network are converged, thereby providing the session service to the internet user. The disclosure facilitates the internet user to use the session service. | 10-02-2014 |
20140304417 | ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS - In one aspect there is provided a host device having: a modem interface arranged to transmit transmission units between the host device and a modem; a communication function configured to generate primitives to establish a communication event between the host device and a remote device; a client agent connected to receive control primitives from the communication function and operable to convert the control primitives to data transmission units; a host routing interface operable to route data transmission units from the client agent according to a predetermined route option which is set based on whether a communication event control function for processing the data transmission units is located on the host device or the modem. | 10-09-2014 |
20140310419 | ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ENTITIES IN A SHARED NETWORK - A method, system, and/or computer program product establishes a communication session between two entities on a shared network. A request to locate a desired entity on a shared network, which hosts one or more entities that are unknown to a requesting entity, is received from the requesting entity. A desired environment with which the desired entity is associated is selected by the requesting entity. An inquiry packet is broadcast to all entities on the shared network. The inquiry packet, which does not specify a data link layer by which any particular entity communicates with the shared network, includes a request for an identity of any entity on the shared network that is assigned to the desired environment. A response to the inquiry packet provides an identity and data link layer address of the desired entity, thus enabling the establishment of a communication session between the requesting and desired entities. | 10-16-2014 |
20140310420 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF IDENTIFYING NETWORKED DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING A P2P CONNECTION - A system and method to identify a networked device for establishing a P2P connection is disclosed, wherein the system comprises a network server, a plurality of networked devices and terminal devices; and the method comprises: connecting at least one networked device to a network server through the Internet; registering the identification code of the networked device to the list of networked devices of the server and dispose a barcode corresponding to the identification code on the networked device; capturing the barcode of the networked device by an image capture unit of the terminal device to intercept the barcode to produce a connection request signal corresponding to the barcode; and obtaining, by the network server, the networked device from the list of networked devices and establish a P2P connection between the terminal device and the networked device. | 10-16-2014 |
20140317301 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING TELECOMMUNICATION CONNECTION BETWEEN A REQUESTER AND AN INTERPRETER - A representative telecommunication system that establishes communication between an interpreter and a requester is disclosed herein comprising a plurality of computing devices associated with at least one interpreter and at least one requester; a network that interconnects the plurality of computing devices; and a match server that is interconnected to the plurality of computing devices by way of the network. The match server includes a processing device, and memory including an match manager which has instructions that are executed by the processing device. The instructions include the following logics: establish connection between the match server and the computing device associated with the interpreter; assess a request for an interpreter having at least one language interpretation and for an availability of the interpreter; and establish a telecommunication connection between the plurality of the computing devices associated with the interpreter and requester based on the connection established between the match server and the computing device associated with the interpreter, and the assessment of the request for the interpreter having the at least one language interpretation and for an availability of the interpreter. | 10-23-2014 |
20140317302 | VIRTUAL COLLABORATION SESSION ACCESS - Methods are provided that include receiving a request to couple a first client device to a communication session, wherein the request includes user identification information. The method may include determining a number of client devices coupled to the communication session and comparing the number of client devices coupled to the communication session to a maximum number of client devices to determine whether the maximum number of client devices are coupled to the communication session. The method may also include when the maximum number of client devices are coupled to the communication session, determining whether a user associated with the first client device is a preferred user based on at least the user identification information and when the user is the preferred user, coupling the client device associated with the preferred user to the communication session. | 10-23-2014 |
20140317303 | APPLICATION LAUNCHING IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN ACCESSORY - An application can be launched in response to a launch request from an accessory. For example, the mobile computing device can determine whether it is in a state that allows launching of an application and/or can determine whether the application or application type requested in the launch command is available for launching. In response to the request, and if the mobile computing device is capable, the mobile computing device can launch the application. The mobile computing device can also send a positive acknowledgment message to the accessory indicating that the application may be launched. An open communication session message may also be sent to the accessory. In response thereto the accessory can open a communication session and interoperate with the application. | 10-23-2014 |
20140325078 | ARCHITECTURE FOR WEB-BASED REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS (WEBRTC) TO ACCESS INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) - Embodiments for providing an architecture for WebRTC to access Internet Protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a non-IMS user equipment (UE) is provided along with an Application Signaling Interworking Function (ASIF) co-located with the non-IMS UE. The non-IMS UE is arranged to send a register message to the ASIF for registering the non-IMS UE with an IMS core. The ASIF is arranged to translate the register message from the non-IMS UE to IMS-based signaling and to register the non-IMS UE with the IMS core using the register message translated to IMS-based signaling. | 10-30-2014 |
20140325079 | METHOD FOR SECURING HOST CONFIGURATION MESSAGES - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for verifying an access network using for example a trusted protocol such as Hotspot 2.0. In this regard, a method is provided that includes causing at least one available network to be detected. The method may further include determining a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the at least one detected available network. The method may further include causing a registry entry to be accessed in a registry that corresponds to the determined FQDN, wherein the registry entry comprises at least one certificate for at least one network entity. The method may further include verifying received configuration information from the connected network, wherein verification comprises determining whether the received configuration information is signed with a digital certificate that corresponds to the at least one certificate in the accessed registry entry. | 10-30-2014 |
20140337536 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA COMMUNICATION - A data communication method, device, and terminal are disclosed in the field of computer technology. In the method, the device obtains server connection information. The device determines whether there exists any previously maintained idle connection with the server that is established based on the connection information. When there exists the previously maintained idle connection with the server, the idle connection is configured to conduct data communication with the server. The device includes: a first acquisition module, a first determination module, and a communication module. The method reduces the time required for establishing a connection with the server based on the server's connection information, improves the efficiency of the data communication between the terminal and the server. | 11-13-2014 |
20140344463 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SUPPORTING STREAMING OVER A PROTOCOL ADAPTATION LAYER (PAL) - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of supporting streaming over a Protocol Adaptation Layer (PAL). For example, an apparatus may include a first PAL communication unit to communicate PAL traffic with a second PAL communication unit over a communication link, the PAL traffic comprising traffic of a PAL connection, over a PAL, between a first device and a second device, the PAL is above a layer of the communication link, the PAL traffic comprising data to be communicated between the first device and one or more endpoints via the second device, wherein the first PAL communication unit is to communicate an endpoint open stream request and an endpoint open stream response with the second PAL communication unit over the communication link. | 11-20-2014 |
20140344464 | Information Processing System, Computer-Readable Storage Medium Having Information Processing Program Stored Therein, Information Processing Apparatus, and Information Processing Method - An information processing apparatus acquires operation information of a user, and executes an application based on the operation information. While the application is being executed, the information processing apparatus repeatedly searches for other unspecified information processing apparatuses by using a wireless communication function, and establishes a connection with the one or more of the other information processing apparatuses having been searched for. The information processing apparatus executes a communication application to communicate with the connected one or more of the other information processing apparatuses, based on the operation information and on operation information relating to the one or more of the other information processing apparatuses. | 11-20-2014 |
20140351444 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENABLING SERVICE INTEROPERABILITY FUNCTIONALITY FOR WIFI DIRECT DEVICES CONNECTED TO A NETWORK VIA A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - Certain embodiments herein are directed to enabling service interoperability functionality for wireless fidelity (WiFi) Direct devices connected to a network via a wireless access point. A WiFi Direct device may identify various other WiFi Direct devices on a WiFi network for performing a requested service, such as printing content or displaying content to a screen. In so doing, the device may share information associated with an access point to which the device is connected with the other devices, which may also share information associated with an access point to which they are connected. In this way, WiFi Direct devices may discover their connectivity with respect to other devices to utilize a broader array of connection options for implementing a desired service, and hence, may leverage application programming interface (API) modules directed at providing service interoperability functionality between software applications and services requested by the software applications. | 11-27-2014 |
20140351445 | MAC LAYER TRANSPORT FOR WI-FI DIRECT SERVICES APPLICATION SERVICE PLATFORM WITHOUT INTERNET PROTOCOL - An apparatus comprising a first wireless computing device further comprises a first a memory and at least one processor. The at least one processor may be configured to: establish a Wi-Fi Direct Services (WFDS) connection to a second wireless computing device via a wireless communication channel, responsive to establishing the WFDS connection, establish a WFDS Application Service Platform (ASP) session between the first wireless computing device and the second wireless computing device, wherein the ASP session uses data link layer communications based on media access control (MAC) addresses via the WFDS connection, and does not use internet protocol (IP) communications, and responsive to establishing the ASP session, communicate to the second wireless computing device, using the ASP session. | 11-27-2014 |
20140351446 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING LOGICAL CHANNELS FOR COMMUNICATION - An apparatus and method for providing one or more protocols for one or more electronic devices are provided. The method includes establishing, by an electronic device configured to provide a framework interface by executing instructions stored in a memory, one or more physical channels with an external electronic device, using one or more communication modules, executing, by the electronic device, two or more application programs to interface with the framework interface, and communicating, via the framework interface, data from the two or more application programs through the one or more physical channels to the external electronic device, using at least one logical channel or session for a respective one of the two or more application programs. | 11-27-2014 |
20140351447 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIPATH TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL CONNECTION MANAGEMENT - The present invention is directed towards systems and methods for multipath transmission control protocol connection (MPTCP) management. A first device, intermediary between a second device and a third device, may establish a protocol control structure responsive to establishment of a MPTCP session between the first device and the second device. The first device may maintain, via the protocol control structure, an identification of a plurality of subflows comprising transmission control protocol (TCP) connections in the MPTCP session between the first device and the second device. The first device may convert or translate, via the protocol control structure, subflow-specific sequence identifiers of packets transmitted via each of the plurality of subflows, to sequence identifiers unique across the plurality of subflows and identifying related packets from each subflows to be processed at the third device. The third device may receive the packets with the converted sequence identifiers in a single TCP connection. | 11-27-2014 |
20140351448 | EFFECTIVE NETWORK IDENTITY PAIRING - A network device may receive a request from a local device to establish a connection with a another device. The request may include an internal network identifier of the local device. The network device may evaluate a plurality of external network identifiers, associated with the network device based on selected criteria. The network device may also, or alternatively, evaluate the external network identifiers by identifying an external network identifier that is already mapped to, or paired with, the internal network identifier. The network device may select an external network identifier, of the plurality of external network identifiers, based on the evaluation and establish the connection requested by the local device using the internal network identifier and the external network identifier. | 11-27-2014 |
20140359137 | METHOD, APPARATUS, NAME SERVER AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING FCOE COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for establishing an FCoE communication connection and a name server. According to a WWN world wide name identifier of a target to be accessed, a destination MAC address used to access the target to be accessed is acquired. According to the destination MAC address, a login operation is performed for the target to be accessed, to establish an FCoE fiber channel over Ethernet communication connection, so that an FCoE initiator may directly establish a communication connection with an FCoE target, thereby reducing data transmission delay and lightening the processing load of an original FCoE forwarder. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359138 | Communication System Having User Selectable Features - A communication system comprising a server capable of establishing telephone communications between at least two users of a communication network and transcribe audio and/or voice communication signals of either or both users of a telephone call established by the server and the transcription is done in accordance with user selectable feature information entered by the users during a registration procedure to the communication system at a website residing in a registration server in communication with the communication system. The communication system may be part of the PSTN or the Internet or both. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359139 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING ACTIVE COMMUNICATION SESSION STREAMS BETWEEN DEVICES - Methods and system for routing first communication session data between a first device and at least one participant device via a first communication session are provided herein. In some embodiments, a method for routing first communication session data between a first device and at least one participant device includes receiving a request to establish a second communication session with at least one discovered extension device proximate to the first device, routing at least a portion of the communication session data to the discovered extension device via the second communication session and synchronizing the communication session data routed via the first communication session, and the at least a portion of the communication session data routed via the second communication session. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359140 | REAL-TIME PLACESHIFTING OF MEDIA CONTENT TO PAIRED DEVICES - Methods, devices, and systems are provided for placeshifting a media program. An exemplary method involves a media device storing identification information for a client device coupled to a network and receiving a request to transfer a media program available for presentation on a primary display device in a first format via the media device. In response to the request, a peer-to-peer communication session with the client device over the network is established using the identification information and an encoded content stream corresponding to the media program is transferred to the client device via the peer-to-peer communication session. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359141 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM FOR DATA COMMUNICATION USING A CALL CONTROL SERVER - There is provided a multifunction peripheral (MFP) configured to perform data communication using a session initiation protocol (SIP) server, which includes a main controller and a sub controller. The sub controller performs a | 12-04-2014 |
20140359142 | PROCESSOR ALLOCATION FOR MULTI-CORE ARCHITECTURES - Methods, computing devices, and computer readable storage media for testing network connections are disclosed. A first processor of a plurality of processors may define a new TCP connection to be opened. The first processor may apply a hash function to determine a second processor of the plurality of processors to open the new TCP connection. The first processor may provide data defining the new TCP connection to the second processor. The second processor may open the new TCP connection in accordance with the data provided by the first processor. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359143 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SHARED CONNECTIVITY - An approach is provided for providing shared path connectivity among devices. A connection sharing platform determines to specify at least one group of devices, the at least one group including at least a first path to establish a network connection and a second path to establish a local connection among the devices. The connection sharing platform also determines to cause at least in part an activation of one or more of the devices to establish the network connection, wherein one or more unactivated devices share the network connection over the local connection. | 12-04-2014 |
20140365669 | Device and Method for Associating with WiFi Networks - A method automatically connects a device to a WiFi network. The method includes determining WiFi networks that are available for a connection thereto. The method includes categorizing each of the WiFi networks as a private WiFi network or a public WiFi network in which the private WiFi network utilizes a first association process while the public WiFi network utilizes a second association process. The method includes executing a first automatic connection process using the first association process until a successful connection is established to one of the private WiFi networks based upon a first prioritized list. The method includes executing a second automatic connection process until a successful connection is established to one of the public WiFi networks based upon a second prioritized list when the first automatic connection process to the private wireless networks is unsuccessful. | 12-11-2014 |
20140365670 | DISTRIBUTED DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM, DISTRIBUTED DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND WIRELESS TERMINAL POINT THEREOF - A distributed data processing system, a distributed data processing method and a wireless terminal point thereof are disclosed, where the distributed data process system includes a first access controller, a plurality of second access controllers and a wireless terminal point (WTP). When receiving a list containing address information of the second access controllers from the first access controller, the WTP selects one of the second access controllers to serve as a designated second access controller and connects the designated second access controller. | 12-11-2014 |
20140365671 | COMPUTING SYSTEM WITH CONTROL MECHANISM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - An computing system includes: a communication unit configured to receive a discovery request, including a client presence factor, having a scan pattern for discovering a target device; a control unit, coupled to the communication unit, configured to: determine a target device coordinate based on the discovery request for identifying a client device relative to the target device, determine a device connectivity based on the target device coordinate, the client presence factor, or a combination thereof for establishing a backhaul communication between the client device and the target device, and a user interface, coupled to the control unit, configured to present a device information based on a trust level for displaying the device information of the client device having the device connectivity of connected with the target device. | 12-11-2014 |
20140365672 | PROVIDING DIFFERENTIATED NETWORK SERVICES AND PRIORITIES TO VPN ROUTERS/CLIENTS - In one embodiment, a first network device receives a priority message from a second network device, wherein the priority message conforms to a connection establishment protocol and indicates a priority associated with the second network device. The first network device obtains the priority from the priority message and stores the priority. The first network device allocates resources for at least one of control or data plane processing to the second network device in accordance with the priority. | 12-11-2014 |
20140379931 | WEBRTC DATA CHANNEL FACILITATING IMS SUPPORT OF RCS FEATURES - A gateway may be configured to establish a first data connection between the gateway device and a client device. The first data connection may be based on a Web Real-Time Communication application programming interface. The gateway may establish a second data connection between the gateway device and an Internet Protocol (“IP”) Multimedia Subsystem (“IMS”) core; and facilitate communications, that are based on a Rich Communication Services (“RCS”) standard, between the client device and the IMS core. Facilitating the communications may include outputting communications, that are based on communications received from the client device via the first data connection, to the IMS core via the second data connection, and outputting communications, that are based on communications received from the IMS core via the second data connection, to the client device via the first data connection. | 12-25-2014 |
20140379932 | SETTING UP COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A WEB APPLICATION AND A TERMINAL - A method and apparatus are provided for setting up a communications session between an instance of a web application installed in a terminal and a called entity. The method includes sending a first request for setting up a communications session between the application instance and the called entity, the first request being formulated in a first protocol; receiving a response indicating that it is not possible to route the first request, and sending a second request for setting up the communications session formulated in a second protocol. | 12-25-2014 |
20150019744 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING INSTANCES OF A GAME - Disclosed is a computer-implemented method of (and system for) operating instances of a game having a plurality of game positions that can be occupied by players, such as a poker-type game. The method comprises assigning a player a plurality of weights relating to game positions, where each weight indicates a bias towards placement of the player at a game position. When a player has played in a first game at a given position, the weights are updated to indicate an altered bias towards placement at each position. The player is then assigned to a second game based on the updated weights. | 01-15-2015 |
20150019745 | CONNECTION DISTRIBUTION WITHIN A CONNECTIONAL PARALLELISM ARCHITECTURE - Example embodiments provide various techniques for distributing connections within a connectional parallelism architecture. In one embodiment, a method is provided where resource utilizations of connection groups are measured. Here, each connection group is assigned to one of multiple processors. A probability distribution is accessed that maps probabilities assigned to relative resource utilizations. A relative resource utilization of one of the connection groups is determined based on a resource utilization of the one connection group relative to other resource utilizations of other connection groups. A probability from the probability distribution is identified based on the determined relative resource utilization, and based on the identified probability, a connection is assigned to this connection group for execution by one of the processors assigned to this connection group. | 01-15-2015 |
20150026351 | ONLINE SESSION TRANSFER - Embodiments for transferring online account sessions are included in systems that enable a user to transfer control of an account session from a first mobile device to a second mobile device and determine whether or not the second mobile device has control of the account session based on transmission data received from the first mobile device or second mobile device. The systems receive transaction data, user input, or device tracking data from the first device or second device, and use the data to process online activities. | 01-22-2015 |
20150032898 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A VIRTUAL COMMUNITY NETWORK CONNECTION AND A SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING SAID METHOD - The present invention discloses a method for establishing a virtual community network connection and a system for implementing said method. A method for establishing a virtual community network connection according to the present invention is for use with a router in a network communication system and includes the steps of: | 01-29-2015 |
20150039772 | SUPL SESSION PERSISTENCE ACROSS POWER CYCLES - A method for managing a secure user plane location (SUPL)-enabled terminal (SET) to resume a SUPL trigger session after an interruption in the SUPL trigger session is described. The method may include initially configuring the SET for storing, periodically, a set of parameters defining a state of the SUPL trigger session and trigger parameters in a non-volatile storage of the SET, reading, after the interruption of the SUPL trigger session, the parameters defining a state of the SUPL trigger session and the trigger parameters from the non-volatile storage of the SET. The parameters defining a state of the SUPL trigger session and trigger session parameters stored in the non-volatile memory may then be used for restoring the SUPL trigger session. | 02-05-2015 |
20150039773 | Handling Session Initiation Protocol Messages in a Wireless Telecommunications Device - A wireless telecommunications device configured to use Session Initiation Protocol in communication with other telecommunications devices comprises a modem subsystem ( | 02-05-2015 |
20150046597 | SPATIAL SECURITY IN A SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) CONFERENCE - In a method for securing a session initiation protocol (SIP) conference session, first location information of a SIP conference session invitee attempting to connect to a SIP conference session is received. The computer determines that the received first location information at least partially matches a location requirement assigned to the invitee attempting to connect to the SIP conference session. The computer causes the invitee to be connected to the SIP conference session. | 02-12-2015 |
20150052255 | MINIMIZING COVERAGE HOLES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Access point functionality of a network device may be disabled, resulting in a coverage hole in a communication network and affecting performance of a client device. Various techniques can be implemented for detecting and minimizing coverage holes. In one embodiment, the network device can selectively establish a communication link with the client device depending on whether the client device is in a coverage hole and depending on whether the client device can detect another access point in the communication network. In some embodiments, the client device can determine that it is in a coverage hole in response to detecting a reserved SSID and can accordingly notify a central coordinator of the communication network. In some embodiments, the central coordinator can identify the network device (with disabled access point functionality) that can eliminate the coverage hole and can cause the network device to enable its access point functionality. | 02-19-2015 |
20150052256 | TRANSMISSION OF NETWORK MANAGEMENT DATA OVER AN EXTENSIBLE SCRIPTING FILE FORMAT - Network management requests may be transmitted in JSON messages over a WebSocket connection to a network device. The network device may process the request and generate a response. The response may be transmitted back over the WebSocket connection in a series of partial response messages. A method for processing network management requests includes receiving data for transmission, packaging the data as a JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) payload, opening a WebSocket connection, and transmitting the JSON payload over a network through the WebSocket connection. | 02-19-2015 |
20150052257 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA STREAMS VIA A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus that enable a community of devices having differing underlying protocols to stream media data such as video or audio data. In one exemplary embodiment, this invention enables IEEE 1394-compliant (“FireWire” enabled) devices to communicate across an Ethernet infrastructure, such as one enabled by the Ethernet AVB Standard(s). This enhances connectivity, and also supports obviating one or more physical ports within the device(s). In another embodiment, or more wireless transports are utilized. | 02-19-2015 |
20150058491 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An information processing apparatus includes a communication unit, a storage unit, and a control unit. The storage unit is configured to store device information related to a device capable of being communicated with by the communication unit and an identifier that identifies the device information for each finding of the device with the device information and the identifier associated with each other. The device information being generated each time the device is found. The control unit is configured to invalidate the device information in a case where a state is detected in which communication with the device is incapable of being performed via a predetermined communication channel and in a case where the identifier is detected to be not changed from when being stored. | 02-26-2015 |
20150067175 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH TRANSPORT LINK MECHANISM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - A method of operation of a communication system includes: adapting an application programming interface (API) for communicating with an application using a control unit; identifying a detection signal for identifying a physical transport for communication with the application through the application programming interface (API); arbitrating a physical transport protocol for the physical transport with the application programming interface (API); and connecting a transport wrapper for the transport protocol with the application programming interface (API) for communicating with the physical transport. | 03-05-2015 |
20150067176 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING MACHINE-TO-MACHINE SENSOR DATA - An approach is described for registering a plurality of gateway devices to a sensor platform operated by a service provider, detecting at the gateway devices, one or more sensors from a personal area network of a subscriber, determining corresponding identifiers of the sensors, collecting data from the sensors over one or more coordinated personal area networks, and designating each of a plurality of agents to process the collected data for local analysis and acting on this analysis, wherein the agents are configured to communicate with other agents. | 03-05-2015 |
20150067177 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - An information processing apparatus of the present disclosure includes: a processor; a network interface that establishes a connection to a network and a connection to a client terminal; and a storage unit, wherein the processor is capable of executing a tethering function to control communication between the network and the client terminal through the network interface, the storage unit stores network information of the network, to which the information processing apparatus connects, and ON/OFF information of the tethering function in association with the network information, and the processor sets the tethering function based on the ON/OFF information of the tethering function when the network interface connects to the network. | 03-05-2015 |
20150067178 | DATA PROCESSING - Maintaining a list of communication session servers which are currently in an active state and which are currently in a failed state, and which are currently responsible for providing communication services to which subscribers. Receiving a query in relation to a communication session involving a subscriber. In response to the list indicating that a communication session server which is currently responsible for providing communication services to the subscriber currently has an active state, responding to the query with an identifier for the communication session server. In response to the list indicating that the communication session server currently has a failed state, conducting a responsibility transfer operation to transfer responsibility for providing communication services to the subscriber from the communication session server to a different communication session server and responding to the query with an identifier for the different communication session server. | 03-05-2015 |
20150067179 | APPLICATION AND/OR SERVER STABILITY IN SIGNALING OPTIMIZATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK FOR TRAFFIC UTILIZING PROPRIETARY AND NON-PROPRIETARY PROTOCOLS - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for signaling optimization in a wireless network utilizing proprietary and non-proprietary protocols. A first connection is established between an application on a mobile device and a local proxy on the mobile device, a second connection is established between the local proxy and a proxy server not located on the mobile device, and a third connection is established between the proxy server and a content server. A byte stream between client and server is communicated between the client and the server via the first, second, and third connections. The mobile device performs signaling optimization to optimize traffic over the second connection. | 03-05-2015 |
20150067180 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CO-BROWSING IN A B2C2C CO-BROWSE ARCHITECTURE THROUGH CO-BROWSING FUNCTIONALITY EMBEDDED IN CONTENT OF A CONTENT PROVIDER AS INITIATED BY A HOST TO A CO-BROWSE SESSION - A method for co-browsing includes establishing a communication session between a first web browser and a content provider to deliver content, wherein the content comprises embedded co-browsing functionality. A request is received for activating the co-browsing functionality. A second communication session is established between the web browser of a first device and a co-browse communication server to initiate a co-browse session, wherein the first device acts as a host. A third communication session is established between a second web browser and the co-browse communication server to join the second web browser into the co-browse session based on the co-browse session identifier. The co-browse session is established between the first web browser as host and the second web browser of said second device as guest, such that the content at the first web browser is delivered to the second web browser via the co-browse communication sever over the co-browse session. | 03-05-2015 |
20150067181 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTI-DOMAIN CO-BROWSING IN A C2C CO-BROWSE ARCHITECTURE THROUGH CO-BROWSING FUNCTIONALITY PROVIDED IN A BROWSER EXTENSION ON A HOST - A method for co-browsing, including establishing a first communication session between a first web browser of first device and a first content provider over a network to deliver content. A co-browse extension is accessed on the first web browser to enable multi-domain co-browsing functionality on the first web browser. A second communication session is established between the first web browser and a co-browse communication server to initiate and join the first web browser in a co-browse session, wherein the session comprises a co-browse session identifier, wherein the first device acts as a host. A third communication session is established between a second web browser of a second device and the co-browse communication server to join the second web browser into the co-browse session, such that content at the first web browser is delivered to the second web browser of the second device via the co-browse communication server. | 03-05-2015 |
20150074283 | METHOD FOR SELECTING A COMMUNICATION LINK - A session admission process is provided which identifies the weakest link in a route between a first node and a second node and determines if the route is able to cope if the session is admitted. The suitability of a link is determined on the basis of: historical link performance; the predicted future performance of the link; and the predicted future demands on the link from other sessions supported by that link | 03-12-2015 |
20150074284 | PROVIDING PUSH TO ALL (PTA) SERVICE - A system and method of providing a Push To All (PTA) service enables a PTA service terminal having limited resources to efficiently perform a multi session, while performing a PTA service such as Push To Talk (PTT), Push To Video (PTV) or Message Session Relay Protocol (MSRP) with a second PTA terminal via an already established session, by rejecting another session requested by a third terminal upon a service type of the session being the same as a service type of the already established session, and by accepting the session upon the service type of the session being different from the already established session. | 03-12-2015 |
20150081918 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION PLATFORM METADATA - A system and method that includes executing communication processes in an application platform, which comprises on behalf of outside entities, negotiating communications between a set of internal resources and at least one external resource using at least a first communication protocol and a second protocol; capturing internal log information during execution of the application platform; receiving a request to access log information by an outside entity; synthesizing the internal log information of the first protocol and at least a second protocol into a unified communication report; and transmitting the unified communication report. | 03-19-2015 |
20150081919 | CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK CONNECTION OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A control system and method for controlling connections to networks includes a first electronic device and a second electronic device. The first electronic device used by a student or child includes a request unit and a connection control unit, the second electronic device which is used by a responsible person includes an answer unit. The request unit issues a request signal and sends the request signal to the second electronic device. The answer unit issues an answer signal and sends the answer signal to the first electronic device. The connection control unit controls the first electronic device to enable a connection to a network or to not enable a connection to a network, according to the answer signal. | 03-19-2015 |
20150081920 | ENHANCED CONTENT CONSUMPTION - Enhanced content consumption is provided by establishing a pairing between two computing devices, wherein at least one of the two computing devices provides a primary consumption experience of a digital content item, so that a secondary consumption experience can be provided via operation of at least one of the two computing devices. The method further comprises presenting, using at least one of the two computing devices, the digital content item for consumption by a user. The method further comprises performing one or more supplemental consumption functions with the other of the two computing devices. | 03-19-2015 |
20150089071 | MANAGING MID-DIALOG SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) MESSAGES - Processing mid-dialog SIP messages by receiving a mid-dialog SIP message from a SIP user agent client, creating a new SIP session, associating the new SIP session with the mid-dialog SIP message, identifying an application that is associated with the mid-dialog SIP message, providing to the application the mid-dialog SIP message in the context of the new SIP session, receiving an acknowledgement from the application that the application will accept the mid-dialog SIP message, and responsive to receiving the acknowledgement, providing to the application the mid-dialog SIP message in the context of the new SIP session. | 03-26-2015 |
20150095501 | NETWORK DISCOVERY AND CONNECTION USING DEVICE ADDRESSES NOT CORRELATED TO A DEVICE - To prevent tracking as it roams through a network of wireless access points (WAPs), a wireless device changes the MAC address. The device does this by randomizing some or all of the bits in the MAC address or selecting the MAC address from a group of MAC addresses assigned to the device by the device manufacturer. Furthermore, in order to further confuse tracking and make analytics not useful, a device can share MAC addresses with other devices, and check to make sure that a shared MAC address is not actively being used before selecting and using it. | 04-02-2015 |
20150095502 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING A FIRST HOST AND A SECOND HOST WITHIN AT LEAST ONE COMMUNICATION NETWORK THROUGH A RELAY MODULE, CORRESPONDING RELAY MODULE - The invention concerns a relay module comprising a capturing module for intercepting a first connection establishment request sent by a first host; a communication module configured for sending a second connection establishment request to establish an initial auxiliary connection between the relay module and a second host and for receiving, from said second host, a first acknowledgment response and a context discovery unit configured for activating:
| 04-02-2015 |
20150095503 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING TO WEB SERVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to an embodiment, a web server connecting method of a terminal includes receiving an HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) request for at least one domain, determining whether the domain supports an HTTP proxy service, and if the domain supports the HTTP proxy service, transmitting the HTTP request to an HTTP proxy through a pre-established HTTP proxy connection. In another embodiment, the terminal using the method is provided. In other embodiments, the HTTP proxy for offering the HTTP proxy service to the terminal and a web server connecting method of the HTTP proxy are provided. | 04-02-2015 |
20150095504 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING IMS SESSION CONTINUITY TO A USER EQUIPMENT ACROSS A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method and system for providing IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) session continuity to a User Equipment (UE) across a plurality of communication networks is provided. The UE traverses from a first communication network to a second communication network. A public user identity associated with a private user identity of the UE is registered with the first communication network by using a first address. The method includes generating ( | 04-02-2015 |
20150100699 | GRAPHIC SHARING - A graphics provider terminal samples, through a graphical interface provided by a Canvas specification, a graphic generated by a web browser of the graphics provider terminal based on the Canvas specification to obtain graphics information according to a preset sampling rate. The graphics provider terminal packs the graphics information to obtain a message packet based on a preset graphics sharing agreement; and sends the message packet to a graphics exchange server through a persistent connection between the graphics provider terminal and the graphics exchange server. The graphics exchange server unpacks the message packet to obtain the graphics information and sends the graphics information to a graphics receiver terminal through a persistent connection between the graphics receiver terminal and the graphics exchange server. | 04-09-2015 |
20150106526 | PROVISIONING A NETWORK FOR NETWORK TRAFFIC - A network system comprising a software-defined network (SDN) controller and an application program interface (API) communicatively coupled to an application and the SDN controller in which data is provided from the API to the SDN controller, the data comprising information regarding the application session characteristics associated with a new session to be initiated on the network. A method of provisioning a network for network traffic comprising receiving data at a software-defined network (SDN) controller from an application program interface (API) describing application information associated with a session to be initiated on the network from an end-point device associated with a number of nodes in the network, and providing the API with real-time data describing available bandwidth on the network that the application may use. | 04-16-2015 |
20150106527 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO CORRELATE LOCAL MEDIA URIs BETWEEN WEB BROWSERS - Various disclosed embodiments include methods and systems for correlating local media uniform resource identifiers (URIs) between a first web browser of a first user device and a second web browser of a second user device. The method comprises establishing a session between the first web browser, the second web browser, and a server. The method comprises performing an action related to a first URI on the first web browser. The method comprises encoding the performed action as a resource description framework (RDF) graph including the first URI and sending the RDF graph to the server. The method comprises translating the received RDF graph to a second RDF graph including a second URI based on a predicate stored in the server. The method comprises sending the second RDF graph to the second browser. | 04-16-2015 |
20150113151 | SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING SYSTEMS AND METHODS VIA A PATH COMPUTATION AND CONTROL ELEMENT - Software Defined Networking systems and methods are described via a Path Computation and Control Element (PCCE) that is based in part on a Path Computation Element (PCE). A common, simple interface is designed based on an existing PCE interface that allows a centralized entity (i.e., a Path Computation and Control Element or PCCE) to control the initiation of new connections or tunnels and by default to manage the state of these connections or tunnels once established. In particular, the systems and methods create an extension to the PCE architecture to allow a centralized application or applications to control the creation, rerouting and deletion of connections within a network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150120943 | Secure mobile access to resources within a private network - A technique is disclosed that provides a secure end-to-end connection between a mobile station in a public network and a resource server in a private network. First, a virtual private network (VPN) connection is established by the resource server within the private network, to a VPN/socket secure (SOCKS) proxy in the public network. Subsequently, the SOCKS proxy receives an access request from the mobile station and, in response, sets up a Hypertext Transport Protocol Secure (HTTPS) connection between the resource server and mobile station. Then, a reverse proxy service operating at the resource server retrieves data packets from a resource device, such as a webcam, and encrypts and pushes the packets to the mobile station. | 04-30-2015 |
20150120944 | SIP ANCHOR POINTS TO POPULATE COMMON COMMUNICATION LOGS - The concept of a centralized communication log is provided. Anchor points, and specifically Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) anchor points, serve as a media and call control point that is established on a per-user basis which can then be leveraged by a communication log application. Such a communication log application is able to determine accurate and real-time communicant information for a communication session and populate a centralized communication log with the same. Such a communication log is, therefore, accurate with respect to multiple users in a system, highly available, and scaled horizontally. | 04-30-2015 |
20150127835 | System, Device and Method for Configuring a Connection in a Machine to Machine Environment - The invention relates to a method for configuring a connection between a second device ( | 05-07-2015 |
20150127836 | METHOD FOR OPERATING CLOUD SERVER DEVICE, METHOD FOR OPERATING CLIENT DEVICE, AND CLIENT DEVICE - An operation method of a first client device is provided. The client device transmits device information to a cloud server device. The client device receives an operational state of a second client device from the cloud server device. The client device establishes a logical session with the second client device based on the operational state. The client device transmits a first event through the logical session. The first event is transmitted to the second client, preferentially over a second event which does not go through any logical session. | 05-07-2015 |
20150127837 | RELAY APPARATUS AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A relay apparatus for transferring data between a terminal on which an application runs and a server, the relay apparatus including, a TCP management module for monitoring a packet to be transmitted and received by using TCP connection established between the terminal and the server; a determination module for analyzing a request packet and determining whether or not to switch a communication route for transmitting the request packet; a request transmission module for establishing new TCP connection on a new communication route and transmitting the request packet to the server; and a data relay module for transferring a data storage packet to the terminal by using the new TCP connection. | 05-07-2015 |
20150127838 | Page Operation Processing Method and Apparatus, and Terminal - A page operation processing method and apparatus, and a terminal. The method includes acquiring, by a terminal device, a uniform resource locator (URL) corresponding to a to-be-accessed resource; detecting, by the terminal device, whether a stored domain name includes a domain name corresponding to the URL; and if the stored domain name includes the domain name corresponding to the URL, triggering, by the terminal device, an application client corresponding to the domain name of the URL to acquire and display an application client page corresponding to the URL. The page operation processing method and apparatus, and the terminal provided in the embodiments of the present invention can reduce consumption of network traffic and facilitate user operations and page browsing, thereby improving user experience. | 05-07-2015 |
20150134833 | COMMUNICATION SERVICE OPERATING METHOD AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE SUPPORTING THE SAME - A main electronic device includes a communication module configured to establish a communication channel based on a first communication network. The main electronic device also includes a first network communication module configured to establish a network communication channel based on a second communication network. The main electronic device further includes a main control unit configured to control an indirect mode execution that controls the transmission of data through the communication module to an auxiliary electronic device connected through the first network communication module in correspondence to a predetermined mode, or configured to control indirect mode execution that controls the transmission of data through the communication module the auxiliary electronic device via the first network communication module. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134834 | SESSION HANDLING BASED ON SHARED SESSION INFORMATION - A connection manager and worker nodes of an application server are both capable to access and control a shared memory session table. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134835 | TRANSFERRING FILES - Systems and techniques for transferring one or more files by connecting to a communications system host; sending, to a client connected to the communications system host, a request to transfer one or more files; when a client permits access to the one or more files, establishing a direct socket connection from the client and bypassing the communications system host; and initiating the transfer of the one or more files from the client over the direct socket connection. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134836 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERACTIVE SESSION PROVISION - Systems and methods applicable, for instance, in interactive session provision. One or more nodes and/or other computers might, for example, provide to one or more other nodes and/or other computers the ability to employ certain software for an interactive session. A node and/or other computer providing the ability might, for instance, provide to a node and/or other computer receiving the ability software to be used in the interactive session, and/or one or more appropriate keys. A node and/or other computer that has received the ability might, for example, lose the ability with interactive session termination. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134837 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A random access procedure control method and apparatus is provided for controlling a random access procedure efficiently in a mobile communication system supporting carrier aggregation. The method for controlling random access procedure of a terminal in a wireless communication system having a primary cell and at least one secondary cell includes initiating a random access procedure in the primary cell and the at least one secondary cells, detecting a random access failure of a terminal performing the random access procedure, determining whether the random access failure is detected in the primary cell or the at least one secondary cell, and determining whether to continue the random access procedure according to a result of the determining of whether the random access failure is detected. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134838 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A random access procedure control method and apparatus is provided for controlling a random access procedure efficiently in a mobile communication system supporting carrier aggregation. The method for controlling random access procedure of a terminal in a wireless communication system having a primary cell and at least one secondary cell includes initiating a random access procedure in the primary cell and the at least one secondary cells, detecting a random access failure of a terminal performing the random access procedure, determining whether the random access failure is detected in the primary cell or the at least one secondary cell, and determining whether to continue the random access procedure according to a result of the determining of whether the random access failure is detected. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134839 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDUCING CONNECTIONS TO A DATABASE - A system automatically maintains a plurality of client connections associated with a plurality of clients, the plurality of client connections including active and idle connections. A first server receives a request from a client of the plurality of clients to access a second server of a plurality of second servers communicatively coupled to the first server, the plurality of second servers having varying communication protocols. The first server then identifies a first communication protocol associated with the second server and activating a link between the first server and the second server using the first communication protocol. | 05-14-2015 |
20150142980 | Context-Based Selection of Instruction Sets for Connecting Through Captive Portals - Embodiments personalize a set of network access points (NAPs) acting as captive portals for each user and/or user device. A cloud service, or the user device, accesses context describing the user device. The context identifies at least one NAP, and may include accounting data. One of the NAP is selected for connection based on the context, and an instruction set associated with the selected NAP is provided for replay by the user device to connect through the NAP. In some embodiments, instructions within the instruction set are also personalized to the user and/or user device based on the context. | 05-21-2015 |
20150142981 | SWITCHING OF CONNECTION PROTOCOL - Methods and systems are provided for switching protocols at a local client without having to delete the existing client account and without having to create a new client account that specifies the new protocol. The client an application executing on the client is configured with the capability to dynamically switch between protocols. For example, the client or an application executing on the client may employ a remote procedure call (RPC) protocol and may dynamically switch to a hypertext transfer (HTTP) protocol or vice versa upon request of the server. | 05-21-2015 |
20150142982 | PRESERVATION OF CONNECTION SESSION - Methods and systems are provided for connecting to a previously-created server session after a period of disconnection. The client is configured with the capability to maintain or establish a persistent session across a period of disconnection. | 05-21-2015 |
20150142983 | CLOUD SERVICES IN MOBILE HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for cloud services. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include receiving, at a selector ( | 05-21-2015 |
20150149643 | DYNAMIC POLICY BASED DATA SESSION MIGRATION MECHANISM IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Mitigating service interruptions within a mobile core network by dynamically managing communication sessions using a policy based network mechanism is presented herein. A method can include receiving policy information associated with redirection of an active communication session from a first device to a second device; receiving status information representing a characteristic of the active communication session; and in response to determining, based on the status information, that the characteristic satisfies a defined condition of the policy information, redirecting the active communication session from the first device to the second device. In an example, the method can further include redirecting the established communication session from the source device to the destination device in response to determining, based on the data session migration policy, that the established communication session is not associated with a dedicated bearer communication channel. | 05-28-2015 |
20150149644 | METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING PEER TO PEER SERVICE BY USING CONTACTS INFORMATION - A method of performing a Peer to Peer (P2P) service with at least one second terminal by a first terminal is provided. The method includes transmitting contact information of the first terminal to the at least one second terminals; receiving contact information of the at least one second terminals from the at least one second terminal; receiving information on an application supporting the P2P service from the at least one second terminal; displaying identification information of the at least one second terminal and first identification information of the application by using the contact information of the at least one second terminal and the information on the application; and performing the P2P service with the at least one second terminal through the application. | 05-28-2015 |
20150149645 | Integrating Co-Browsing with Other Forms of Information Sharing - A co-browse service uses JavaScript to allow a web page shown in a user's browser to be viewed remotely. Updates to the web page are rendered into HTML and forwarded on the co-browse session. Aspects of the web page that should not be visible are specified in a list of masked elements which prevents the JavaScript from transmitting the content of those elements on the co-browse session. A person viewing the web page at the remote location can select objects to have those objects highlighted within the user's browser. Likewise the person viewing the web page may manipulate the objects by selecting objects and entering information into the objects. Updates to the web page are collected and aggregated such that only the most recent updates are forwarded on the co-browse session. Updates that don't affect the DOM, such as hover state, are also transmitted on the session. | 05-28-2015 |
20150149646 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR MAINTAINING A COMMUNICATION SESSION DURING A NETWORK TRANSITION - Provided are a device and method for maintaining a communication session during a network transition. In one example, the method includes monitoring, by a client, a connection with a first network to determine whether a signal strength of the connection falls below a threshold value. The client establishes a connection with a second network if the signal strength of the connection with the first network falls below the threshold value. Establishing the connection with the second network includes obtaining an address and port assignment corresponding to the client from the second network. The client uses the obtained address and port assignment to maintain a communication session during the changeover from the first network to the second network. | 05-28-2015 |
20150295957 | DATA TRANSMITTING DEVICE, DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - According to one embodiment, a data transmitting device communicates with a plurality of other communication devices through a network. The data transmitting device includes a session manager and a communication processor. The session manager sequentially and cyclically selects a plurality of sessions relevant to the other communication devices. The communication processor performs a transmitting process of data to the other communication device relevant to the session selected by the session manager in each time each of the sessions is selected so as to suppress variations in amounts of transmitted data among the sessions with respect to an amount of data transmitted per one transmitting process. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295958 | ELECTRONIC UNIT, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING TERMINAL AND METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - The present invention relates to electronic units, communication systems and methods, information processing terminals and methods, and information processing apparatuses and methods which allow easy and quick communications. When a link pin 21A is inserted into a VCR 3, the VCR 3 reads the pin ID stored in the RF tag of the link pin 21A, and reports the pin ID and the address to a management server 1. When the management server 1 has already obtained the pin ID of a link pin 21B read by a television receiver 5, the management server 1 determines whether the group ID included in the pin ID reported by the VCR 3 is the same as the group ID included in the pin ID reported by the television receiver 5. When the management server 1 determines that they are the same, the management server 1 connects the VCR 3 to the television receiver 5. The present invention can be applied to various types of information processing apparatuses connected to a network. | 10-15-2015 |
20150304362 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An information processing system includes a first information processing apparatus used as a connection requester, and a second information processing apparatus used as a connection destination. The first information processing apparatus includes a connection destination detector to detect the second information processing apparatus by transmitting a response request, a display controller to selectively display a plurality of connection information input screens on a display of the first information processing apparatus depending on a condition of a network that the first information processing apparatus belongs, and a network that the second information processing apparatus belongs, in which the connection information input screens are useable for inputting information required for communication connection with the second information processing apparatus, and a connection processing unit to perform communication connection with the second information processing apparatus by using information input to one or more of the plurality of connection information input screens. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304363 | HIDDEN IDENTIFIERS FOR DEMULTIPLEXING AND RESOLUTION ARCHITECTURE - A new and useful approach to binding network socket API using hidden identifiers, referred to by the acronym HIDRA (Hidden Identifiers for De-multiplexing and Resolution Architecture). HIDRA is the first solution that takes advantage of “hidden” identifiers to be used in hosts. HIDRA has three main components that integrate together: a protocol-agnostic API and stack; upgraded name-resolution and service-discovery functions; and transport-layer modifications. The hidden identifiers are de-multiplexed into open identifiers in lower protocol layers and open identifiers are resolved back into hidden identifiers in lower protocol layers for use by the application. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304365 | SYSTEM, METHOD, NETWORK ENTITY AND DEVICE FOR CONNECTING A DEVICE TO A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The system includes a device of a plurality of devices and a network entity for connecting the device to a communications network. The device is arranged for attempting to access the network while providing an identification of the device to the network entity. The network entity is arranged for receiving the access attempt from the device, and determining the identification of the device. The network entity determines an identification of a subscription associated with the device from a first database of the system. The network determines whether the identified subscription has the device associated therewith in a second database. The network entity allows the device to connect to the network entity or prevents the device from connecting to the communications network depending on the above determinations. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304426 | METHOD OF MANAGING AN APPLICATION IN A SECURE ELEMENT - The invention is a method of managing an application embedded in a secure element which is able to communicate with another device through a HTTP session. The application has previously registered for being triggered when a preset event will occur into the secure element. The triggering of the application is blocked as a HTTP session is in progress between the secure element and the device when the preset event occurs. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304428 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DATA ACCESS - The disclosed is a method and device for accessing data. In the method, a Bearer Independent Protocol (BIP) sends a data access instruction to a Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) through a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI); and the BIP gateway receives the data corresponding to the data access instruction from the UICC through the SPI. According to the technical scheme provided by the disclosure, access speed is improved for the user and large data transmission is implemented for the web server in the UICC. | 10-22-2015 |
20150319791 | DEVICE FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION-BASED UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS SERVICE AND ASSOCIATED CONNECTION MANAGEMENT METHOD - Disclosed is a method of managing a connection with a device for a wireless communication-based Wireless universal Serial Bus (WSB) service in a host, including controlling to create an initial channel to connect to a target device for a WSB service, considering a device class of the target device, and configured to create a new channel to substitute for the initial channel considering a particular service, at a user's request, to provide the particular service through association with the target device. | 11-05-2015 |
20150326672 | CONNECTING PUBLIC CLOUD WITH PRIVATE NETWORK RESOURCES - The automatic provisioning of a connection between a public cloud and an on-premises resource in a private network. This allows a connection to be more easily made when an application in the public cloud is to access that on-premises resource in the private network. The automatic provisioning is initiated upon determining that an application running in the public cloud is to access the on-premises resource. The provisioning occurs by identifying a bridging infrastructure that provides access to the on-premises resource. Credentials are then accessed for later use in connecting to the bridging infrastructure. Application-specific credentials are securely provided to the application. The application-specific credentials are usable by an agent on the public cloud to connect to the identified bridging infrastructure. A configuration packages is then created that includes resource-specific credentials, the identity of the on-premises resource and an executable. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327304 | SENSOR BASED CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL OF NETWORK DEVICES - A mobile device, such as a smartphone or a tablet computer, can execute functionality for configuring a network device in a communication network and for subsequently controlling the operation of the network device with little manual input. The mobile device can detect sensor information from a network device. The mobile device can determine device configuration information based, at least in part, on decoding the sensor information. The mobile device can provide the device configuration information to an access point of a network. The mobile device can receive communication link information from the access point. The mobile device can provide the communication link information to the network device. The mobile device can receive a message indicating a communication link between the network device and the access point is established. | 11-12-2015 |
20150334190 | Cloud Side Application - Cloud Side Application (CSA) is an environment that allows programmers to develop, to host and to run solutions on the server side; CSA runs the solution. | 11-19-2015 |
20150341442 | COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - Described herein is a server for managing a communication system including a plurality of terminals. The server includes circuitry configured to in response to an initiation request from an initiating terminal, generate a session ID and allocate a relay device, update the session management database based on the generated session ID and allocated relay device, transmit information identifying the generated session ID and the allocated relay device to the initiating terminal and destination terminals identified by the requesting terminal, establish a content data session between the requesting terminal and the one or more destination terminals, designate an owner terminal and one or more participating terminals for the content data session from the requesting terminal and the destination terminals based on information in a terminal management database, and instruct transmission of sound permission instructions to the owner terminal and sound restriction instructions to the one or more participating terminals. | 11-26-2015 |
20150350256 | Device and Method for Virtual Private Network Connection Establishment - A method, client device and non-transitory computer readable storage medium for connecting to a virtual private network (VPN). A request to connect to a destination identified by a hostname is received from an application executed on the client device and a domain name system (DNS) lookup functionality is performed on the hostname, the DNS lookup functionality returning an address. It is then determined whether the returned address is a redirected address, whether a hypertext transmission protocol secure (HTTPS) probe configured for the hostname fails, or whether the returned address matches a cached route in which a transmission control protocol (TCP) connection establishment is unsuccessful. If any of the returned address is a redirected address, the HTTPS probe fails or the returned address matches the cached route and the TCP connection establishment is unsuccessful, the client device is connected to the VPN. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350333 | ENHANCED DISCOVERY FOR AD-HOC MEETINGS - Systems, methods, and software are disclosed herein for enhancing ad-hoc online meetings. A service client, when executed by a computing system, directs the computing system to at least detect an in-room discovery signal, identify a room from the in-room discovery signal, identify a session based on the room associated with the in-room discovery signal, and join the session. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350334 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIATING A HIGH-POWER CONNECTION VIA A LOW-POWER INTERFACE - An apparatus and methods are provided for initiating a network connection between a first device and a second device. While one or more high-power network interfaces of the first device are in a dormant state, the first device communicates with a second device via the first device's low-power network interface. The first device can determine, based on the communication, whether to establish a network connection with the second device via a high-power network interface of the first device. Next, if the first device is to establish the network connection with the second device via the high-power network interface, the device can wake the first high-power network interface and connect to the second device via the first high-power network interface. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350339 | System and Method for Transferring a Call - Described are systems and methods for transferring calls between multiple stations. An exemplary system includes a first station and a second station that establishes a first communication session having a first call identification with the first station. The system further includes a third station and a network device that includes stored data indicating a relationship between the first station and the third station, the network device configured to receive the first call identification from the first station and transmit the first call identification to the third station based on the relationship, wherein the third station is configured to receive the first call identification and send an invite to the second station to replace the first communication session with the first station with a second communication session with the third station, the invite including the first call identification and a second call identification that identifies the second communication session. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358363 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING SESSION BETWEEN DEVICES ON NETWORK INCLUDING MULTIPLE DEVICES - Disclosed is a method for controlling a session between devices on a network including a plurality of devices, including: receiving a session control request message from a control device, wherein the session control request message represents a message for operating a session control between a first device and a second device; transmitting a triggering message for a specific control operation to the first device on the basis of the received session control request message; performing the session control between the first device and the second device by using the triggering message; and receiving a triggering response message from the first device, wherein the triggering response message indicates a result of performing the session control. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358366 | Method and Apparatus for Keeping Alive L2TP Tunnel State - A method and apparatus for keeping alive an L2TP tunnel state are provided, where the method includes: an active device and an opposite-end device establish an L2TP tunnel, the active device transmits to a standby device an interactive L2TP control message between the active device and the opposite-end device, and the active device performs corresponding processing on the L2TP control message only after having received a response about having stored the L2TP control message sent by the standby device; and when active-standby switching occurs between the active device and the standby device, the standby device connects to the opposite-end device via the L2TP tunnel, and performs corresponding processing according to the L2TP control message which has already been stored. Control messages of an active and standby device and an opposite-end device of the disclosure always keep synchronous, ensuring that when the active device has failed, after switching between the active and standby device, the standby device and the opposite-end device can work normally, which will not cause discarding of the message, and ensuring the normal working state. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358410 | TRANSFER OF SESSION FROM INTERACTIVE DIGITAL SIGN TO MOBILE DEVICE - In one embodiment, a method includes creating at a network device, a user session with an interactive digital sign, generating a session tag for the user session, wherein the session tag is configured for input at a mobile device, transmitting the session tag to the interactive digital sign, and continuing at the network device, the user session with the mobile device. An apparatus and logic are also disclosed herein. | 12-10-2015 |
20150359015 | METHODS FOR PRIORITIZING AND ROUTING AUDIO SIGNALS BETWEEN CONSUMER ELECTRONIC DEVICES - Methods for prioritizing and routing audio signals between consumer electronic devices using wireless communication standards are provided. In one embodiment, a method for prioritizing and routing audio signals between consumer electronic devices includes receiving a device prioritization designation for at least two connectivity technology-enabled devices. The prioritization designation designates a first of the at least two connectivity technology-enabled devices as having a higher priority than another of the at least two connectivity technology-enabled devices. The method further includes connecting with each of the at least two connectivity technology-enabled devices and providing an audio signal to the first of the at least two connectivity technology-enabled devices. | 12-10-2015 |
20150373168 | WIRELESS SHARED RESOURCE COMPUTING - The formation of a wireless device group for use in a computing environment involves establishing a wireless communication connection between a host wireless interface device and each of one or more dependent wireless interface devices, in which each dependent wireless interface device is configured to not directly communicate with a computing device. Another wireless communication connection is established between the host wireless interface device and the computing device when the host wireless interface device is within a host connection distance of the computing device. A further wireless communication connection can be established between the host wireless interface device and a second, different computing device. | 12-24-2015 |
20150381474 | Method and Device for Flow Path Negotiation in Link Aggregation Group - Provided are a method and device for negotiating a traffic path in an LAG, wherein the method includes that an aggregation port acquires indication information, wherein the indication information is used for indicating one or more groups of services or sessions needing to be borne by the aggregation ports, each group of the services or sessions includes one or more services or sessions; the aggregation port determines multiple groups of services or sessions to be borne, and/or services or sessions currently being borne by the aggregation port; an aggregation group portal to which the aggregation port belongs, performs traffic distribution according to services or sessions currently being borne by each aggregation port which belongs to the aggregation group portal. It is solved the problem in the related art that the same service or session cannot be transmitted bi-directionally on the same path, thus implementing the protection on the interconnect interface. | 12-31-2015 |
20160006771 | MAINTAINING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL APPLICATION SESSION AFFINITY IN SIP CONTAINER CLUSTER ENVIRONMENTS - A system for maintaining SIP application session affinity, the system including a destination inspector configured to inspect a SIP request to determine whether the SIP request indicates as its destination a logical name of a SIP container, a request router configured to route the SIP request to the SIP container that is identified by the logical name if the SIP request indicates as its destination the logical name of the SIP container, and a destination assignor configured to assign the SIP request to a SIP container in accordance with a predefined assignment protocol if the SIP request does not indicate as its destination the logical name of a SIP container. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006818 | Reducing a Number of Server-Client Sessions - A method for an intermediary node to reduce a number of server-client sessions between a server ( | 01-07-2016 |
20160014210 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SECURE REAL-TIME CLOUD SERVICES | 01-14-2016 |
20160014211 | Electronic Switching System For Generating Correlation Identity | 01-14-2016 |
20160021191 | REMOTE CONTROL OF DIALYSIS MACHINES - This disclosure relates to remote control of dialysis machines. In certain aspects, a method includes receiving a request for a network connection from a dialysis machine and establishing the network connection with the dialysis machine. The method also includes receiving, from a client device, a request to access the dialysis machine, authorizing the client device to access the dialysis machine, receiving, from the dialysis machine, information pertaining to an operation of the dialysis machine, and providing, to the client device, the received information. | 01-21-2016 |
20160036864 | PROVIDING EXTERNAL APPLICATION SERVICES WITH AN EXISTING PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE MEDIA SERVER - A solution is provided that integrates external services with existing PBX services to provide new features to the PBX without having to update the PBX. To provide the external services, an external application server establishes a Computer Telephone Integration (CTI) channel with the PBX in order to register for one or more events that occur for a communication session controlled by the PBX. When one of the events occurs, the PBX sends a token containing information regarding the communication session and a media server associated with the communication session. The external application server uses the information in the token to provide an external service, via an external application, to a media stream of the communication session. In one embodiment, the media stream may be sent to that external application that provides the service to the communication session. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036865 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION - Systems and method for establishing communication between two entities are disclosed. The method comprises, establishing connection between two entities upon accepting request, providing an option to make a communication group be one of private or public, such that the communication in a private groups is confined only to two entities, sending messages to the communication groups using a messenger by one or more enterprises and recommending one or more channels to a user and the enterprise. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036870 | SESSION MANAGING METHOD, SESSION MANAGING SYSTEM, AND CALL PROCESSING METHOD - A session managing method executed by a session managing device, the session managing method includes: establishing a session with a communicating device in response to a first request from the communicating device; extending a duration limit of the session by a first time interval according to an actual result of communication between the communicating device and the session managing device; and extending the duration limit of the session by a second time interval longer than the first time interval when receiving, from the communicating device, a notification indicating that a telephone call with another communicating device is started. | 02-04-2016 |
20160044074 | DISTRIBUTED STREAM PROCESSING - In a computing device supporting distributed stream processing, a regularizer process is started by a first thread executing at a computing device. The regularizer process is a separate process from a process executing on the first thread. The started regularizer process, sends a presence announcement to a controller device; receives a presence acknowledgement from the controller device; sends a notification to the first thread that the started regularizer process is ready to receive streamed data; receives, from the controller device, an indicator of a data provider system that is to connect to the started regularizer process; receives a connection request from the data provider system; compares the received connection request to the received indicator; sends a connection acknowledgement to the data provider system when the received connection request matches the received indicator; accepts a connection from the data provider system; and receives the streamed data through the connection. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044112 | User Feedback Systems and Methods - An exemplary method includes detecting, by a user feedback system, ring-back content provided to a first computing device during a connection period prior to beginning a communication session between the first computing device and a second computing device, and providing, by the user feedback system in conjunction with the detecting of the ring-back content provided to the first computing device, a feedback mechanism that facilitates a user of the first computing device providing feedback regarding the ring-back content. Corresponding systems and methods are also described. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044115 | REMOTE BROWSING SESSION MANAGEMENT - A browsing process is directed to the generation and management of a browse session at a network computing provider. A client computing device requests a remote browse session instance at a network computing provider. The browse session instance may correspond to requested network content. The network computing provider determines one or more browse configurations. Different browse configurations can be determined for separate portions of the requested network content. The browse configurations may identify a communication protocol and various processing actions. The network computing provider retrieves the requested content through an instantiated network browse session instance, and performs a first set of processing actions to generate a processing result. The processing result may be provided to the client computing device for display, including performing a second set of processing actions on the processing result at the client computing device. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050236 | DATA RECEIVING DEVICE, DATA RECEIVING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - There is provided a data receiving device including a reception controller and a read controller. The reception controller controls an access processing device to write data received through a session established with a communication device on a network to a file on a storage. The read controller manages registration information indicating association between the file and the session, and upon receiving a data reception request specifying a session from an application, outputs a read request for data of the file associated with a specified session to the storage and receive the data read from the storage. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050285 | IMAGE LINKING AND SHARING - According to one or more embodiments of the present disclosure, a method of linking images may include analyzing metadata of a plurality of image files each associated with an image of a plurality of images. The method may also include determining that the plurality of images are associated with the same event based on the analysis of the metadata. In addition, the method may include linking the plurality of images based on the determination that the plurality of images are associated with the same event. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050293 | Method and Apparatus for Data Interaction - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for data interaction, and the method includes: obtaining required times of data interaction between valid applications in a background application mode and a network; selecting a minimum required time from the current required times as a target required time of data interaction, and starting timing; when the target required time expires, obtaining each valid application whose current required time of data interaction is between two consecutive target required times, and determining the valid application as a target application; and activating a packet data protocol PDP, establishing a data link between the target application and the network, and performing data interaction, and then restarting timing. | 02-18-2016 |
20160057232 | Portal device management method, portal device and portal system - Disclosed is a portal device management method, and the method includes: an instance connection between a portal client and a pre-configured portal server is established through capability negotiation; and each of the portal client and the pre-configured portal server having the instance connection established therebetween announces its information to its opposite end. Further disclosed are a portal device and a portal system, in the embodiments of the disclosure, an instance connection is established between a portal server and a portal client, and load balancing of the portal server is implemented based on the established instance connection; it is possible to solve the problem that the portal client and the portal server cannot upgrade smoothly; information such as a public key of an asymmetrical algorithm and an IP address pool can be automatically announced between the portal client and the portal server without manual configuration operations, thereby result in convenient and secure operation and maintenance. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057233 | METHODS FOR SYNCHRONIZING WEB SESSIONS AND DEVICES THEREOF - A first web socket connection is established with a sending device and a second web socket connection is established with a receiving device. The sending device is notified when the second web socket connection is established. One or more cookies including session information and a redirect uniform resource locator (URL) are received from the sending device in response to the notification and over the first web socket connection. The one or more cookies and the redirect URL are forwarded to the receiving device over the second web socket connection, wherein the redirect URL is associated with a web page that, when executed by the receiving device, is configured to comprise the session information. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057236 | METHOD FOR NETWORK CHANGE TOLERANT SERVICE DISCOVERY IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - Method and computer network for discovering services in a computer network using Domain Name System Service Discovery (DNS-SD), comprising as components at least a client and a server, the components can be linked by bridges and communicate by a network protocol, whereby the client and the server have a connection-oriented communication path between each other in the computer network, whereby in case of a connection loss one of the components being affected by the connection loss announces itself regularly using DNS-SD until the connection to the client is restored. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057240 | AUTOSAVE WITH ACROSS USER SESSION UNDO SUPPORT - Systems and methods are disclosed that, in various embodiments, record a complete action history (user actions) that created a data set. The action history can then be incorporated as part of the data set. Given a saved object, a path can be constructed between an initial state (e.g., one with no content) to a final state (e.g., the saved content). By proceed backwards in the action history, a user can continue undoing actions all the way to the initial state. | 02-25-2016 |
20160065623 | HYBRID CLOUD MEDIA ARCHITECTURE FOR MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS - A request to establish a communication session is received at a cloud communication application. The request is from a first enterprise communication device to establish a communication session with a second communication device that is typically also within the enterprise. In response to receiving the request to initiate the communication session, the cloud communication application directs the first enterprise communication device to use an enterprise media server for sending a media stream of the first communication session. This allows the cloud communication application to provide one or more cloud services for the media stream via a communication channel that has been previously established between the cloud communication application and the enterprise media server. This results in the media stream being sent within the enterprise, thus, providing enhanced security. In addition, less bandwidth is required because the media streams do not have to be sent to and from the cloud. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065631 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND APPARATUSES FOR IMPLEMENTING A STREAMING PLATFORM IO PUMP AND REGULATOR - In accordance with disclosed embodiments, there are provided methods, systems, and apparatuses for implementing a streaming platform IO pump and regulator including, for example, means for executing an application at the computing device; requesting data for the application from a second computing device communicably interfaced with the first computing device via a public Internet; calculating an estimated arrival time for the data to be returned from the second computing device; determining the data fails to arrive within the estimated arrival time calculated; initiating a new connection to the second computing device; and re-sending the request for the data for the application to the second computing device via the new connection. Other related embodiments are disclosed. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066353 | AVOIDING P2P CONNECTION FAILURE DUE TO PUSH BUTTON CONFIGURATION OVERLAP - Methods, systems, and devices are provided that reduce delay in establishing connectivity between wireless devices when either device detects a session overlap condition during a wireless network setup. In response to detecting the session overlap condition at a first node, the first node made transmit a notification to a second node to switch from the first setup procedure to a second setup procedure using a vendor specific information element. | 03-03-2016 |
20160072677 | Systems and Methods for Connecting Home Area Network Devices to Smart Meters and Utility Accounts - The present invention is generally directed to systems and methods for pairing energy monitoring devices with energy metering devices. Some embodiments disclose a method of pairing of an energy monitoring device with an energy metering device with limited user action, the method transacted using an pairing device in communication with the monitoring device and the metering device, the method including: detecting, using the pairing device, the monitoring device and at first identifier associated therewith; retrieving a second identifier associated with the monitoring device, based at least in part on the first identifier; identifying by the pairing device, the metering device and a metering device identifier associated therewith; providing by the pairing device, the first identifier and the second identifier to the metering device; and pairing the detected monitoring device with the identified metering device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072896 | COMPUTING SYSTEM WITH CONTROL MECHANISM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - An computing system includes: a storage unit including a memory configured to store a device interface; and a control unit including a processor, coupled to the storage unit, configured to: determine a communication frequency based on a discovery communication for identifying a target device, determine a channel type based on the communication frequency for establishing a backhaul communication to the target device, and determine the device interface to be displayed based on the channel type for controlling the target device for displaying on a client device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080487 | PEER-TO-PEER PERFORMANCE - Embodiments disclosed herein can be used to improve the distribution of digital content in a peer-to-peer network. In certain embodiments, computing devices are mapped into different groups based on location information, and inter-group information is collected and used to identify other computing devices to which it would be efficient and effective for a computing device to send download requests for digital content. In certain embodiments, computing devices are grouped into clusters of computing devices, and different computing devices within the same cluster are instructed or recommended to send download requests for different digital content units to computing devices outside of the cluster so that the plurality of computing devices within the same cluster will collectively obtain all of the different digital content units. The computing devices within the same cluster can then share the digital content units with one another. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080502 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CONTROLLER-BASED SECURE SESSION KEY EXCHANGE OVER UNSECURED NETWORK PATHS - A method includes generating at a multi-tenant controller on a network a common shared secret for establishing a link between a first site and a second site, transmitting the shared secret to each of the first site and the second site over a secured channel, assigning a wall clock based start and end validity period for the shared secret, sending the shared secret with a future validity to allow secure link communication to continue if one or more elements in both sites cannot communicate with the multi-tenant controller and using a separate shared secret per link per VXWAN. | 03-17-2016 |
20160088027 | SESSION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SESSION CONTROL METHOD, AND MEDIUM - A session control system controls establishing a session to transmit contents data between communication terminals, in a communication system including multiple relay management devices managing relaying the contents data transmitted from the communication terminals. The session control system includes a selection unit configured to select one of the relay management devices to manage relaying the contents data, every time the session is to be established; and a transmitter unit configured to transmit selection information representing the relay management device selected by the selection unit, at least to the communication terminals being connected with the relay management devices different from the relay management device selected by the selection unit, among the communication terminals to be participating in the session to be established. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088091 | Identifying Existing Synchronous Communication Sessions Associated with a User - Existing synchronous communication sessions associated with a user are identified. A request to display information about the user is received. A plurality of existing synchronous communication sessions is identified. Each existing synchronous communication session includes at least one participant and is associated with a user. An affinity score for each of the plurality of synchronous communication sessions is determined based on an affinity between the user and at least one of the participants of the synchronous communication session. The plurality of existing synchronous communication sessions associated with the user is ranked based on the affinity score. An indication of a subset of the plurality of existing synchronous communication sessions is sent for display on the one more computing devices. In some embodiments, an indication of one of the existing synchronous communication sessions is sent for display on the one more computing devices. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088092 | VIRTUAL HOSTING DEVICE AND SERVICE TO PROVIDE SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORKS IN A CLOUD ENVIRONMENT - A hosting system to facilitate a customer of an operator of the system to connect to a cloud provider, the system including: a first cloud exchange co-located with and connected to first cloud provider equipment; a second cloud exchange co-located with and connected to second cloud provider equipment, wherein the first cloud provider equipment and the second cloud provider equipment are of a same cloud provider but at different geographically spaced locations or the first cloud provider equipment is of a different cloud provider than that of the second cloud provider equipment, and wherein the first cloud exchange is connected to the second cloud exchange; and a non-transitory computer readable medium including computer program instructions, the instructions configured to facilitate the configuration of a software-defined network including the first cloud exchange and/or second cloud exchange, wherein the network connects the customer to the first cloud provider equipment and/or the second cloud provider equipment. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088093 | DYNAMIC DATA MANAGEMENT - Client devices have a variety of options for receiving data via data services. Among those options may include various different interfaces and connection types. One example operation of a client device may include at least one of establishing a first data session between a client device and a first data service provider, monitoring the data session for a loss of communication data for a predetermined period of time, identifying the predetermined period of time has expired without data session activity, terminating the first data session, retrieving data session preferences from memory, and establishing a second data session between the client device and a second data service provider based on the data session preferences. | 03-24-2016 |
20160094589 | Media Session Between Network Endpoints - A media session between an initiating endpoint and a responding endpoint is established via a communication network. A set of candidate pairs is generated, each comprising a respective network address available to the initiating endpoint and a respective network address available to the responding endpoint by exchanging network addresses between the initiating endpoint and the responding endpoint. The media session is established using a candidate pair of the set determined to be valid. Connectivity checks are performed for at least one candidate pair of the set to determine whether or not the candidate pair is valid. The at least one candidate pair is selected in dependence on selection data pertaining to at least one of the network addresses and indicative of the quality of a path through the network that would be traversed were that network address to be used for the media session. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094590 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING COMMUNICATION SESSION - Disclosed is a system for configuring a communication session. The system comprises a plurality of operator devices associated with a plurality of sales operators. The system further comprises a server arrangement coupled via one or more communication networks to the plurality of operator devices. The server arrangement is operable to receive information pertaining to a web page that is accessed by a consumer device associated with a given consumer. The server arrangement is then operable to analyze the information to select an operator device from the plurality of operator devices. Moreover, the server arrangement is operable to start the communication session between the consumer device and the selected operator device. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094649 | NODE-TO-NODE DATA DISTRIBUTION - Node-to-Node data distribution is described herein. A node may receive a set of peer nodes from a collection authority node that is managing a collection. The node and the set of peer nodes are members of the collection. The node may select a subset of peer nodes from the set of peer nodes. The node may attempt to establish communications with each of the subset of peer nodes, connected peers being those peers where the attempt was successful. The node may synchronize an event stream with each connected peer. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094661 | Sticky Service Sessions in a Datacenter - Some embodiments provide novel inline switches that distribute data messages from source compute nodes (SCNs) to different groups of destination service compute nodes (DSCNs). In some embodiments, the inline switches are deployed in the source compute nodes datapaths (e.g., egress datapath). The inline switches in some embodiments are service switches that (1) receive data messages from the SCNs, (2) identify service nodes in a service-node cluster for processing the data messages based on service policies that the switches implement, and (3) use tunnels to send the received data messages to their identified service nodes. Alternatively, or conjunctively, the inline service switches of some embodiments (1) identify service-nodes cluster for processing the data messages based on service policies that the switches implement, and (2) use tunnels to send the received data messages to the identified service-node clusters. The service-node clusters can perform the same service or can perform different services in some embodiments. This tunnel-based approach for distributing data messages to service nodes/clusters is advantageous for seamlessly implementing in a datacenter a cloud-based XaaS model (where XaaS stands for X as a service, and X stands for anything), in which any number of services are provided by service providers in the cloud. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094663 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUSES FOR APPLICATION SERVICE LAYER (ASL) INTER-NETWORKING - Systems and/or methods for providing internetworking among application services layers (ASLs) of different network technologies may be provided. For example, a tunnel anchor point (TAP) may be established. The TAP may be configured to enable communication between a local application in the network and a remote application in a different network. At the TAP, an ASL tunnel may be created to the local application in the network to facilitate the communication. Additionally, a message from the local application may be received where at least a portion of the message may be configured to be provided to a remote ASL and the remote application in the different network to which the local application wishes to communicate. At least the portion of the message may be provided to the remote ASL and the remote application in the different network. | 03-31-2016 |
20160099976 | Internet of Things Context-Enabled Device-Driven Tracking - A determination is made at a server that a network connected device is to control monitoring performed by a first network connected sensor. A first connection is established between the network connected device and the first network connected sensor, the first connection providing control of the first network connected sensor by the network connected device. A context change for the network connected device is determined. A second connection between the network connected device and a second network connected sensor is established, the second connection providing control of the second network connected sensor by the network connected device. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100003 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A CROWD SERVICE STORE - A method, medium, and system to receive a request for a web-based service from an application, determine whether the requested service is available for consumption, invoke an application programming interface (API) call to the requested service, establish a communication connection between the application and the requested service, and deliver the requested service to the application over the established communication link, including management thereof. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100015 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RESOLVING SERVICE INITIALIZATION LINKS IN VIRTUAL DESKTOP INFRASTRUCTURE ENVIRONMENTS - Systems and methods for resolving service initialization links in Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI) environments are disclosed. Specifically, the links includes information that does not identify the originating user and are only associated with the offered service, whereas multiple users may be using the same service. The systems and methods involve a proxy component at the server as well as a plug-in at the client. The proxy is responsible for obtaining the service initialization information, identifying the correct session, and forwarding the service initialization information to the corresponding plug-in through the session. The plug-in, in turn, is responsible for forwarding the service initialization data back to the main application. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100022 | PROXY DEVICE FOR REDUCING NUMBER OF CONNECTIONS TO GATEWAY - Techniques and systems for operating a device as a communication proxy for other devices are provided. For example, a method, computing device, or computer-program product may be provided, and may include receiving a device communication using a connection with a first device, determining that the device communication is from the first device, wherein the computing device and the first device are able to connect with a second device, and establishing a connection with the second device, wherein the computing device operates as a communication proxy for the first device by using the connection with the second device to exchange communications with the second device for the first device, and wherein the computing device and the first device include Internet of Things devices and share a common cloud network service provider. The method, computing device, or computer-program product may further include transmitting the device communication using the connection with the second device. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100023 | PROXY DEVICE FOR REDUCING NUMBER OF CONNECTIONS TO GATEWAY - Techniques and systems for operating a device as a communication proxy for other devices are provided. For example, a method, computing device, or computer-program product may be provided, and may include receiving, on a computing device, a device communication using a first transceiver radio and using a connection with a first device, wherein the connection with the first device is established over a first channel of a frequency band, determining that the device communication is from the first device, wherein the computing device and the device are able to connect with a second device, and establishing a connection with the second device over a second channel of the frequency band, wherein the computing device operates as a communication proxy for the first device by using the connection with the second device to exchange communications with the second device for the first device, and wherein the computing device and the first device include Internet of Things devices and share a common cloud network service provider. The method, computing device, or computer-program product may further include transmitting the device communication using a second transceiver radio over the second channel of the frequency band using the connection with the second device. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105466 | Personal Network Access Control System and Method - A server is provided that includes a processor such that for a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) request containing a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) identifying the first device, the processor is programmed to promote adding a URI and redirecting the SIP request to a second device. The added URI used by the second device to invoke a Personal Network Management (PNM) Controller function. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105485 | FAST JOIN OF PEER TO PEER GROUP WITH POWER SAVING MODE - A wireless peer-to-peer protocol that supports fast and low power joining to an existing group. The protocol may be an extension of a peer-to-peer protocol that supports a sleep state for a device controlling the group. When a device is seeking to join a group at a time when the controlling device is in a sleep state, another device that has information about the controlling device may provide information to the joining device that may then be used by the joining device to more quickly, and using less power, synchronize with the controlling device. The information may include information about a channel used by the controlling device or about timing of availability of the controlling device. The information may also reveal whether the group provides a service being sought by the joining device or may otherwise influence whether the joining device will attempt to join a group. | 04-14-2016 |
20160110188 | SESSION MANAGEMENT IN A MIXED MODE ENVIRONMENT - Systems and methods for managing multiple versions of applications executing on servers in a server pool are provided. A request to generate new session data for a transaction requested by a user is received by a first server executing a first version of an application. A determination is made that the first version of the application is unsuitable to process the request. An identity of a second server executing a second version of the application is requested by the first server in a server pool comprising one or more servers, and an appropriate second server is selected. The first server transmits a hypertext transfer protocol proxy request to the selected second server, which generates the new session data. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112464 | SESSION TRANSFER PROTOCOL BETWEEN DIFFERENT BROWSERS ON DIFFERENT DEVICES - A device may be configured to establish a session for communicating data between a first user device and a server device. The device may monitor the data communicated via the session. The device may store session information based on monitoring the session. The session information may include information for transferring the session with the server device to a second user device. The device may receive a request to transfer the session from the second user device. The device may send the session information to the second user device causing the session to be transferred from the first user device to the second user device. The device may establish the same session for communicating the data between the second user device and the server device. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112465 | TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATIONS METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A transmission system having a first transmission terminal and a second transmission terminal includes a first communications connector to connect first data communications between the first transmission terminal specified by first identification information and the second transmission terminal specified by second identification information, an identification information creating part to create fourth identification information of the second transmission terminal when receiving a request for connecting second data communications between the first transmission terminal and the second transmission terminal, and a second communications connector to acquire third identification information in association with the first identification information by referring to registration information registering the third identification information in association with the first identification information of the first transmission terminal, and connect the second data communications between the first transmission terminal specified by the third identification information and the second transmission terminal specified by the fourth identification information. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112521 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A NETWORK DISCOVERY SERVICE PLATFORM - A multi-tenant media communication platform system and methods. The platform system includes media communication micro-services and micro-service configuration for entities configured for the platform system. Enrolling an entity in the platform system includes setting entity configuration for use of the platform system by the entity. A signaling micro-service request is processed according to the entity configuration. The signaling micro-service request is a request for use the signaling micro-service of the platform system on behalf of the entity. Use of the signaling micro-service is accounted for on behalf of the entity. Billing information for the entity is generated based on the accounting for the use of the signaling micro-service. Entity configuration includes micro-service configuration, and micro-service configuration of the signaling micro-service specifies at least one of: an endpoint mapping to at least one application logic URI, an event callback URI, and an event application logic URI. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119385 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - An aspect of the subject disclosure may include, for example, receiving a request from a communication device to initiate a communication session in a packet-switched network, obtaining a first name authority pointer record responsive to determining that there is an undesirable operational state in the packet-switched network, wherein the first name authority pointer record comprises a null record, obtaining a second name authority pointer record responsive to determining that there is a desirable operational state in the packet-switched network, wherein the second name authority pointer record comprises a record, and initiating the communication session according to one of the first name authority pointer record or the second name authority pointer record. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119415 | METHOD FOR PEER-TO-PEER MULTIMEDIA DATA SHARING, ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND NON-VOLATILE COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A method for peer-to-peer multimedia data sharing suitable for an electronic device is provided. The method includes the following step: scanning at least one sink device having Peer-to-Peer connectivity; determining a candidate device from the at least one sink device according a distance between the electronic device and the at least one sink device; deriving a beacon from the candidate device; establishing a Peer-to-Peer connection with the candidate device according to the beacon; and transmitting multimedia data to the candidate device. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119432 | Method and System for Enabling a Communication Device to Remotely Execute an Application - A communication system capable of enabling one or more communication devices to remotely execute one or more applications includes one or more communication devices that are coupled to a data connection. At least one of the one or more communication devices is operable to communicate a request to establish a communication session over the data connection. The system also includes one or more application servers that are coupled to the data connection. At least one of the one or more application servers is adapted to execute an application to establish the requested communication session with the at least one communication device. The at least one application server resides at a location remote from the at least one communication device. The at least one application server communicates a request for processing service to the at least one communication device. The request for processing service is communicated to the at least one communication device over the data connection. | 04-28-2016 |
20160142371 | TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION TRAVERSAL - A transmission system and a transmission method for network address translation traversal are provided. The transmission system includes a private network device, a network address record device, a public network device and a network address translation server. The network address record device records an inner network address of the private network device and an outer network address corresponding to the inner network address. The public network device inquires the inner network address of the private network device and the outer network address corresponding to the inner network address from the network address record device, and generates a packet according to the inner network address and the outer network address corresponding to the inner network address. The network address translation server receives the packet from the public network device, and transmits the packet to the public network device. | 05-19-2016 |
20160149961 | ADAPTIVE VOICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD BASED ON HYPERTEXT TRANSPORT PROTOCOL - A system and method of performing voice communication over a hypertext transport protocol (HTTP)-based network. The adaptive voice communication system includes a web server configured to issue a session identifier (ID), a talk transmission uniform resource locator (URL), and a talk reception URL and transmit an HTTP response in response to an HTTP request and a web client configured to transmit the HTTP request and transmit or receive voice information by using the issued talk transmission URL and talk reception URL. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150025 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SECURE REAL-TIME CLOUD SERVICES - A system and method for providing secure, end-to-end data service enabling real-time data over the Internet is disclosed. The system and method provides a communication framework between sensors, devices, and machinery and the users of that data from any remote location that is connected to the Internet without requiring open inbound firewall ports, while at the same time enabling high data rates, low latency and full bi-directionality. The graphical and networking features of RIA frameworks in combination with the disclosed system and method provide low-latency, real-time data applications in a web browser securely over the Internet. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150026 | Virtual Desktop Access Using Wireless Devices - Aspects herein describe at least a method, system, and computer readable storage media for transmitting data from a first computing device to a second computing device. The first computing device comprises a host while the second computing device comprises a client for receiving a virtual desktop session. In one embodiment, the method comprises generating a first type of packets associated with an application. The application is executed by a processor of the first computing device. The method further comprises transmitting the generated packets using a remote display protocol from the first computing device to the second computing device. The packets are translated into a second type of packets at the second computing device and transmitted to a wireless device that is communicatively coupled to the second computing device. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150027 | Method Of Handling Notification Channel Disconnection - A method of handling notification channel disconnection is provided. The method includes detecting that a notification channel corresponding to a representational state transfer (REST) client is disconnected, sending, to an application server, a disconnection request indicating that the notification channel is disconnected, and receiving, from the application server, a response indicating that a subscription of the REST client has been deleted. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150046 | RE-ESTABLISHING PUSH NOTIFICATION CHANNELS VIA USER IDENTIFIERS - Embodiments enable recovery of push notification channels via session information associated with user identifiers. A proxy service creates session information describing push notification channels (e.g., subscriptions) for a user and associates the session information with a user identifier. The session information is stored in a cloud service or other storage area separate from the proxy service. After failure of a user computing device or the proxy service, the session information is obtained via the user identifiers and the push notification channels are re-created with the session information. In some embodiments, the proxy service enables delivery of the same notification to multiple computing devices associated with the user identifier. | 05-26-2016 |
20160156484 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, CLOUD SERVER, DEVICE CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM ENCODED WITH DEVICE CONTROL PROGRAM | 06-02-2016 |
20160156485 | TUNNEL ESTABLISHMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS | 06-02-2016 |
20160156706 | System and Method for Peer-to-Peer Management Through Policy and Context Replication | 06-02-2016 |
20160156720 | PERSONALLY-WEARABLE INTERNET OF THINGS MICROCONTROLLED DEVICE | 06-02-2016 |
20160164923 | METHOD FOR DATA ROUTING IN NETWORKS - An integrated security system integrates broadband and mobile access and control with conventional security systems and premise devices to provide a tri-mode security network having remote connectivity and access. The integrated security system delivers remote premise monitoring and control functionality to conventional monitored premise protection and complements existing premise protection equipment. The integrated security system integrates into the premise network and couples wirelessly with the conventional security panel, enabling broadband access to premise security systems. Automation devices can be added, enabling users to remotely see live video or pictures and control home devices via a personal web portal or other client device. Camera management enables automatic configuration and management of cameras in the premise network. The camera management extends to remote control and monitoring from outside the firewall of the premise network to include routing of images or video from a streaming source device to a requesting client device. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164924 | Stack Fusion Software Communication Service - A stack fusion method is implemented at an originator cluster of software services in a distributed Software-as-a-Service (SaaS) system. The method includes receiving a request for a communication service from an originator registered to the originator cluster. The method further includes, responsive to the request, creating a communication protocol object in the originator cluster, discovering a participant cluster on which the participant is registered, notifying the participant via the participant cluster that the communication protocol object exists, and updating an index protocol object in the participant cluster that tracks communication sessions in which the participant is engaged with a reference that points to the communication protocol object in the originator cluster. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165381 | ELECTRONIC ACCESSORY FOR DETECTING AND COMMUNICATING A CONNECTION ATTRIBUTE CORRESPONDING TO ANOTHER ELECTRONIC ACCESSORY - At an electronic accessory of a master electronic device, a connection attribute can be detected that is indicative of a presence or a characteristic of a connection between the electronic accessory and at least one other electronic accessory of the master electronic device. A connection-indicative signal can be generated at the electronic device that includes the connection attribute. The connection-indicative signal can be transmitted to the master electronic device. | 06-09-2016 |
20160173613 | DEVICE CONTROL PROFILE FOR A FABRIC NETWORK | 06-16-2016 |
20160173616 | Transition from a Primary Communication Session Type to a Secondary Communication Session Type | 06-16-2016 |
20160173617 | CONTINUING AN APPLICATION SESSION ON A DIFFERENT DEVICE | 06-16-2016 |
20160174268 | SMART HOME CONTROLLER AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF | 06-16-2016 |
20160182574 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING FACILITY CONTROL OF TERMINAL | 06-23-2016 |
20160182644 | Accessing Method and Related Server Device | 06-23-2016 |
20160182645 | MANAGING MESSAGES SENT BETWEEN SERVICES | 06-23-2016 |
20160182647 | DISCONNECT PROTECTION FOR COMMAND-LINE REMOTE TERMINALS | 06-23-2016 |
20160183317 | METHOD TO REDUCE USER PERCEIVED CONNECTION TIME FOR MIRACAST/WIDI | 06-23-2016 |
20160191270 | METHOD OF PROVIDING OPERATING OPTIONS OF AN ELECTRIC APPLIANCE - A method of providing operating options of an electric appliance is applied in a wireless system, which includes a portable device, an electric appliance, and a relay apparatus. The portable device and the relay apparatus are connected to each other within either a near-end network or a far-end network. The electric appliance communicates with the relay apparatus, and has a plurality of operating options which can be selected to operate the electric appliance. If the portable device and the relay apparatus are connected within the near-end network, all of the operating options are displayed on the portable device for selection; if it's within the far-end network, a part of the operating options are disabled on the portable device for selection. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191461 | TURN Relay Service Reuse For NAT Traversal During Media Session Resumption - A call media session restoration method comprising detecting a network reconnection triggering event that disconnects a media session for a client and a relay connection on a network device for the media session, sending a relay address allocation request to the network device, wherein the relay address allocation request comprises a session update attribute that identifies the relay connection, receiving a user authentication request message from the network device, authenticating the relay address allocation request with the network device, wherein the relay address allocation request is authenticated in accordance with the user authentication request message, and wherein authenticating the relay address allocation request comprises resending the session update attribute, and performing a connectivity check between the client and a peer via the relay connection, wherein performing the connectivity check restores the media session and the relay connection and reuses the relay address for the relay connection. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191631 | System and Method for Using VoLTE Session Continuity Information using Logical Scalable Units - Logical scalable units (LSU) can be used within a single network data center to provide stateful scalability. However, LSUs are not suitable for operating across multiple network data centers in order to provide geographical redundancy in active-active scenarios while providing high availability. This is because the latencies associated with replicating full session information are unacceptably slow. An additional component in the LSU (known as an LSU Frontend) can be used to replicate a small subset of session information between LSUs. This subset of session information may be enough to enable LSUs to process requests in an acceptable way rather than outright failing. This may be particularly advantageous in scenarios where the requests relate to Voice over LTE calls, because outright failure is very perceivable to subscribers, and it causes resource leakage within the telecommunications network. | 06-30-2016 |
20160198004 | Systems and Methods for Session State Transfer to a Mobile Device | 07-07-2016 |
20160205152 | REMOTE CALLING METHOD AND APPARATUS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205200 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING IMS SESSION CONTINUITY TO A USER EQUIPMENT ACROSS A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION NETWORKS | 07-14-2016 |
20160255120 | NETWORK NODE | 09-01-2016 |
20160255157 | INITIATING COMMUNICATION SESSION USING PREFERRED MODE OF COMMUNICATION WHILE MAINTAINING CONFIDENTIALITY | 09-01-2016 |
20160255158 | Mobile Event Notifications | 09-01-2016 |
20160381089 | RELATIONSHIP-CENTRIC PORTALS FOR COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - A method for providing relationship-centric resources includes establishing a communication session between a first device and a second device, determining, during the communication session between the first and second devices, an intersection of mutual topics of interest between users of the first and second devices by cross-referencing sets of interests for the users, retrieving content based on a determination that the content meets a content descriptor, and simultaneously displaying the retrieved content. The content descriptor describes a nature of the communication session. The retrieving is further based on a determination that the content is related to a mutual topic of interest from the intersection of mutual topics of interest between the users of the first and second devices. The determination of relatedness is based on a cross-reference between the content and the mutual topic of interest. The cross-reference is stored in a lookup table. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381190 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR AUTO-NEGOTIATION - Methods, systems, and apparatuses, including electrical circuitry, are described for auto-negotiation. Active cables, active backplanes, and line cards may include one or more instances of electrical circuitry and/or integrated circuits that intercept advertisements of standard auto-negotiation protocol signaling from an initiating device for establishment of communication links with a receiving device. Auto negotiation information in the intercepted signaling may be translated and encoded into signaling in accordance with the capabilities of the receiving device. Active cables and active backplanes may also include one or more connection components between instances of electrical circuitry and/or integrated circuits to provide high-speed transmission of data packets encapsulating the auto-negotiation information in a format that differs from the standard auto-negotiation protocol. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237781 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR CLEARING DIAMETER SESSION INFORMATION | 08-17-2017 |
20170237818 | SERVICE DISCOVERY METHOD, RELATED DEVICE, AND SYSTEM | 08-17-2017 |
20170237826 | TRIGGER MANAGEMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CSE, CSE AND NETWORK ELEMENT OF BEARER NETWORK | 08-17-2017 |
20170237834 | Secure connection with protected facilities | 08-17-2017 |
20180027078 | Image Session Identifier Techniques | 01-25-2018 |
20190149613 | METHOD, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND COMMUNICATION NODE DEVICE FOR ASSOCIATING RESOURCES | 05-16-2019 |
20190149614 | STORAGE MEDIUM, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, AND PROCESSING METHOD | 05-16-2019 |